AM3874CCYE80 [TI]
Sitara 处理器：Arm Cortex-A8、HDMI、3D 图形 | CYE | 684 | 0 to 90;
| 型号： | AM3874CCYE80 |
| 厂家： | 
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS |
| 描述： | Sitara 处理器：Arm Cortex-A8、HDMI、3D 图形 | CYE | 684 | 0 to 90 |
| 文件： | 总345页 (文件大小：2227K) |
| 中文： | 中文翻译 | 下载： | 下载PDF数据表文档文件 |
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
AM387x Sitara™
ARM® Microprocessors (MPUs)
Check for Samples: AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
1 High-Performance System-on-Chip (SoC)
1.1 Features
12
8-bit SD Capture Ports
• High-Performance Sitara™ ARM®
Microprocessors (MPUs)
– Up to 1-GHz ARM® Cortex™-A8 RISC MPU
• ARM® Cortex™-A8 Core
•
•
One 8/16/24-bit Input
One 8-bit Only Input
– Two 165 MHz HD Video Display Outputs
One 16/24/30-bit and one 16/24-bit Output
– ARMv7 Architecture
•
•
In-Order, Dual-Issue, Superscalar
Microprocessor Core
– Composite or S-Video Analog Output
– MacroVision® Support Available
•
•
•
NEON™ Multimedia Architecture
Supports Integer and Floating Point
Jazelle® RCT Execution Environment
– Digital HDMI 1.3 transmitter With Integrated
PHY
– Advanced Video Processing Features Such
as Scan/Format/Rate Conversion
– Three Graphics Layers and Compositors
• Dual 32-bit LPDDR/DDR2/DDR3 SDRAM
• ARM® Cortex™-A8 Memory Architecture
– 32K-Byte Instruction and Data Caches
– 512K-Byte L2 Cache
– 64K-Byte RAM, 48K-Byte Boot ROM
• 128K-Bytes On-Chip Memory Controller
(OCMC) RAM
• Imaging Subsystem (ISS)
– Camera Sensor Connection
Interfaces
– Supports up to LPDDR-400, DDR2-800, and
DDR3-800
– Up to Eight x 8 Devices Total 2 GB Total
Address Space
– Dynamic Memory Manager (DMM)
•
Parallel Connection for Raw (up to 16-Bit)
and BT.656/BT.1120 (8-/16-bit)
•
Programmable Multi-Zone Memory
Mapping and Interleaving
– Image Sensor Interface (ISIF) for Handling
Image/Video Data From the Camera Sensor
– Resizer
•
•
Enables Efficient 2D Block Accesses
Supports Tiled Objects in 0°, 90°, 180°, or
270° Orientation and Mirroring
•
•
Resizing Image/Video From 1/16x to 8x
Generating Two Different Resizing
Outputs Concurrently
•
Optimizes Interlaced Accesses
• General Purpose Memory Controller (GPMC)
– 8-/16-bit Multiplexed Address/Data Bus
• Media Controller
– 512M-Byte Total Address Space Divided
– Controls the HDVPSS and ISS
• SGX530 3D Graphics Engine
– Delivers up to 18 MPoly/sec
– Universal Scalable Shader Engine
Among up to 8 Chip Selects
– Glueless Interface to NOR Flash, NAND
Flash (BCH/Hamming Error Code Detection),
SRAM and Pseudo-SRAM
– Error Locator Module (ELM) Outside of
GPMC to Provide Upto 16-Bit/512-Bytes
Hardware ECC for NAND
– Direct3D Mobile, OpenGLES 1.1 and 2.0,
OpenVG 1.0, OpenMax API Support
– Advanced Geometry DMA Driven Operation
– Programmable HQ Image Anti-Aliasing
• Endianness
– Flexible Asynchronous Protocol Control for
Interface to FPGA, CPLD, ASICs, etc.
– ARM Instructions/Data – Little Endian
• HD Video Processing Subsystem (HDVPSS)
– Two 165 MHz HD Video Capture Inputs
• Enhanced Direct-Memory-Access (EDMA)
Controller
– Four Transfer Controllers
– 64/8 Independent DMA/QDMA Channels
•
One 16/24-bit Input, Splittable into Dual
1
Please be aware that an important notice concerning availability, standard warranty, and use in critical applications of Texas
Instruments semiconductor products and disclaimers thereto appears at the end of this data sheet.
2
All trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
PRODUCT PREVIEW information concerns products in the formative
or design phase of development. Characteristic data and other
specifications are design goals. Texas Instruments reserves the right
to change or discontinue these products without notice.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
• Dual Port Ethernet (10/100/1000 Mb/s) With
– DIT-Capable For S/PDIF (All Ports)
Optional Switch
• Multi-Channel Buffered Serial Port (McBSP)
– Transmit/Receive Clocks up to 48 MHz
– Two Clock Zones and Two Serial Data Pins
– Supports TDM, I2S, and Similar Formats
– IEEE 802.3 Compliant (3.3V I/O Only)
– MII/RMII/GMII/RGMII Media Independent I/Fs
– Management Data I/O (MDIO) Module
– Reset Isolation
• Serial ATA (SATA) 3.0 Gbps Controller With
– IEEE-1588 Time-Stamping and Industrial
Integrated PHY
Ethernet Protocols
– Direct Interface to One Hard Disk Drive
• Dual USB 2.0 Ports With Integrated PHYs
– USB2.0 High-/Full-Speed Clients
– Hardware-Assisted Native Command
Queuing (NCQ) from up to 32 Entries
– USB2.0 High-/Full-/Low-Speed Hosts, or OTG
– Supports End Points 0-15
• One PCI Express 2.0 Port With Integrated PHY
– Single Port With 1 Lane at 5.0 GT/s
– Configurable as Root Complex or Endpoint
• Eight 32-bit General-Purpose Timers (Timer1–8)
• One System Watchdog Timer (WDT 0)
• Six Configurable UART/IrDA/CIR Modules
– UART0 With Modem Control Signals
– Supports up to 3.6864 Mbps UART0/1/2
– Supports up to 12 Mbps UART3/4/5
– SIR, MIR, FIR (4.0 MBAUD), and CIR
– Supports Port Multiplier and
Command-Based Switching
• Real-Time Clock (RTC)
– One-Time or Periodic Interrupt Generation
• Up to 128 General-Purpose I/O (GPIO) Pins
• One Spin Lock Module with up to 128 Hardware
Semaphores
• One Mailbox Module with 12 Mailboxes
• On-Chip ARM ROM Bootloader (RBL)
• Power, Reset, and Clock Management
– SmartReflex™ Technology (Level 2b)
– Multiple Independent Core Power Domains
– Multiple Independent Core Voltage Domains
• Four Serial Peripheral Interfaces (SPIs) [up to
– Support for Three Operating Points
(OPP120/100/50) per Voltage Domain
– Clock Enable/Disable Control for
48-MHz]
– Each With Four Chip-Selects
• Three MMC/SD/SDIO Serial Interfaces [up to
Subsystems and Peripherals
• 32KB Embedded Trace Buffer™ (ETB™) and
5-pin Trace Interface for Debug
• IEEE-1149.1 (JTAG) Compatible
• 684-Pin Pb-Free BGA Package (CYE Suffix),
0.8-mm Ball Pitch With Via Channel™
Technology to Reduce PCB Cost
• 45-nm CMOS Technology
• 1.8-/3.3-V Dual Voltage Buffers for General I/O
48-MHz]
– Three Supporting up to 1-/4-/8-Bit Modes
• Dual Controller Area Network (DCAN) Modules
– CAN Version 2 Part A, B
• Four Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C Bus™) Ports
• Six Multi-Channel Audio Serial Ports (McASP)
– Dual Ten Serializer Transmit/Receive Ports
– Quad Four Serializer Transmit/Receive Ports
1.2 Applications
•
•
•
•
•
•
Single Board Computing
Network and Communications Processing
Industrial Automation
Human Machine Interface
Interactive Point-of-Service/Information Kiosks
Portable Data Terminals
2
High-Performance System-on-Chip (SoC)
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
1.3 Description
AM387x Sitara™ ARM® MPUs are a highly-integrated, programmable platform that leverages TI’s
Sitara™ Microprocessor technology to meet the processing needs of the following applications:
Single-Board Computing, Network and Communications Processing, Industrial Automation, Human
Machine Interface, and Interactive Point-of-Service/Information Kiosks, and Portable Data Terminals.
The device enables Original-Equipment Manufacturers (OEMs) and Original-Design Manufacturers
(ODMs) to quickly bring to market devices featuring robust operating systems support, rich user interfaces,
and high processing performance through the maximum flexibility of a fully integrated mixed processor
solution. The device also combines programmable ARMprocessing with a highly integrated peripheral set.
The AM387x Sitara™ ARM® MPUs also present OEMs and ODMs with new levels of processor scalability
and software reuse. An OEM or ODM that used the AM387x MPU in a design and sees an opportunity to
make a similar product with added features could scale up to the pin-compatible and software-compatible
TMS320DM814x processors from Texas Instruments (TI). The TMS320DM814x DaVinci™ Digital Media
processors add a powerful C674x™ core DSP along with a video encoder/decoder to the hardware on the
AM38x. Additionally, OEMs or ODMs that have used the AM387x or DM814x processors and find a need
for a faster ARM and/or DSP core performance could scale up to the software-compatible AM389x,
TMS320C6A816x, or TMS320DM816x devices with higher core speeds.
Programmability is provided by an ARM Cortex™-A8 RISC CPU with Neon™ extension. The ARM allows
developers to keep control functions separate from algorithms programmed on coprocessors, thus
reducing the complexity of the system software. The ARM Cortex™-A8 32-bit RISC microprocessor with
Neon™ floating-point extension includes: 32 Kbytes (KB) of Instruction cache; 32KB of Data cache;
512KB of L2 Cache; 48KB of Boot ROM; and 64KB of RAM.
The rich peripheral set provides the ability to control external peripheral devices and communicate with
external processors. For details on each of the peripherals, see the related sections in this document and
the associated peripheral reference guides. The peripheral set includes: HD Video Processing Subsystem;
Dual Port Gigabit Ethernet MACs (10/100/1000 Mbps) [Ethernet Switch] with MII/RMII/GMII/RGMII and
MDIO interface supporting IEEE-1588 Time-Stamping and Industrial Ethernet Protocols; two USB ports
with integrated 2.0 PHY; PCIe x1 GEN2 Compliant interface; two 10-serializer McASP audio serial ports
(with DIT mode); four quad-serilaizer McASP audio serial ports (with DIT mode); one McBSP multichannel
buffered serial port; six UARTs with IrDA and CIR support; four SPI serial interfaces; three MMC/SD/SDIO
serial interfaces; four I2C master/slave interfaces; a Parallel Camera Interface (CAM); up to
128 General-Purpose IOs (GPIOs); eight 32-bit general-purpose timers; System watchdog timer; Dual
LPDDR/DDR2/DDR3 SDRAM interfaces; flexible 8/16-bit asynchronous memory interface; two Controller
Area Network (DCAN) modules; a Spin Lock; Mailbox; and Serial Hard Disk Drive Interface (SATA 300).
The AM387x Sitara™ ARM® MPUs also include a SGX530 3D graphics engine to off-load many graphics
processing tasks from the ARM core, making more ARM MIPS available for common processing tasks on
algorithms. Additionally, it has a complete set of development tools for the ARM which include C compilers
and a Microsoft® Windows™ debugger interface for visibility into source code execution.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
High-Performance System-on-Chip (SoC)
3
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
1.4 Functional Block Diagram
Figure 1-1 shows the functional block diagram of the device.
Video Processing
(B)(C)
Subsystem
Imaging
Subsystem
ARM Subsystem
CortexTM -A8
NEON
Parallel Cam Input
Video Capture
CPU
FPU
32 KB
I-Cache
32 KB
D-Cache
Display Processing
HD OSD
SD OSD
SD VENC
SD DACs
512 KB L2 Cache
Resizer
HD VENC
HDMI Xmt
Boot ROM
48 KB
RAM
64 KB
ICE Crusher
System Interconnect
Peripherals
Serial Interfaces
System Control
Program/Data Storage
Connectivity
Real-Time
Clock
PRCM
JTAG
EMAC
(R)(G)MII
(2)
(m)DDR2/3
32-bit
(2)
GPMC
+
ELM
McASP
(6)
MDIO
McBSP
2
GP Timer
(8)
USB 2.0
Ctlr/PHY
(2)
PCIe 2.0
(One x1
Port)
SATA
3Gbp/s
(1 Drives)
SPI
(4)
C
I
(4)
Watchdog
Timer
MMC/SD/
SDIO
(3)
DCAN
(2)
UART
(6)
Spin Lock
Mailbox
A. SGX530 is only available on the AM3874 device.
B. HDMI is only available on the AM3874 and AM3872 devices.
C. Video Ports (Inputs/Outputs) are only available on the AM3874 and AM3872 devices.
Figure 1-1. AM387x Sitara™ ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Functional Block Diagram
4
High-Performance System-on-Chip (SoC)
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
1
High-Performance System-on-Chip (SoC) ......... 1
7.3 Reset .............................................. 175
7.4 Clocking ........................................... 183
7.5 Interrupts .......................................... 198
Peripheral Information and Timings ............. 201
8.1 Parameter Information ............................ 201
1.1 Features .............................................. 1
1.2 Applications .......................................... 2
1.3 Description ........................................... 3
1.4 Functional Block Diagram ............................ 4
Device Overview ........................................ 6
8
8.2
Recommended Clock and Control Signal Transition
Behavior ........................................... 202
Controller Area Network Interface (DCAN) ....... 202
2
2.1 Device Comparison .................................. 6
2.2 Device Characteristics ............................... 6
2.3 Device Compatibility ................................. 9
8.3
8.4 EDMA ............................................. 204
8.5 Emulation Features and Capability ............... 207
8.6 Ethernet MAC Switch (EMAC SW) ................ 211
2.4
ARM® Cortex™-A8 Microprocessor Unit (MPU)
Subsystem Overview ................................ 9
8.7
General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) ............ 226
General-Purpose Memory Controller (GPMC) and
8.8
2.5 Media Controller Overview ......................... 11
2.6 SGX530 Overview .................................. 12
2.7 Spinlock Module Overview ......................... 12
2.8 Mailbox Module Overview .......................... 13
2.9 Memory Map Summary ............................. 14
Device Pins ............................................. 21
3.1 Pin Maps ............................................ 21
3.2 Terminal Functions ................................. 30
Device Configurations .............................. 139
4.1 Control Module Registers ......................... 139
4.2 Boot Modes ....................................... 139
4.3 Pin Multiplexing Control ........................... 146
4.4 Handling Unused Pins ............................ 156
4.5 DeBugging Considerations ........................ 156
System Interconnect ................................ 158
Device Operating Conditions ...................... 163
Error Location Module (ELM) ..................... 229
8.9
High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) ...... 246
8.10 High-Definition Video Processing Subsystem
(HDVPSS) ......................................... 249
8.11 Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) ...................... 255
8.12 Imaging Subsystem (ISS) ......................... 259
8.13 LPDDR/DDR2/DDR3 Memory Controller ......... 262
8.14 Multichannel Audio Serial Port (McASP) .......... 295
8.15 Multichannel Buffered Serial Port (McBSP) ....... 303
3
4
8.16 MultiMedia Card/Secure Digital/Secure Digital Input
Output (MMC/SD/SDIO) ........................... 308
8.17 Peripheral Component Interconnect Express (PCIe)
..................................................... 311
8.18 Serial ATA Controller (SATA) ..................... 316
8.19 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) .................. 320
8.20 Timers ............................................. 327
8.21 Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
(UART) ............................................ 329
8.22 Universal Serial Bus (USB2.0) .................... 331
Device and Documentation Support ............. 339
9.1 Device Support .................................... 339
5
6
6.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ....................... 163
6.2 Recommended Operating Conditions ............. 164
9
6.3
Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended
Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating
9.2 Documentation Support ........................... 340
9.3 Community Resources ............................ 340
Temperature (Unless Otherwise Noted) .......... 166
7
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts ......... 168
10 Mechanical ............................................ 341
7.1
Power, Reset and Clock Management (PRCM)
10.1 Thermal Data for CYE-04 (Top Hat) .............. 341
10.2 Packaging Information ............................ 341
Module ............................................ 168
7.2 Power .............................................. 168
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Contents
5
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
2 Device Overview
2.1 Device Comparison
Table 2-1 shows a comparison between devices, highlighting the differences.
Table 2-1. AM387x Device Comparison
DEVICES
FEATURES
AM3874
AM3872
AM3871
Video Ports
(Inputs)
VIN[0]/VIN[1]
VIN[0]/VIN[1]
NONE
HDVPSS
Video Ports
(Outputs)
VOUT[0]/VOUT[1] VOUT[0]/VOUT[1]
NONE
HDMI
YES (1)
YES (1)
YES (1)
NONE
NONE
NONE
SGX530
2.2 Device Characteristics
Table 2-2 provides an overview of the AM387x Sitara™ ARM Microprocessors (MPUs), which includes
significant features of the device, including the capacity of on-chip RAM, peripherals, and the package
type with pin count.
6
Device Overview
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 2-2. Characteristics of the Processor
HARDWARE FEATURES
AM387x
1 16-/24-bit HD Capture Port or
2 8-bit SD Capture Ports
and
1 8/16/24-bit HD Capture Port
and
1 8-bit SD Capture Port
and
HD Video Processing Subsystem (HDVPSS)
1 16-/24-/30-bit HD Display Port or
1 HDMI 1.3 Transmitter
and
1 16-/24-bit HD Display Port
and
2 SD Video DACs
1 Parallel Camera Input for Raw (up to
16-bit)
Imaging Subsystem (ISS)
and BT.656/BT.1120 (8/16-bit)
Peripherals
LPDDR/DDR2/3 Memory Controller
GPMC + ELM
2 (32-bit Bus Widths)
Not all peripherals
pins are available at
the same time (for
more details, see the
Device
Asynchronous (8-/16-bit bus width)
RAM, NOR, NAND
64 Independent Channels
8 QDMA Channels
EDMA
Configurations
section).
10/100/1000 Ethernet MAC Switch with Management Data
Input/Output (MDIO)
1 (with 2 MII/RMII/GMII/RGMII Interfaces)
2 (Supports High- and Full-Speed as a
Device and
High-, Full-, and Low-Speed as a Host, or
OTG)
USB 2.0
PCI Express 2.0
Timers
1 Port (1 5.0GT/s lane)
8 (32-bit General purpose)
and
1 (System Watchdog)
6 (with SIR, MIR, FIR, CIR support and
RTS/CTS flow control)
(UART0 Supports Modem Interface)
UART
SPI
4 (Supports 4 slave devices)
1 (1-bit or 4-bit or 8-bit modes)
and
MMC/SD/SDIO
1 (8-bit mode) or
2 (1-bit or 4-bit modes)
I2C
4 (Master/Slave)
Media Controller
Controls HDVPSS and ISS
6 (10/10/4/4/4/4 Serializers, Each with
Transmit/Receive and DIT capability)
McASP
McBSP
1 (2 Data Pins, Transmit/Receive)
Controller Area Network (DCAN)
Serial ATA (SATA) 3.0 Gbps
RTC
2
1 (Supports 1 Hard Disk Drive)
1
GPIO
Up to 128 pins
Parallel Camera Interface (CAM)
Spin Lock Module
Mailbox Module
1
1 (up to 128 H/W Semaphores)
1 (with 12 Mailboxes)
768KB RAM, 48KB ROM
Size (Bytes)
ARM
32KB I-cache
32KB D-cache
512KB L2 Cache
64KB RAM
On-Chip Memory
Organization
48KB Boot ROM
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Overview
7
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 2-2. Characteristics of the Processor (continued)
HARDWARE FEATURES
AM387x
ADDITIONAL SHARED MEMORY
128KB On-chip RAM
see Section 8.5.3.1, JTAG ID (JTAGID)
Register Description
JTAG BSDL ID
DEVICE_ID Register (address location: 0x4814_0600)
CPU Frequency
Cycle Time
MHz
ns
ARM® Cortex™-A8 720 MHZ
ARM® Cortex™ -A8 1.39 ns
DEEP SLEEP, OPP50,
OPP100, OPP120
0.83 V – 1.2 V
Core Logic (V)
Voltage
OPP166
TBD V
I/O (V)
1.5 V, 1.8 V, 3.3 V
684-Pin BGA (CYE) [with Via Channel™
Package
23 x 23 mm
Technology]
Process Technology μm
Product Preview (PP),
0.045 μm
Product Status(1)
Advance Information (AI),
or Production Data (PD)
PP
(1) PRODUCT PREVIEW information concerns products in the formative or design phase of development. Characteristic data and other
specifications are design goals. Texas Instruments reserves the right to change or discontinue these products without notice.
8
Device Overview
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
2.3 Device Compatibility
2.4 ARM® Cortex™-A8 Microprocessor Unit (MPU) Subsystem Overview
The ARM® Cortex™-A8 Subsystem is designed to give the ARM Cortex-A8 Master control of the device.
In general, the ARM Cortex-A8 is responsible for configuration and control of the various subsystems,
peripherals, and external memories.
The ARM Cortex-A8 Subsystem includes the following features:
•
ARM Cortex-A8 RISC processor:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ARMv7 ISA plus Thumb2™, JazelleX™, and Media Extensions
Neon™ Floating-Point Unit
Enhanced Memory Management Unit (MMU)
Little Endian
32KB L1 Instruction Cache
32KB L1 Data Cache
512KB L2 Cache
•
•
•
•
•
CoreSight Embedded Trace Module (ETM)
ARM Cortex-A8 Interrupt Controller (AINTC)
Embedded PLL Controller (PLL_ARM)
64KB Internal RAM
48KB Internal Public ROM
Figure 2-1 shows the ARM Cortex-A8 Subsystem for the device.
System Events
128
L3
DMM
DEVOSC
PLL_ARM
128
128 128
128
32
128
128
ARM Cortex-A8
Interrupt Controller
(AINTC)
ARM Cortex-A8
32
64
32KB L1I$ 32KB L1D$
512KB L2$
48KB ROM
64KB RAM
Arbiter
ETM
NEON
Trace
64
Debug
ICECrusher
Figure 2-1. ARM Cortex-A8 Subsystem
For more details on the ARM Cortex-A8 Subsystem, see the System MMU section of the Chip Level
Resources chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual
(Literature Number: SPRUGZ7).
2.4.1 ARM Cortex-A8 RISC Processor
The ARM Cortex-A8 Subsystem integrates the ARM Cortex-A8 processor. The ARM Cortex-A8 processor
is a member of ARM Cortex family of general-purpose microprocessors. This processor is targeted at
multi-tasking applications where full memory management, high performance, low die size, and low power
are all important. The ARM Cortex-A8 processor supports the ARM debug architecture and includes logic
to assist in both hardware and software debug. The ARM Cortex-A8 processor has a Harvard architecture
and provides a complete high-performance subsystem, including:
•
•
ARM Cortex-A8 Integer Core
Superscalar ARMv7 Instruction Set
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Overview
9
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Thumb-2 Instruction Set
Jazelle RCT Acceleration
CP14 Debug Coprocessor
CP15 System Control Coprocessor
NEON™ 64-/128-bit Hybrid SIMD Engine for Multimedia
Enhanced VFPv3 Floating-Point Coprocessor
Enhanced Memory Management Unit (MMU)
Separate Level-1 Instruction and Data Caches
Integrated Level-2 Cache
128-bit Interconnector-to-System Memories and Peripherals
Embedded Trace Module (ETM).
2.4.2 Embedded Trace Module (ETM)
To support real-time trace, the ARM Cortex-A8 processor provides an interface to enable connection of an
embedded trace module (ETM). The ETM consists of two parts:
•
•
The Trace port which provides real-time trace capability for the ARM Cortex-A8.
Triggering facilities that provide trigger resources, which include address and data comparators,
counter, and sequencers.
The ARM Cortex-A8 trace port is not pinned out and is, instead, only connected to the system-level
Embedded Trace Buffer (ETB). The ETB has a 32KB buffer memory. ETB enabled debug tools are
required to read/interpret the captured trace data.
For more details on the ETM, see Section 8.5.2, Trace.
2.4.3 ARM Cortex-A8 Interrupt Controller (AINTC)
The ARM Cortex-A8 subsystem contains an interrupt controller (AINTC) that prioritizes all service requests
from the system peripherals and generates either IRQ or FIQ to the ARM Cortex-A8 processor. For more
details on the AINTC, see Section 7.5.1, ARM Cortex-A8 Interrupts.
2.4.4 ARM Cortex-A8 PLL (PLL_ARM)
The ARM Cortex-A8 subsystem contains an embedded PLL Controller (PLL_ARM) for generating the
subsystem’s clocks from the DEV Clock input. For more details on the PLL_ARM, see Section 7.4,
Clocking.
2.4.5 ARM MPU Interconnect
The ARM Cortex-A8 processor is connected through the arbiter to both an L3 interconnect port and a
DMM port. The DMM port is 128-bits wide and provides the ARM Cortex-A8 direct access to the DDR
memories, while the L3 interconnect port is 64-bits wide and provides access to the remaining device
modules.
10
Device Overview
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
2.5 Media Controller Overview
The Media Controller has the responsibility of managing the HDVPSS and ISS modules.
For more details on the Media Controller, see the Media Controller Subsystem section of the Chip Level
Resources chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual
(Literature Number: SPRUGZ7).
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Overview
11
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
2.6 SGX530 Overview
The SGX530 is a vector/3D graphics accelerator for vector and 3-dimensional (3D) graphics applications.
The SGX530 graphics accelerator efficiently processes a number of various multimedia data types
concurrently:
•
•
•
Pixel data
Vertex data
Video data
This is achieved using a multi-threaded architecture using two levels of scheduling and data partitioning
enabling zero overhead task switching.
The SGX530 has the following major features:
•
•
•
Vector graphics and 3D graphics
Tile-based architecture
Universal Scalable Shader Engine (USSE™) - multi-threaded engine incorporating pixel and vertex
shader functionality
•
•
•
•
•
•
Advanced shader feature set - in excess of Microsoft VS3.0, PS3.0, and OpenGL2.0
Industry standard API support - OpenGL ES 1.1 and 2.0, OpenVG v1.1
Fine-grained task switching, load balancing, and power management
Advanced geometry DMA driven operation for minimum CPU interaction
Programmable high-quality image anti-aliasing
POWERVR SGX core MMU for address translation from the core virtual address to the external
physical address (up to 4GB address range)
•
•
Fully-virtualized memory addressing for OS operation in a unified memory architecture
Advanced and standard 2D operations [e.g., vector graphics, block level transfers (BLTs), raster
operations (ROPs)]
For more details on the Secure State Machine (SSM), see the System MMU section of the Chip Level
Resources chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual
(Literature Number: SPRUGZ7).
2.7 Spinlock Module Overview
The Spinlock module provides hardware assistance for synchronizing the processes running on multiple
processors in the device:
•
•
ARM Cortex-A8 processor
Media Controller
The Spinlock module implements 128 spinlocks (or hardware semaphores) that provide an efficient way to
perform a lock operation of a device resource using a single read-access, avoiding the need for a
read-modify-write bus transfer of which the programmable cores are not capable.
For more details on the Spinlock Module, see the Spinlock section of the Chip Level Resources chapter of
the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number:
SPRUGZ7).
12
Device Overview
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
2.8 Mailbox Module Overview
The device Mailbox module facilitates communication between the ARM Cortex-A8 and the Media
Controller. It consists of twelve mailboxes, each supporting a 1-way communication between two of the
above processors. The sender sends information to the receiver by writing a message to the mailbox
registers. Interrupt signaling is used to notify the receiver that a message has been queued or to notify the
sender about an overflow situation.
The Mailbox module supports the following features (see Figure 2-2):
•
•
•
•
•
•
12 mailboxes
Flexible mailbox-to-processor assignment scheme
Four-message FIFO depth for each message queue
32-bit message width
Message reception and queue-not-full notification using interrupts
Three interrupts (one to ARM Cortex-A8 and two to Media Controller)
Mailbox Module
Mailbox
Mailbox
Mailbox
Mailbox
Mailbox
Mailbox
Mailbox
Mailbox
Mailbox
Mailbox
Mailbox
Mailbox
L4
Interconnect
Interrupt
Interrupt
Interrupt
ARM Cortex-A8
Media Controller
Figure 2-2. Mailbox Module Block Diagram
For more details on the Mailbox Module, see the Mailbox section of the Chip Level Resources chapter of
the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number:
SPRUGZ7).
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Overview
13
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
2.9 Memory Map Summary
The device has multiple on-chip memories associated with its two processors and various subsystems. To
help simplify software development a unified memory map is used where possible to maintain a consistent
view of device resources across all bus masters.
2.9.1 L3 Memory Map
Table 2-3 shows the L3 memory map for all system masters (including Cortex-A8). .
For more details on the interconnect topology and connectivity across the L3 and L4 interconnects, see
Section 5, System Interconnect.
Table 2-3. L3 Memory Map
START ADDRESS
(HEX)
END ADDRESS
(HEX)
SIZE
DESCRIPTION
0x0000_0000
0x2000_0000
0x3000_0000
0x4000_0000
0x1FFF_FFFF
0x2FFF_FFFF
0x3FFF_FFFF
0x4001_FFFF
512MB
256MB
256MB
128KB
GPMC
PCIe
Reserved
Reserved
ARM Cortex-A8 ROM
(Accessible by ARM Cortex-A8 only)
0x4002_0000
0x4002_BFFF
48KB
0x4002_C000
0x402F_0000
0x402E_FFFF
0x402F_03FF
2832KB
1KB
Reserved
Reserved
ARM Cortex-A8 RAM
(Accessible by ARM Cortex-A8 only)
0x402F_0400
0x402F_FFFF
64KB - 1KB
0x4030_0000
0x4032_0000
0x4080_0000
0x4084_0000
0x40E0_0000
0x40E0_8000
0x40F0_0000
0x40F0_8000
0x4100_0000
0x4200_0000
0x4400_0000
0x4440_0000
0x4480_0000
0x44C0_0000
0x4600_0000
0x4640_0000
0x4680_0000
0x46C0_0000
0x4700_0000
0x4740_0000
0x4780_0000
0x4781_0000
0x4781_2000
0x47C0_0000
0x4800_0000
0x4031_FFFF
0x407F_FFFF
0x4083_FFFF
0x40DF_FFFF
0x40E0_7FFF
0x40EF_FFFF
0x40F0_7FFF
0x40FF_FFFF
0x41FF_FFFF
0x43FF_FFFF
0x443F_FFFF
0x447F_FFFF
0x44BF_FFFF
0x45FF_FFFF
0x463F_FFFF
0x467F_FFFF
0x46BF_FFFF
0x46FF_FFFF
0x473F_FFFF
0x477F_FFFF
0x4780_FFFF
0x4781_1FFF
0x47BF_FFFF
0x47FF FFFF
0x48FF_FFFF
128KB
4992KB
256KB
5888KB
32KB
992KB
32KB
992KB
16MB
32MB
4MB
OCMC SRAM
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
L3 Fast configuration registers
L3 Mid configuration registers
L3 Slow configuration registers
Reserved
4MB
4MB
20MB
4MB
McASP0 Data Peripheral Registers
McASP1 Data Peripheral Registers
McASP2 Data Peripheral Registers
HDMI
4MB
4MB
4MB
4MB
McBSP
4MB
USB
64KB
8KB
Reserved
MMC/SD/SDIO2 Peripheral Registers
Reserved
4MB - 72KB
4MB
Reserved
16MB
L4 Slow Peripheral Domain
(see Table 2-5)
0x4900_0000
0x490F_FFFF
1MB
EDMA TPCC Registers
14
Device Overview
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 2-3. L3 Memory Map (continued)
START ADDRESS
END ADDRESS
SIZE
DESCRIPTION
(HEX)
(HEX)
0x4910_0000
0x4980_0000
0x4990_0000
0x49A0_0000
0x49B0_0000
0x49C0_0000
0x4A00_0000
0x497F_FFFF
0x498F_FFFF
0x499F_FFFF
0x49AF_FFFF
0x49BF_FFFF
0x49FF_FFFF
0x4AFF_FFFF
7MB
1MB
1MB
1MB
1MB
4MB
16MB
Reserved
EDMA TPTC0 Registers
EDMA TPTC1 Registers
EDMA TPTC2 Registers
EDMA TPTC3 Registers
Reserved
L4 Fast Peripheral Domain
(see Table 2-4)
0x4B00_0000
0x4C00_0000
0x4D00_0000
0x4E00_0000
0x5000_0000
0x5100_0000
0x5200_0000
0x5500_0000
0x5600_0000
0x5700_0000
0x5800_0000
0x5C00_0000
0x5E00_0000
0x6000_0000
0x8000_0000
0x1 0000 0000
0x4BFF_FFFF
0x4CFF_FFFF
0x4DFF_FFFF
0x4FFF_FFFF
0x50FF_FFFF
0x51FF_FFFF
0x54FF_FFFF
0x55FF_FFFF
0x56FF_FFFF
0x57FF_FFFF
0x5BFF_FFFF
0x5DFF_FFFF
0x5FFF_FFFF
0x7FFF_FFFF
0xFFFF_FFFF
0x1 FFFF FFFF
16MB
16MB
16MB
32MB
16MB
16MB
48MB
16MB
16MB
16MB
64MB
32MB
32MB
512MB
2GB
Emulation Subsystem
DDR0 Registers
DDR1 Registers
DDR DMM Registers
GPMC Registers
PCIE Registers
Reserved
Media Controller
SGX530
Reserved
Reserved
ISS
Reserved
DDR DMM Tiler Window (see Table 2-6)
DDR
4GB
DDR DMM Tiler Extended Address Map
(ISS and HDVPSS only) [see Table 2-6]
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Overview
15
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
2.9.2 L4 Memory Map
The L4 Fast Peripheral Domain, L4 Slow Peripheral Domain regions of the memory maps above are
broken out into Table 2-4 and Table 2-5.
For more details on the interconnect topology and connectivity across the L3 and L4 interconnects, see
Section 5, System Interconnect.
2.9.2.1 L4 Fast Peripheral Memory Map
Table 2-4. L4 Fast Peripheral Memory Map
Cortex-A8 and L3 Masters
SIZE
DEVICE NAME
START ADDRESS
(HEX)
END ADDRESS
(HEX)
0x4A00_0000
0x4A00_0800
0x4A00_1000
0x4A00_1400
0x4A00_1800
0x4A00_2000
0x4A08_0000
0x4A10_0000
0x4A10_8000
0x4A14_0000
0x4A15_0000
0x4A15_1000
0x4A18_0000
0x4A1A_2000
0x4A1A_4000
0x4A1A_5000
0x4A1A_6000
0x4A1A7000
0x4A1A_8000
0x4A1A_A000
0x4A1A_B000
0x4A1A_C000
0x4A1A_D000
0x4A1A_E000
0x4A1B_0000
0x4A1B_1000
0x4A1B_2000
0x4A1B_3000
0x4A1B_6000
0x4A1B_4000
0x4A00_07FF
0x4A00_0FFF
0x4A00_13FF
0x4A00_17FF
0x4A00_1FFF
0x4A07_FFFF
0x4A0F_FFFF
0x4A10_7FFF
0x4A10_8FFF
0x4A14_FFFF
0x4A15_0FFF
0x4A17_FFFF
0x4A1A_1FFF
0x4A1A_3FFF
0x4A1A_4FFF
0x4A1A_5FFF
0x4A1A_6FFF
0x4A1A7FFF
0x4A1A_9FFF
0x4A1A_AFFF
0x4A1A_BFFF
0x4A1A_CFFF
0x4A1A_DFFF
0x4A1A_FFFF
0x4A1B_0FFF
0x4A1B_1FFF
0x4A1B_2FFF
0x4A1B_5FFF
0x4A1B_6FFF
0x4AFF_FFFF
2KB
2KB
L4 Fast Configuration - Address/Protection (AP)
L4 Fast Configuration - Link Agent (LA)
L4 Fast Configuration - Initiator Port (IP0)
L4 Fast Configuration - Initiator Port (IP1)
Reserved
1KB
1KB
2KB
504KB
512KB
32KB
4KB
Reserved
Reserved
EMAC SW Peripheral Registers
EMAC SW Support Registers
SATA Peripheral Registers
SATA Support Registers
64KB
4KB
188KB
136KB
8KB
Reserved
Reserved
McASP3 Configuration Peripheral Registers
McASP3 Configuration Support Registers
McASP3 Data Peripheral Registers
McASP3 Data Support Registers
Reserved
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
8KB
McASP4 Configuration Peripheral Registers
McASP4 Configuration Support Registers
McASP4 Data Peripheral Registers
McASP4 Data Support Registers
Reserved
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
8KB
McASP5 Configuration Peripheral Registers
McASP5 Configuration Support Registers
McASP5 Data Peripheral Registers
McASP5 Data Support Registers
Reserved
4KB
4KB
4KB
12KB
4KB
Reserved
14632KB
Reserved
16
Device Overview
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
2.9.2.2 L4 Slow Peripheral Memory Map
Table 2-5. L4 Slow Peripheral Memory Map
Cortex-A8 and L3 Masters
SIZE
DEVICE NAME
START ADDRESS
END ADDRESS
(HEX)
(HEX)
0x4800_0000
0x4800_0800
0x4800_1000
0x4800_1400
0x4800_1800
0x4800_2000
0x4800_8000
0x4801_2000
0x4802_0000
0x4802_1000
0x4802_2000
0x4802_3000
0x4802_4000
0x4802_5000
0x4802_6000
0x4802_8000
0x4802_9000
0x4802_A000
0x4802_B000
0x4802_C000
0x4802_E000
0x4802_F000
0x4803_0000
0x4803_1000
0x4803_2000
0x4803_3000
0x4803_4000
0x4803_8000
0x4803_A000
0x4803_B000
0x4803_C000
0x4803_E000
0x4803_F000
0x4804_0000
0x4804_1000
0x4804_2000
0x4804_3000
0x4804_4000
0x4804_5000
0x4804_6000
0x4804_7000
0x4804_8000
0x4804_9000
0x4804_A000
0x4800_07FF
0x4800_0FFF
0x4800_13FF
0x4800_17FF
0x4800_1FFF
0x4800_7FFF
0x4800_8FFF
0x4801_FFFF
0x4802_0FFF
0x4802_1FFF
0x4802_2FFF
0x4802_3FFF
0x4802_4FFF
0x4802_5FFF
0x4802_7FFF
0x4802_8FFF
0x4802_9FFF
0x4802_AFFF
0x4802_BFFF
0x4802_DFFF
0x4802_EFFF
0x4802_FFFF
0x4803_0FFF
0x4803_1FFF
0x4803_2FFF
0x4803_3FFF
0x4803_7FFF
0x4803_9FFF
0x4803_AFFF
0x4803_BFFF
0x4803_DFFF
0x4803_EFFF
0x4803_FFFF
0x4804_0FFF
0x4804_1FFF
0x4804_2FFF
0x4804_3FFF
0x4804_4FFF
0x4804_5FFF
0x4804_6FFF
0x4804_7FFF
0x4804_8FFF
0x4804_9FFF
0x4804_AFFF
2KB
2KB
1KB
1KB
2KB
24KB
32KB
56KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
8KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
8KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
16KB
8KB
4KB
4KB
8KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
L4 Slow Configuration – Address/Protection (AP)
L4 Slow Configuration – Link Agent (LA)
L4 Slow Configuration – Initiator Port (IP0)
L4 Slow Configuration – Initiator Port (IP1)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
UART0 Peripheral Registers
UART0 Support Registers
UART1 Peripheral Registers
UART1 Support Registers
UART2 Peripheral Registers
UART2 Support Registers
Reserved
I2C0 Peripheral Registers
I2C0 Support Registers
I2C1 Peripheral Registers
I2C1 Support Registers
Reserved
TIMER1 Peripheral Registers
TIMER1 Support Registers
SPI0 Peripheral Registers
SPI0 Support Registers
GPIO0 Peripheral Registers
GPIO0 Support Registers
Reserved
McASP0 CFG Peripheral Registers
McASP0 CFG Support Registers
Reserved
McASP1 CFG Peripheral Registers
McASP1 CFG Support Registers
Reserved
TIMER2 Peripheral Registers
TIMER2 Support Registers
TIMER3 Peripheral Registers
TIMER3 Support Registers
TIMER4 Peripheral Registers
TIMER4 Support Registers
TIMER5 Peripheral Registers
TIMER5 Support Registers
TIMER6 Peripheral Registers
TIMER6 Support Registers
TIMER7 Peripheral Registers
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Overview
17
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Cortex-A8 and L3 Masters
SIZE
DEVICE NAME
TIMER7 Support Registers
START ADDRESS
(HEX)
END ADDRESS
(HEX)
0x4804_B000
0x4804_C000
0x4804_D000
0x4804_E000
0x4805_0000
0x4805_2000
0x4805_3000
0x4806_0000
0x4807_0000
0x4807_1000
0x4808_0000
0x4809_0000
0x4809_1000
0x480A_0000
0x480B_0000
0x480B_1000
0x480C_0000
0x480C_1000
0x480C_2000
0x480C_4000
0x480C_8000
0x480C_9000
0x480C_A000
0x480C_B000
0x480C_C000
0x4810_0000
0x4812_0000
0x4812_1000
0x4812_2000
0x4812_3000
0x4812_4000
0x4814_0000
0x4816_0000
0x4816_1000
0x4818_0000
0x4818_3000
0x4818_4000
0x4818_8000
0x4818_9000
0x4818_A000
0x4818_B000
0x4818_C000
0x4818_D000
0x4818_E000
0x4818_F000
0x4819_0000
0x4819_4000
0x4804_BFFF
0x4804_CFFF
0x4804_DFFF
0x4804_FFFF
0x4805_1FFF
0x4805_2FFF
0x4805_FFFF
0x4806_FFFF
0x4807_0FFF
0x4807_FFFF
0x4808_FFFF
0x4809_0FFF
0x4809_FFFF
0x480A_FFFF
0x480B_0FFF
0x480B_FFFF
0x480C_0FFF
0x480C_1FFF
0x480C_3FFF
0x480C_7FFF
0x480C_8FFF
0x480C_9FFF
0x480C_AFFF
0x480C_BFFF
0x480F_FFFF
0x4811_FFFF
0x4812_0FFF
0x4812_1FFF
0x4812_2FFF
0x4812_3FFF
0x4813_FFFF
0x4815_FFFF
0x4816_0FFF
0x4817_FFFF
0x4818_2FFF
0x4818_3FFF
0x4818_7FFF
0x4818_8FFF
0x4818_9FFF
0x4818_AFFF
0x4818_BFFF
0x4818_CFFF
0x4818_DFFF
0x4818_EFFF
0x4818_FFFF
0x4819_3FFF
0x4819_BFFF
4KB
4KB
GPIO1 Peripheral Registers
GPIO1 Support Registers
Reserved
4KB
8KB
8KB
McASP2 CFG Peripheral Registers
McASP2 CFG Support Registers
Reserved
4KB
52KB
64KB
4KB
MMC/SD/SDIO0 Peripheral Registers
MMC/SD/SDIO0 Support Registers
Reserved
60KB
64KB
4KB
ELM Peripheral Registers
ELM Support Registers
Reserved
60KB
64KB
4KB
Reserved
Reserved
60KB
4KB
Reserved
RTC Peripheral Registers
RTC Support Registers
Reserved
4KB
8KB
16KB
4KB
Reserved
Mailbox Peripheral Registers
Mailbox Support Registers
Spinlock Peripheral Registers
Spinlock Support Registers
Reserved
4KB
4KB
4KB
208KB
128KB
4KB
HDVPSS Peripheral Registers
HDVPSS Support Registers
Reserved
4KB
4KB
HDMI Peripheral Registers
HDMI Support Registers
Reserved
4KB
112KB
128KB
4KB
Control Module Peripheral Registers
Control Module Support Registers
Reserved
124KB
12KB
4KB
PRCM Peripheral Registers
PRCM Support Registers
Reserved
16KB
4KB
SmartReflex0 Peripheral Registers
SmartReflex0 Support Registers
SmartReflex1 Peripheral Registers
SmartReflex1 Support Registers
OCP Watchpoint Peripheral Registers
OCP Watchpoint Support Registers
Reserved
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
Reserved
16KB
32KB
Reserved
Reserved
18
Device Overview
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Cortex-A8 and L3 Masters
SIZE
DEVICE NAME
START ADDRESS
END ADDRESS
(HEX)
(HEX)
0x4819_C000
0x4819_C000
0x4819_D000
0x4819_E000
0x4819_F000
0x481A_0000
0x481A_1000
0x481A_2000
0x481A_3000
0x481A_4000
0x481A_5000
0x481A_6000
0x481A_7000
0x481A_8000
0x481A_9000
0x481A_A000
0x481A_B000
0x481A_C000
0x481A_D000
0x481A_E000
0x481A_F000
0x481B_0000
0x481C_0000
0x481C_1000
0x481C_2000
0x481C_3000
0x481C_4000
0x481C_5000
0x481C_6000
0x481C_7000
0x481C_8000
0x481C_9000
0x481C_A000
0x481C_C000
0x481C_E000
0x481D_0000
0x481D_2000
0x481D_4000
0x481D_6000
0x481D_7000
0x481D_8000
0x481E_8000
0x481E_9000
0x4820_0000
0x4820_1000
0x481F_FFFF
0x4819_CFFF
0x4819_DFFF
0x4819_EFFF
0x4819_FFFF
0x481A_0FFF
0x481A_1FFF
0x481A_2FFF
0x481A_3FFF
0x481A_4FFF
0x481A_5FFF
0x481A_6FFF
0x481A_7FFF
0x481A_8FFF
0x481A_9FFF
0x481A_AFFF
0x481A_BFFF
0x481A_CFFF
0x481A_DFFF
0x481A_EFFF
0x481A_FFFF
0x481B_FFFF
0x481C_0FFF
0x481C_1FFF
0x481C_2FFF
0x481C_3FFF
0x481C_4FFF
0x481C_5FFF
0x481C_6FFF
0x481C_7FFF
0x481C_8FFF
0x481C_9FFF
0x481C_BFFF
0x481C_DFFF
0x481C_FFFF
0x481D_1FFF
0x481D_3FFF
0x481D_5FFF
0x481D_6FFF
0x481D_7FFF
0x481E_7FFF
0x481E_8FFF
0x481F_FFFF
0x4820_0FFF
0x4823_FFFF
400KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
64KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
4KB
8KB
8KB
8KB
8KB
8KB
8KB
8KB
4KB
4KB
64KB
4KB
52KB
4KB
252KB
Reserved
I2C2 Peripheral Registers
I2C2 Support Registers
I2C3 Peripheral Registers
I2C3 Support Registers
SPI1 Peripheral Registers
SPI1 Support Registers
SPI2 Peripheral Registers
SPI2 Support Registers
SPI3 Peripheral Registers
SPI3 Support Registers
UART3 Peripheral Registers
UART3 Support Registers
UART4 Peripheral Registers
UART4 Support Registers
UART5 Peripheral Registers
UART5 Support Registers
GPIO2 Peripheral Registers
GPIO2 Support Registers
GPIO3 Peripheral Registers
GPIO3 Support Registers
Reserved
Reserved
TIMER8 Peripheral Registers
TIMER8 Support Registers
SYNCTIMER32K Peripheral Registers
SYNCTIMER32K Support Registers
PLLSS Peripheral Registers
PLLSS
WDT0 Peripheral Registers
WDT0 Support Registers
Reserved
Reserved
DCAN0 Peripheral Registers
DCAN0 Support Registers
DCAN1 Peripheral Registers
DCAN1 Support Registers
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
MMC/SD/SDIO1 Peripheral Registers
MMC/SD/SDIO1 Support Registers
Reserved
Interrupt controller(1)
Reserved(1)
(1) These regions decoded internally by the Cortex™-A8 Subsystem and are not physically part of the L4 Slow. They are included here only
for reference when considering the Cortex™-A8 Memory Map. For Masters other than the Cortex-A8 these regions are reserved.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Overview
19
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Cortex-A8 and L3 Masters
SIZE
DEVICE NAME
MPUSS config register(1)
Reserved(1)
SSM(1)
START ADDRESS
(HEX)
END ADDRESS
(HEX)
0x4824_0000
0x4824_1000
0x4828_0000
0x4828_1000
0x4830_0000
0x4824_0FFF
0x4827_FFFF
0x4828_0FFF
0x482F_FFFF
0x48FF_FFFF
4KB
252KB
4KB
508KB
13MB
Reserved(1)
Reserved
2.9.3 DDR DMM TILER Extended Addressing Map
The Tiler includes an additional 4-GBytes of addressing range, enabled by a 33rd address bit, to access
the frame buffer in rotated and mirrored views. shows the details of the Tiler Extended Address Mapping.
This entirety of this additional range is only accessible to the HDVPSS and ISS subsystems. However,
other masters can access any one single view through the 512-MB Tiler region in the base 4GByte
address memory map.
Table 2-6. DDR DMM TILER Extended Address Mapping
START ADDRESS
(HEX)
END ADDRESS
(HEX)
BLOCK NAME
SIZE
DESCRIPTION
Tiler View 0
Tiler View 1
0x1 0000_0000
0x1 2000_0000
0x1 1FFF_FFFF
0x1 3FFF_FFFF
512MB
512MB
Natural 0° View
0° with Vertical Mirror
View
Tiler View 2
0x1 4000_0000
0x1 5FFF_FFFF
512MB
0° with Horizontal Mirror
View
Tiler View 3
Tiler View 4
0x1 6000_0000
0x1 8000_0000
0x1 7FFF_FFFF
0x1 9FFF_FFFF
512MB
512MB
180° View
90° with Vertical Mirror
View
Tiler View 5
Tiler View 6
Tiler View 7
0x1 A000_0000
0x1 C000_0000
0x1 E000_0000
0x1 BFFF_FFFF
0x1 DFFF_FFFF
0x1 FFFF_FFFF
512MB
512MB
512MB
270° View
90° View
90° with Horizontal Mirror
View
20
Device Overview
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
3 Device Pins
3.1 Pin Maps
Figure 3-1 through Figure 3-8 show the bottom view of the package pin assignments in eight pin maps (A,
B, C, D, E, F, G, and H).
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
21
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
E
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
SD1_CMD/
GP0[0]
SD1_DAT[0]
SD1_CLK
SD1_DAT[2]_SDRW
SD1_DAT[1]_SDIRQ
P
N
M
L
SD1_DAT[3]
DVDD_SD
MCA[2]_AXR[0]/
SD0_DAT[6]/
UART5_RXD
GP0[12]
SD0_CMD/
SD1_CMD/
GP0[2]
MCA[1]_AXR[3]/
MCB_CLKR
DVDD
MCA[0]_AXR[9]/
MCB_CLKX/
MCB_CLKR
MCA[1]_ACLKR/
MCA[1]_AXR[4]
MCA[1]_AFSR/
MCA[1]_AXR[5]
MCA[0]_AXR[5]/
MCA[1]_AXR[9]
MCA[0]_AXR[6]/
MCB_DR
MCA[0]_AXR[3]
VDDA_1P8
AUD_CLKIN0/
MCA[0]_AXR[7]/
MCA[0]_AHCLKX/
MCA[3]_AHCLKX]/
USB1_DRVVBUS
MCA[5]_AXR[1]/
MCA[4]_AXR[3]/
TIM7_IO/
MCA[0]_AXR[8]/
MCB_FSX/
MCB_FSR
MCA[5]_AXR[0]/
MCA[4]_AXR[2]/
GP0[27]
MCA[0]_AXR[2]/
I2C[3]_SDA
MCA[0]_AXR[7]/
MCB_DX
MCA[0]_AFSX
GP0[28]
MCA[0]_AFSR/
MCA[5]_AXR[3]
MCA[0]_ACLKR/
MCA[5]_AXR[2]
MCA[4]_ACLKX/
GP0[21]
K
RSTOUT_WD_OUT
CLKIN32/
CLKOUT0/
TIM3_IO/
GP3[31]
MCA[4]_AXR[1]/
TIM6_IO/
GP0[24]
MCA[0]_AXR[0]
MCA[3]_AXR[3]/
MCA[1]_AXR[9]
MCA[0]_AXR[1]/
I2C[3]_SCL
MCA[5]_ACLKX/
GP0[25]
RESET
J
AUD_CLKIN2/
MCA[0]_AXR[9]/
MCA[2]_AHCLKX/
MCA[5]_AHCLKX/
EDMA_EVT2/
TIM3_IO/
MCA[2]_AXR[3]/
MCA[1]_AXR[7]/
TIM3_IO/
MCA[4]_AFSX/
GP0[22]
MCA[3]_AFSX/
GP0[17]
MCA[5]_AFSX/
GP0[26]
MCA[4]_AXR[0]/
GP0[23]
NMI
H
G
F
GP0[15]
GP0[9]
MCA[3]_AXR[0]/
TIM4_IO/
GP0[18]
MCA[3]_AXR[1]/
TIM5_IO/
GP0[19]
MCA[3]_ACLKX/
GP0[16]
MCA[3]_AXR[2]/
MCA[1]_AXR[8]/
GP0[20]
POR
DDR[1]_DQM[0]
DDR[1]_D[17]
DDR[1]_D[1]
DDR[1]_D[0]
DDR[1]_D[6]
DDR[1]_D[10]
DDR[1]_DQS[1]
DDR[1]_D[4]
DDR[1]_D[3]
DDR[1]_DQS[0]
DDR[1]_D[7]
DDR[1]_VTP
DDR[1]_D[2]
DDR[1]_DQS[0]
DDR[1]_D[8]
DDR[1]_D[5]
DDR[1]_D[21]
DDR[1]_D[22]
DDR[1]_D[20]
DDR[1]_DQS[2]
E
D
C
B
A
DDR[1]_D[9]
DDR[1]_D[18]
DDR[1]_D[19]
DDR[1]_D[13]
DDR[1]_DQM[1]
DDR[1]_D[12]
DDR[1]_D[23]
VSS
DDR[1]_D[11]
DDR[1]_DQS[1]
DDR[1]_D[14]
DDR[1]_D[15]
DDR[1]_DQS[2]
DDR[1]_D[27]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Figure 3-1. Pin Map A
22
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
E
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
P
N
M
L
DVDD
DVDD_SD
CVDD
VSS
RSV21
RSV18
RSV20
RSV19
CVDD
VSS
CVDD
CVDD
VSS
VSS
CVDD
DVDD
CVDD
RSV22
CVDD
CVDD
CVDD
VSS
CVDD
CVDD
CVDD
CVDD
CVDD
VSS
CVDD
K
CVDD
VSS
CVDD
VSS
VSS
J
DVDD_DDR[1]
DDR[1]_ODT[0]
DDR[1]_RST
DDR[1]_A[1]
DVDD_DDR[1]
DDR[1]_CKE
DDR[1]_CS[1]
DDR[1]_ODT[1]
DDR[1]_A[13]
DDR[1]_A[14]
DDR[1]_A[2]
DDR[1]_A[0]
VSS
DVDD_DDR[1]
DVDD_DDR[1]
DVDD_DDR[1]
DDR[1]_CAS
VSS
H
G
F
DDR[1]_D[16]
DDR[1]_DQM[2]
DDR[1]_D[26]
DVDD_DDR[1]
DDR[1]_D[29]
DDR[1]_D[30]
DDR[1]_DQS[3]
DDR[1]_D[25]
DDR[1]_DQM[3]
DDR[1]_D[24]
DVDD_DDR[1]
VSS
DVDD_DDR[1]
DDR[1]_CS[0]
DDR[1]_A[10]
DDR[1]_WE
DDR[1]_BA[2]
DDR[1]_RAS
DDR[1]_A[5]
DVDD_DDR[1]
VREFSSTL_DDR[1]
DDR[1]_BA[0]
DDR[1]_A[8]
DDR[1]_A[6]
DDR[1]_A[9]
DDR[1]_A[4]
E
D
C
B
A
DDR[1]_D[28]
DDR[1]_D[31]
DDR[1]_A[12]
DDR[1]_CLK
DDR[1]_DQS[3]
DDR[1]_BA[1]
DDR[1]_A[11]
VSS
12
DDR[1]_CLK
DDR[1]_A[3]
DDR[1]_A[7]
8
9
10
11
13
14
Figure 3-2. Pin Map B
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
23
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
E
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
VSS
VSS
CVDD
VSS
LDOCAP_RAM0
VDDA_L3PLL_1P8
CVDD
VSS
DVDD_GPMC
VSS
VSS
VSS
P
N
M
CVDD
CVDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
CVDD
VSS
VSS
DVDD_GPMC
VDDA_1P8
DVDD_GPMC
CVDD
VSS
CVDD
LDOCAP_RAM2
CVDD
DVDD_GPMC
L
K
J
VSS
VSS
VSS
CVDD
VSS
DVDD_DDR[0]
VDDA_DDRPLL_1P8
VREFSSTL_DDR[0]
DDR[0]_BA[0]
DDR[0]_A[3]
DDR[0]_A[4]
DDR[0]_A[9]
DDR[0]_A[8]
DVDD_DDR[0]
DVDD_DDR[0]
DVDD_DDR[0]
DDR[0]_A[14]
DVDD_DDR[0]
DVDD_DDR[0]
DDR[0]_CS[1]
DDR[0]_A[13]
DDR[0]_A[12]
DDR[0]_A[11]
DDR[0]_WE
DDR[0]_A[5]
DVDD_DDR[0]
DDR[0]_CKE
DDR[0]_ODT[0]
DDR[0]_CS[0]
DDR[0]_A[7]
DDR[0]_A[2]
DDR[0]_CAS
DDR[0]_RAS
VSS
DDR[0]_ODT[1]
DDR[0]_RST
DDR[0]_A[1]
DDR[0]_D[24]
DDR[0]_D[26]
DDR[0]_DQM[3]
DVDD_DDR[0]
VSS
DDR[0]_D[18]
DDR[0]_D[19]
DDR[0]_D[25]
DVDD_DDR[0]
DDR[0]_D[30]
DDR[0]_D[29]
DDR[0]_DQS[3]
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
DDR[0]_D[28]
DDR[0]_D[31]
DDR[0]_CLK
DDR[0]_A[0]
DDR[0]_A[6]
DDR[0]_CLK
VSS
17
DDR[0]_BA[2]
DDR[0]_A[10]
DDR[0]_BA[1]
DDR[0]_DQS[3]
15
16
18
19
20
21
Figure 3-3. Pin Map C
24
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
E
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
SD2_DAT[5]/
GPMC_A[26]/
GPMC_A[22]/
TIM6_IO/
EMAC[0]_MRXD[1]/
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[0]/
VIN[1]B_D[6]/
EMAC[0]_RMTXD[1]/
GP3[29]
GPMC_CS[3]/
VIN[1]B_CLK/
SPI[2]_SCS[0]/
GP1[26]
GPMC_CS[4]/
SD2_CMD/
GP1[8]
MDIO/
GP1[12]
RSV13
RSV11
RSV8
RSV6
RSV12
RSV10
RSV9
P
N
M
L
GP1[21]
SD2_DAT[6]/
GPMC_A[25]/
GPMC_A[21]/
UART2_TXD/
GP1[20]
VSS
VDDA_1P8
VSS
GPMC_ADV_ALE/
GPMC_CS[6]/
TIM5_IO/
SD2_DAT[1]_SDIRQ/
GPMC_A[3]/
GP1[13]
GPMC_CS[2]/
GPMC_A[24]/
GP1[25]
SD2_CLK/
GP1[15]
GP1[28]
EMAC[0]_MTCLK/
EMAC[0]_RGRXC/
VIN[1]B_D[0]/
SPI[3]_SCS[3]/
I2C[2]_SDA/
EMAC[0]_MCOL/
EMAC[0]_RGRXCTL/
VIN[1]B_D[1]/
EMAC[0]_RMRXD[0]/
GP3[24]
SD2_DAT[7]/
GPMC_A[24]/
GPMC_A[20]/
UART2_RXD/
GP1[19]
SD2_DAT[0]/
GPMC_A[4]/
GP1[14]
RSV7
GP3[23]
EMAC[0]_MRXDV/
EMAC[1]_RGRXD[1]/
GPMC_A[5]/
EMAC[0]_GMTCLK/
EMAC[1]_RGRXC/
GPMC_A[6]/
SD2_DAT[2]_SDRW/
GPMC_A[2]/
GP2[6]
GPMC_CS[1]/
GPMC_A[25]/
GP1[24]
K
SPI[2]_SCLK
SPI[2]_D[1]
EMAC[0]_MRXD[3]/
EMAC[1]_RGRXCTL/
GPMC_A[27]/
GPMC_A[26]/
GPMC_A[0]/
UART5_RXD
EMAC[0]_MTXD[6]/
EMAC[1]_RGRXD[0]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXD[0]/
GPMC_A[13]/
EMAC[0]_MTXEN/
EMAC[1]_RGRXD[2]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXEN/
GPMC_A[15]/
EMAC[0]_MRXER/
EMAC[0]_RGTXCTL/
VIN[1]B_D[3]/
EMAC[0]_RMRXER/
GP3[26]
EMAC[0]_MTXD[0]/
EMAC[1]_RGRXD[3]/
GPMC_A[7]/
EMAC_RMREFCLK/
TIM2_IO/
GP1[10]
SD2_DAT[3]/
GPMC_A[1]/
GP2[5]
J
SPI[2]_D[0]
UART1_TXD
UART1_RTS
EMAC[0]_MRCLK/
EMAC[0]_RGTXC/
VIN[1]B_D[4]/
EMAC[0]_RMCRSDV/
SPI[3]_SCS[2]/
GP3[27]
EMAC[0]_MTXD[2]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXCTL/
EMAC[1]_RMRXD[0]/
GPMC_A[9]/
EMAC[0]_MTXD[3]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXD[0]/
EMAC[1]_RMRXD[1]/
GPMC_A[10]/
EMAC[0]_MTXD[7]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXD[3]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXD[1]/
GPMC_A[14]/
EMAC[0]_MTXD[1]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXD[1]/
GPMC_A[8]/
EMAC[0]_MRXD[5]/
EMAC[0]_RGTXD[3]/
GPMC_A[2]/
MDCLK/
GP1[11]
H
G
F
UART4_RXD
UART5_CTS
UART4_TXD
UART4_CTS
UART1_CTS
EMAC[0]_MTXD[4]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXD[2]/
EMAC[1]_RMRXER/
GPMC_A[11]/
EMAC[0]_MRXD[0]/
EMAC[0]_RGTXD[0]/
VIN[1]B_D[5]/
EMAC[0]_RMTXD[0]/
GP3[28]
EMAC[0]_MRXD[7]/
EMAC[0]_RGTXD[1]/
GPMC_A[4]/
SPI[2]_SCS[3]
UART4_RTS
EMAC[0]_MTXD[5]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXC/
EMAC[1]_RMCRSDV/
GPMC_A[12]/
EMAC[0]_MRXD[6]/
EMAC[0]_RGTXD[2]/
GPMC_A[3]/
DDR[0]_D[17]
DDR[0]_D[4]
DDR[0]_D[3]
DDR[0]_D[5]
DDR[0]_D[1]
DDR[0]_D[2]
DDR[0]_D[6]
DDR[0]_D[10]
DDR[0]_DQS[1]
UART5_RTS
UART1_RXD
DDR[0]_D[21]
DDR[0]_D[20]
DDR[0]_D[22]
DDR[0]_DQS[2]
DDR[0]_D[0]
DDR[0]_DQS[0]
DDR[0]_D[8]
DDR[0]_DQM[0]
DDR[0]_DQS[0]
DDR[0]_D[7]
E
D
C
B
A
DDR[0]_D[13]
DDR[0]_DQM[2]
DDR[0]_D[16]
DDR[0]_D[9]
DDR[0]_D[23]
DDR[0]_D[12]
DDR[0]_VTP
DDR[0]_DQM[1]
DDR[0]_D[27]
DDR[0]_DQS[2]
DDR[0]_D[15]
DDR[0]_D[14]
DDR[0]_DQS[1]
DDR[0]_D[11]
VSS
28
22
23
24
25
26
27
Figure 3-4. Pin Map D
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
25
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
UART0_DCD/
UART3_RXD/
SPI[0]_SCS[3]/
I2C[2]_SCL/
SD1_POW/
GP1[2]
DCAN0_TX/
UART2_TXD/
I2C[3]_SDA/
GP1[0]
VOUT[0]_G_Y_YC[2]/
EMU3/
GP2[24]
DEVOSC_MXI/
DEV_CLKIN
DEVOSC_MXO
VSSA_DEVOSC
SPI[0]_D[1]
UART0_RXD
AH
AG
AF
AE
AD
AC
AB
AA
Y
VSS
UART0_DSR/
UART3_TXD/
SPI[0]_SCS[2]/
I2C[2]_SDA/
SD1_SDWP/
GP1[3]
UART0_DTR/
UART3_CTS/
UART1_TXD/
GP1[4]
DCAN0_RX/
UART2_RXD/
I2C[3]_SCL/
GP1[1]
VOUT[0]_B_CB_C[2]
EMU2/
GP2[22]
VSS
UART0_TXD
UART0_RTS/
UART4_TXD/
DCAN1_RX/
SPI[1]_SCS[2]/
SD2_SDCD
UART0_RIN/
UART3_RTS/
UART1_RXD/
GP1[5]
SERDES_CLKP
VOUT[0]_R_CR[6]/
SERDES_CLKN
SPI[0]_SCS[1]/
SD1_SDCD/
SATA_ACT0_LED/
EDMA_EVT1/
TIM4_IO/
UART0_CTS/
UART4_RXD/
DCAN1_TX/
SPI[1]_SCS[3]/
SD0_SDCD
VSS
VSS
SPI[0]_D[0]
GP1[6]
SPI[1]_SCS[0]/
GP1[16]
PCIE_TXN0
PCIE_RXN0
SATA_TXN0
SATA_RXP0
VSS
PCIE_TXP0
PCIE_RXP0
SATA_TXP0
SATA_RXN0
VSS
RTCK
SPI[0]_SCS[0]
SPI[1]_SCLK/
GP1[17]
I2C[0]_SCL
TDO
SPI[0]_SCLK
I2C[0]_SDA
SPI[1]_D[1]/
GP1[18]
MCA[2]_AFSX/
GP0[11]
SPI[1]_D[0]/
GP1[26]
TRST
TMS
SD0_DAT[2]_SDRW/
SD1_DAT[6]/
GP0[5]
SD0_DAT[3]/
SD1_DAT[7]/
GP0[6]
SD0_DAT[1]_SDIRQ/
SD1_DAT[5]/
GP0[4]
SD0_CLK/
GP0[1]
TDI
DEVOSC_WAKE/
SPI[1]_SCS[1]/
TIM5_IO/
W
GP1[7]
GP1[8]
TCLK
GP1[7]
MCA[2]_AXR[2]/
MCA[1]_AXR[6]/
TIM2_IO/
MCA[2]_AXR[1]/
SD0_DAT[7]/
UART5_TXD/
GP0[13]
MCA[1]_AXR[0]/
SD0_DAT[4]
MCA[1]_AFSX
V
GP1[9]
GP1[10]
VSS
GP0[14]
UART2_TXD/
GP0[31]
UART2_RXD/
GP0[29]
MCA[2]_ACLKX//
GP0[10]
U
RSV16
RSV17
MCA[1]_ACLKX
VDDA_1P8
TCLKIN/
GP0[30]
MCA[1]_AXR[1]/
SD0_DAT[5]
T
AUXOSC_MXO
DVDD
AUD_CLKIN1/
MCA[0]_AXR[8]/
MCA[1]_AHCLKX/
MCA[4]_AHCLKX/
EDMA_EVT3/
TIM2_IO/
SD0_DAT[0]/
SD1_DAT[4]/
GP0[3]
AUXOSC_MXI/
AUX_CLKIN
MCA[1]_AXR[2]/
MCB_FSR
MCA[0]_AXR[4]/
MCA[1]_AXR[8]
R
VSSA_AUXOSC
MCA[0]_ACLKX
GP0[8]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
E
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
Figure 3-5. Pin Map E
26
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
VIN[0]A_D[4]/
GP2[9]
VIN[0]A_D[10]_BD[2]/
GP2[15]
AH
AG
AF
AE
USB0_CE
USB0_ID
USB0_DM
USB0_DP
USB1_ID
USB1_DM
USB1_CE
VIN[0]A_D[9]_BD[1]/
GP2[14]
USB0_VBUSIN
EMU0
USB1_DP
USB1_VBUSIN
VIN[0]A_D[0]/
GP1[11]
USB0_DRVVBUS/
GP0[7]
VOUT[0]_R_CR[5]
VOUT[0]_R_CR[8]
VOUT[0]_R_CR[7]
VOUT[0]_G_Y_YC[9]
VOUT[0]_G_Y_YC[8]
VOUT[0]_G_Y_YC[7]
VIN[0]A_D[3]/
GP2[8]
VSS
EMU1
VOUT[0]_R_CR[2]/
EMU4/
GP2[26]
AD
RSV1
RSV5
VOUT[0]_B_CB_C[4]
VOUT[0]_HSYNC
VOUT[0]_CLK
VIN[0]A_D[14]_BD[6]/
CAM_STROBE/
GP2[19]
VIN[0]A_D[15]_BD[7]/
CAM_SHUTTER/
GP2[20]
VIN[0]A_D[2]/
GP2[7]
AC
VOUT[0]_B_CB_C[6]
VOUT[0]_R_CR[9]
VOUT[0]_R_CR[3]/
GP2[27]
VIN[0]A_D[1]/
GP1[12]
AB
AA
Y
VOUT[0]_G_Y_YC[4]
VOUT[0]_G_Y_YC[6]
VOUT[0]_B_CB_C[7]
VOUT[0]_G_Y_YC[5]
VOUT[0]_VSYNC
VDDA_USB_3P3
VDDA_1P8
VDDA_USB1_1P8
VSSA_USB
CVDD
DVDD
VOUT[0]_AVID/
VOUT[0]_FLD/
SPI[3]_SCLK/
TIM7_IO/
VIN[0]A_D[7]/
GP2[12]
VSS
VOUT[0]_R_CR[4]
VDDA_USB0_1P8
GP2[21]
VSS
DVDD
VSS
RSV4
W
VDDA_PCIE_1P8
VDDA_PCIE_1P8
CVDD
VSS
LDOCAP_ARM
LDOCAP_ARMRAM
VSS
V
RSV3
RSV2
VSS
VSS
VDDA_1P8
VSS
VSSA_USB
U
VDDA_SATA_1P8
VDDA_SATA_1P8
CVDD
VSS
T
VSS
LDOCAP_SGX
LDOCAP_SERDESCLK
CVDD
VSS
CVDD_ARM
VSS
VSS
DVDD_M
LDOCAP_RAM1
VSS
12
VDDA_ARMPLL_1P8
VSS
14
R
8
9
10
11
13
E
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
Figure 3-6. Pin Map F
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
27
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
VIN[0]A_D[11]_BD[3]/
CAM_WE/
GP2[16]
VOUT[0]_G_Y_YC[3]/
GP2[25]
VIN[0]A_D[6]/
GP2[11]
HDMI_CLKN
HDMI_CLKP
HDMI_DN0
HDMI_DP0
HDMI_DN1
HDMI_DP1
HDMI_DN2
AH
VIN[0]A_D[12]_BD[4]/
CLKOUT1/
GP2[17]
VIN[0]A_D[5]/
GP2[10]
VOUT[0]_B_CB_C[9]
VOUT[0]_B_CB_C[8]
HDMI_DP2
AG
AF
VOUT[0]_FLD/
CAM_PCLK/
GPMC_A[12]/
UART2_RTS/
GP2[2]
VIN[0]A_D[18]/
CAM_D[10]/
EMAC[1]_RMRXD[1]/
I2C[3]_SCL/
GP0[12]
VIN[0]A_D[19]/
CAM_D[11]/
EMAC[1]_RMRXD[0]/
I2C[3]_SDA/
GP0[13]
VIN[0]A_D[13]_BD[5]/
CAM_RESET/
GP2[18]
VIN[0]A_D[21]/
CAM_D[13]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXD[0]/
SPI[3]_SCLK/
GP0[15]
VIN[0]A_DE/
VIN[0]B_HSYNC/
UART5_TXD/
I2C[2]_SDA/
GP2[0]
VIN[0]B_CLK/
CLKOUT0/
GP1[9]
VOUT[0]_B_CB_C[3]/
GP2[23]
VSS
AE
AD
AC
AB
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[1]/
CAM_D[3]/
GPMC_A[5]/
UART4_RXD/
GP0[22]
VIN[0]B_FLD/
CAM_D[4]/
GP0[21]
VIN[0]A_VSYNC/
UART5_CTS/
GP2[4]
VOUT[0]_B_CB_C[5]
VSS
VIN[0]A_D[23]/
CAM_D[15]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXEN/
SPI[3]_D[0]/
GP0[17]
VIN[0]A_D[20]/
CAM_D[12]/
EMAC[1]_RMCRSDV/
SPI[3]_SCS[0]/
GP0[14]
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[0]/
CAM_D[2]/
GPMC_A[6]/
UART4_TXD/
GP0[23]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[1]/
CAM_D[1]/
GPMC_A[7]/
UART4_CTS/
GP0[24]
VIN[0]A_D[22]/
CAM_D[14]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXD[1]/
SPI[3]_D[1]/
GP0[16]
VIN[0]B_DE/
CAM_D[6]/
GP0[19]
VIN[0]A_HSYNC/
UART5_RTS/
GP2[3]
VIN[0]A_D[17]/
CAM_D[9]/
EMAC[1]_RMRXER/
GP0[11]
VIN[0]A_DE/
CAM_D[7]/
GP0[18]
VIN[0]A_D[8]_BD[0]/
GP2[13]
VIN[0]A_CLK/
GP2[2]
DVDD
VDDA_VID0PLL_1P8
VDDA_VDAC_1P8
VIN[0]A_FLD/
VIN[0]B_VSYNC/
UART5_RXD/
I2C[2]_SCL/
GP2[1]
VIN[0]A_D[16]/
CAM_D[8]/
I2C[2]_SCL/
GP0[10]
DVDD
VSS
DVDD
VDDA_VID1PLL_1P8
VSSA_VDAC
AA
VSS
DVDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
Y
VDDA_1P8
CVDD_ARM
CVDD_ARM
CVDD_ARM
VSS
VSS
VDDA_HDMI_1P8
VSSA_HDMI
VSS
DVDD_C
DVDD_C
W
CVDD_ARM
CVDD_ARM
CVDD_ARM
VSS
VSS
DVDD
VSS
DVDD
VSS
V
CVDD
CVDD
VSS
U
VSS
VSS
VSS
DVDD_GPMC
T
CVDD
VSS
16
CVDD
VDDA_AUDIOPLL_1P8
CVDD
VDDA_1P8
VSS
21
R
15
17
18
19
20
E
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
Figure 3-7. Pin Map G
28
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[3]/
EMAC[1]_MRCLK/
VIN[1]A_D[0]/
UART4_CTS/
GP3[0]
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[8]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[4]/
VIN[1]A_D[5]/
I2C[3]_SCL/
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[6]/
EMAC[1]_GMTCLK/
VIN[1]A_D[11]/
GP3[10]
TV_OUT1
TV_RSET
TV_VFB0
VSS
TV_OUT0
VSS
AH
AG
AF
AE
AD
AC
AB
AA
Y
GP3[5]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[3]/
GPMC_A[14]/
VIN[1]A_D[22]/
HDMI_SDA/
SPI[2]_SCLK/
I2C[2]_SDA
GP3[21]
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[4]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[0]/
VIN[1]A_D[1]/
UART4_RXD/
GP3[1]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[4]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[3]/
VIN[1]A_D[15]/
SPI[3]_SCS[1]/
GP3[14]
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[5]/
EMAC[1]_MRXDV/
VIN[1]A_D[10]/
GP3[9]
I2C[1]_SDA/
HDMI_SDA
TV_VFB1
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[2]/
GPMC_A[13]/
VIN[1]A_D[21]/
HDMI_SCL/
SPI[2]_SCS[2]/
I2C[2]_SCL/
GP3[20]
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[2]/
GPMC_A[0]/
VIN[1]A_D[7]/
HDMI_CEC/
SPI[2]_D[0]/
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[5]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[1]/
VIN[1]A_D[2]/
UART4_TXD/
GP3[2]
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[7]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[0]/
VIN[1]A_D[12]/
GP3[11]
I2C[1]_SCL/
HDMI_SCL
GP3[30]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[2]/
GPMC_A[15]/
VIN[1]A_D[23]/
HDMI_HPDET/
SPI[2]_D[1]/
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[1]/
CAM_HS/
GPMC_A[9]/
UART2_RXD/
GP0[26]
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[8]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[1]/
VIN[1]A_D[13]/
GP3[12]
VOUT[1]_CLK/
EMAC[1]_MTCLK/
VIN[1]A_HSYNC/
GP2[28]
GPMC_A[18]/
TIM2_IO/
GP1[13]
GP3[22]
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[0]/
CAM_VS/
GPMC_A[10]/
UART2_TXD/
GP0[27]
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[6 ]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[2]/
VIN[1]A_D[3]/
UART3_RXD/
GP3[3]
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[9]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[2]/
VIN[1]A_D[14]/
GP3[13]
GPMC_A[20]/
SPI[2]_SCS[1]/
GP1[15]
GPMC_A[16]/
GP2[5]
VOUT[1]_HSYNC/
EMAC[1]_MCOL/
VIN[1]A_VSYNC/
SPI[3]_D[1]/
UART3_RTS/
GP2[29]
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[7]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[3]/
VIN[1]A_D[4]/
UART3_TXD/
GP3[4]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[5]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[4]/
VIN[1]A_D[16]/
SPI[3]_SCLK/
GPMC_A[19]/
TIM3_IO/
GP1[14]
VIN[0]A_FLD/
CAM_D[5]/
GP0[20]
GPMC_A[21]/
SPI[2]_D[0]/
GP1[16]
GP3[15]
VOUT[1]_FLD/
CAM_FLD/
CAM_WE/
GPMC_A[11]/
UART2_CTS/
GP0[28]
GPMC_A[22]/
SPI[2]_D[1]/
HDMI_CEC/
TIM4_IO/
GPMC_D[9]/
BTMODE[9]
GP1[17]
VOUT[1]_VSYNC/
EMAC[1]_MCRS/
VIN[1]A_FLD/
VIN[1]A_DE/
SPI[3]_D[0]/
VOUT[1]_R_CR[6]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[5]/
VIN[1]A_D[17]/
SPI[3]_D[1]/
VOUT[1]_R_CR[0]/
CAM_D[0]/
GPMC_A[8]/
UART4_RTS/
GP0[25]
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[9]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[5]/
VIN[1]A_D[6]/
I2C[3]_SDA/
GPMC_A[23]/
SPI[2]_SCLK/
HDMI_HPDET/
TIM5_IO/
GPMC_D[11]/
BTMODE[11]
GPMC_D[5]/
BTMODE[5]
GP3[16]
UART3_CTS/
GP2[30]
GP3[6]
GP1[18]
VOUT[1]_AVID/
EMAC[1]_MRXER/
VIN[1]A_CLK/
UART4_RTS/
TIM6_IO/
VOUT[1]_R_CR[9]/
EMAC[1]_MTXEN/
VIN[1]A_D[20]/
UART5_TXD/
GP3[19]
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[3]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[6]/
VIN[1]A_D[8]/
GPMC_D[10]/
BTMODE[10]
GPMC_D[8]/
BTMODE[8]
GPMC_D[1]/
BTMODE[1]
GPMC_D[15]/
BTMODE[15]
GP3[7]
GP2[31]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[8]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[7]/
VIN[1]A_D[19]/
UART5_RXD/
GP3[18]
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[4]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[7]/
VIN[1]A_D[9]/
GPMC_WAIT[0]/
GPMC_A[26]/
EDMA_EVT0/
GP1[31]
GPMC_D[3]/
BTMODE[3]
W
GP3[8]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[7]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[6]/
VIN[1]A_D[18]/
SPI[3]_D[0]/
GPMC_BE[1]/
GPMC_A[24]/
EDMA_EVT1/
TIM7_IO/
GPMC_A[17]/
GP2[6]
GPMC_D[14]/
BTMODE[14]
GPMC_D[7]/
BTMODE[7]
GPMC_D[4]/
BTMODE[4]
GPMC_D[2]/
BTMODE[2]
V
GP3[17]
GP1[30]
GPMC_BE[0]_CLE/
GPMC_A[25]/
EDMA_EVT2/
TIM6_IO/
GPMC_D[13]/
BTMODE[13]
GPMC_D[12]/
BTMODE[12]
GPMC_D[6]/
BTMODE[6]
GPMC_D[0]/
BTMODE[0]
DVDD
GPMC_WE
U
GP1[29]
EMAC[0]_MRXD[4]/
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[3]/
GPMC_A[1]/
GPMC_CS[0]/
GP1[23]
VSS
GPMC_OE_RE
T
UART5_TXD
SD2_DAT[4]/
GPMC_A[27]/
GPMC_A[23]/
GPMC_CS[7]/
EDMA_EVT0/
TIM7_IO/
GPMC_CLK/
GPMC_CS[5]/
GPMC_WAIT[1]/
CLKOUT1/
EDMA_EVT3/
TIM4_IO/
GP1[27]
EMAC[0]_MRXD[2]/
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[1]/
VIN[1]B_D[7]/
EMAC[0]_RMTXEN/
GP3[30]
EMAC[0]_MCRS/
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[2]/
VIN[1]B_D[2]/
EMAC[0]_RMRXD[1]/
GP3[25]
VSS
22
RSV14
RSV15
R
GP1[22]
23
24
25
26
27
28
E
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
Figure 3-8. Pin Map H
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
29
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
3.2 Terminal Functions
The terminal functions tables identify the external signal names and their pin multiplexing, the associated
pin (ball) numbers along with the mechanical package designator, the pin type (e.g., I, O, Z, S, A, or
GND), whether the pin has any internal pullup or pulldown resistors (e.g., IPU, IPD, or DIS), the supply
voltage source, and describe the a function(s) of the pin. The MUXED column in the tables also identifies
all peripheral pin functions multiplexed on a pin, the pin control register (PINCNTLx) that controls which
peripheral pin function is selected for that particular pin, and indicates the state driven on the peripheral
input (logic "0", logic "1", or "PIN" level) when the peripheral pin function is not selected (i.e., the
de-selected input state [DSIS]), and the Multi-Muxed [MM] option for that peripheral pin function). For
more detailed information on device configuration, boot mode order, peripheral selection, and
multiplexed/shared pin control, etc., see Section 4, Device Configurations of this data manual.
30
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
3.2.1 Boot Configuration
Table 3-1. Boot Configuration Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
BOOT
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
GPMC CS0 default GPMC_Wait enable input. This pin is
multiplexed between ARM Cortex-A8 boot mode and
General-Purpose Memory Controller (GPMC) peripheral
functions. At reset, BTMODE[15] is sampled to determine
the GPMC CS0 Wait enable:
GPMC
PINCNTL104
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_D[15]/
BTMODE[15]
DIS
DVDD_GPMC
Y25
V24
U23
I
I
I
•
•
0 = Wait disabled
1 = Wait enabled
After reset, this pin functions as GPMC multiplexed
data/address pin 15 (GPMC_D[15]).
GPMC
PINCNTL103
DSIS: PIN
GPMC CS0 default Address/Data multiplexing mode
input. These pins are multiplexed between ARM
Cortex-A8 boot mode and General-Purpose Memory
Controller (GPMC) peripheral functions. At reset,
BTMODE[14:13] are sampled to determine the GPMC
CS0 Address/Data multiplexing:
GPMC_D[14]/
BTMODE[14]
DIS
DVDD_GPMC
•
•
•
•
00 = Not muxed
01 = A/A/D muxed
10 = A/D muxed
11 = Reserved
GPMC
PINCNTL102
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_D[13]/
BTMODE[13]
DIS
DVDD_GPMC
After reset, this pin functions as GPMC multiplexed
data/address pins 14 through 13 (GPMC_D[14:13]).
GPMC CS0 default Data Bus Width input. This pin is
multiplexed between ARM Cortex-A8 boot mode and
General-Purpose Memory Controller (GPMC) peripheral
functions. At reset, BTMODE[12] is sampled to determine
the GPMC CS0 bus width:
GPMC
PINCNTL101
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_D[12]/
BTMODE[12]
DIS
DVDD_GPMC
U24
I
•
•
0 = 8-bit data bus
1 = 16-bit data bus
After reset, this pin functions as GPMC multiplexed
data/address pin 12 (GPMC_D[12]).
RSTOUT_WD_OUT Configuration. This pin is
multiplexed between ARM Cortex-A8 boot mode and
General-Purpose Memory Controller (GPMC) peripheral
functions. At reset, BTMODE[11] is sampled to determine
the function of the RSTOUT_WD_OUT pin:
GPMC
PINCNTL100
DSIS: PIN
•
0 = RSTOUT is asserted when a Watchdog Timer
reset, POR, RESET, or Emulation/Software-Global
Cold/Warm reset occurs
GPMC_D[11]/
BTMODE[11]
DIS
DVDD_GPMC
AA27
I
•
1 = RSTOUT_WD_OUT is asserted only when a
Watchdog Timer reset occurs
After reset, this pin functions as GPMC multiplexed
data/address pin 11 (GPMC_D[11]).
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull during and after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
31
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-1. Boot Configuration Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
XIP (NOR) on GPMC Configuration. This pin is
multiplexed between ARM Cortex-A8 boot mode and
General-Purpose Memory Controller (GPMC) peripheral
functions. At reset, when the XIP (MUX0), XIP (MUX1),
XIP w/ WAiT (MUX0) or XIP w/ WAiT (MUX1) bootmode
is selected (see Table 4-1), BTMODE[10] is sampled to
select between GPMC pin muxing options A or B shown
in Table 4-2, XIP (on GPMC) Boot Options [Muxed or
Non-Muxed].
GPMC
PINCNTL99
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_D[10]/
BTMODE[10]
DIS
DVDD_GPMC
Y26
I
•
•
0 = GPMC Option A
1 = GPMC Option B
After reset, this pin functions as GPMC multiplexed
data/address pin 10 (GPMC_D[10]).
GPMC
PINCNTL98
DSIS: PIN
Ethernet PHY Configuration. These pins are multiplexed
between ARM Cortex-A8 boot mode and
GPMC_D[9]/
BTMODE[9]
DIS
DVDD_GPMC
AB28
I
General-Purpose Memory Controller (GPMC) peripheral
functions. At reset, when EMAC bootmode is selected
(see Table 4-1), BTMODE[9:8] pins are sampled to
determine the function of the Ethernet PHY Mode
selection.
•
•
•
•
00 = MII (GMII)
01 = RMII
GPMC
PINCNTL97
DSIS: PIN
10 = RGMII
GPMC_D[8]/
BTMODE[8]
DIS
DVDD_GPMC
Y27
I
11 = Reserved
For more detailed information on the EMAC PHY boot
modes and the EMAC pin functions selected, see
Section 4.2.6, Ethernet PHY Mode Selection.
After reset, these pins function as GPMC multiplexed
data/address pins 9 and 8 (GPMC_D[9] and
GPMC_D[8]).
GPMC
PINCNTL96
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_D[7]/
BTMODE[7]
DIS
DVDD_GPMC
Reserved Boot Pins. These pins are multiplexed between
ARM Cortex-A8 boot mode and General-Purpose
Memory Controller (GPMC) peripheral functions.
V25
U25
AA28
V26
W27
V27
Y28
U26
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GPMC
PINCNTL95
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_D[6]/
BTMODE[6]
DIS
DVDD_GPMC
For proper device operation at reset, these pins should
be externally pulled low.
GPMC
PINCNTL94
DSIS: PIN
After reset, these pins function as GPMC multiplexed
data/address pins 10 through 5 (GPMC_D[7:5]).
GPMC_D[5]/
BTMODE[5]
DIS
DVDD_GPMC
GPMC
PINCNTL93
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_D[4]/
BTMODE[4]
DIS
DVDD_GPMC
ARM Cortex-A8 Boot Mode Configuration Bits. These
pins are multiplexed between ARM Cortex-A8 boot mode
and the General-Purpose Memory Controller (GPMC)
peripheral functions.
GPMC
PINCNTL92
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_D[3]/
BTMODE[3]
DIS
DVDD_GPMC
At reset, the boot mode inputs BTMODE[4:0] are
sampled to determine the ARM boot configuration. For
more details on the types of boot modes supported, see
Section 4.2, Boot Modes, of this document, along with
the AM387x ROM Code Memory and Peripheral Booting
chapter of the AM387x Sitara™ ARM Microprocessors
(MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number:
SPRUGZ7).
GPMC
PINCNTL91
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_D[2]/
BTMODE[2]
DIS
DVDD_GPMC
GPMC
PINCNTL90
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_D[1]/
BTMODE[1]
DIS
DVDD_GPMC
GPMC
PINCNTL89
DSIS: PIN
After reset, these pins function as GPMC multiplexed
data/address pins 4 through 0 (GPMC_D[4:0]).
GPMC_D[0]/
BTMODE[0]
DIS
DVDD_GPMC
32
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
3.2.2 Camera Interface (I/F)
Table 3-2. Camera I/F Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
CAMERA I/F
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
VOUT[0]_FLD/
CAM_PCLK/
GPMC_A[12]/
UART2_RTS/
GP2[2]
VOUT[0], GPMC, UART2,
GP2
IPD
DVDD_C
AF18
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Camera Pixel Clock.
PINCNTL175
DSIS: 0
VIN[0]A_D[23]/
CAM_D[15]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXEN/
SPI[3]_D[0]/
VIN[0]A, EMAC[1], SPI[3],
GP0
IPD
DVDD_C
AC16
AC21
AE18
PINCNTL163
DSIS: PIN
GP0[17]
VIN[0]A_D[22]/
CAM_D[14]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXD[1]/
SPI[3]_D[1]/
VIN[0]A, EMAC[1]_RM,
SPI[3], GP0
IPD
DVDD_C
PINCNTL162
DSIS: PIN
GP0[16]
VIN[0]A_D[21]/
CAM_D[13]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXD[0]/
SPI[3]_SCLK/
GP0[15]
VIN[0]A, EMAC[1]_RM,
SPI[3], GP0
IPD
DVDD_C
PINCNTL161
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[20]/
CAM_D[12]/
EMAC[1]_RMCRSDV/ AC17
SPI[3]_SCS[0]/
GP0[14]
VIN[0]A, EMAC[1]_RM,
SPI[3], GP0
IPD
DVDD_C
PINCNTL160
DSIS: PIN
Camera data inputs
VIN[0]A_D[19]/
CAM_D[11]/
EMAC[1]_RMRXD[0]/
I2C[3]_SDA/
GP0[13]
VIN[0]A, EMAC[1]_RM,
I2C[3], GP0
IPU
DVDD_C
AF21
AF20
PINCNTL159
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[18]/
CAM_D[10]/
EMAC[1]_RMRXD[1]/
I2C[3]_SCL/
VIN[0]A, EMAC[1]_RM,
I2C[3], GP0
IPU
DVDD_C
PINCNTL158
DSIS: PIN
GP0[12]
VIN[0]A_D[17]/
CAM_D[9]/
EMAC[1]_RMRXER/
GP0[11]
VIN[0]A, EMAC[1]_RM,
GP0
IPD
DVDD_C
AB21
AA21
I
I
PINCNTL157
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[16]/
CAM_D[8]/
I2C[2]_SCL/
GP0[10]
VIN[0]A, I2C[2], GP0
PINCNTL156
IPU
DVDD_C
DSIS: PIN
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
33
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-2. Camera I/F Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
VIN[0]A_DE/
CAM_D[7]/
GP0[18]
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
VIN[0]A, GP0
PINCNTL164
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_C
AB17
I
VIN[0]B_DE/
CAM_D[6]/
GP0[19]
VIN[0]A, GP0
PINCNTL165
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_C
AC15
AC22
AD17
I
I
I
VIN[0]A_FLD/
CAM_D[5]/
GP0[20]
VIN[0]A, GP0
PINCNTL166
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_C
VIN[0]B_FLD/
CAM_D[4]/
GP0[21]
VIN[0]B, GP0
PINCNTL167
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_C
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[1]/
CAM_D[3]/
GPMC_A[5]/
UART4_RXD/
GP0[22]
VOUT[1], GPMC, UART4,
GP0
IPU
DVDD_C
AD18
AC18
AC19
AA22
AE23
AD23
I
PINCNTL168
DSIS: PIN
Camera data inputs
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[0]/
CAM_D[2]/
GPMC_A[6]/
UART4_TXD/
GP0[23]
VOUT[1], GPMC, UART4,
GP0
IPD
DVDD_C
I
I
PINCNTL169
DSIS: PIN
VOUT[1]_R_CR[1]/
CAM_D[1]/
GPMC_A[7]/
UART4_CTS/
GP0[24]
VOUT[1], GPMC, UART4,
GP0
IPD
DVDD_C
PINCNTL170
DSIS: PIN
VOUT[1]_R_CR[0]/
CAM_D[0]/
GPMC_A[8]/
UART4_RTS/
GP0[25]
VOUT[1], GPMC, UART4,
GP0
IPD
DVDD_C
I
PINCNTL171
DSIS: PIN
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[1]/
CAM_HS/
GPMC_A[9]/
UART2_RXD/
GP0[26]
VOUT[1], GPMC, UART2,
GP0
IPD
DVDD_C
I/O
I/O
Camera Horizontal Synchronization
Camera Vertical Synchronization
PINCNTL172
DSIS: 0
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[0]/
CAM_VS/
GPMC_A[10]/
UART2_TXD/
GP0[27]
VOUT[1], GPMC, UART2,
GP0
IPU
DVDD_C
PINCNTL173
DSIS: 0
VIN[0]A_D[13]_BD[5]/
CAM_RESET/
GP2[18]
VIN[0]AB, GP2
PINCNTL153
DSIS: 0
IPD
DVDD
AF17
AH17
I/O
I
Camera Reset. Used for Strobe Synchronization
VIN[0]AB. GP2
PINCNTL151
DSIS: 0
VIN[0]A_D[11]_BD[3]/
CAM_WE/
GP2[16]
IPD
DVDD
MM: MUX1
VOUT[1]_FLD/
CAM_FLD/
CAM_WE/
GPMC_A[11]/
UART2_CTS/
GP0[28]
Camera Write Enable
VOUT[1], CAMERA_I/F,
GPMC, UART2, GP0
PINCNTL174
IPD
DVDD_C
AB23
AB23
I
DSIS: 0
MM: MUX0
VOUT[1]_FLD/
CAM_FLD/
CAM_WE/
GPMC_A[11]/
UART2_CTS/
GP0[28]
VOUT[1], CAMERA_I/F,
GPMC, UART2, GP0
PINCNTL174
IPD
DVDD_C
I/O
Camera Field Identification input
DSIS: 0
34
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-2. Camera I/F Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
VIN[0]A_D[14]_BD[6]/
CAM_STROBE/
GP2[19]
VIN[0]AB, GP2
PINCNTL154
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD
AC12
O
Camera Flash Strobe Control Signal
VIN[0]A_D[15]_BD[7]/
CAM_SHUTTER/
GP2[20]
VIN[0]AB, GP2
PINCNTL155
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD
AC14
O
Camera Mechanical Shutter Control Signal
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
35
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
3.2.3 Controller Area Network (DCAN) Modules (DCAN0, DCAN1)
Table 3-3. DCAN Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DCAN0
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
AG6
AH6
DCAN0_RX/
UART2_RXD/
I2C[3]_SCL/
GP1[1]
UART2, I2C[3], GP1
PINCNTL69
IPU
DVDD
I/O
I/O
DCAN0 receive data pin.
DSIS: 1
DCAN0_TX/
UART2_TXD/
I2C[3]_SDA/
GP1[0]
UART2, I2C[3], GP1
PINCNTL68
IPU
DVDD
DCAN0 transmit data pin.
DSIS: 1
DCAN1
UART0_RTS/
UART4_TXD/
DCAN1_RX/
SPI[1]_SCS[2]/
SD2_SDCD
UART0, UART4, SPI[1],
SD2
IPU
DVDD
AF5
AE6
I/O
I/O
DCAN1 receive data pin.
DCAN1 transmit data pin.
PINCNTL73
DSIS: 1
UART0_CTS/
UART4_RXD/
DCAN1_TX/
SPI[1]_SCS[3]/
SD0_SDCD
UART0, UART4, SPI[1],
SD0
IPU
DVDD
PINCNTL72
DSIS: 1
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
36
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
3.2.4 LPDDR/DDR2/DDR3 Memory Controller
Table 3-4. LPDDR/DDR2/DDR3 Memory Controller 0 Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
DESCRIPTION
NO.
LPDDR/DDR2/DDR3 Memory Controller 0 (DDR[0])
DDR[0] Clock
IPD/DIS
DDR[0]_CLK
B16
O
The internal pulldown (IPD) is enabled for this pin when the device is
in reset and the IPD is disabled (DIS) when reset is released.
DVDD_DDR[0]
DDR[0] Negative Clock
The internal pullup (IPU) is enabled for this pin when the device is in
reset and the IPU is disabled (DIS) when reset is released.
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[0]
DDR[0]_CLK
DDR[0]_CKE
DDR[0]_WE
A16
H18
C17
O
O
O
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
DDR[0] Clock Enable
DDR[0] Write Enable
The internal pullup (IPU) is enabled for this pin when the device is in
reset and the IPU is disabled (DIS) when reset is released.
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[0]
DDR[0] Chip Select 0
The internal pullup (IPU) is enabled for this pin when the device is in
reset and the IPU is disabled (DIS) when reset is released.
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[0]
DDR[0]_CS[0]
DDR[0]_CS[1]
DDR[0]_RAS
DDR[0]_CAS
F18
G17
B18
C18
O
O
O
O
DDR[0] Chip Select 1
The internal pullup (IPU) is enabled for this pin when the device is in
reset and the IPU is disabled (DIS) when reset is released.
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[0]
DDR[0] Row Address Strobe output
The internal pullup (IPU) is enabled for this pin when the device is in
reset and the IPU is disabled (DIS) when reset is released.
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[0]
DDR[0] Column Address Strobe output
The internal pullup (IPU) is enabled for this pin when the device is in
reset and the IPU is disabled (DIS) when reset is released.
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPU
DVDD_DDR[0]
DDR[0]_DQM[3]
DDR[0]_DQM[2]
DDR[0]_DQM[1]
DDR[0]_DQM[0]
DDR[0]_DQS[3]
DDR[0]_DQS[2]
DDR[0]_DQS[1]
DDR[0]_DQS[0]
DDR[0]_DQS[3]
DDR[0]_DQS[2]
DDR[0]_DQS[1]
DDR[0]_DQS[0]
F20
C24
B28
E28
B21
B23
B26
D28
A21
A23
A26
D27
O
DDR[0] Data Mask outputs
DDR[0]_DQM[3]: For upper byte data bus DDR[0]_D[31:24]
DDR[0]_DQM[2]: For DDR[0]_D[23:16]
DDR[0]_DQM[1]: For DDR[0]_D[15:8]
DDR[0]_DQM[0]: For lower byte data bus DDR[0]_D[7:0]
IPU
DVDD_DDR[0]
O
IPU
DVDD_DDR[0]
O
The internal pullup (IPU) is enabled for these pins when the device is
in reset and switches to an IPD enabled when reset is released.
IPU
DVDD_DDR[0]
O
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
Data strobe input/outputs for each byte of the 32-bit data bus. They
are outputs to the DDR[0] memory when writing and inputs when
reading. They are used to synchronize the data transfers.
DDR[0]_DQS[3]: For upper byte data bus DDR[0]_D[31:24]
DDR[0]_DQS[2]: For DDR[0]_D[23:16]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
DDR[0]_DQS[1]: For DDR[0]_D[15:8]
DDR[0]_DQS[0]: For lower byte data bus DDR[0]_D[7:0]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPU
DVDD_DDR[0]
Complimentary data strobe input/outputs for each byte of the 32-bit
data bus. They are outputs to the DDR[0] memory when writing and
inputs when reading. They are used to synchronize the data
transfers.
DDR[0]_DQS[3]: For upper byte data bus DDR[0]_D[31:24]
DDR[0]_DQS[2]: For DDR[0]_D[23:16]
IPU
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPU
DVDD_DDR[0]
DDR[0]_DQS[1]: For DDR[0]_D[15:8]
DDR[0]_DQS[0]: For lower byte data bus DDR[0]_D[7:0]
IPU
DVDD_DDR[0]
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull during and after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
37
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-4. LPDDR/DDR2/DDR3 Memory Controller 0 Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
DESCRIPTION
NO.
DDR[0] On-Die Termination for Chip Select 0.
The internal pulldown (IPD) is enabled for this pin when the device is
in reset and the IPD is disabled (DIS) when reset is released.
IPD/DIS
DVDD_DDR[0]
DDR[0]_ODT[0]
DDR[0]_ODT[1]
G18
O
DDR[0] On-Die Termination for Chip Select 1.
The internal pulldown (IPD) is enabled for this pin when the device is
in reset and the IPD is disabled (DIS) when reset is released.
IPD/DIS
DVDD_DDR[0]
H19
G19
O
O
DDR[0] Reset output
IPD/DIS
DVDD_DDR[0]
DDR[0]_RST
The internal pulldown (IPD) is enabled for this pin when the device is
in reset and the IPD is disabled (DIS) when reset is released.
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[0]
DDR[0]_BA[2]
DDR[0]_BA[1]
DDR[0]_BA[0]
DDR[0]_A[14]
DDR[0]_A[13]
DDR[0]_A[12]
DDR[0]_A[11]
DDR[0]_A[10]
DDR[0]_A[9]
DDR[0]_A[8]
DDR[0]_A[7]
DDR[0]_A[6]
DDR[0]_A[5]
DDR[0]_A[4]
DDR[0]_A[3]
DDR[0]_A[2]
DDR[0]_A[1]
DDR[0]_A[0]
A18
A20
F15
F16
F17
E17
D17
A19
C15
B15
E18
A15
B17
D15
E15
D18
F19
B19
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
DDR[0] Bank Address outputs
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[0]
The internal pullup (IPU) is enabled for these pins when the device is
in reset and the IPU is disabled (DIS) when reset is released.
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[0]
DDR[0] Address Bus
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[0]
The internal pullup (IPU) is enabled for these pins when the device is
in reset and the IPU is disabled (DIS) when reset is released.
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[0]
38
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-4. LPDDR/DDR2/DDR3 Memory Controller 0 Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
DESCRIPTION
NO.
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
DDR[0]_D[31]
DDR[0]_D[30]
DDR[0]_D[29]
DDR[0]_D[28]
DDR[0]_D[27]
DDR[0]_D[26]
DDR[0]_D[25]
DDR[0]_D[24]
DDR[0]_D[23]
DDR[0]_D[22]
DDR[0]_D[21]
DDR[0]_D[20]
DDR[0]_D[19]
DDR[0]_D[18]
DDR[0]_D[17]
DDR[0]_D[16]
B20
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
D21
C21
C20
A22
G20
F21
H20
B22
C23
E23
D23
G21
H21
F22
B24
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
DDR[0] Data Bus
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
39
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-4. LPDDR/DDR2/DDR3 Memory Controller 0 Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
DESCRIPTION
NO.
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
DDR[0]_D[15]
A24
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
DDR[0]_D[14]
DDR[0]_D[13]
DDR[0]_D[12]
DDR[0]_D[11]
DDR[0]_D[10]
DDR[0]_D[9]
DDR[0]_D[8]
DDR[0]_D[7]
DDR[0]_D[6]
DDR[0]_D[5]
DDR[0]_D[4]
DDR[0]_D[3]
DDR[0]_D[2]
DDR[0]_D[1]
DDR[0]_D[0]
DDR[0]_VTP
A25
D24
B25
A27
C26
C25
C27
C28
D26
E25
F24
F25
E26
F26
E27
B27
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
DDR[0] Data Bus
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[0]
–
DDR VTP Compensation Resistor Connection
DVDD_DDR[0]
40
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-5. LPDDR/DDR2/DDR3 Memory Controller 1 Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
DESCRIPTION
NO.
LPDDR/DDR2/DDR3 Memory Controller 1 (DDR[1])
DDR[1] Clock
IPD/DIS
DDR[1]_CLK
B13
O
The internal pulldown (IPD) is enabled for this pin when the device is
in reset and the IPD is disabled (DIS) when reset is released.
DVDD_DDR[1]
DDR[1] Negative Clock
The internal pullup (IPU) is enabled for this pin when the device is in
reset and the IPU is disabled (DIS) when reset is released.
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[1]
DDR[1]_CLK
DDR[1]_CKE
DDR[1]_WE
A13
H11
E12
O
O
O
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
DDR[1] Clock Enable
DDR[1] Write Enable
The internal pullup (IPU) is enabled for this pin when the device is in
reset and the IPU is disabled (DIS) when reset is released.
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[1]
DDR[1] Chip Select 0
The internal pullup (IPU) is enabled for this pin when the device is in
reset and the IPU is disabled (DIS) when reset is released.
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[1]
DDR[1]_CS[0]
DDR[1]_CS[1]
DDR[1]_RAS
DDR[1]_CAS
G12
G11
C12
F13
O
O
O
O
DDR[1] Chip Select 1
The internal pullup (IPU) is enabled for this pin when the device is in
reset and the IPU is disabled (DIS) when reset is released.
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[1]
DDR[1] Row Address Strobe output
The internal pullup (IPU) is enabled for this pin when the device is in
reset and the IPU is disabled (DIS) when reset is released.
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[1]
DDR[1] Column Address Strobe output
The internal pullup (IPU) is enabled for this pin when the device is in
reset and the IPU is disabled (DIS) when reset is released.
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPU/IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
DDR[1]_DQM[3]
DDR[1]_DQM[2]
DDR[1]_DQM[1]
DDR[1]_DQM[0]
DDR[1]_DQS[3]
DDR[1]_DQS[2]
DDR[1]_DQS[1]
DDR[1]_DQS[0]
DDR[1]_DQS[3]
DDR[1]_DQS[2]
DDR[1]_DQS[1]
G9
G8
B2
F4
B8
A6
B3
D1
A8
B6
A3
O
O
DDR[1] Data Mask outputs
DDR[1]_DQM[3]: For upper byte data bus DDR[1]_D[31:24]
DDR[1]_DQM[2]: For DDR[1]_D[23:16]
DDR[1]_DQM[1]: For DDR[1]_D[15:8]
DDR[1]_DQM[0]: For lower byte data bus DDR[1]_D[7:0]
IPU/IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPU/IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
O
The internal pullup (IPU) is enabled for these pins when the device is
in reset and switches to an IPD enabled when reset is released.
IPU/IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
O
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
Data strobe input/outputs for each byte of the 32-bit data bus. They are
outputs to the DDR[1] memory when writing and inputs when reading.
They are used to synchronize the data transfers.
DDR[1]_DQS[3]: For upper byte data bus DDR[1]_D[31:24]
DDR[1]_DQS[2]: For DDR[1]_D[23:16]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
DDR[1]_DQS[1]: For DDR[1]_D[15:8]
DDR[1]_DQS[0]: For lower byte data bus DDR[1]_D[7:0]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPU/IPD
Complimentary data strobe input/outputs for each byte of the 32-bit
DVDD_DDR[1] data bus. They are outputs to the DDR[1] memory when writing and
inputs when reading. They are used to synchronize the data transfers.
IPU/IPD
DDR[1]_DQS[3]: For upper byte data bus DDR[1]_D[31:24]
DVDD_DDR[1]
DDR[1]_DQS[2]: For DDR[1]_D[23:16]
DDR[1]_DQS[1]: For DDR[1]_D[15:8]
DDR[1]_DQS[0]: For lower byte data bus DDR[1]_D[7:0]
IPU/IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPU/IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
The internal pullup (IPU) is enabled for these pins when the device is
in reset and switches to an IPD enabled when reset is released.
DDR[1]_DQS[0]
DDR[1]_ODT[0]
D2
I/O
O
DDR[1] On-Die Termination for Chip Select 0.
The internal pulldown (IPD) is enabled for this pin when the device is
in reset and the IPD is disabled (DIS) when reset is released.
IPD/DIS
DVDD_DDR[1]
H10
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull during and after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
41
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-5. LPDDR/DDR2/DDR3 Memory Controller 1 Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
DESCRIPTION
NO.
DDR[1] On-Die Termination for Chip Select 1.
The internal pulldown (IPD) is enabled for this pin when the device is
in reset and the IPD is disabled (DIS) when reset is released.
IPD/DIS
DVDD_DDR[1]
DDR[1]_ODT[1]
DDR[1]_RST
F11
O
DDR[1] Reset output.
The internal pulldown (IPD) is enabled for this pin when the device is
in reset and the IPD is disabled (DIS) when reset is released.
IPD/DIS
DVDD_DDR[1]
G10
O
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[1]
DDR[1]_BA[2]
DDR[1]_BA[1]
DDR[1]_BA[0]
DDR[1]_A[14]
DDR[1]_A[13]
DDR[1]_A[12]
DDR[1]_A[11]
DDR[1]_A[10]
DDR[1]_A[9]
DDR[1]_A[8]
DDR[1]_A[7]
DDR[1]_A[6]
DDR[1]_A[5]
DDR[1]_A[4]
DDR[1]_A[3]
DDR[1]_A[2]
DDR[1]_A[1]
DDR[1]_A[0]
D12
A10
F14
D11
E11
B10
A11
F12
C14
E14
A9
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
DDR[1] Bank Address outputs
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[1]
The internal pullup (IPU) is enabled for these pins when the device is
in reset and the IPU is disabled (DIS) when reset is released.
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[1]
DDR[1] Address Bus
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[1]
The internal pullup (IPU) is enabled for these pins when the device is
in reset and the IPU is disabled (DIS) when reset is released.
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[1]
D14
B12
B14
A14
C11
F10
B11
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPU/DIS
DVDD_DDR[1]
42
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-5. LPDDR/DDR2/DDR3 Memory Controller 1 Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
DESCRIPTION
NO.
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
DDR[1]_D[31]
DDR[1]_D[30]
DDR[1]_D[29]
DDR[1]_D[28]
DDR[1]_D[27]
DDR[1]_D[26]
DDR[1]_D[25]
DDR[1]_D[24]
DDR[1]_D[23]
DDR[1]_D[22]
DDR[1]_D[21]
DDR[1]_D[20]
DDR[1]_D[19]
DDR[1]_D[18]
DDR[1]_D[17]
DDR[1]_D[16]
B9
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
C8
D8
C9
A7
F8
H9
F9
B7
D6
E6
C6
B5
C5
F7
H8
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
DDR[1] Data Bus
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
43
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-5. LPDDR/DDR2/DDR3 Memory Controller 1 Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
DESCRIPTION
NO.
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
DDR[1]_D[15]
A5
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
DDR[1]_D[14]
DDR[1]_D[13]
DDR[1]_D[12]
DDR[1]_D[11]
DDR[1]_D[10]
DDR[1]_D[9]
DDR[1]_D[8]
DDR[1]_D[7]
DDR[1]_D[6]
DDR[1]_D[5]
DDR[1]_D[4]
DDR[1]_D[3]
DDR[1]_D[2]
DDR[1]_D[1]
DDR[1]_D[0]
DDR[1]_VTP
A4
C4
B4
A2
C3
D5
C2
C1
D3
E4
F5
E1
E2
F3
E3
B1
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
DDR[1] Data Bus
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
IPD
DVDD_DDR[1]
–
DDR[1] VTP Compensation Resistor Connection
DVDD_DDR[1]
44
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
3.2.5 EDMA
Table 3-6. EDMA Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
EDMA
DESCRIPTION
NO.
AUD_CLKIN1/
MCA[0]_AXR[8]/
MCA[1]_AHCLKX/
MCA[4]_AHCLKX/
EDMA_EVT3/
TIM2_IO/
AUD_CLKIN1,
MCA[0], MCA[1],
MCA[4], TIMER2,
GP0
PINCNTL15
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
R5
I
GP0[8]
MM: MUX1
External EDMA Event 3
GPMC_CLK/
GPMC_CS[5]/
GPMC_WAIT[1]/
CLKOUT1/
EDMA_EVT3/
TIM4_IO/
GPMC, CLKOUT1,
TIMER4, GP1
PINCNTL127
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
R26
I
I
MM: MUX0
GP1[27]
AUD_CLKIN2/
MCA[0]_AXR[9]/
MCA[2]_AHCLKX/
MCA[5]_AHCLKX/
EDMA_EVT2/
TIM3_IO/
AUD_CLKIN2,
MCA[0], MCA[2].
MCA[5], TIMER3,
GP0
PINCNTL16
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
H1
External EDMA Event 2
GP0[9]
MM: MUX1
GPMC_BE[0]_CLE/
GPMC_A[25]/
EDMA_EVT2/
TIM6_IO/
GPMC, TIMER6,
GP1
PINCNTL131
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX0
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
U27
AE5
V28
I
I
I
GP1[29]
SPI[0]_SCS[1]/
SD1_SDCD/
SATA_ACT0_LED/
EDMA_EVT1/
TIM4_IO/
SPI[0], SD1,
SATA, TIMER4,
GP1
PINCNTL80
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD
GP1[6]
MM: MUX1
External EDMA Event 1
GPMC_BE[1]/
GPMC_A[24]/
EDMA_EVT1/
TIM7_IO/
GPMC, TIMER7,
GP1
PINCNTL132
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX0
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
GP1[30]
SD2_DAT[4]/
GPMC_A[27]/
GPMC_A[23]/
GPMC_CS[7]/
EDMA_EVT0/
TIM7_IO/
SD2, GPMC,
TIMER7, GP1
PINCNTL116
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
R24
I
I
MM: MUX1
External EDMA Event 0
GP1[22]
GPMC_WAIT[0]/
GPMC_A[26]/
EDMA_EVT0/
GP1[31]
GPMC, GP1
PINCNTL133
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
W28
MM: MUX0
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and the , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
45
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
3.2.6 EMAC [(R)(G)MII Modes] and MDIO
Table 3-7. EMAC[0] Terminal Functions [(R)(G)MII]
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
EMAC[0] (G)MII Mode
TBD
These pin functions are available only when GMII or MII modes are selected.
EMAC[0]_MCOL/
EMAC[0]_RGRXCTL/
VIN[1]B_D[1]/
EMAC[0]_RMRXD[0]/
GP3[24]
EMAC[0],
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
VIN[1]B, GP3
PINCNTL236
DSIS: 0
L23
I
[G]MII Collision Detect (Sense) input
[G]MII Carrier Sense input
EMAC[0]_MCRS/
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[2]/
VIN[1]B_D[2]/
EMAC[0]_RMRXD[1]/
GP3[25]
EMAC[0],
VIN[1]B, GP3
PINCNTL237
DSIS: 0
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
R25
K23
I
EMAC[0]_GMTCLK/
EMAC[1]_RGRXC/
GPMC_A[6]/
EMAC[1],
GPMC, SPI[2]
PINCNTL249
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
O
GMII Source Asynchronous Transmit Clock
[G]MII Receive Clock
SPI[2]_D[1]
EMAC[0]_MRCLK/
EMAC[0]_RGTXC/
VIN[1]B_D[4]/
EMAC[0]_RMCRSDV/
SPI[3]_SCS[2]/
GP3[27]
EMAC[0],
VIN[1]B, SPI[3],
GP3
PINCNTL239
DSIS: 0
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
H27
I
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
46
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-7. EMAC[0] Terminal Functions [(R)(G)MII] (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
EMAC[0]_MRXD[7]/
EMAC[0]_RGTXD[1]/
GPMC_A[4]/
EMAC[0],
GPMC, SPI[2]
PINCNTL247
DSIS: PIN
G27
SPI[2]_SCS[3]
EMAC[0]_MRXD[6]/
EMAC[0]_RGTXD[2]/
GPMC_A[3]/
EMAC[0],
GPMC, UART5
PINCNTL246
DSIS: PIN
F28
H26
T23
UART5_RTS
EMAC[0]_MRXD[5]/
EMAC[0]_RGTXD[3]/
GPMC_A[2]/
EMAC[0],
GPMC, UART5
PINCNTL245
DSIS: PIN
UART5_CTS
EMAC[0]_MRXD[4]/
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[3]/
GPMC_A[1]/
EMAC[0],
GPMC, UART5
PINCNTL244
DSIS: PIN
UART5_TXD
EMAC[0]_MRXD[3]/
EMAC[1]_RGRXCTL/
GPMC_A[27]/
GPMC_A[26]/
GPMC_A[0]/
[G]MII Receive Data [7:0]. For 1000 EMAC GMII
operation, EMAC[0]_RXD[7:0] are used. For 10/100
EMAC MII operation, only EMAC[0]_RXD[3:0] are
used.
EMAC[1],
GPMC, UART5
PINCNTL243
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
I
J25
UART5_RXD
EMAC[0]_MRXD[2]/
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[1]/
VIN[1]B_D[7]/
EMAC[0]_RMTXEN/
GP3[30]
EMAC[0],
VIN[1]B, GP3
PINCNTL242
DSIS: PIN
R23
P23
EMAC[0]_MRXD[1]/
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[0]/
VIN[1]B_D[6]/
EMAC[0]_RMTXD[1]/
GP3[29]
EMAC[0],
VIN[1]B, GP3
PINCNTL241
DSIS: PIN
EMAC[0]_MRXD[0]/
EMAC[0]_RGTXD[0]/
VIN[1]B_D[5]/
EMAC[0]_RMTXD[0]/
GP3[28]
EMAC[0],
VIN[1]B, GP3
PINCNTL240
DSIS: PIN
G28
K22
J26
EMAC[0]_MRXDV/
EMAC[1]_RGRXD[1]/
GPMC_A[5]/
EMAC[1],
GPMC, SPI[2]
PINCNTL248
DSIS: 0
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
I
I
[G]MII Receive Data Valid input
[G]MII Receive Data Error input
SPI[2]_SCLK
EMAC[0]_MRXER/
EMAC[0]_RGTXCTL/
VIN[1]B_D[3]/
EMAC[0]_RMRXER/
GP3[26]
EMAC[0],
VIN[1]B, GP3
PINCNTL238
DSIS: 0
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
EMAC[0]_MTCLK/
EMAC[0]_RGRXC/
VIN[1]B_D[0]/
SPI[3]_SCS[3]/
I2C[2]_SDA/
EMAC[0],
VIN[1]B, SPI[3],
I2C[2], GP3
PINCNTL235
DSIS: 0
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
L24
I
[G]MII Transmit Clock input
GP3[23]
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
47
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-7. EMAC[0] Terminal Functions [(R)(G)MII] (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
EMAC[0]_MTXD[7]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXD[3]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXD[1]/
GPMC_A[14]/
EMAC[1],
GPMC, UART1
PINCNTL257
DSIS: N/A
H24
UART1_CTS
EMAC[0]_MTXD[6]/
EMAC[1]_RGRXD[0]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXD[0]/
GPMC_A[13]/
EMAC[1],
GPMC, UART1
PINCNTL256
DSIS: N/A
J22
F27
G23
H23
H22
UART1_TXD
EMAC[0]_MTXD[5]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXC/
EMAC[1]_RMCRSDV/
GPMC_A[12]/
EMAC[1],
GPMC, UART1
PINCNTL255
DSIS: N/A
UART1_RXD
EMAC[0]_MTXD[4]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXD[2]/
EMAC[1]_RMRXER/
GPMC_A[11]/
EMAC[1],
GPMC, UART4
PINCNTL254
DSIS: N/A
[G]MII Transmit Data [7:0]. For 1000 EMAC GMII
operation, EMAC[0]_TXD[7:0] are used. For 10/100
EMAC MII operation, only EMAC[0]_TXD[3:0] are
used.
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
O
UART4_RTS
EMAC[0]_MTXD[3]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXD[0]/
EMAC[1]_RMRXD[1]/
GPMC_A[10]/
EMAC[1],
GPMC, UART4
PINCNTL253
DSIS: N/A
UART4_CTS
EMAC[0]_MTXD[2]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXCTL/
EMAC[1]_RMRXD[0]/
GPMC_A[9]/
EMAC[1],
GPMC, UART4
PINCNTL252
DSIS: N/A
UART4_TXD
EMAC[0]_MTXD[1]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXD[1]/
GPMC_A[8]/
EMAC[1],
GPMC, UART4
PINCNTL251
DSIS: N/A
H25
J24
UART4_RXD
EMAC[0]_MTXD[0]/
EMAC[1]_RGRXD[3]/
GPMC_A[7]/
EMAC[1],
GPMC, UART4
PINCNTL250
DSIS: N/A
SPI[2]_D[0]
EMAC[0]_MTXEN/
EMAC[1]_RGRXD[2]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXEN/
GPMC_A[15]/
EMAC[1],
GPMC, UART4
PINCNTL258
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
J23
O
[G]MII Transmit Data Enable output
UART1_RTS
EMAC[0] RMII Mode
TBD
These pin functions are available only when RMII mode is selected.
RMII Reference Clock (EMAC[0] and EMAC[1] RMII
mode)
Regardless of EMAC[0] RMII Mode, the GMII_EN bit
TIMER2, GP1 in the MACCONTROL register, of the Control
EMAC_RMREFCLK/
TIM2_IO/
GP1[10]
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
J27
I/O
PINCNTL232
DSIS: PIN
Module, configures the RMREFCLK pin function as
an INPUT or OUTPUT clock reference. During RMII
ROM Boot, the RMREFCLK pin function is
configured as an OUTPUT clock reference (driving
50 MHz).
EMAC[0]_MRCLK/
EMAC[0]_RGTXC/
VIN[1]B_D[4]/
EMAC[0]_RMCRSDV/
SPI[3]_SCS[2]/
GP3[27]
EMAC[0],
VIN[1]B, SPI[3],
GP3
PINCNTL239
DSIS: 0
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
H27
I
RMII Carrier Sense input
48
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-7. EMAC[0] Terminal Functions [(R)(G)MII] (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
EMAC[0]_MCRS/
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[2]/
VIN[1]B_D[2]/
EMAC[0]_RMRXD[1]/
GP3[25]
EMAC[0],
VIN[1]B, SPI[3],
GPI3
PINCNTL237
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
R25
I
RMII Receive Data [1:0]. For 10/100 EMAC RMII
operation, EMAC[0]_RMRXD[1:0] are used.
EMAC[0]_MCOL/
EMAC[0]_RGRXCTL/
VIN[1]B_D[1]/
EMAC[0]_RMRXD[0]/
GP3[24]
EMAC[0],
VIN[1]B, GP3
PINCNTL236
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
L23
J26
I
EMAC[0]_MRXER/
EMAC[0]_RGTXCTL/
VIN[1]B_D[3]/
EMAC[0]_RMRXER/
GP3[26]
EMAC[0],
VIN[1]B, GP3
PINCNTL238
DSIS: 0
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
I
RMII Receive Data Error input
EMAC[0]_MRXD[1]/
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[0]/
VIN[1]B_D[6]/
EMAC[0]_RMTXD[1]/
GP3[29]
EMAC[0],
VIN[1]B, GP3
PINCNTL241
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
P23
G28
R23
O
O
O
RMII Transmit Data [7:0]. For 10/100 EMAC RMII
operation, EMAC[0]_RMTXD[1:0] are used.
EMAC[0]_MRXD[0]/
EMAC[0]_RGTXD[0]/
VIN[1]B_D[5]/
EMAC[0]_RMTXD[0]/
GP3[28]
EMAC[0],
VIN[1]B, GP3
PINCNTL240
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
EMAC[0]_MRXD[2]/
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[1]/
VIN[1]B_D[7]/
EMAC[0]_RMTXEN/
GP3[30]
EMAC[0],
VIN[1]B, GP3
PINCNTL242
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
RMII Transmit Data Enable output
EMAC[0] RGMII Mode
TBD
These pin functions are available only when RGMII mode is selected.
EMAC[0]_MTCLK/
EMAC[0]_RGRXC/
VIN[1]B_D[0]/
SPI[3]_SCS[3]/
I2C[2]_SDA/
GP3[23]
EMAC[0],
VIN[1]B, SPI[3],
I2C[2], GP3
PINCNTL235
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
L24
L23
I
I
RGMII Receive Clock
RGMII Receive Control
EMAC[0]_MCOL/
EMAC[0]_RGRXCTL/
VIN[1]B_D[1]/
EMAC[0]_RMRXD[0]/
GP3[24]
EMAC[0],
VIN[1]B, GP3
PINCNTL236
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
49
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-7. EMAC[0] Terminal Functions [(R)(G)MII] (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
EMAC[0]_MRXD[4]/
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[3]/
GPMC_A[1]/
EMAC[0],
GPMC, UART5
PINCNTL244
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
T23
I
UART5_TXD
EMAC[0]_MCRS/
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[2]/
VIN[1]B_D[2]/
EMAC[0]_RMRXD[1]/
GP3[25]
EMAC[0],
VIN[1]B, GP3
PINCNTL237
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
R25
R23
P23
I
I
I
RGMII Receive Data [3:0]
EMAC[0]_MRXD[2]/
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[1]/
VIN[1]B_D[7]/
EMAC[0]_RMTXEN/
GP3[30]
EMAC[0],
VIN[1]B, GP3
PINCNTL242
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
EMAC[0]_MRXD[1]/
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[0]/
VIN[1]B_D[6]/
EMAC[0]_RMTXD[1]/
GP3[29]
EMAC[0],
VIN[1]B, GP3
PINCNTL241
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
EMAC[0]_MRCLK/
EMAC[0]_RGTXC/
VIN[1]B_D[4]/
EMAC[0]_RMCRSDV/
SPI[3]_SCS[2]/
GP3[27]
EMAC[0],
VIN[1]B, SPI[3],
GP3
PINCNTL239
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
H27
J26
O
O
RGMII Transmit Clock
RGMII Transmit Enable
EMAC[0]_MRXER/
EMAC[0]_RGTXCTL/
VIN[1]B_D[3]/
EMAC[0]_RMRXER/
GP3[26]
EMAC[0],
VIN[1]B, GP3
PINCNTL238
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
EMAC[0]_MRXD[5]/
EMAC[0]_RGTXD[3]/
GPMC_A[2]/
EMAC[0],
GPMC, UART5
PINCNTL245
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
H26
F28
G27
O
O
O
UART5_CTS
EMAC[0]_MRXD[6]/
EMAC[0]_RGTXD[2]/
GPMC_A[3]/
EMAC[0],
GPMC, UART5
PINCNTL246
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
UART5_RTS
RGMII Transmit Data [3:0]
EMAC[0]_MRXD[7]/
EMAC[0]_RGTXD[1]/
GPMC_A[4]/
EMAC[0],
GPMC, SPI[2]
PINCNTL247
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
SPI[2]_SCS[3]
EMAC[0]_MRXD[0]/
EMAC[0]_RGTXD[0]/
VIN[1]B_D[5]/
EMAC[0]_RMTXD[0]/
GP3[28]
EMAC[0],
VIN[1]B, GP3
PINCNTL240
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
G28
O
50
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-8. EMAC[1] Terminal Functions [(R)(G)MII]
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
EMAC[1] (G)MII Mode
TBD
These pin functions are available only when GMII and MII modes are selected.
VOUT[1]_HSYNC/
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1]_MCOL/
VIN[1]A, SPI[3],
VIN[1]A_VSYNC/
SPI[3]_D[1]/
UART3_RTS/
GP2[29]
IPD
DVDD
AC24
I
UART3, GP2
PINCNTL205
DSIS: 0
[G]MII Collision Detect (Sense) input
VOUT[1]_VSYNC/
EMAC[1]_MCRS/
VIN[1]A_FLD/
VIN[1]A_DE/
SPI[3]_D[0]/
VOUT[1],
VIN[1]A, SPI[3],
UART3, GP2
PINCNTL206
DSIS: 0
IPD
DVDD
AA23
I
[G]MII Carrier Sense input
UART3_CTS/
GP2[30]
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[6]/
EMAC[1]_GMTCLK/
VIN[1]A_D[11]/
VOUT[1],
VIN[1]A, GP3
PINCNTL218
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD
AH27
AH25
O
I
GMII Source Asynchronous Transmit Clock
[G]MII Receive Clock
GP3[10]
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[3]/
EMAC[1]_MRCLK/
VIN[1]A_D[0]/
UART4_CTS/
GP3[0]
VOUT[1],
VIN[1]A,
UART4, GP3
PINCNTL208
DSIS: 0
IPD
DVDD
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and the , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
51
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-8. EMAC[1] Terminal Functions [(R)(G)MII] (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[4]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[7]/
VIN[1]A_D[9]/
VOUT[1],
VIN[1]A, GP3
PINCNTL216
DSIS: PIN
W22
GP3[8]
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[3]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[6]/
VIN[1]A_D[8]/
VOUT[1],
VIN[1]A, GP3
PINCNTL215
DSIS: PIN
Y23
GP3[7]
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[9]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[5]/
VIN[1]A_D[6]/
VOUT[1],
VIN[1]A, I2C[3],
GP3
AA24
I2C[3]_SDA/
GP3[6]
PINCNTL214
DSIS: PIN
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[8]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[4]/
VIN[1]A_D[5]/
I2C[3]_SCL/
VOUT[1],
VIN[1]A, I2C[3],
GP3
PINCNTL213
DSIS: PIN
AH26
AC25
AD25
AF25
GP3[5]
[G]MII Receive Data [7:0]. For 1000 EMAC GMII
operation, EMAC[0]_RXD[7:0] are used. For 10/100
EMAC MII operation, only EMAC[0]_RXD[3:0] are
used.
IPD
DVDD
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[7]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[3]/
VIN[1]A_D[4]/
UART3_TXD/
GP3[4]
VOUT[1],
VIN[1]A,
UART3, GP3
PINCNTL212
DSIS: PIN
I
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[6]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[2]/
VIN[1]A_D[3]/
UART3_RXD/
GP3[3]
VOUT[1],
VIN[1]A,
UART3, GP3
PINCNTL211
DSIS: PIN
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[5]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[1]/
VIN[1]A_D[2]/
UART4_TXD/
GP3[2]
VOUT[1],
VIN[1]A,
UART4, GP3
PINCNTL210
DSIS: PIN
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[4]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[0]/
VIN[1]A_D[1]/
UART4_RXD/
GP3[1]
VOUT[1],
VIN[1]A,
UART4, GP3
PINCNTL209
DSIS: PIN
AG25
AG26
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[5]/
EMAC[1]_MRXDV/
VIN[1]A_D[10]/
GP3[9]
VOUT[1],
VIN[1]A, GP3
PINCNTL217
DSIS: 0
IPD
DVDD
I
I
I
[G]MII Receive Data Valid input
[G]MII Receive Data Error input
[G]MII Transmit Clock input
VOUT[1]_AVID/
EMAC[1]_MRXER/
VIN[1]A_CLK/
UART4_RTS/
TIM6_IO/
VOUT[1],
VIN[1]A,
UART4, TIMER
6, GP2
PINCNTL207
DSIS: 0
IPD
DVDD
Y22
GP2[31]
VOUT[1]_CLK/
EMAC[1]_MTCLK/
VIN[1]A_HSYNC/
GP2[28]
VOUT[1],
VIN[1]A, GP2
PINCNTL204
DSIS: 0
IPD
DVDD
AE24
52
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-8. EMAC[1] Terminal Functions [(R)(G)MII] (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
VOUT[1]_R_CR[8]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[7]/
VIN[1]A_D[19]/
UART5_RXD/
GP3[18]
VOUT[1],
VIN[1]A,
UART5, GP3
PINCNTL226
DSIS: N/A
W23
VOUT[1]_R_CR[7]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[6]/
VIN[1]A_D[18]/
SPI[3]_D[0]/
VOUT[1],
VIN[1]A, SPI[3],
GP3
PINCNTL225
DSIS: N/A
V22
GP3[17]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[6]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[5]/
VIN[1]A_D[17]/
SPI[3]_D[1]/
VOUT[1],
VIN[1]A, SPI[3],
GP3
PINCNTL224
DSIS: N/A
AA25
AC26
AG27
GP3[16]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[5]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[4]/
VIN[1]A_D[16]/
SPI[3]_SCLK/
VOUT[1],
VIN[1]A, SPI[3],
GP3
PINCNTL223
DSIS: N/A
[G]MII Transmit Data [7:0]. For 1000 EMAC GMII
operation, EMAC[0]_TXD[7:0] are used. For 10/100
EMAC MII operation, only EMAC[0]_TXD[3:0] are
used.
IPD
DVDD
O
GP3[15]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[4]/
EMAC]1]_MTXD[3]/
VIN]1]A_D[15]/
SPI[3]_SCS[1]/
GP3[14]
VOUT[1],
VIN[1]A, SPI[3],
GP3
PINCNTL222
DSIS: N/A
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[9]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[2]/
VIN[1]A_D[14]/
GP3[13]
VOUT[1],
VIN[1]A, GP3
PINCNTL221
DSIS: N/A
AD26
AE26
AF26
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[8]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[1]/
VIN[1]A_D[13]/
GP3[12]
VOUT[1],
VIN[1]A, GP3
PINCNTL220
DSIS: N/A
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[7]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[0]/
VIN[1]A_D[12]/
GP3[11]
VOUT[1],
VIN[1]A, GP3
PINCNTL219
DSIS: N/A
VOUT[1]_R_CR[9]/
EMAC[1]_MTXEN/
VIN[1]A_D[20]/
UART5_TXD/
GP3[19]
VOUT[1],
VIN[1]A,
UART5, GP3
PINCNTL227
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD
Y24
O
[G]MII Transmit Data Enable output
EMAC[1] RMII Mode
TBD
These pin functions are available only when RMII mode is selected.
EMAC_RMREFCLK/
TIM2_IO/
GP1[10]
TIMER2, GP1
PINCNTL232
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
RMII Reference Clock (EMAC[0] and EMAC[1] RMII
mode)
J27
I/O
VIN[0]A,
CAMERA_I/F,
SPI[3], GP0
PINCNTL160
DSIS: 0
VIN[0]A_D[20]/
CAM_D[12]/
EMAC[1]_RMCRSDV/
SPI[3]_SCS[0]/
GP0[14]
IPD
DVDD_C
AC17
I
MM: MUX1
RMII Carrier Sense input
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1],
EMAC[0]_MTXD[5]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXC/
EMAC[1]_RMCRSDV/
GPMC_A[12]/
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
GPMC, UART1
PINCNTL255
DSIS: 0
F27
I
UART1_RXD
MM: MUX0
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
53
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-8. EMAC[1] Terminal Functions [(R)(G)MII] (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
VIN[0]A,
CAMERA_I/F,
I2C[3], GP0
PINCNTL158
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[18]/
CAM_D[10]/
EMAC[1]_RMRXD[1]/
I2C[3]_SCL/
IPU
DVDD_C
AF20
I
GP0[12]
MM: MUX1
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1],
GPMC, UART4
PINCNTL253
DSIS: PIN
EMAC[0]_MTXD[3]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXD[0]/
EMAC[1]_RMRXD[1]/
GPMC_A[10]/
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
H23
AF21
H22
I
I
I
I
I
UART4_CTS
MM: MUX0
RMII Receive Data [1:0].
VIN[0]A,
CAMERA_I/F,
I2C[3], GP0
PINCNTL159
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[19]/
CAM_D[11]/
EMAC[1]_RMRXD[0]/
I2C[3]_SDA/
IPU
DVDD_C
GP0[13]
MM: MUX1
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1],
GPMC, UART4
PINCNTL252
DSIS: PIN
EMAC[0]_MTXD[2]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXCTL/
EMAC[1]_RMRXD[0]/
GPMC_A[9]/
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
UART4_TXD
MM: MUX0
VIN[0]A,
CAMERA_I/F,
SPI[3], GP0
PINCNTL157
DSIS: 0
VIN[0]A_D[17]/
CAM_D[9]/
EMAC[1]_RMRXER/
GP0[11]
IPD
DVDD_C
AB21
G23
MM: MUX1
RMII Receive Data Error input
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1],
GPMC, UART1
PINCNTL254
DSIS: 0
EMAC[0]_MTXD[4]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXD[2]/
EMAC[1]_RMRXER/
GPMC_A[11]/
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
UART4_RTS
MM: MUX0
VIN[0]A,
CAMERA_I/F,
SPI[3], GP0
PINCNTL162
DSIS: N/A
VIN[0]A_D[22]/
CAM_D[14]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXD[1]/
SPI[3]_D[1]/
IPD
DVDD_C
AC21
H24
O
O
O
GP0[16]
MM: MUX1
EMAC[0]_MTXD[7]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXD[3]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXD[1]/
GPMC_A[14]/
EMAC[0],
GPMC, UART1
PINCNTL257
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
UART1_CTS
MM: MUX0
RMII Transmit Data [1:0].
VIN[0]A
CAMERA_I/F,
SPI[3], GP0
PINCNTL161
DSIS: N/A
VIN[0]A_D[21]/
CAM_D[13]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXD[0]/
SPI[3]_SCLK/
GP0[15]
IPD
DVDD_C
AE18
MM: MUX1
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1],
GPMC, UART1
PINCNTL256
DSIS: N/A
EMAC[0]_MTXD[6]/
EMAC[1]_RGRXD[0]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXD[0]/
GPMC_A[13]/
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
J22
O
UART1_TXD
MM: MUX0
54
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-8. EMAC[1] Terminal Functions [(R)(G)MII] (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
VIN[0]A,
CAMERA_I/F,
SPI[3], GP0
PINCNTL163
DSIS: N/A
VIN[0]A_D[23]/
CAM_D[15]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXEN/
SPI[3]_D[0]/
IPD
DVDD_C
AC16
O
GP0[17]
MM: MUX1
RMII Transmit Data Enable output
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1],
EMAC[0]_MTXEN/
EMAC[1]_RGRXD[2]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXEN/
GPMC_A[15]/
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
GPMC, UART1
PINCNTL258
DSIS: N/A
J23
O
UART1_RTS
MM: MUX0
EMAC[1] RGMII MODE
TBD
These pin functions are available only when RGMII mode is selected.
EMAC[0]_GMTCLK/
EMAC[1]_RGRXC/
GPMC_A[6]/
EMAC[0],
GPMC, SPI[2]
PINCNTL249
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
K23
I
RGMII Receive Clock
RGMII Receive Control
SPI[2]_D[1]
EMAC[0]_MRXD[3]/
EMAC[1]_RGRXCTL/
GPMC_A[27]/
GPMC_A[26]/
GPMC_A[0]/
EMAC[0],
GPMC, UART5
PINCNTL243
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
J25
I
UART5_RXD
EMAC[0]_MTXD[0]/
EMAC[1]_RGRXD[3]/
GPMC_A[7]/
EMAC[0],
GPMC, UART4
PINCNTL250
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
J24
J23
K22
J22
I
I
I
I
SPI[2]_D[0]
EMAC[0]_MTXEN/
EMAC[1]_RGRXD[2]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXEN/
GPMC_A[15]/
EMAC[0],
GPMC, UART4
PINCNTL258
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
UART1_RTS
RGMII Receive Data [3:0]
EMAC[0]_MRXDV/
EMAC[1]_RGRXD[1]/
GPMC_A[5]/
EMAC[0],
GPMC, SPI[2]
PINCNTL248
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
SPI[2]_SCLK
EMAC[0]_MTXD[6]/
EMAC[1]_RGRXD[0]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXD[0]/
GPMC_A[13]/
EMAC[0],
GPMC, UART1
PINCNTL256
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
UART1_TXD
EMAC[0]_MTXD[5]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXC/
EMAC[1]_RMCRSDV/
GPMC_A[12]/
EMAC[0],
GPMC, UART1
PINCNTL255
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
F27
H22
O
O
RGMII Transmit Clock
RGMII Transmit Enable
UART1_RXD
EMAC[0]_MTXD[2]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXCTL/
EMAC[1]_RMRXD[0]/
GPMC_A[9]/
EMAC[0],
GPMC, UART4
PINCNTL252
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
UART4_TXD
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
55
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-8. EMAC[1] Terminal Functions [(R)(G)MII] (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
EMAC[0]_MTXD[7]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXD[3]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXD[1]/
GPMC_A[14]/
EMAC[0],
GPMC, UART1
PINCNTL257
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
H24
O
UART1_CTS
EMAC[0]_MTXD[4]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXD[2]/
EMAC[1]_RMRXER/
GPMC_A[11]/
EMAC[0],
GPMC, UART4
PINCNTL254
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
G23
H25
H23
O
O
O
UART4_RTS
RGMII Transmit Data [3:0]
EMAC[0]_MTXD[1]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXD[1]/
GPMC_A[8]/
EMAC[0],
GPMC, UART4
PINCNTL251
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
UART4_RXD
EMAC[0]_MTXD[3]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXD[0]/
EMAC[1]_RMRXD[1]/
GPMC_A[10]/
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1],
GPMC, UART4
PINCNTL253
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
UART4_CTS
Table 3-9. MDIO Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
MDIO
DESCRIPTION
NO.
GP1
PINCNTL233
DSIS: N/A
MDCLK/
GP1[11]
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
H28
P24
O
Management Data Serial Clock output
Management Data I/O
GP1
PINCNTL234
DSIS: 1
MDIO/
GP1[12]
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
I/O
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
56
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
3.2.7 General-Purpose Input/Outputs (GPIOs)
Table 3-10. GP0 Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1) OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
GPIO0
DESCRIPTION
NO.
Note: General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) pins can also serve as external interrupt inputs.
UART2
PINCNTL61
DSIS: PIN
UART2_TXD/
GP0[31]
IPD
DVDD
U3
T2
U4
I/O
I/O
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 31.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 30.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 29.
TCLKIN
PINCNTL60
DSIS: PIN
TCLKIN/
GP0[30]
IPD
DVDD
UART2
PINCNTL59
DSIS: PIN
UART2_RXD/
GP0[29]
IPD
DVDD
MCA[5], MCA[4],
TIMER7
PINCNTL58
DSIS: PIN
MCA[5]_AXR[1]/
MCA[4]_AXR[3]/
TIM7_IO/
IPD
DVDD
L6
I/O
GP0[28]
MM: MUX1
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 28.
VOUT[1]_FLD/
CAM_FLD/
CAM_WE/
GPMC_A[11]/
UART2_CTS/
GP0[28]
VOUT[1],
CAMERA_I/F,
GPMC, UART2
PINCNTL174
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_C
AB23
L7
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
MM: MUX0
MCA[5], MCA[4]
PINCNTL57
DSIS: PIN
MCA[5]_AXR[0]/
MCA[4]_AXR[2]/
GP0[27]
IPD
DVDD
MM: MUX1
VOUT[1],
CAMERA_I/F,
GPMC, UART2
PINCNTL173
DSIS: PIN
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 27.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 26.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 25.
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[0]/
CAM_VS/
GPMC_A[10]/
UART2_TXD/
GP0[27]
IPU
DVDD_C
AD23
H5
MM: MUX0
MCA[5]
MCA[5]_AFSX/
GP0[26]
IPD
DVDD
PINCNTL56
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX1
VOUT[1],
CAMERA_I/F,
GPMC, UART2
PINCNTL172
DSIS: PIN
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[1]/
CAM_HS/
GPMC_A[9]/
UART2_RXD/
GP0[26]
IPD
DVDD_C
AE23
J3
MM: MUX0
MCA[5]
MCA[5]_ACLKX/
GP0[25]
IPD
DVDD
PINCNTL55
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX1
VOUT[1],
CAMERA_I/F,
GPMC, UART4
PINCNTL171
DSIS: PIN
VOUT[1]_R_CR[0]/
CAM_D[0]/
GPMC_A[8]/
UART4_RTS/
GP0[25]
IPD
DVDD_C
AA22
MM: MUX0
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
57
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-10. GP0 Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
TYPE(1) OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
MCA[4], TIMER6
PINCNTL54
DSIS: PIN
MCA[4]_AXR[1]/
TIM6_IO/
GP0[24]
IPD
DVDD
J4
I/O
MM: MUX1
VOUT[1],
CAMERA_I/F,
GPMC, UART4
PINCNTL170
DSIS: PIN
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 24.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 23.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 22.
VOUT[1]_R_CR[1]/
CAM_D[1]/
GPMC_A[7]/
UART4_CTS/
GP0[24]
IPD
I/O
AC19
H6
DVDD_C
MM: MUX0
MCA[4]
MCA[4]_AXR[0]/
GP0[23]
IPD
DVDD
PINCNTL53
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX1
I/O
VOUT[1],
CAMERA_I/F,
GPMC, UART4
PINCNTL169
DSIS: PIN
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[0]/
CAM_D[2]/
GPMC_A[6]/
UART4_TXD/
GP0[23]
IPD
I/O
AC18
H3
DVDD_C
MM: MUX0
MCA[4]
MCA[4]_AFSX/
GP0[22]
IPD
DVDD
PINCNTL52
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX1
I/O
VOUT[1],
CAMERA_I/F,
GPMC, UART4
PINCNTL168
DSIS: PIN
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[1]/
CAM_D[3]/
GPMC_A[5]/
UART4_RXD/
GP0[22]
IPU
I/O
AD18
DVDD_C
MM: MUX0
MCA[4]
MCA[4]_ACLKX/
GP0[21]
IPD
DVDD
PINCNTL51
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX1
K7
AD17
F2
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 21.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 20.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 19.
VIN[0]B,
CAMERA_I/F
PINCNTL167
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]B_FLD/
CAM_D[4]/
GP0[21]
IPU
I/O
DVDD_C
MM: MUX0
MCA[3], MCA[1]
PINCNTL49
DSIS: PIN
MCA[3]_AXR[2]/
MCA[1]_AXR[8]/
GP0[20]
IPD
DVDD
I/O
MM: MUX1
VIN[0]A,
CAMERA_I/F
PINCNTL166
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_FLD/
CAM_D[5]/
GP0[20]
IPU
I/O
AC22
G2
DVDD_C
MM: MUX0
MCA[3], TIMER5
PINCNTL48
DSIS: PIN
MCA[3]_AXR[1]/
TIM5_IO/
GP0[19]
IPD
DVDD
I/O
MM: MUX1
VIN[0]B,
CAMERA_I/F
PINCNTL165
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]B_DE/
CAM_D[6]/
GP0[19]
IPU
I/O
AC15
DVDD_C
MM: MUX0
58
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-10. GP0 Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1) OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
MCA[3], TIMER4
PINCNTL47
DSIS: PIN
MCA[3]_AXR[0]/
TIM4_IO/
GP0[18]
IPD
DVDD
G1
I/O
MM: MUX1
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 18.
VIN[0]A,
CAMERA_I/F
PINCNTL164
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_DE/
CAM_D[7]/
GP0[18]
IPU
I/O
AB17
H4
DVDD_C
MM: MUX0
MCA[3]
MCA[3]_AFSX/
GP0[17]
IPD
PINCNTL46
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX1
I/O
DVDD
VIN[0]A,
CAMERA_I/F,
EMAC[1]_RM,
SPI[3]
PINCNTL163
DSIS: PIN
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 17.
VIN[0]A_D[23]/
CAM_D[15]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXEN/
SPI[3]_D[0]/
IPD
I/O
AC16
G6
DVDD_C
GP0[17]
MM: MUX0
MCA[3]
MCA[3]_ACLKX/
GP0[16]
IPD
PINCNTL45
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX1
I/O
DVDD
VIN[0]A,
CAMERA_I/F,
EMAC[1]_RM,
SPI[3]
PINCNTL162
DSIS: PIN
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 16.
VIN[0]A_D[22]/
CAM_D[14]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXD[1]/
SPI[3]_D[1]/
IPD
I/O
AC21
DVDD_C
GP0[16]
MM: MUX0
MCA[2], MCA[1],
TIMER3
PINCNTL44
DSIS: PIN
MCA[2]_AXR[3]/
MCA[1]_AXR[7]/
TIM3_IO/
IPD
DVDD
H2
AE18
V5
I/O
GP0[15]
MM: MUX1
VIN[0]A,
CAMERA_I/F,
EMAC[1]_RM,
SPI[3]
PINCNTL161
DSIS: PIN
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 15.
VIN[0]A_D[21]/
CAM_D[13]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXD[0]/
SPI[3]_SCLK/
GP0[15]
IPD
I/O
DVDD_C
MM: MUX0
MCA[2], MCA[1],
TIMER2
PINCNTL43
DSIS: PIN
MCA[2]_AXR[2]/
MCA[1]_AXR[6]/
TIM2_IO/
IPD
DVDD
I/O
GP0[14]
MM: MUX1
VIN[0]A,
CAMERA_I/F,
EMAC[1]_RM,
SPI[3]
PINCNTL160
DSIS: PIN
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 14.
VIN[0]A_D[20]/
CAM_D[12]/
EMAC[1]_RMCRSDV/ AC17
SPI[3]_SCS[0]/
IPD
I/O
DVDD_C
GP0[14]
MM: MUX0
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
59
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-10. GP0 Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
TYPE(1) OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
MCA[2], SD0,
UART5
PINCNTL42
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX1
MCA[2]_AXR[1]/
SD0_DAT[7]/
UART5_TXD/
GP0[13]
IPU
DVDD
V6
I/O
VIN[0]A,
CAMERA_I/F,
EMAC[1]_RM,
I2C[3]
PINCNTL159
DSIS: PIN
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 13.
VIN[0]A_D[19]/
CAM_D[11]/
EMAC[1]_RMRXD[0]/
I2C[3]_SDA/
IPU
I/O
AF21
N2
DVDD_C
GP0[13]
MM: MUX0
MCA[2], SD0,
UART5
PINCNTL41
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX1
MCA[2]_AXR[0]/
SD0_DAT[6]/
UART5_RXD/
GP0[12]
IPU
I/O
DVDD
VIN[0]A,
CAMERA_I/F,
EMAC[1]_RM,
I2C[3]
PINCNTL158
DSIS: PIN
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 12.
VIN[0]A_D[18]/
CAM_D[10]/
EMAC[1]_RMRXD[1]/
I2C[3]_SCL/
IPU
I/O
AF20
DVDD_C
GP0[12]
MM: MUX0
MCA[2]
MCA[2]_AFSX/
GP0[11]
IPU
DVDD
PINCNTL40
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX1
AA5
AB21
U6
I/O
VIN[0]A,
CAMERA_I/F,
EMAC[1]_RM
PINCNTL157
DSIS: PIN
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 11.
VIN[0]A_D[17]/
CAM_D[9]/
EMAC[1]_RMRXER/
GP0[11]
IPD
I/O
DVDD_C
MM: MUX0
MCA[2]
MCA[2]_ACLKX/
GP0[10]
IPU
DVDD
PINCNTL39
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX1
I/O
VIN[0]A,
CAMERA_I/F,
I2C[2]
PINCNTL156
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX0
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 10.
VIN[0]A_D[16]/
CAM_D[8]/
I2C[2]_SCL/
GP0[10]
IPU
I/O
AA21
DVDD_C
AUD_CLKIN2/
MCA[0]_AXR[9]/
MCA[2]_AHCLKX/
MCA[5]_AHCLKX/
EDMA_EVT2/
TIM3_IO/
AUD_CLKIN2,
MCA[0], MCA[2],
MCA[5], EDMA,
TIMER3
PINCNTL16
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
H1
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 9.
GP0[9]
AUD_CLKIN1/
MCA[0]_AXR[8]/
MCA[1]_AHCLKX/
MCA[4]_AHCLKX/
EDMA_EVT3/
TIM2_IO/
AUD_CLKIN1,
MCA[0], MCA[1],
MCA[4], EDMA,
TIMER2
PINCNTL15
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
R5
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 8.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 7.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
GP0[8]
USB0
PINCNTL270
DSIS: PIN
USB0_DRVVBUS/
GP0[7]
IPD
DVDD
AF11
I/O
60
Device Pins
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-10. GP0 Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1) OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
SD0_DAT[3]/
SD1_DAT[7]/
GP0[6]
SD0, SD1
PINCNTL13
DSIS: PIN
IPU
I/O
Y4
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 6.
DVDD_SD
SD0_DAT[2]_SDRW/
SD1_DAT[6]/
GP0[5]
SD0, SD1
PINCNTL12
DSIS: PIN
IPU
I/O
Y3
Y5
R7
N1
Y6
P2
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 5.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 4.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 3.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 2.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 1.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 0 [GP0] pin 0.
DVDD_SD
SD0_DAT[1]_SDIRQ/
SD1_DAT[5]/
GP0[4]
SD0, SD1
PINCNTL11
DSIS: PIN
IPU
I/O
DVDD_SD
SD0_DAT[0]/
SD1_DAT[4]/
GP0[3]
SD0, SD1
PINCNTL10
DSIS: PIN
IPU
I/O
DVDD_SD
SD0_CMD/
SD1_CMD/
GP0[2]
SD0, SD1
PINCNTL9
DSIS: PIN
IPU
I/O
DVDD_SD
SD0
PINCNTL8
DSIS: PIN
SD0_CLK/
GP0[1]
IPU
I/O
DVDD_SD
SD1
PINCNTL2
DSIS: PIN
SD1_CMD/
GP0[0]
IPU
I/O
DVDD_SD
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
61
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-11. GP1 Terminal Functions
OTHER(2)
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
(3)
NAME
NO.
GPIO1
Note: General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) pins can also serve as external interrupt inputs.
GPMC_WAIT[0]/
IPU
DVDD_GP
MC
GPMC, EDMA
PINCNTL133
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_A[26]/
EDMA_EVT0/
GP1[31]
W28
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 31.
GPMC_BE[1]/
GPMC_A[24]/
EDMA_EVT1/
TIM7_IO/
GPMC, EDMA,
TIMER7
PINCNTL132
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GP
MC
V28
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 30.
GP1[30]
GPMC_BE[0]_CLE/
GPMC_A[25]/
EDMA_EVT2/
TIM6_IO/
GPMC, EDMA,
TIMER6
PINCNTL131
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GP
MC
U27
M26
I/O
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 29.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 28.
GP1[29]
GPMC_ADV_ALE/
GPMC_CS[6]/
TIM5_IO/
IPU
DVDD_GP
MC
GPMC, TIMER5
PINCNTL128
DSIS: PIN
GP1[28]
GPMC_CLK/
GPMC_CS[5]/
GPMC_WAIT[1]/
CLKOUT1/
EDMA_EVT3/
TIM4_IO/
GPMC, CLKOUT1,
EDMA, TIMER4
PINCNTL127
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_GP
MC
R26
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 27.
GP1[27]
SPI[1]
SPI[1]_D[0]/
GP1[26]
IPU
DVDD
PINCNTL88
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX1
AA6
P26
I/O
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 26.
GPMC, VIN[1]B,
SPI[2]
PINCNTL125
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_CS[3]/
VIN[1]B_CLK/
SPI[2]_SCS[0]/
GP1[26]
IPU
DVDD_GP
MC
MM: MUX0
GPMC_CS[2]/
GPMC_A[24]/
GP1[25]
IPU
DVDD_GP
MC
GPMC
PINCNTL124
DSIS: PIN
M25
K28
T28
I/O
I/O
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 25.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 24.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 23.
GPMC_CS[1]/
GPMC_A[25]/
GP1[24]
IPU
DVDD_GP
MC
GPMC
PINCNTL123
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_GP
MC
GPMC
PINCNTL122
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_CS[0]/
GP1[23]
SD2_DAT[4]/
GPMC_A[27]/
GPMC_A[23]/
GPMC_CS[7]/
EDMA_EVT0/
TIM7_IO/
SD2, GPMC,
EDMA, TIMER7
PINCNTL116
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_GP
MC
R24
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 22.
GP1[22]
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
62
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-11. GP1 Terminal Functions (continued)
OTHER(2)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
(3)
NO.
SD2_DAT[5]/
GPMC_A[26]/
GPMC_A[22]/
TIM6_IO/
SD2, GPMC,
TIMER6
PINCNTL115
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_GP
MC
P22
I/O
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 21.
GP1[21]
SD2_DAT[6]/
GPMC_A[25]/
GPMC_A[21]/
UART2_TXD/
GP1[20]
SD2, GPMC,
UART2
PINCNTL114
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_GP
MC
N23
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 20.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 19.
SD2_DAT[7]/
GPMC_A[24]/
GPMC_A[20]/
UART2_RXD/
GP1[19]
SD2, GPMC,
UART2
PINCNTL113
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_GP
MC
L25
AA3
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
SPI[1]
SPI[1]_D[1]/
GP1[18]
IPU
DVDD
PINCNTL87
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX1
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 18.
GPMC_A[23]/
SPI[2]_SCLK/
HDMI_HPDET/
TIM5_IO/
GPMC, SPI[2],
HDMI, TIMER5
PINCNTL112
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GP
MC
AA26
AC3
GP1[18]
MM: MUX0
SPI[1]
SPI[1]_SCLK/
GP1[17]
IPU
DVDD
PINCNTL86
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX1
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 17.
GPMC_A[22]/
SPI[2]_D[1]/
HDMI_CEC/
TIM4_IO/
GPMC, SPI[2],
HDMI, TIMER4
PINCNTL111
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_GP
MC
AB27
GP1[17]
MM: MUX0
SPI[1]
SPI[1]_SCS[0]/
GP1[16]
IPU
DVDD
PINCNTL85
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX1
AD3
AC28
M23
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 16.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 15.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 14.
GPMC, SPI[2]
PINCNTL110
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_A[21]/
SPI[2]_D[0]/
GP1[16]
IPD
DVDD_GP
MC
MM: MUX0
SD2
IPU
DVDD_GP
MC
SD2_CLK/
GP1[15]
PINCNTL121
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX1
GPMC, SPI[2]
PINCNTL109
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_A[20]/
SPI[2]_SCS[1]/
GP1[15]
IPU
DVDD_GP
MC
AD28
L26
MM: MUX0
SD2, GPMC
PINCNTL120
DSIS: PIN
SD2_DAT[0]/
GPMC_A[4]/
GP1[14]
IPU
DVDD_GP
MC
MM: MUX1
GPMC, TIMER3
PINCNTL108
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_A[19]/
TIM3_IO/
GP1[14]
IPD
DVDD_GP
MC
AC27
MM: MUX0
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
63
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-11. GP1 Terminal Functions (continued)
OTHER(2)
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
(3)
NAME
NO.
SD2_DAT[1]_SDIRQ
/
GPMC_A[3]/
GP1[13]
SD2, GPMC
PINCNTL119
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_GP
MC
M24
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
MM: MUX1
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 13.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 12.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 11.
GPMC, TIMER2
PINCNTL107
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_A[18]/
TIM2_IO/
GP1[13]
IPD
DVDD_GP
MC
AE28
AB11
P24
MM: MUX0
VIN[0]A
PINCNTL141
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[1]/
GP1[12]
IPD
DVDD
MM: MUX1
MDIO
IPU
DVDD_GP
MC
MDIO/
GP1[12]
PINCNTL234
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX0
VIN[0]A
PINCNTL140
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[0]/
GP1[11]
IPD
DVDD
AF9
MM: MUX1
MDIO
IPU
DVDD_GP
MC
MDCLK/
GP1[11]
PINCNTL233
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX0
H28
V2
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
PINCNTL65
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX1
IPU
DVDD_M
GP1[10]
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 10.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 9.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 8.
EMAC, TIMER2
PINCNTL232
DSIS: PIN
EMAC_RMREFCLK/
TIM2_IO/
GP1[10]
IPD
DVDD_GP
MC
J27
V1
MM: MUX0
PINCNTL64
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX1
IPD
DVDD_M
GP1[9]
VIN[0]B, CLKOUT0
PINCNTL134
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]B_CLK/
CLKOUT0/
GP1[9]
IPD
DVDD
AE17
W2
MM: MUX0
PINCNTL63
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX1
IPU
DVDD_M
GP1[8]
GPMC, SD2
PINCNTL126
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_CS[4]/
SD2_CMD/
GP1[8]
IPU
DVDD_GP
MC
P25
W1
MM: MUX0
PINCNTL62
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX1
IPD
DVDD_M
GP1[7]
DEVOSC, SPI[1],
TIMER5
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 7.
DEVOSC_WAKE/
SPI[1]_SCS[1]/
TIM5_IO/
IPU
DVDD_SD
W6
I/O
I/O
PINCNTL7
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX0
GP1[7]
SPI[0]_SCS[1]/
SD1_SDCD/
SATA_ACT0_LED/
EDMA_EVT1/
TIM4_IO/
SPI[0], SD1, SATA,
EDMA, TIMER4
PINCNTL80
IPU
DVDD
AE5
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 6.
DSIS: PIN
GP1[6]
64
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-11. GP1 Terminal Functions (continued)
OTHER(2)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
(3)
NO.
UART0_RIN/
UART3_RTS/
UART1_RXD/
GP1[5]
UART0, UART3,
UART1
PINCNTL77
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD
AF4
I/O
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 5.
UART0_DTR/
UART3_CTS/
UART1_TXD/
GP1[4]
UART0, UART3,
UART1
PINCNTL76
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD
AG2
AG4
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 4.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 3.
UART0_DSR/
UART3_TXD/
SPI[0]_SCS[2]/
I2C[2]_SDA/
SD1_SDWP/
GP1[3]
UART0, UART3,
SPI[0], I2C[2], SD1
PINCNTL75
IPU
DVDD
I/O
I/O
DSIS: PIN
UART0_DCD/
UART3_RXD/
SPI[0]_SCS[3]/
I2C[2]_SCL/
SD1_POW/
GP1[2]
UART0, UART3,
SPI[0], I2C[2], SD1
PINCNTL74
IPU
DVDD
AH4
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 2.
DSIS: PIN
DCAN0_RX/
UART2_RXD/
I2C[3]_SCL/
GP1[1]
DCAN0, UART2,
I2C[3]
PINCNTL69
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD
AG6
AH6
I/O
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 1.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 1 [GP1] pin 0.
DCAN0_TX/
UART2_TXD/
I2C[3]_SDA/
GP1[0]
DCAN0, UART2,
I2C[3]
PINCNTL68
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
65
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-12. GP2 Terminal Functions
OTHER(2)
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
(3)
NAME
NO.
GPIO2
Note: General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) pins can also serve as external interrupt inputs.
VOUT[1]_AVID/
VOUT[1], EMAC[1],
EMAC[1]_MRXER/
VIN[1]A, UART4,
VIN[1]A_CLK/
UART4_RTS/
TIM6_IO/
IPD
DVDD
Y22
I/O
TIMER6
PINCNTL207
DSIS: PIN
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 31.
GP2[31]
VOUT[1]_VSYNC/
EMAC[1]_MCRS/
VIN[1]A_FLD/
VIN[1]A_DE/
SPI[3]_D[0]/
VOUT[1], EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, SPI[3],
UART3
IPD
DVDD
AA23
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 30.
PINCNTL206
DSIS: PIN
UART3_CTS/
GP2[30]
VOUT[1]_HSYNC/
EMAC[1]_MCOL/
VIN[1]A_VSYNC/
SPI[3]_D[1]/
UART3_RTS/
GP2[29]
VOUT[1], EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, SPI[3],
UART3
IPD
DVDD
AC24
AE24
I/O
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 29.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 28.
PINCNTL205
DSIS: PIN
VOUT[1]_CLK/
EMAC[1]_MTCLK/
VIN[1]A_HSYNC/
GP2[28]
VOUT[1], EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A
IPD
DVDD
PINCNTL204
DSIS: PIN
VOUT[0]
PINCNTL197
DSIS: PIN
VOUT[0]_R_CR[3]/
GP2[27]
IPD
DVDD
AB9
AD9
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 27.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 26.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 25.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 24.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 23.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 22.
VOUT[0]_R_CR[2]/
EMU4/
GP2[26]
VOUT[0], EMU
PINCNTL196
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
VOUT[0]
PINCNTL189
DSIS: PIN
VOUT[0]_G_Y_YC[3]/
GP2[25]
IPD
DVDD
AH15
AH7
VOUT[0]_G_Y_YC[2]/
EMU3/
GP2[24]
VOUT[0], EMU
PINCNTL188
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
VOUT[0]
PINCNTL181
DSIS: PIN
VOUT[0]_B_CB_C[3]/
GP2[23]
IPD
DVDD
AE15
AG7
VOUT[0]_B_CB_C[2]/
EMU2/
GP2[22]
VOUT[0], EMU
PINCNTL180
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
VOUT[0]_AVID/
VOUT[0]_FLD/
SPI[3]_SCLK/
TIM7_IO/
VOUT[0], SPI[3],
TIMER7
PINCNTL179
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
AA10
AC14
I/O
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 21.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 20.
GP2[21]
VIN[0]AB,
CAMERA_I/F
PINCNTL155
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[15]_BD[7]/
CAM_SHUTTER/
GP2[20]
DIS
DVDD
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
66
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-12. GP2 Terminal Functions (continued)
OTHER(2)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
(3)
NO.
VIN[0]AB,
CAMERA_I/F
PINCNTL154
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[14]_BD[6]/
CAM_STROBE/
GP2[19]
IPD
DVDD
AC12
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 19.
VIN[0]AB,
CAMERA_I/F
PINCNTL153
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[13]_BD[5]/
CAM_RESET/
GP2[18]
IPD
DVDD
AF17
AG17
AH17
I/O
I/O
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 18.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 17.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 16.
VIN[0]AB,
CLKOUT1
PINCNTL152
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[12]_BD[4]/
CLKOUT1/
GP2[17]
IPD
DVDD
VIN[0]AB,
CAMERA_I/F
PINCNTL151
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[11]_BD[3]/
CAM_WE/
GP2[16]
IPD
DVDD
VIN[0]AB
PINCNTL150
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[10]_BD[2]/
GP2[15]
IPD
DVDD
AH9
AG9
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 15.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 14.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 13.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 12.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 11.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 10.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 9.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 8.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 7.
VIN[0]AB
PINCNTL149
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[9]_BD[1]/
GP2[14]
IPD
DVDD
VIN[0]AB
PINCNTL148
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[8]_BD[0]/
GP2[13]
IPD
DVDD
AB15
AA11
AH16
AG16
AH8
VIN[0]A
PINCNTL147
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[7]/
GP2[12]
IPD
DVDD
VIN[0]A
PINCNTL146
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[6]/
GP2[11]
IPD
DVDD
VIN[0]A
PINCNTL145
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[5]/
GP2[10]
IPD
DVDD
VIN[0]A
PINCNTL144
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[4]/
GP2[9]
IPD
DVDD
VIN[0]A
PINCNTL143
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[3]/
GP2[8]
IPD
DVDD
AE12
AC9
VIN[0]A
PINCNTL142
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[2]/
GP2[7]
IPD
DVDD
SD2, GPMC
PINCNTL118
DSIS: PIN
SD2_DAT[2]_SDRW/
GPMC_A[2]/
GP2[6]
IPU
DVDD_GP
MC
K27
V23
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
MM: MUX1
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 6.
GPMC
IPD
DVDD_GP
MC
GPMC_A[17]/
GP2[6]
PINCNTL106
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX0
SD2, GPMC
PINCNTL117
DSIS: PIN
SD2_DAT[3]/
GPMC_A[1]/
GP2[5]
IPU
DVDD_GP
MC
J28
MM: MUX1
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 5.
GPMC
IPD
DVDD_GP
MC
GPMC_A[16]/
GP2[5]
PINCNTL105
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX0
AD27
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
67
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-12. GP2 Terminal Functions (continued)
OTHER(2)
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
(3)
NAME
NO.
VIN[0]A_VSYNC/
UART5_CTS/
GP2[4]
VIN[0]A, UART5
PINCNTL139
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD
AD20
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 4.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 3.
VIN[0]A_HSYNC/
UART5_RTS/
GP2[3]
VIN[0]A, UART5
PINCNTL138
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD
AC20
AB20
I/O
I/O
VIN[0]A
PINCNTL137
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_CLK/
GP2[2]
IPD
DVDD
MM: MUX1
VOUT[0],
CAMERA_I/F,
GPMC, UART2
PINCNTL175
DSIS: PIN
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 2.
VOUT[0]_FLD/
CAM_PCLK/
GPMC_A[12]/
UART2_RTS/
GP2[2]
IPD
DVDD_C
AF18
I/O
MM: MUX0
VIN[0]A_FLD/
VIN[0]B_VSYNC/
UART5_RXD/
I2C[2]_SCL/
GP2[1]
VIN[0]A, VIN[0]B,
UART5, I2C[2]
PINCNTL136
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD
AA20
AE21
I/O
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 1.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 0.
VIN[0]A_DE/
VIN[0]B_HSYNC/
UART5_TXD/
I2C[2]_SDA/
GP2[0]
VIN[0]A, VIN[0]B,
UART5, I2C[2]
PINCNTL135
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD
68
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-13. GP3 Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
GPIO3
DESCRIPTION
NO.
Note: General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) pins can also serve as external interrupt inputs.
CLKIN32,
CLKOUT0,
TIMER3
PINCNTL259
DSIS: PIN
CLKIN32/
CLKOUT0/
TIM3_IO/
GP3[31]
IPD
DVDD
J7
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 31.
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[2]/
GPMC_A[0]/
VIN[1]A_D[7]/
HDMI_CEC/
SPI[2]_D[0]/
VOUT[1], GPMC,
VIN[1]A, HDMI,
SPI[2]
PINCNTL231
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD
AF28
I/O
GP3[30]
MM: MUX1
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 30.
EMAC[0]_MRXD[2]/
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[1]/
VIN[1]B_D[7]/
EMAC[0]_RMTXEN/
GP3[30]
EMAC[0], VIN[1]B
PINCNTL242
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
R23
P23
G28
I/O
I/O
I/O
MM: MUX0
EMAC[0]_MRXD[1]/
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[0]/
VIN[1]B_D[6]/
EMAC[0]_RMTXD[1]/
GP3[29]
EMAC[0], VIN[1]B
PINCNTL241
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 29.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 28.
EMAC[0]_MRXD[0]/
EMAC[0]_RGTXD[0]/
VIN[1]B_D[5]/
EMAC[0]_RMTXD[0]/
GP3[28]
EMAC[0], VIN[1]B
PINCNTL240
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
EMAC[0]_MRCLK/
EMAC[0]_RGTXC/
VIN[1]B_D[4]/
EMAC[0]_RMCRSDV/
SPI[3]_SCS[2]/
GP3[27]
EMAC[0], VIN[1]B,
SPI[3]
PINCNTL239
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
H27
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 27.
EMAC[0]_MRXER/
EMAC[0]_RGTXCTL/
VIN[1]B_D[3]/
EMAC[0]_RMRXER/
GP3[26]
EMAC[0], VIN[1]B
PINCNTL238
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
J26
R25
L23
I/O
I/O
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 26.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 25.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 24.
EMAC[0]_MCRS/
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[2]/
VIN[1]B_D[2]/
EMAC[0]_RMRXD[1]/
GP3[25]
EMAC[0], VIN[1]B
PINCNTL237
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
EMAC[0]_MCOL/
EMAC[0]_RGRXCTL/
VIN[1]B_D[1]/
EMAC[0]_RMRXD[0]/
GP3[24]
EMAC[0], VIN[1]B
PINCNTL236
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
EMAC[0]_MTCLK/
EMAC[0]_RGRXC/
VIN[1]B_D[0]/
SPI[3]_SCS[3]/
I2C[2]_SDA/
EMAC[0], VIN[1]B,
SPI[3], I2C[2]
PINCNTL235
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
L24
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 23.
GP3[23]
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
69
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-13. GP3 Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
VOUT[1]_R_CR[2]/
GPMC_A[15]/
VIN[1]A_D[23]/
HDMI_HPDET/
SPI[2]_D[1]/
VOUT[1], GPMC,
VIN[1]A, HDMI,
SPI[2]
PINCNTL230
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
AE27
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 22.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 21.
GP3[22]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[3]/
GPMC_A[14]/
VIN[1]A_D[22]/
HDMI_SDA/
SPI[2]_SCLK/
I2C[2]_SDA
VOUT[1], GPMC,
VIN[1]A, HDMI,
SPI[2], I2C[2]
PINCNTL229
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD
AG28
AF27
I/O
I/O
GP3[21]
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[2]/
GPMC_A[13]/
VIN[1]A_D[21]/
HDMI_SCL/
SPI[2]_SCS[2]/
I2C[2]_SCL/
VOUT[1], GPMC,
VIN[1]A, HDMI,
SPI[2], I2C[2]
PINCNTL228
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 20.
GP3[20]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[9]/
EMAC[1]_MTXEN/
VIN[1]A_D[20]/
UART5_TXD/
GP3[19]
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A,
UART5
PINCNTL227
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
Y24
W23
V22
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 19.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 18.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 17.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 16.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 15.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 14.
VOUT[1]_R_CR[8]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[7]/
VIN[1]A_D[19]/
UART5_RXD/
GP3[18]
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A,
UART5
PINCNTL226
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
VOUT[1]_R_CR[7]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[6]/
VIN[1]A_D[18]/
SPI[3]_D[0]/
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A,
SPI[3]
PINCNTL225
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
GP3[17]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[6]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[5]/
VIN[1]A_D[17]/
SPI[3]_D[1]/
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A,
SPI[3]
PINCNTL224
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
AA25
AC26
AG27
GP3[16]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[5]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[4]/
VIN[1]A_D[16]/
SPI[3]_SCLK/
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A,
SPI[3]
PINCNTL223
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
GP3[15]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[4]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[3]/
VIN[1]A_D[15]/
SPI[3]_SCS[1]/
GP3[14]
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A,
SPI[3]
PINCNTL222
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[9]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[2]/
VIN[1]A_D[14]/
GP3[13]
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A
PINCNTL221
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
AD26
AE26
AF26
I/O
I/O
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 13.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 12.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 11.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[8]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[1]/
VIN[1]A_D[13]/
GP3[12]
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A
PINCNTL220
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[7]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[0]/
VIN[1]A_D[12]/
GP3[11]
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A
PINCNTL219
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
70
Device Pins
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-13. GP3 Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[6]/
EMAC[1]_GMTCLK/
VIN[1]A_D[11]/
GP3[10]
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A
PINCNTL218
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
AH27
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 10.
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[5]/
EMAC[1]_MRXDV/
VIN[1]A_D[10]/
GP3[9]
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A
PINCNTL217
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
AG26
W22
Y23
I/O
I/O
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 9.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 8.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 7.
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[4]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[7]/
VIN[1]A_D[9]/
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A
PINCNTL216
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
GP3[8]
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[3]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[6]/
VIN[1]A_D[8]/
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A
PINCNTL215
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
GP3[7]
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[9]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[5]/
VIN[1]A_D[6]/
I2C[3]_SDA/
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A,
I2C[3]
PINCNTL214
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
AA24
AH26
AC25
AD25
AF25
AG25
AH25
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 6.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 5.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 4.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 3.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 2.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 3 [GP3] pin 1.
General-Purpose Input/Output (I/O) 2 [GP2] pin 0.
GP3[6]
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[8]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[4]/
VIN[1]A_D[5]/
I2C[3]_SCL/
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A,
I2C[3]
PINCNTL213
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
GP3[5]
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[7]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[3]/
VIN[1]A_D[4]/
UART3_TXD/
GP3[4]
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A,
UART3
PINCNTL212
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[6]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[2]/
VIN[1]A_D[3]/
UART3_RXD/
GP3[3]
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A,
UART3
PINCNTL211
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[5]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[1]/
VIN[1]A_D[2]/
UART4_TXD/
GP3[2]
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A,
UART4
PINCNTL210
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[4]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[0]/
VIN[1]A_D[1]/
UART4_RXD/
GP3[1]
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A,
UART4
PINCNTL209
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[3]/
EMAC[1]_MRCLK/
VIN[1]A_D[0]/
UART4_CTS/
GP3[0]
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A,
UART4
PINCNTL208
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
71
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
3.2.8 GPMC
Table 3-14. GPMC Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
GPMC_CLK/
GPMC_CS[5]/
GPMC_WAIT[1]/
CLKOUT1/
EDMA_EVT3/
TIM4_IO/
GPMC, CLKOUT1,
EDMA, TIMER4,
GP1 GPMC Clock output
IPU
R26
O
DVDD_GPMCB
PINCNTL127
DSIS: 0
GP1[27]
SD2_DAT[4]/
GPMC_A[27]/
GPMC_A[23]/
GPMC_CS[7]/
EDMA_EVT0/
TIM7_IO/
SD2, GPMC,
EDMA, TIMER7,
GP1
PINCNTL116
DSIS: N/A
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
R24
M26
R26
O
O
O
GPMC Chip Select 7
GPMC Chip Select 6
GPMC Chip Select 5
GP1[22]
GPMC_ADV_ALE/
GPMC_CS[6]/
TIM5_IO/
GPMC, TIMER5,
GP1
PINCNTL128
DSIS: N/A
IPU
DVDD_GPMCB
GP1[28]
GPMC_CLK/
GPMC_CS[5]/
GPMC_WAIT[1]/
CLKOUT1/
EDMA_EVT3/
TIM4_IO/
GPMC, CLKOUT1,
EDMA, TIMER4,
GP1
IPU
DVDD_GPMCB
PINCNTL127
DSIS: N/A
GP1[27]
GPMC_CS[4]/
SD2_CMD/
GP1[8]
SD2, GP1
PINCNTL126
DSIS: N/A
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
P25
P26
O
O
GPMC Chip Select 4
GPMC Chip Select 3
GPMC_CS[3]/
VIN[1]B_CLK/
SPI[2]_SCS[0]/
GP1[26]
VIN[1]B, SPI[2],
GP1
PINCNTL125
DSIS: N/A
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
GPMC_CS[2]/
GPMC_A[24]/
GP1[25]
GPMC, GP1
PINCNTL124
DSIS: N/A
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
M25
K28
T28
U28
T27
O
O
O
O
O
GPMC Chip Select 2
GPMC_CS[1]/
GPMC_A[25]/
GP1[24]
GPMC, GP1
PINCNTL123
DSIS: N/A
IPU
GPMC Chip Select 1
DVDD_GPMCB
GP1
PINCNTL122
DSIS: N/A
GPMC_CS[0]/
GP1[23]
IPU
GPMC Chip Select 0
DVDD_GPMCB
–
IPU
GPMC_WE
PINCNTL130
DSIS: N/A
GPMC Write Enable output
GPMC Output Enable output
DVDD_GPMCB
–
IPU
GPMC_OE_RE
PINCNTL129
DSIS: N/A
DVDD_GPMCB
GPMC_BE[1]/
GPMC_A[24]/
EDMA_EVT1/
TIM7_IO/
GPMC, EDMA,
TIMER7, GP1
PINCNTL132
DSIS: N/A
IPD
V28
O
GPMC Upper Byte Enable output
DVDD_GPMCB
GP1[30]
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and the , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
72
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-14. GPMC Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
GPMC_BE[0]_CLE/
GPMC_A[25]/
EDMA_EVT2/
TIM6_IO/
GPMC, EDMA,
TIMER6, GP1
PINCNTL131
DSIS: PIN
IPD
GPMC Lower Byte Enable output or Command
Latch Enable output
U27
O
DVDD_GPMCB
GP1[29]
GPMC_ADV_ALE/
GPMC_CS[6]/
TIM5_IO/
GPMC, TIMER5,
GP1
PINCNTL128
DSIS: N/A
IPU
GPMC Address Valid output or Address Latch
Enable output
M26
R26
O
DVDD_GPMCB
GP1[28]
GPMC_CLK/
GPMC_CS[5]/
GPMC_WAIT[1]/
CLKOUT1/
EDMA_EVT3/
TIM4_IO/
GPMC, CLKOUT1,
EDMA, TIMER4,
GP1
IPU
I
GPMC Wait input 1
GPMC Wait input 0
DVDD_GPMCB
PINCNTL127
DSIS: 1
GP1[27]
GPMC_WAIT[0]/
GPMC_A[26]/
EDMA_EVT0/
GP1[31]
GPMC, EDMA,
GP1
PINCNTL133
DSIS: 1
IPU
W28
J25
I
DVDD_GPMCB
EMAC[0]_MRXD[3]/
EMAC[1]_RGRXCTL/
GPMC_A[27]/
GPMC_A[26]/
GPMC_A[0]/
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1], GPMC,
UART5
PINCNTL243
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
O
UART5_RXD
MM: MUX1
GPMC Address 27
SD2_DAT[4]/
GPMC_A[27]/
GPMC_A[23]/
GPMC_CS[7]/
EDMA_EVT0/
TIM7_IO/
SD2, GPMC,
EDMA, TIMER7,
GP1
PINCNTL116
DSIS: N/A
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
R24
O
MM: MUX0
GP1[22]
GPMC, EDMA,
GP1
PINCNTL133
DSIS: N/A
MM: MUX2
GPMC_WAIT[0]/
GPMC_A[26]/
EDMA_EVT0/
GP1[31]
IPU
W28
J25
O
O
O
DVDD_GPMCB
EMAC[0]_MRXD[3]/
EMAC[1]_RGRXCTL/
GPMC_A[27]/
GPMC_A[26]/
GPMC_A[0]/
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1], GPMC,
UART5
PINCNTL243
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
GPMC Address 26
UART5_RXD
MM: MUX1
SD2_DAT[5]/
GPMC_A[26]/
GPMC_A[22]/
TIM6_IO/
SD2, GPMC,
TIMER6, GP1
PINCNTL115
DSIS: N/A
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
P22
GP1[21]
MM: MUX0
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
73
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-14. GPMC Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
GPMC_BE[0]_CLE/
GPMC_A[25]/
EDMA_EVT2/
TIM6_IO/
GPMC, EDMA,
TIMER6, GP1
PINCNTL131
DSIS: N/A
IPD
U27
O
DVDD_GPMCB
GP1[29]
MM: MUX2
GPMC, GP1
PINCNTL123
DSIS: N/A
GPMC_CS[1]/
GPMC_A[25]/
GP1[24]
IPU
K28
N23
O
O
GPMC Address 25
DVDD_GPMCB
MM: MUX1
SD2_DAT[6]/
GPMC_A[25]/
GPMC_A[21]/
UART2_TXD/
GP1[20]
SD2, GPMC,
UART2, GP1
PINCNTL114
DSIS: N/A
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
MM: MUX0
GPMC_BE[1]/
GPMC_A[24]/
EDMA_EVT1/
TIM7_IO/
GPMC, EDMA,
TIMER7, GP1
PINCNTL132
DSIS: N/A
IPD
V28
M25
L25
O
O
O
DVDD_GPMCB
GP1[30]
MM: MUX2
GPMC, GP1
PINCNTL124
DSIS: N/A
GPMC_CS[2]/
GPMC_A[24]/
GP1[25]
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
GPMC Address 24
MM: MUX1
SD2_DAT[7]/
GPMC_A[24]/
GPMC_A[20]/
UART2_RXD/
GP1[19]
SD2, GPMC,
UART2, GP1
PINCNTL113
DSIS: N/A
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
MM: MUX0
SD2_DAT[4]/
GPMC_A[27]/
GPMC_A[23]/
GPMC_CS[7]/
EDMA_EVT0/
TIM7_IO/
SD2, GPMC,
EDMA, TIMER5,
GP1
PINCNTL116
DSIS: N/A
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
R24
O
MM: MUX1
GPMC Address 23
GP1[22]
GPMC_A[23]/
SPI[2]_SCLK/
HDMI_HPDET/
TIM5_IO/
SPI[2], HDMI,
TIMER5, GP1
PINCNTL112
DSIS: N/A
IPD
AA26
P22
O
O
O
DVDD_GPMCB
GP1[18]
MM: MUX0
SD2_DAT[5]/
GPMC_A[26]/
GPMC_A[22]/
TIM6_IO/
SD2, GPMC,
TIMER6, GP1
PINCNTL115
DSIS: N/A
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
GP1[21]
MM: MUX1
GPMC Address 22
GPMC_A[22]/
SPI[2]_D[1]/
HDMI_CEC/
TIM4_IO/
SPI[2], HDMI,
TIMER4, GP1
PINCNTL111
DSIS: N/A
IPU
AB27
DVDD_GPMCB
GP1[17]
MM: MUX0
SD2_DAT[6]/
GPMC_A[25]/
GPMC_A[21]/
UART2_TXD/
GP1[20]
SD2, GPMC,
UART2, GP1
PINCNTL114
DSIS: N/A
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
N23
O
O
MM: MUX1
GPMC Address 21
SPI[2], GP1
PINCNTL110
DSIS: N/A
GPMC_A[21]/
SPI[2]_D[0]/
GP1[16]
IPD
AC28
DVDD_GPMCB
MM: MUX0
74
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-14. GPMC Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
SD2_DAT[7]/
GPMC_A[24]/
GPMC_A[20]/
UART2_RXD/
GP1[19]
SD2,. GPMC,
UART2, GP1
PINCNTL113
DSIS: N/A
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
L25
O
MM: MUX1
GPMC Address 20
SPI[2], GP1
PINCNTL109
DSIS: N/A
GPMC_A[20]/
SPI[2]_SCS[1]/
GP1[15]
IPU
AD28
O
DVDD_GPMCB
MM: MUX0
GPMC_A[19]/
TIM3_IO/
GP1[14]
TIMER2, GP1
PINCNTL108
DSIS: N/A
IPD
AC27
AE28
V23
O
O
O
O
GPMC Address 19
GPMC Address 18
GPMC Address 17
GPMC Address 16
DVDD_GPMCB
GPMC_A[18]/
TIM2_IO/
GP1[13]
TIMER2, GP1
PINCNTL107
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMCB
GP2
PINCNTL106
DSIS: N/A
GPMC_A[17]/
GP2[6]
IPD
DVDD_GPMCB
GP2
PINCNTL105
DSIS: N/A
GPMC_A[16]/
GP2[5]
IPD
AD27
DVDD_GPMCB
VOUT[1]_R_CR[2]/
GPMC_A[15]/
VIN[1]A_D[23]/
HDMI_HPDET/
SPI[2]_D[1]/
VOUT[1], VIN[1]A,
HDMI, SPI[2],GP3
PINCNTL230
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD
AE27
J23
O
O
MM: MUX1
GP3[22]
GPMC Address 15
EMAC[0]_MTXEN/
EMAC[1]_RGRXD[2]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXEN/
GPMC_A[15]/
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1], UART1
PINCNTL258
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
UART1_RTS
MM: MUX0
VOUT[1]_R_CR[3]/
GPMC_A[14]/
VIN[1]A_D[22]/
HDMI_SDA/
SPI[2]_SCLK/
I2C[2]_SDA/
GP3[21]
VOUT[1], VIN[1]A,
HDMI, SPI[2],
I2C[2], GP3
PINCNTL229
DSIS: N/A
IPU
DVDD
AG28
H24
O
O
O
O
MM: MUX1
GPMC Address 14
EMAC[0]_MTXD[7]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXD[3]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXD[1]/
GPMC_A[14]/
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1], UART1
PINCNTL257
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
UART1_CTS
MM: MUX0
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[2]/
GPMC_A[13]/
VIN[1]A_D[21]/
HDMI_SCL/
SPI[2]_SCS[2]/
I2C[2]_SCL/
VOUT[1], VIN[1]A,
HDMI, SPI[2],
I2C[2], GP3
PINCNTL228
DSIS: N/A
IPU
DVDD
AF27
J22
MM: MUX1
GPMC Address 13
GP3[20]
EMAC[0]_MTXD[6]/
EMAC[1]_RGRXD[0]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXD[0]/
GPMC_A[13]/
EMACF[0],
EMAC[1], UART1
PINCNTL256
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
UART1_TXD
MM: MUX0
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
75
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-14. GPMC Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
VOUT[0],
CAMERA_I/F,
UART2, GP2
PINCNTL175
DSIS: N/A
VOUT[0]_FLD/
CAM_PCLK/
GPMC_A[12]/
UART2_RTS/
GP2[2]
IPD
DVDD_C
AF18
O
MM: MUX1
GPMC Address 12
GPMC Address 11
GPMC Address 10
GPMC Address 9
GPMC Address 8
EMAC[0]_MTXD[5]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXC/
EMAC[1]_RMCRSDV/
GPMC_A[12]/
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1], UART1
PINCNTL255
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
F27
AB23
G23
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
UART1_RXD
MM: MUX0
VOUT[1]_FLD/
CAM_FLD/
CAM_WE/
GPMC_A[11]/
UART2_CTS/
GP0[28]
VOUT[1],
CAMERA_I/F,
UART2, GP0
PINCNTL174
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_C
MM: MUX1
EMAC[0]_MTXD[4]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXD[2]/
EMAC[1]_RMRXER/
GPMC_A[11]/
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1], UART4
PINCNTL254
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
UART4_RTS
MM: MUX0
VOUT[1],
CAMERA_I/F,
UART2, GP0
PINCNTL173
DSIS: N/A
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[0]/
CAM_VS/
GPMC_A[10]/
UART2_TXD/
GP0[27]
IPU
DVDD_C
AD23
H23
MM: MUX1
EMAC[0]_MTXD[3]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXD[0]/
EMAC[1]_RMRXD[1]/
GPMC_A[10]/
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1], UART4
PINCNTL253
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
UART4_CTS
MM: MUX0
VOUT[1],
CAMERA_I/F,
UART2, GP0
PINCNTL172
DSIS: N/A
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[1]/
CAM_HS/
GPMC_A[9]/
UART2_RXD/
GP0[26]
IPD
DVDD_C
AE23
H22
MM: MUX1
EMAC[0]_MTXD[2]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXCTL/
EMAC[1]_RMRXD[0]/
GPMC_A[9]/
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1], UART4
PINCNTL252
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
UART4_TXD
MM: MUX0
VOUT[1],
CAMERA_I/F,
UART4, GP0
PINCNTL171
DSIS: N/A
VOUT[1]_R_CR[0]/
CAM_D[0]/
GPMC_A[8]/
UART4_RTS/
GP0[25]
IPD
DVDD_C
AA22
H25
MM: MUX1
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1], UART4
PINCNTL251
DSIS: N/A
EMAC[0]_MTXD[1]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXD[1]/
GPMC_A[8]/
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
UART4_RXD
MM: MUX0
76
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-14. GPMC Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
VOUT[1],
CAMERA_I/F,
UART4, GP0
PINCNTL170
DSIS: N/A
VOUT[1]_R_CR[1]/
CAM_D[1]/
GPMC_A[7]/
UART4_CTS/
GP0[24]
IPD
DVDD_C
AC19
O
MM: MUX1
GPMC Address 7
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1], SPI[2]
PINCNTL250
DSIS: N/A
EMAC[0]_MTXD[0]/
EMAC[1]_RGRXD[3]/
GPMC_A[7]/
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
J24
AC18
K23
O
O
O
O
O
SPI[2]_D[0]
MM: MUX0
VOUT[1],
CAMERA_I/F,
UART4, GP0
PINCNTL169
DSIS: N/A
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[0]/
CAM_D[2]/
GPMC_A[6]/
UART4_TXD/
GP0[23]
IPD
DVDD_C
MM: MUX1
GPMC Address 6
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1], SPI[2]
PINCNTL249
DSIS: N/A
EMAC[0]_GMTCLK/
EMAC[1]_RGRXC/
GPMC_A[6]/
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
SPI[2]_D[1]
MM: MUX0
VOUT[1],
CAMERA_I/F,
UART4, GP0
PINCNTL168
DSIS: N/A
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[1]/
CAM_D[3]/
GPMC_A[5]/
UART4_RXD/
GP0[22]
IPU
DVDD_C
AD18
K22
MM: MUX1
GPMC Address 5
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1], SPI[2]
PINCNTL248
DSIS: N/A
EMAC[0]_MRXDV/
EMAC[1]_RGRXD[1]/
GPMC_A[5]/
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
SPI[2]_SCLK
MM: MUX0
SD2, GP1
PINCNTL120
DSIS: N/A
SD2_DAT[0]/
GPMC_A[4]/
GP1[14]
IPU
L26
G27
M24
F28
K27
H26
O
O
O
O
O
O
DVDD_GPMCB
MM: MUX1
GPMC Address 4
GPMC Address 3
GPMC Address 2
EMAC[0]_MRXD[7]/
EMAC[0]_RGTXD[1]/
GPMC_A[4]/
EMAC[0], SPI[2]
PINCNTL247
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
SPI[2]_SCS[3]
MM: MUX0
SD2, GP1
PINCNTL119
DSIS: N/A
SD2_DAT[1]_ SDIRQ/
GPMC_A[3]/
GP1[13]
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
MM: MUX1
EMAC[0]_MRXD[6]/
EMAC[0]_RGTXD[2]/
GPMC_A[3]/
EMAC[0], UART5
PINCNTL246
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
UART5_RTS
MM: MUX0
SD2, GP2
PINCNTL118
DSIS: N/A
SD2_DAT[2]_SDRW/
GPMC_A[2]/
GP2[6]
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
MM: MUX1
EMAC[0]_MRXD[5]/
EMAC[0]_RGTXD[3]/
GPMC_A[2]/
EMAC[0], UART5
PINCNTL245
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
UART5_CTS
MM: MUX0
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
77
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-14. GPMC Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
SD2, GP2
PINCNTL117
DSIS: N/A
SD2_DAT[3]/
GPMC_A[1]/
GP2[5]
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
J28
O
MM: MUX1
GPMC Address 1
EMAC[0]_MRXD[4]/
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[3]/
GPMC_A[1]/
EMAC[0], UART5
PINCNTL244
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
T23
O
O
UART5_TXD
MM: MUX0
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[2]/
GPMC_A[0]/
VIN[1]A_D[7]/
HDMI_CEC/
SPI[2]_D[0]/
VOUT[1], VIN[1]A,
HDMI, SPI[2], GP3
PINCNTL231
DSIS: N/A
IPU
DVDD
AF28
MM: MUX1
GP3[30]
GPMC Address 0
EMAC[0]_MRXD[3]/
EMAC[1]_RGRXCTL/
GPMC_A[27]/
GPMC_A[26]/
GPMC_A[0]/
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1], GPMC,
UART5
PINCNTL243
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
J25
O
UART5_RXD
MM: MUX0
78
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-14. GPMC Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
BTMODE
PINCNTL104
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_D[15]/
BTMODE[15]
DIS
Y25
I/O
DVDD_GPMCB
BTMODE
PINCNTL103
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_D[14]/
BTMODE[14]
DIS
V24
U23
U24
AA27
Y26
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
DVDD_GPMCB
BTMODE
PINCNTL102
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_D[13]/
BTMODE[13]
DIS
DVDD_GPMCB
BTMODE
PINCNTL101
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_D[12]/
BTMODE[12]
DIS
DVDD_GPMCB
BTMODE
PINCNTL100
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_D[11]/
BTMODE[11]
DIS
DVDD_GPMCB
BTMODE
PINCNTL99
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_D[10]/
BTMODE[10]
DIS
DVDD_GPMCB
BTMODE
PINCNTL98
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_D[9]/
BTMODE[9]
DIS
AB28
Y27
DVDD_GPMCB
BTMODE
PINCNTL97
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_D[8]/
BTMODE[8]
DIS
DVDD_GPMCB
GPMC Multiplexed Data/Address I/Os.
BTMODE
PINCNTL96
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_D[7]/
BTMODE[7]
DIS
V25
DVDD_GPMCB
BTMODE
PINCNTL95
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_D[6]/
BTMODE[6]
DIS
U25
AA28
V26
DVDD_GPMCB
BTMODE
PINCNTL94
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_D[5]/
BTMODE[5]
DIS
DVDD_GPMCB
BTMODE
PINCNTL93
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_D[4]/
BTMODE[4]
DIS
DVDD_GPMCB
BTMODE
PINCNTL92
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_D[3]/
BTMODE[3]
DIS
W27
V27
DVDD_GPMCB
BTMODE
PINCNTL91
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_D[2]/
BTMODE[2]
DIS
DVDD_GPMCB
BTMODE
PINCNTL90
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_D[1]/
BTMODE[1]
DIS
Y28
DVDD_GPMCB
BTMODE
PINCNTL89
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_D[0]/
BTMODE[0]
DIS+
DVDD_GPMCB
U26
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
79
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
3.2.9 HDMI
Table 3-15. HDMI Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
–
HDMI_CLKP
AG18
O
VDDA_HDMI_
1P8
–
HDMI Clock Output.
When the HDMI PHY is powered down, these pins
should be left unconnected.
–
HDMI_CLKN
HDMI_DN2
HDMI_DP2
HDMI_DN1
HDMI_DP1
HDMI_DN0
HDMI_DP0
AH18
AH21
AG21
AH20
AG20
AH19
AG19
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
VDDA_HDMI_
1P8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
VDDA_HDMI_
1P8
HDMI Data 2 output.
When the HDMI PHY is powered down, these pins
should be left unconnected.
–
VDDA_HDMI_
1P8
–
VDDA_HDMI_
1P8
HDMI Data 1 output.
When the HDMI PHY is powered down, these pins
should be left unconnected.
–
VDDA_HDMI_
1P8
–
VDDA_HDMI_
1P8
HDMI Data 0 output.
When the HDMI PHY is powered down, these pins
should be left unconnected.
–
VDDA_HDMI_
1P8
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[2]/
GPMC_A[13]/
VIN[1]A_D[21]/
HDMI_SCL/
SPI[2]_SCS[2]/
I2C[2]_SCL/
VOUT[1], GPMC,
VIN[1]ASPI[2],
I2C[2], GP3
PINCNTL228
DSIS: 1
IPU
DVDD
AF27
AF24
AG28
AG24
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
HDMI I2C Serial Clock Output
MM: MUX1
GP3[20]
I2C[1]
PINCNTL78
DSIS: 1
I2C[1]_SCL/
HDMI_SCL
DVDD
MM: MUX0
VOUT[1]_R_CR[3]/
GPMC_A[14]/
VIN[1]A_D[22]/
HDMI_SDA/
SPI[2]_SCLK/
I2C[2]_SDA/
GP3[21]
VOUT[1], GPMC,
VIN[1]ASPI[2],
I2C[2], GP3
PINCNTL229
DSIS: 1
IPU
DVDD
HDMI I2C Serial Data I/O
MM: MUX1
I2C[1]
PINCNTL79
DSIS: 1
I2C[1]_SDA/
HDMI_SDA
DVDD
MM: MUX0
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
80
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-15. HDMI Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[2]/
GPMC_A[0]/
VIN[1]A_D[7]/
HDMI_CEC/
SPI[2]_D[0]/
VOUT[1], GPMC,
VIN[1]A, SPI[2],
GP3
PINCNTL231
DSIS: 1
IPU
DVDD
AF28
I/O
GP3[30]
MM: MUX1
HDMI Consumer Electronics Control I/O
GPMC_A[22]/
SPI[2]_D[1]/
HDMI_CEC/
TIM4_IO/
GPMC, SPI[2],
TIMER4, GP1
PINCNTL111
DSIS: 1
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
AB27
AE27
AA26
I/O
GP1[17]
MM: MUX0
VOUT[1]_R_CR[2]/
GPMC_A[15]/
VIN[1]A_D[23]/
HDMI_HPDET/
SPI[2]_D[1]/
VOUT[1], GPMC,
VIN[1]ASPI[2],
GP3
PINCNTL230
DSIS: 0
IPD
DVDD
I
I
HDMI Hot Plug Detect Input. Signals the connection /
removal of an HDMI cable at the connector.
GP3[22]
MM: MUX1
GPMC_A[23]/
SPI[2]_SCLK/
HDMI_HPDET/
TIM5_IO/
GPMC, SPI[2],
TIMER5, GP1
PINCNTL112
DSIS: 0
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
GP1[18]
MM: MUX0
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
81
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
3.2.10 I2C
Table 3-16. I2C Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
I2C[0]
–
I2C[0] Clock I/O. For proper device operation,
this pin must be pulled up via external resistor.
I2C[0]_SCL
AC4
AB6
I/O
I/O
DVDD
DVDD
PINCNTL263
–
I2C[0] Data I/O. For proper device operation,
this pin must be pulled up via external resistor.
I2C[0]_SDA
PINCNTL264
I2C[1]
HDMI
PINCNTL78
DSIS: 1
I2C[1] Clock I/O. For proper device operation in
I2C mode, this pin must be pulled up via
external resistor.
I2C[1]_SCL/
HDMI_SCL
AF24
AG24
I/O
I/O
DVDD
DVDD
HDMI
PINCNTL79
DSIS: 1
I2C[1] Data I/O. For proper device operation in
I2C mode, this pin must be pulled up via
external resistor.
I2C[1]_SDA/
HDMI_SDA
I2C[2]
VIN[0]A_FLD/
VIN[0]B_VSYNC/
UART5_RXD/
I2C[2]_SCL/
GP2[1]
VIN[0]A, VIN[0]B,UART5,
GP2
IPU
DVDD
AA20
AF27
I/O
I/O
PINCNTL136
DSIS: 1
MM: MUX3
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[2]/
GPMC_A[13]/
VIN[1]A_D[21]/
HDMI_SCL/
SPI[2]_SCS[2]/
I2C[2]_SCL/
VOUT[1], GPMC, VIN[1]A,
HDMI, SPI[2], GP3
PINCNTL228
IPU
DVDD
DSIS: 1
MM: MUX2
I2C[2] Clock I/O. For proper device operation in
I2C mode, this pin must be pulled up via
external resistor.
GP3[20]
VIN[0]A_D[16]/
CAM_D[8]/
I2C[2]_SCL/
GP0[10]
VIN[0]A, CAM I/F, GP0
PINCNTL156
DSIS: 1
IPU
DVDD_C
AA21
AH4
I/O
I/O
MM: MUX1
UART0_DCD/
UART3_RXD/
SPI[0]_SCS[3]/
I2C[2]_SCL/
SD1_POW/
GP1[2]
UART0, UART3, SPI[0],
SD1, GP1
IPU
DVDD
PINCNTL74
DSIS: 1
MM: MUX0
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and the , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
82
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-16. I2C Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
EMAC[0]_MTCLK/
EMAC[0]_RGRXC/
VIN[1]B_D[0]/
SPI[3]_SCS[3]/
I2C[2]_SDA/
EMAC[0], VIN[1]B, SPI[3],
GP3
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
L24
I/O
PINCNTL235
DSIS: 1
MM: MUX3
GP3[23]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[3]/
GPMC_A[14]/
VIN[1]A_D[22]/
HDMI_SDA/
SPI[2]_SCLK/
I2C[2]_SDA/
GP3[21]
VOUT[1], GPMC, VIN[1]A,
HDMI, SPI[2], GP3
PINCNTL229
IPU
DVDD
AG28
I/O
DSIS: 1
MM: MUX2
I2C[2] Data I/O. For proper device operation in
I2C mode, this pin must be pulled up via
external resistor.
VIN[0]A_DE/
VIN[0]B_HSYNC/
UART5_TXD/
I2C[2]_SDA/
GP2[0]
VIN[0]A, VIN[0]B, UART5,
GP2
IPU
DVDD
AE21
AG4
I/O
I/O
PINCNTL135
DSIS: 1
MM: MUX1
UART0_DSR/
UART3_TXD/
SPI[0]_SCS[2]/
I2C[2]_SDA/
SD1_SDWP/
GP1[3]
UART0, UART3, SPI[0],
SD1, GP1
IPU
DVDD
PINCNTL75
DSIS: 1
MM: MUX0
I2C3
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[8]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[4]/
VIN[1]A_D[5]/
I2C[3]_SCL/
VOUT[1], EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, GP3
PINCNTL213
DSIS: 1
IPD
DVDD
AH26
AF20
I/O
I/O
GP3[5]
MM: MUX3
VIN[0]A_D[18]/
CAM_D[10]/
EMAC[1]_RMRXD[1]/
I2C[3]_SCL/
VIN[0]A, CAM I/F,
EMAC[1], GP0
PINCNTL158
DSIS: 1
IPU
DVDD_C
I2C3 Clock I/O. For proper device operation in
I2C mode, this pin must be pulled up via
external resistor.
GP0[12]
MM: MUX2
DCAN0_RX/
UART2_RXD/
I2C[3]_SCL/
GP1[1]
DCAN0, UART2, GP1
PINCNTL69
DSIS: 1
IPU
DVDD
AG6
J1
I/O
I/O
MM: MUX1
MCA[0]
PINCNTL22
DSIS: 1
MCA[0]_AXR[1]/
I2C[3]_SCL
IPU
DVDD
MM: MUX0
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[9]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[5]/
VIN[1]A_D[6]/
I2C[3]_SDA/
VOUT[1], EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, GP3
PINCNTL214
DSIS: 1
IPD
DVDD
AA24
AF21
I/O
I/O
GP3[6]
MM: MUX3
VIN[0]A_D[19]/
CAM_D[11]/
EMAC[1]_RMRXD[0]/
I2C[3]_SDA/
GP0[13]
VIN[0]A, CAM I/F,
EMAC[1], GP0
PINCNTL159
DSIS: 1
IPU
DVDD_C
I2C3 Data I/O. For proper device operation in
I2C mode, this pin must be pulled up via
external resistor.
MM: MUX2
DCAN0_TX/
UART2_TXD/
I2C[3]_SDA/
GP1[0]
DCAN0, UART2, GP1
PINCNTL68
DSIS: 1
IPU
DVDD
AH6
L4
I/O
I/O
MM: MUX1
MCA[0]
PINCNTL23
DSIS: 1
MCA[0]_AXR[2]/
I2C[3]_SDA
IPU
DVDD
MM: MUX0
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
83
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
3.2.11 McASP
Table 3-17. McASP0 Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
McASP0
MCA[5]
PINCNTL19
DSIS: 0
MCA[0]_ACLKR/
MCA[5]_AXR[2]
IPD
DVDD
K2
I/O
McASP0 Receive Bit Clock I/O
MCA[5]
PINCNTL20
DSIS: 0
MCA[0]_AFSR/
MCA[5]_AXR[3]
IPD
DVDD
K1
R4
I/O
I/O
McASP0 Receive Frame Sync I/O
McASP0 Transmit Bit Clock I/O
IPD
DVDD
–
MCA[0]_ACLKX
PINCNTL17
AUD_CLKIN0/
AUD_CLKIN0,
MCA[0], MCA[3],
USB1
PINCNTL14
DSIS: PIN
MCA[0]_AXR[7]/
MCA[0]_AHCLKX/
MCA[3]_AHCLKX/
USB1_DRVVBUS
IPD
DVDD
L5
L3
I/O
I/O
McASP0 Transmit High-Frequency Master Clock I/O
McASP0 Transmit Frame Sync I/O
IPD
DVDD
–
MCA[0]_AFSX
PINCNTL18
AUD_CLKIN2/
MCA[0]_AXR[9]/
MCA[2]_AHCLKX/
MCA[5]_AHCLKX/
EDMA_EVT2/
TIM3_IO/
AUD_CLKIN2,
MCA[1], MCA[4],
EDMA, TIMER2,
GP0
PINCNTL16
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
H1
M6
R5
I/O
I/O
I/O
GP0[9]
MM: MUX1
MCB
MCA[0]_AXR[9]/
MCB_CLKX/
MCB_CLKR
IPD
DVDD
PINCNTL30
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX0
AUD_CLKIN1/
MCA[0]_AXR[8]/
MCA[1]_AHCLKX/
MCA[4]_AHCLKX/
EDMA_EVT3/
TIM2_IO/
AUD_CLKIN1,
MCA[1], MCA[4],
EDMA, TIMER2,
GP0
PINCNTL15
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
McASP0 Transmit/Receive Data I/Os
GP0[8]
MM: MUX1
MCB
MCA[0]_AXR[8]/
MCB_FSX/
MCB_FSR
IPD
DVDD
PINCNTL29
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX0
L1
L5
L2
I/O
I/O
I/O
AUD_CLKIN0,
MCA[0], MCA[3],
USB1
PINCNTL14
DSIS: PIN
AUD_CLKIN0/
MCA[0]_AXR[7]/
MCA[0]_AHCLKX/
MCA[3]_AHCLKX/
USB1_DRVVBUS
IPD
DVDD
MM: MUX1
MCB
MCA[0]_AXR[7]/
MCB_DX
IPD
DVDD
PINCNTL28
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX0
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull during and after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
84
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-17. McASP0 Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
MCB
PINCNTL27
DSIS: PIN
MCA[0]_AXR[6]/
MCB_DR
IPD
DVDD
M4
I/O
MCA[1]
PINCNTL26
DSIS: PIN
MCA[0]_AXR[5]/
MCA[1]_AXR[9]
IPD
DVDD
M3
I/O
MCA[1]
PINCNTL25
DSIS: PIN
MCA[0]_AXR[4]/
MCA[1]_AXR[8]
IPD
DVDD
R6
M5
L4
I/O
I/O
I/O
IPD
DVDD
PINCNTL24
DSIS: PIN
McASP0 Transmit/Receive Data I/Os
MCA[0]_AXR[3]/
I2C[3]
PINCNTL23
DSIS: PIN
MCA[0]_AXR[2]/
I2C[3]_SDA
IPU
DVDD
I2C[3]
PINCNTL22
DSIS: PIN
MCA[0]_AXR[1]/
I2C[3]_SCL
IPU
DVDD
J1
J2
I/O
I/O
IPD
DVDD
PINCNTL21
DSIS: PIN
MCA[0]_AXR[0]
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
85
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-18. McASP1 Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
McASP1
MCA[1]
PINCNTL33
DSIS: 0
MCA[1]_ACLKR/
MCA[1]_AXR[4]
IPD
DVDD
M1
I/O
McASP1 Receive Bit Clock I/O
MCA[1]
PINCNTL34
DSIS: 0
MCA[1]_AFSR/
MCA[1]_AXR[5]
IPD
DVDD
M2
U5
I/O
I/O
McASP1 Receive Frame Sync I/O
McASP1 Transmit Bit Clock I/O
IPD
DVDD
–
MCA[1]_ACLKX
PINCNTL31
AUD_CLKIN1/
MCA[0]_AXR[8]/
MCA[1]_AHCLKX/
MCA[4]_AHCLKX/
EDMA_EVT3/
TIM2_IO/
AUD_CLKIN1,
MCA[0], MCA[4],
EDMA, TIMER2,
GP0
PINCNTL15
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
R5
I/O
McASP1 Transmit High-Frequency Master Clock I/O
McASP1 Transmit Frame Sync I/O
GP0[8]
IPD
DVDD
–
MCA[1]_AFSX
V3
J6
I/O
I/O
PINCNTL32
MCA[3]
MCA[3]_AXR[3]/
MCA[1]_AXR[9]/
IPD
DVDD
PINCNTL50
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX1
MCA[0]
MCA[0]_AXR[5]/
MCA[1]_AXR[9]
IPD
DVDD
PINCNTL26
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX0
M3
F2
R6
H2
V5
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
MCA[3], GP0
PINCNTL49
DSIS: PIN
MCA[3]_AXR[2]/
MCA[1]_AXR[8]/
GP0[20]
IPD
DVDD
MM: MUX1
MCA[0]
MCA[0]_AXR[4]/
MCA[1]_AXR[8]
IPD
DVDD
PINCNTL25
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX0
MCA[2]_AXR[3]/
MCA[1]_AXR[7]/
TIM3_IO/
MCA[2], TIMER3,
GP0
PINCNTL44
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
McASP1 Transmit/Receive Data I/Os
GP0[15]
MCA[2]_AXR[2]/
MCA[1]_AXR[6]/
TIM2_IO/
MCA[2], TIMER2,
GP0
PINCNTL43
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
GP0[14]
MCA[1]
PINCNTL34
DSIS: PIN
MCA[1]_AFSR/
MCA[1]_AXR[5]
IPD
DVDD
M2
M1
N6
R3
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
MCA[1]
PINCNTL33
DSIS: PIN
MCA[1]_ACLKR/
MCA[1]_AXR[4]
IPD
DVDD
MCB
PINCNTL38
DSIS: PIN
MCA[1]_AXR[3]/
MCB_CLKR
IPD
DVDD
MCB
PINCNTL37
DSIS: PIN
MCA[1]_AXR[2]/
MCB_FSR
IPD
DVDD
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull during and after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
86
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-18. McASP1 Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
SD0
PINCNTL36
DSIS: PIN
MCA[1]_AXR[1]/
SD0_DAT[5]/
IPU
DVDD
T6
I/O
McASP1 Transmit/Receive Data I/Os
SD0
MCA[1]_AXR[0]/
SD0_DAT[4]/
IPU
DVDD
V4
I/O
PINCNTL35
DSIS: PIN
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
87
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-19. McASP2 Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
McASP2
GP0
PINCNTL39
DSIS: 0
MCA[2]_ACLKX/
GP0[10]
IPU
DVDD
U6
I/O
McASP2 Transmit Bit Clock I/O
AUD_CLKIN2/
MCA[0]_AXR[9]/
MCA[2]_AHCLKX/
MCA[5]_AHCLKX/
EDMA_EVT2/
TIM3_IO/
AUD_CLKIN2,
MCA[0], MCA[5],
EDMA, TIMER3,
GP0
PINCNTL16
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
H1
I/O
McASP2 Transmit High-Frequency Master Clock I/O
McASP2 Transmit Frame Sync I/O
GP0[9]
GP0
PINCNTL40
DSIS: 0
MCA[2]_AFSX/
GP0[11]
IPU
DVDD
AA5
H2
I/O
I/O
MCA[2]_AXR[3]/
MCA[1]_AXR[7]/
TIM3_IO/
MCA[1], TIMER3,
GP0
PINCNTL44
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
GP0[15]
MCA[2]_AXR[2]/
MCA[1]_AXR[6]/
TIM2_IO/
MCA[1], TIMER2,
GP0
PINCNTL43
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
V5
V6
N2
I/O
I/O
I/O
GP0[14]
McASP2 Transmit/Receive Data I/Os
MCA[2]_AXR[1]/
SD0_DAT[7]/
UART5_TXD/
GP0[13]
SD0, UART5, GP0
PINCNTL42
IPU
DVDD
DSIS: PIN
MCA[2]_AXR[0]/
SD0_DAT[6]/
UART5_RXD/
GP0[12]
SD0, UART5, GP0
PINCNTL41
IPU
DVDD
DSIS: PIN
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull during and after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and ,Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
88
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-20. McASP3 Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
McASP3
GP0
PINCNTL45
DSIS: 0
MCA[3]_ACLKX/
GP0[16]
IPD
DVDD
G6
I/O
I/O
McASP3 Transmit Bit Clock I/O
AUD_CLKIN0/
AUD_CLKIN0,
MCA[0], USB1
PINCNTL14
DSIS: PIN
MCA[0]_AXR[7]/
MCA[0]_AHCLKX/
MCA[3]_AHCLKX/
USB1_DRVVBUS
IPD
DVDD
L5
McASP3 Transmit High-Frequency Master Clock I/O
McASP3 Transmit Frame Sync I/O
GP0
PINCNTL46
DSIS: 0
MCA[3]_AFSX/
GP0[17]
IPD
DVDD
H4
J6
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
MCA[1]
PINCNTL50
DSIS: PIN
MCA[3]_AXR[3]/
MCA[1]_AXR[9]/
IPD
DVDD
MCA[3]_AXR[2]/
MCA[1]_AXR[8]/
GP0[20]
MCA[1], GP0
PINCNTL49
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
F2
G2
G1
McASP3 Transmit/Receive Data I/Os
MCA[3]_AXR[1]/
TIM5_IO/
GP0[19]
TIMER5, GP0
PINCNTL48
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
MCA[3]_AXR[0]/
TIM4_IO/
GP0[18]
TIMER4, GP0
PINCNTL47
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull before after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
89
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-21. McASP4 Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
McASP4
GP0
PINCNTL51
DSIS: 0
MCA[4]_ACLKX/
GP0[21]
IPD
DVDD
K7
I/O
McASP4 Transmit Bit Clock I/O
AUD_CLKIN1/
MCA[0]_AXR[8]/
MCA[1]_AHCLKX/
MCA[4]_AHCLKX/
EDMA_EVT3/
TIM2_IO/
AUD_CLKIN1,
MCA[0], MCA[1],
EDMA, TIMER2,
GP0
PINCNTL15
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
R5
I/O
McASP4 Transmit High-Frequency Master Clock I/O
McASP4 Transmit Frame Sync I/O
GP0[8]
GP0
PINCNTL52
DSIS: 0
MCA[4]_AFSX/
GP0[22]
IPD
DVDD
H3
L6
I/O
I/O
MCA[5]_AXR[1]/
MCA[4]_AXR[3]/
TIM7_IO/
MCA[5], TIMER7,
GP0
PINCNTL58
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
GP0[28]
MCA[5]_AXR[0]/
MCA[4]_AXR[2]/
GP0[27]
MCA[5], GP0
PINCNTL57
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
L7
J4
I/O
I/O
I/O
McASP4 Transmit/Receive Data I/Os
MCA[4]_AXR[1]/
TIM6_IO/
GP0[24]
TIMER6, GP0
PINCNTL54
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
GP0
PINCNTL53
DSIS: PIN
MCA[4]_AXR[0]/
GP0[23]
IPD
DVDD
H6
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull during and after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
90
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-22. McASP5 Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
McASP5
GP0
PINCNTL55
DSIS: 0
MCA[5]_ACLKX/
GP0[25]
IPD
DVDD
J3
I/O
McASP5 Transmit Bit Clock I/O
AUD_CLKIN2/
MCA[0]_AXR[9]/
MCA[2]_AHCLKX/
MCA[5]_AHCLKX/
EDMA_EVT2/
TIM3_IO/
AUD_CLKIN2,
MCA[0], MCA[2],
EDMA, TIMER3,
GP0
PINCNTL16
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
H1
I/O
McASP5 Transmit High-Frequency Master Clock I/O
McASP5 Transmit Frame Sync I/O
GP0[9]
GP0
PINCNTL56
DSIS: 0
MCA[5]_AFSX/
GP0[26]
IPD
DVDD
H5
K1
K2
I/O
I/O
I/O
MCA[0]
PINCNTL20
DSIS: PIN
MCA[0]_AFSR/
MCA[5]_AXR[3]
IPD
DVDD
MCA[0]
PINCNTL19
DSIS: PIN
MCA[0]_ACLKR/
MCA[5]_AXR[2]
IPD
DVDD
McASP5 Transmit/Receive Data I/Os
MCA[5]_AXR[1]/
MCA[4]_AXR[3]/
TIM7_IO/
MCA[4], TIMER7,
GP0
PINCNTL58
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
L6
L7
I/O
I/O
GP0[28]
MCA[5]_AXR[0]/
MCA[4]_AXR[2]/
GP0[27]
MCA[4], GP0
PINCNTL57
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull during and after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
91
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
3.2.12 McBSP
Table 3-23. McBSP Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
McBSP
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
M6
N6
L1
MCA[0], MCB
PINCNTL30
DSIS: PIN
MCA[0]_AXR[9]/
MCB_CLKX/
MCB_CLKR
IPD
DVDD
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
MM: MUX1
McBSP Receive Clock I/O
MCA[1]
MCA[1]_AXR[3]/
MCB_CLKR
IPD
DVDD
PINCNTL38
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX0
MCA[0], MCB
PINCNTL29
DSIS: PIN
MCA[0]_AXR[8]/
MCB_FSX/
MCB_FSR
IPD
DVDD
MM: MUX1
McBSP Receive Frame Sync I/O
MCA[1], MCB
PINCNTL37
DSIS: PIN
MCA[1]_AXR[2]/
MCB_FSR
IPD
DVDD
R3
MM: MUX0
MCA[0]
PINCNTL27
DSIS: PIN
MCA[0]_AXR[6]/
MCB_DR
IPD
DVDD
M4
M6
L1
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
McBSP Receive Data Input
McBSP Transmit Clock I/O
McBSP Transmit Frame Sync I/O
McBSP Transmit Data Output
MCA[0]_AXR[9]/
MCB_CLKX/
MCB_CLKR
MCA[0], MCB
PINCNTL30
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
MCA[0]_AXR[8]/
MCB_FSX/
MCB_FSR
MCA[0], MCB
PINCNTL29
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
MCA[0]
PINCNTL28
DSIS: PIN
MCA[0]_AXR[7]/
MCB_DX
IPD
DVDD
L2
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull during and after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
92
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
3.2.13 PCI Express (PCIe)
Table 3-24. PCI Express (PCIe) Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
PCIE_TXP0
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
DESCRIPTION
PCIE Transmit Data Lane 0.
NO.
AD2
O
O
I
–
When the PCIe SERDES are powered down, these pins should be
left unconnected.
VDDA_PCIE_1P8
PCIE_TXN0
PCIE_RXP0
PCIE_RXN0
AD1
AC2
AC1
PCIE Receive Data Lane 0.
–
When the PCIe SERDES are powered down, these pins should be
left unconnected.
VDDA_PCIE_1P8
I
–
PCIE Serdes Reference Clock Inputs and optional SATA
Reference Clock Inputs.
Shared between PCI Express and Serial ATA. When PCI Express
is not used, and these pins are not used as optional SATA
Reference Clock Inputs, these pins can be left unconnected.
SERDES_CLKP
SERDES_CLKN
AF1
AF2
I
I
SERDES_CLK LDO
(internal)
–
SERDES_CLK LDO
(internal)
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
93
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
3.2.14 Reset, Interrupts, and JTAG Interface
Table 3-25. RESET, Interrupts, and JTAG Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
RESET
DESCRIPTION
NO.
IPU
DVDD
–
RESET
POR
J5
I
I
Device Reset input
PINCNTL260
–
F1
–
Power-On Reset input
DVDD
Reset output (RSTOUT) or watchdog out (WD_OUT)
DIS
DVDD
–
RSTOUT_WD_OUT
K6
H7
O
For more detailed information on RSTOUT_WD_OUT pin
behavior, see Section 7.3.14, RSTOUT_WD_OUT Pin.
PINCNTL262
INTERRUPTS
IPU
DVDD
–
NMI
I
Non-Maskable Interrupt input
PINCNTL261
Interrupt-capable general-purpose I/Os.
see
Table 3-10
see
NOTE
see
NOTE: All pins are multiplexed with other pin functions.
GP0[31:0]
I/O
Table 3-10 See Table 3-10, GP0 Terminal Functions table for muxing
and internal pullup/pulldown/disable details.
Interrupt-capable general-purpose I/Os.
see
Table 3-11
see
NOTE
see
NOTE: All pins are multiplexed with other pin functions.
GP1[31:0]
GP2[31:0]
GP3[31:0]
I/O
I/O
I/O
Table 3-11 See Table 3-11, GP1 Terminal Functions table for muxing
and internal pullup/pulldown/disable details.
Interrupt-capable general-purpose I/Os.
NOTE: All pins are multiplexed with other pin functions.
see
Table 3-12
see
NOTE
see
Table 3-12 See Table 3-12, GP2 Terminal Functions table for muxing
and internal pullup/pulldown/disable details.
Interrupt-capable general-purpose I/Os.
NOTE: All pins are multiplexed with other pin functions.
see
Table 3-13
see
NOTE
see
Table 3-13 See Table 3-13, GP3 Terminal Functions table for muxing
and internal pullup/pulldown/disable details.
JTAG
IPU
DVDD
TCLK
RTCK
W7
I
–
–
JTAG test clock input
JTAG return clock output
IPU/DIS
DVDD
The internal pullup (IPU) is enabled for this pin when the
device is in reset and the IPU is disabled (DIS) when reset
is released.
AD4
O
IPU
DVDD
TDI
Y7
I
O
I
–
–
–
–
JTAG test data input
IPU
DVDD
TDO
TMS
TRST
AC5
AA7
AA4
JTAG test port data output
IPU
DVDD
JTAG test port mode select input. For proper operation, do
not oppose the IPU on this pin.
IPD
DVDD
I
JTAG test port reset input
VOUT[0],
GP2
PINCNTL196
DSIS: PIN
VOUT[0]_R_CR[2]/
EMU4/
GP2[26]
IPD
DVDD
AD9
AH7
I/O
I/O
Emulator pin 4
VOUT[0],
GP2
PINCNTL188
DSIS: PIN
VOUT[0]_G_Y_YC[2]/
EMU3/
GP2[24]
IPD
DVDD
Emulator pin 3
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull during and after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
94
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-25. RESET, Interrupts, and JTAG Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
VOUT[0],
GP0
PINCNTL180
DSIS: PIN
VOUT[0]_B_CB_C[2]/
EMU2/
GP2[22]
IPD
DVDD
AG7
I/O
Emulator pin 2
IPU
DVDD
EMU1
EMU0
AE11
AG8
I/O
I/O
–
–
Emulator pin 1
Emulator pin 0
IPU
DVDD
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
95
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
3.2.15 Serial ATA (SATA) Signals
Table 3-26. Serial ATA (SATA) Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
–
Serial ATA Data Transmit.
SATA_TXN0
SATA_TXP0
SATA_RXN0
SATA_RXP0
AB1
O
O
I
–
–
–
–
VDDA_SATA_1P8
When the SATA SERDES are powered down, these
pins should be left unconnected.
–
AB2
AA2
AA1
VDDA_SATA_1P8
–
Serial ATA Data Receive.
VDDA_SATA_1P8
When the SATA SERDES are powered down, these
pins should be left unconnected.
–
I
VDDA_SATA_1P8
SPI[0]_SCS[1]/
SD1_SDCD/
SATA_ACT0_LED/
EDMA_EVT1/
TIM4_IO/
SPI[0], SD1,
EDMA, TIMER 4,
GP1
PINCNTL80
DSIS: N/A
IPU
DVDD
AE5
O
Serial ATA disk 0 Activity LED output
GP1[6]
–
PCIE Serdes Reference Clock Inputs and optional
SATA Reference Clock Inputs.
Shared between PCI Express and Serial ATA. When
PCI Express is not used, and these pins are not used
as optional SATA Reference Clock Inputs, these pins
should be left unconnected.
SERDES_CLKP
SERDES_CLKN
AF1
AF2
I
I
SERDES_CLK
LDO (internal)
–
–
–
SERDES_CLK
LDO (internal)
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull during and after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
96
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
3.2.16 SD Signals (MMC/SD/SDIO)
Table 3-27. SD0 Terminal Functions
OTHER(2)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
(3)
NO.
GP0
PINCNTL8
DSIS: 1
SD0_CLK/
GP0[1]
IPU
DVDD_SD
Y6
O
SD0 Clock output
SD0_CMD/
SD1_CMD/
GP0[2]
SD1, GP0
PINCNTL9
DSIS: 1
IPU
DVDD_SD
N1
R7
Y5
Y3
Y4
V4
T6
O
SD0 Command output
SD0_DAT[0]/
SD1_DAT[4]/
GP0[3]
SD1, GP0
PINCNTL10
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_SD
SD0 Data0 I/O. Functions as data bit 0 for 4-/8-bit SD mode
and single data bit for 1-bit SD mode.
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
SD0_DAT[1]_SDIRQ/
SD1_DAT[5]/
GP0[4]
SD1, GP0
PINCNTL11
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_SD
SD0 Data1 I/O. Functions as data bit 1 for 4-/8-bit SD mode
and as an IRQ input for 1-bit SD mode.
SD0_DAT[2]_SDRW/
SD1_DAT[6]/
GP0[5]
SD1, GP0
PINCNTL12
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_SD
SD0 Data2 I/O. Functions as data bit 2 for 4-/8-bit SD mode
and as a Read Wait input for 1-bit SD mode.
SD0_DAT[3]/
SD1_DAT[7]/
GP0[6]
SD1, GP0
PINCNTL13
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_SD
SD0 Data3 I/O. Functions as data bit 3 for 4-/8-bit SD mode.
SD0 Data4 I/O. Functions as data bit 4 for 8-bit SD mode.
SD0 Data5 I/O. Functions as data bit 5 for 8-bit SD mode.
MCA[1]
PINCNTL35
DSIS: PIN
MCA[1]_AXR[0]/
SD0_DAT[4]/
IPU
DVDD
MCA[1], SC0
PINCNTL36
DSIS: PIN
MCA[1]_AXR[1]/
SD0_DAT[5]/
IPU
DVDD
MCA[2]_AXR[0]/
SD0_DAT[6]/
UART5_RXD/
GP0[12]
MCA[2], UART5,
GP0
PINCNTL41
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD
N2
V6
I/O
I/O
SD0 Data6 I/O. Functions as data bit 6 for 8-bit SD mode.
SD0 Data7 I/O. Functions as data bit 7 for 8-bit SD mode.
MCA[2]_AXR[1]/
SD0_DAT[7]/
UART5_TXD/
GP0[13]
MCA[2], UART5,
GP0
PINCNTL42
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD
UART0_CTS/
UART4_RXD/
DCAN1_TX/
SPI[1]_SCS[3]/
SD0_SDCD
UART0, UART4,
DCAN1, SPI[1]
PINCNTL72
DSIS: 1
IPD
DVDD
AE6
I
SD0 Card Detect input
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
97
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-28. SD1 Terminal Functions
OTHER(2)
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
(3)
NAME
NO.
–
IPU
DVDD_SD
SD1_CLK
P3
O
PINCNTL1
DSIS: N/A
SD1 Clock output
SD0, GP0
PINCNTL9
DSIS: N/A
MM: MUX1
SD0_CMD/
SD1_CMD/
GP0[2]
IPU
DVDD_SD
N1
P2
O
O
SD1 Command output
GP1
SD1_CMD/
GP0[0]
IPU
DVDD_SD
PINCNTL2
DSIS: N/A
MM: MUX0
IPU
DVDD_SD
–
SD1 Data0 I/O. Functions as data bit 0 for 4-/8-bit SD mode
and single data bit for 1-bit SD mode.
SD1_DAT[0]
P1
P5
P4
P6
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
PINCNTL3
IPU
DVDD_SD
–
SD1 Data1 I/O. Functions as data bit 1 for 4-/8-bit SD mode
and as an IRQ input for 1-bit SD mode.
SD1_DAT[1]_SDIRQ
SD1_DAT[2]_SDRW
SD1_DAT[3]
PINCNTL4
IPU
DVDD_SD
–
SD1 Data2 I/O. Functions as data bit 2 for 4-/8-bit SD mode
and as a Read Wait input for 1-bit SD mode.
PINCNTL5
IPU
DVDD_SD
–
SD1 Data3 I/O. Functions as data bit 3 for 4-/8-bit SD mode.
PINCNTL6
SD0_DAT[0]/
SD1_DAT[4]/
GP0[3]
SD0, GP0
PINCNTL10
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_SD
R7
Y5
Y3
Y4
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
SD1 Data4 I/O. Functions as data bit 4 for 8-bit SD mode.
SD0_DAT[1]_SDIRQ/
SD1_DAT[5]/
GP0[4]
SD0, GP0
PINCNTL11
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_SD
SD1 Data5 I/O. Functions as data bit 5 for 8-bit SD mode.
SD1 Data6 I/O. Functions as data bit 6 for 8-bit SD mode.
SD1 Data7 I/O. Functions as data bit 7 for 8-bit SD mode.
SD0_DAT[2]_SDRW/
SD1_DAT[6]/
GP0[5]
SD0, GP0
PINCNTL12
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_SD
SD0_DAT[3]/
SD1_DAT[7]/
GP0[6]
SD0, GP0
PINCNTL13
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_SD
UART0_DCD/
UART3_RXD/
SPI[0]_SCS[3]/
I2C[2]_SCL/
SD1_POW/
GP1[2]
UART0, UART3,
SPI[0], I2C[2], GP1
PINCNTL74
IPU
DVDD
AH4
AE5
AG4
O
SD1 Card Power Enable output
SD1 Card Detect input
DSIS: PIN
SPI[0]_SCS[1]/
SD1_SDCD/
SATA_ACT0_LED/
EDMA_EVT1/
TIM4_IO/
SPI[0], SATA,
EDMA, TIM4, GP1
PINCNTL80
IPU
DVDD
I
DSIS: 1
GP1[6]
UART0_DSR/
UART3_TXD/
SPI[0]_SCS[2]/
I2C[2]_SDA/
SD1_SDWP/
GP1[3]
UART0, UART3,
SPI[0], I2C[2], GP1
PINCNTL75
IPU
DVDD
I
SD1 Card Write Protect input
DSIS: 0
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
98
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-29. SD2 Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
GP1
PINCNTL121
DSIS: N/A
SD2_SCLK/
GP1[15]
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
M23
O
SD2 Clock output
GPMC_CS[4]/
SD2_CMD/
GP1[8]
GPMC, GP1
PINCNTL126
DSIS: N/A
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
P25
L26
M24
K27
J28
O
SD2 Command output
SD2_DAT[0]/
GPMC_A[4]/
GP1[14]
GPMC, GP1
PINCNTL120
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
SD2 Data0 I/O. Functions as data bit 0 for 4-/8-bit SD
mode and single data bit for 1-bit SD mode.
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
SD2_DAT[1]_SDIRQ/
GPMC_A[3]/
GP1[13]
GMPC, GP1
PINCNTL119
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
SD2 Data1 I/O. Functions as data bit 1 for 4-/8-bit SD
mode and as an IRQ input for 1-bit SD mode
SD2_DAT[2]_SDRW/
GPMC_A[2]/
GP2[6]
GPMC, GP2
PINCNTL118
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
SD2 Data2 I/O. Functions as data bit 2 for 4-/8-bit SD
mode and as a Read Wait input for 1-bit SD mode.
SD2_DAT[3]/
GPMC_A[1]/
GP2[5]
GPMC, GP2
PINCNTL117
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
SD2 Data3 I/O. Functions as data bit 3 for 4-/8-bit SD
mode.
SD2_DAT[4]/
GPMC_A[27]/
GPMC_A[23]/
GPMC_CS[7]/
EDMA_EVT0/
TIM7_IO/
GPMC, EDMA,
TIM7, GP1
PINCNTL116
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
R24
I/O
SD2 Data4 I/O. Functions as data bit 4 for 8-bit SD mode.
GP1[22]
SD2_DAT[5]/
GPMC_A[26]/
GPMC_A[22]/
TIM6_IO/
GPMC, TIM6,
GP1
PINCNTL115
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
P22
N23
L25
AF5
I/O
I/O
I/O
I
SD2 Data5 I/O. Functions as data bit 5 for 8-bit SD mode.
SD2 Data6 I/O. Functions as data bit 6 for 8-bit SD mode.
SD2 Data7 I/O. Functions as data bit 7 for 8-bit SD mode.
SD2 Card Detect input.
GP1[21]
SD2_DAT[6]/
GPMC_A[25]/
GPMC_A[21]/
UART2_TXD/
GP1[20]
GPMC, UART2,
GP1
PINCNTL114
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
SD2_DAT[7]/
GPMC_A[24]/
GPMC_A[20]/
UART2_RXD/
GP1[19]
GPMC, UART2,
GP1
PINCNTL113
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
UART0_RTS/
UART4_TXD/
DCAN1_RX/
SPI[1]_SCS[2]/
SD2_SDCD
UART0, UART4,
DCAN1, SPI[1]
PINCNTL73
DSIS: 1
IPD
DVDD
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull during and after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
99
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
3.2.17 SPI
Table 3-30. SPI 0 Terminal Functions
OTHER(2)
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
(3)
NAME
NO.
IPU
DVDD
–
SPI[0]_SCLK
AC7
I/O
SPI Clock I/O
PINCNTL82
UART0_DCD/
UART3_RXD/
SPI[0]_SCS[3]/
I2C[2]_SCL/
SD1_POW/
GP1[2]
UART0, UART3,
I2C[2], SD1, GP1
PINCNTL74
IPU
DVDD
AH4
AG4
AE5
I/O
I/O
I/O
DSIS: PIN
UART0_DSR/
UART3_TXD/
SPI[0]_SCS[2]/
I2C[2]_SDA/
SD1_SDWP/
GP1[3]
UART0, UART3,
I2C[2], SD1, GP1
PINCNTL75
IPU
DVDD
SPI Chip Select I/O
DSIS: PIN
SPI[0]_SCS[1]/
SD1_SDCD/
SATA_ACT0_LED/
EDMA_EVT1/
TIM4_IO/
SD1, SATA,
EDMA, TIMER4,
GP1
PINCNTL80
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD
GP1[6]
IPU
DVDD
–
SPI[0]_SCS[0]
SPI[0]_D[1]
AD6
AF3
AE3
I/O
I/O
I/O
PINCNTL81
IPU
DVDD
–
PINCNTL83
SPI Data I/O. Can be configured as either MISO or MOSI
IPU
DVDD
–
SPI[0]_D[0]
PINCNTL84
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull during and after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
100
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-31. SPI 1 Terminal Functions
OTHER(2)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
(3)
NO.
GP1
IPU
DVDD
SPI[1]_SCLK/
GP1[17]
AC3
I/O
PINCNTL86
DSIS: PIN
SPI Clock I/O
UART0_CTS/
UART4_RXD/
DCAN1_TX/
SPI[1]_SCS[3]/
SD0_SDCD
UART0, UART4,
DCAN1, SD0
PINCNTL72
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD
AE6
I/O
UART0_RTS/
UART4_TXD/
DCAN1_RX/
SPI[1]_SCS[2]/
SD2_SDCD
UART0, UART4,
DCAN1, SD2
PINCNTL73
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD
AF5
W6
I/O
I/O
SPI Chip Select I/O
DEVOSC_WAKE/
SPI[1]_SCS[1]/
TIM5_IO/
DEVOSC,
TIMER5, GP1
PINCNTL7
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_SD
GP1[7]
GP1
PINCNTL85
DSIS: PIN
SPI[1]_SCS[0]/
GP1[16]
IPU
DVDD
AD3
AA3
AA6
I/O
I/O
I/O
GP1
PINCNTL87
DSIS: PIN
SPI[1]_D[1]/
GP1[18]
IPU
DVDD
SPI Data I/O. Can be configured as either MISO or MOSI
GP1
PINCNTL88
DSIS: PIN
SPI[1]_D[0]/
GP1[26]
IPU
DVDD
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull during and after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
101
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-32. SPI 2 Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1], GPMC
PINCNTL248
DSIS: 1
EMAC[0]_MRXDV/
EMAC[1]_RGRXD[1]/
GPMC_A[5]/
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
K22
I/O
SPI[2]_SCLK
MM: MUX2
VOUT[1]_R_CR[3]/
GPMC_A[14]/
VIN[1]A_D[22]/
HDMI_SDA/
SPI[2]_SCLK/
I2C[2]_SDA/
GP3[21]
VOUT[1], GPMC,
VIN[1]A, HDMI,
I2C[2], GP3
PINCNTL229
DSIS: 1
IPU
DVDD
AG28
I/O
SPI Clock I/O
MM: MUX1
GPMC_A[23]/
SPI[2]_SCLK/
HDMI_HPDET/
TIM5_IO/
GPMC, HDMI,
TIMER5, GP1
PINCNTL112
DSIS: 1
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
AA26
G27
I/O
I/O
GP1[18]
MM: MUX0
EMAC[0]_MRXD[7]/
EMAC[0]_RGTXD[1]/
GPMC_A[4]/
EMAC[0], GPMC
PINCNTL247
DSIS: 1
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
SPI[2]_SCS[3]/
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[2]/
GPMC_A[13]/
VIN[1]A_D[21]/
HDMI_SCL/
SPI[2]_SCS[2]/
I2C[2]_SCL/
VOUT[1].
VIN[1]A, HDMI,
I2C[2], GP3
PINCNTL228
DSIS: 1
IPU
DVDD
AF27
I/O
SPI Chip Select I/O
GP3[20]
GPMC_A[20]/
SPI[2]_SCS[1]/
GP1[15]
GPMC, GP1
PINCNTL109
DSIS: 1
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
AD28
P26
I/O
I/O
GPMC_CS[3]/
VIN[1]B_CLK/
SPI[2]_SCS[0]/
GP1[26]
GPMC, VIN[1]B,
GP1
PINCNTL125
DSIS: 1
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull during and after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
102
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-32. SPI 2 Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1], GPMC
PINCNTL249
DSIS: PIN
EMAC[0]_GMTCLK/
EMAC[1]_RGRXC/
GPMC_A[6]/
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
K23
I/O
SPI[2]_D[1]
MM: MUX2
VOUT[1]_R_CR[2]/
GPMC_A[15]/
VIN[1]A_D[23]/
HDMI_HPDET/
SPI[2]_D[1]/
VOUT[1], GPMC,
VIN[1]A, HDMI,
GP3
PINCNTL230
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
AE27
I/O
GP3[22]
MM: MUX1
GPMC_A[22]/
SPI[2]_D[1]/
HDMI_CEC/
TIM4_IO/
GPMC, HDMI,
TIMER 4, GP1
PINCNTL111
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
AB27
J24
I/O
I/O
GP1[17]
MM: MUX0
SPI Data I/O. Can be configured as either MISO or MOSI
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1], GPMC
PINCNTL250
DSIS: PIN
EMAC[0]_MTXD[0]/
EMAC[1]_RGRXD[3]/
GPMC_A[7]/
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
SPI[2]_D[0]
MM: MUX2
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[2]/
GPMC_A[0]/
VIN[1]A_D[7]/
HDMI_CEC/
SPI[2]_D[0]/
GP3[30]
VOUT[1], GPMC,
VIN[1]A, HDMI,
GP3
PINCNTL231
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD
AF28
AC28
I/O
I/O
MM: MUX1
GPMC, GP1
PINCNTL110
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_A[21]/
SPI[2]_D[0]/
GP1[16]
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
MM: MUX0
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
103
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-33. SPI 3 Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
VOUT[0]_AVID/
VOUT[0]_FLD/
SPI[3]_SCLK/
TIM7_IO/
VOUT[0], TIMER
7, GP2
PINCNTL179
DSIS: 1
IPD
DVDD
AA10
I/O
GP2[21]
MM: MUX2
VOUT[0],
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, GP3
PINCNTL223
DSIS: 1
VOUT[1]_R_CR[5]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[4]/
VIN[1]A_D[16]/
SPI[3]_SCLK/
GP3[15]
IPD
DVDD
AC26
I/O
I/O
I/O
SPI Clock I/O
MM: MUX1
VIN[0]A,
CAMERA_I/F,
EMAC[1], GP0
PINCNTL161
DSIS: 1
VIN[0]A_D[21]/
CAM_D[13]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXD[0]/ AE18
SPI[3]_SCLK/
IPD
DVDD_C
GP0[15]
MM: MUX0
EMAC[0]_MTCLK/
EMAC[0]_RGRXC/
VIN[1]B_D[0]/
SPI[3]_SCS[3]/
I2C[2]_SDA/
GP3[23]
EMAC[0],
VIN[1]B, I2C[2],
GP3
PINCNTL235
DSIS: 1
IPD
DVDD
L24
EMAC[0]_MRCLK/
EMAC[0]_RGTXC/
VIN[1]B_D[4]/
EMAC[0]_RMCRSDV/
SPI[3]_SCS[2]/
EMAC[0],
VIN[1]B, GP3
PINCNTL239
DSIS: 1
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
H27
I/O
I/O
I/O
GP3[27]
SPI Chip Select I/O
VOUT[1]_R_CR[4]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[3]/
VIN[1]A_D[15]/
SPI[3]_SCS[1]/
GP3[14]
VOUT[1].
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, GP3
PINCNTL222
DSIS: 1
IPD
DVDD
AG27
VIN[0]A,
CAMERA,_I/F,
EMAC[1]_RM,
GP0
PINCNTL160
DSIS: 1
VIN[0]A_D[20]/
CAM_D[12]/
EMAC[1]_RMCRSDV/ AC17
SPI[3]_SCS[0]/
IPD
DVDD_C
GP0[14]
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull during and after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
104
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-33. SPI 3 Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, UART3,
GP2
PINCNTL205
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX2
VOUT[1]_HSYNC/
EMAC[1]_MCOL/
VIN[1]A_VSYNC/
SPI[3]_D[1]/
UART3_RTS/
GP2[29]
IPD
DVDD
AC24
I/O
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, GP3
PINCNTL224
DSIS: PIN
VOUT[1]_R_CR[6]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[5]/
VIN[1]A_D[17]/
SPI[3]_D[1]/
IPD
DVDD
AA25
I/O
I/O
GP3[16]
MM: MUX1
VIN[0]A,
CAMERA_I/F,
EMAC[1]_RM,
GP0
PINCNTL162
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[22]/
CAM_D[14]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXD[1]/ AC21
SPI[3]_D[1]/
IPD
DVDD_C
GP0[16]
MM: MUX0
SPI Data I/O. Can be configured as either MISO or MOSI
VOUT[1]_VSYNC/
EMAC[1]_MCRS/
VIN[1]A_FLD/
VIN[1]A_DE/
SPI[3]_D[0]/
UART3_CTS/
GP2[30]
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, UART3,
GP2
PINCNTL206
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX2
IPD
DVDD
AA23
I/O
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, GP3
PINCNTL225
DSIS: PIN
VOUT[1]_R_CR[7]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[6]/
VIN[1]A_D[18]/
SPI[3]_D[0]/
IPD
DVDD
V22
I/O
I/O
GP3[17]
MM: MUX1
VIN[0]A,
CAMERA_I/F,
EMAC[1], GP0
PINCNTL163
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[23]/
CAM_D[15]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXEN/
SPI[3]_D[0]/
GP0[17]
IPD
DVDD_C
AC16
MM: MUX0
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
105
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
3.2.18 Oscillator/PLL, Audio Reference Clocks, and Clock Generator
Table 3-34. Oscillator/PLL, Audio Reference Clocks, and Clock Generator Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
CLOCK GENERATOR
VIN[0]A_D[12]_BD[4]/
CLKOUT1/
GP2[17]
VIN[0]A, GP2
PINCNTL152
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
AG17
I/O
GPMC_CLK/
GPMC_CS[5]/
GPMC_WAIT[1]/
CLKOUT1/
EDMA_EVT3/
TIM4_IO/
Device Clock output 1. Can be used as a system clock
for other devices.
GPMC, EDMA,
TIM4, GP1
PINCNTL127
DSIS: N/A
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
R26
O
GP1[27]
VIN[0]B_CLK/
CLKOUT0/
GP1[9]
VIN[0]B, GP1
PINCNTL134
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
AE17
J7
I/O
O
Device Clock output 0. Can be used as a system clock
for other devices.
CLKIN32/
CLKOUT0/
TIM3_IO/
GP3[31]
CLKIN32, TIM3,
GP3
PINCNTL259
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD
OSCILLATOR/PLL
Device Crystal input. Crystal connection to internal
oscillator for system clock. Functions as DEV_CLKIN
clock input when an external oscillator is used.
DEVOSC_MXI/
DEV_CLKIN
–
AH2
AH3
AG3
A I
A O
GND
–
VDDA_1P8
Device Crystal output. Crystal connection to internal
oscillator for system clock. When device oscillator is
BYPASSED, leave this pin unconnected.
–
DEVOSC_MXO
VSSA_DEVOSC
–
VDDA_1P8
Supply Ground for DEV Oscillator. If the internal
oscillator is bypassed, DEVOSC_VSS should be
connected to ground (VSS).
Auxiliary Crystal input [Optional Audio/Video Reference
Crystal Input]. Crystal connection to internal oscillator
for auxiliary clock. Functions as AUX_CLKIN clock input
when an external oscillator is used.
AUXOSC_MXI/
AUX_CLKIN
–
R1
A I
–
–
VDDA_1P8
Auxiliary Crystal output [Optional Audio/Video
Reference Crystal Output]. When auxiliary oscillator is
BYPASSED, leave this pin unconnected.
–
AUXOSC_MXO
VSSA_AUXOSC
T1
R2
A O
VDDA_1P8
Supply Ground for AUX Oscillator. If the internal
oscillator is bypassed, AUXOSC_VSS should be
connected to ground (VSS).
GND
CLKIN32/
CLKOUT0/
TIM3_IO/
GP3[31]
CLKOUT0,
TIMER 3, GP3
PINCNTL259
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
RTC Clock input. Optional 32.768 KHz clock for RTC
reference.
J7
I
I
DEVOSC_WAKE/
SPI[1]_SCS[1]/
TIM5_IO/
SPI[1], TIMER 5,
GP1
IPU
DVDD_SD
W6
Oscillator Wake-up input.
PINCNTL7
DSIS: 1
GP1[7]
AUDIO REFERENCE CLOCKS
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull during and after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external
pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
106
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-34. Oscillator/PLL, Audio Reference Clocks, and Clock Generator Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
AUD_CLKIN2/
MCA[0]_AXR[9]/
MCA[2]_AHCLKX/
MCA[5]_AHCLKX/
EDMA_EVT2/
TIM3_IO/
MCA[0], MCA[2],
MCA[5], EDMA,
TIMER 3, GP0
PINCNTL16
IPD
DVDD
H1
I
Audio Reference Clock 2 for Audio Peripherals.
DSIS: PIN
GP0[9]
AUD_CLKIN1/
MCA[0]_AXR[8]/
MCA[1]_AHCLKX/
MCA[4]_AHCLKX/
EDMA_EVT3/
TIM2_IO/
MCA[0], MCA[1],
MCA[4], EDMA,
TIMER 2, GP0
PINCNTL15
IPD
DVDD
R5
L5
I
I
Audio Reference Clock 1 for Audio Peripherals.
Audio Reference Clock 0 for Audio Peripherals.
DSIS: PIN
GP0[8]
AUD_CLKIN0/
MCA[0], MCA[3],
USB1
PINCNTL14
DSIS: PIN
MCA[0]_AXR[7]/
MCA[0]_AHCLKX/
MCA[3]_AHCLKX/US
B1_DRVVBUS
IPD
DVDD
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
107
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
3.2.19 Timer
Table 3-35. Timer Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
Timers 8-1 and Watchdog Timer 0
Timer 8 and Timer1
There are no external pins for these timers.
Timers TCLKIN
GP0
PINCNTL60
DSIS: 0
TCLKIN/
GP0[30]
IPD
DVDD
T2
I
Timer external clock input
Timer 7
GPMC_BE[1]/
GPMC_A[24]/
EDMA_EVT1/
TIM7_IO/
GPMC, EDMA,
GP1
PINCNTL132
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX3
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
V28
I/O
GP1[30]
SD2_DAT4
GPMC_A[27]/
GPMC_A[23]/
GPMC_CS[7]/
EDMA_EVT0/
TIM7_IO/
SD2, GPMC,
EDMA, GP1
PINCNTL116
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
R24
I/O
MM: MUX2
Timer 7 capture event input or PWM output
GP1[22]
VOUT[0]_AVID/
VOUT[0]_FLD/
SPI[3]_SCLK/
TIM7_IO/
VOUT[0], SPI[3],
GP2
PINCNTL179
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX1
IPD
DVDD
AA10
L6
I/O
I/O
GP2[21]
MCA[5], MCA[4],
GP0
PINCNTL58
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX0
MCA[5]_AXR[1]/
MCA[4]_AXR[3]/
TIM7_IO/
IPD
DVDD
GP0[28]
Timer 6
GPMC_BE[0]_CLE/
GPMC_A[25]/
EDMA_EVT2/
TIM6_IO/
GPMC, EDMA,
GP1
PINCNTL131
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX3
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
U27
P22
I/O
I/O
GP1[29]
SD2_DAT[5]/
GPMC_A[26]/
GPMC_A[22]/
TIM6_IO/
SD2, GPMC, GP1
PINCNTL115
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
MM: MUX2
GP1[21]
Timer 6 capture event input or PWM output
VOUT[1]_AVID/
EMAC[1]_MRXER/
VIN[1]A_CLK/
UART4_RTS/
TIM6_IO/
VOUT[1].
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A,
UART4, GP2
PINCNTL207
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
Y22
J4
I/O
I/O
GP2[31]
MM: MUX1
MCA[4], GP0
PINCNTL54
DSIS: PIN
MCA[4]_AXR[1]/
TIM6_IO/
GP0[24]
IPD
DVDD
MM: MUX0
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
108
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-35. Timer Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
Timer 5
GPMC_ADV_ALE/
GPMC_CS[6]/
TIM5_IO/
GPMC, GP1
PINCNTL128
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
M26
I/O
I/O
GP1[28]
MM: MUX3
GPMC_A[23]/
SPI[2]_SCLK/
HDMI_HPDET/
TIM5_IO/
GPMC, SPI[2],
HDMI, GP1
PINCNTL112
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
AA26
GP1[18]
MM: MUX2
Timer 5 capture event input or PWM output
DEVOSC_WAKE/
SPI[1]_SCS[1]/
TIM5_IO/
OSC, SPI[1], GP1
PINCNTL7
IPU
DVDD_SD
W6
G2
I/O
I/O
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX1
GP1[7]
MCA[3], GP0
PINCNTL48
DSIS: PIN
MCA[3]_AXR[1]/
TIM5_IO/
GP0[19]
IPD
DVDD
MM: MUX0
Timer 4
GPMC_CLK/
GPMC_CS[5]/
GPMC_WAIT[1]/
CLKOUT1/
EDMA_EVT3/
TIM4_IO/
GPMC, CLKOUT1,
EDMA, GP1
PINCNTL127
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
R26
I/O
I/O
MM: MUX3
GP1[27]
GPMC_A[22]/
SPI[2]_D[1]/
HDMI_CEC/
TIM4_IO/
GPMC, SPI[2],
HDMI, GP1
PINCNTL111
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
AB27
Timer 4 capture event input or PWM output
GP1[17]
MM: MUX2
SPI[0]_SCS[1]/
SD1_SDCD/
SATA_ACT0_LED/
EDMA_EVT1/
TIM4_IO/
SPI[0], SD1,
SATA, EDMA,
GP1
PINCNTL80
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX1
IPU
DVDD
AE5
G1
I/O
I/O
GP1[6]
MCA[3], GP0
PINCNTL47
DSIS: PIN
MCA[3]_AXR[0]/
TIM4_IO/
GP0[18]
IPD
DVDD
MM: MUX0
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
109
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-35. Timer Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
J7
Timer 3
CLKIN32,
CLKOUT, GP3
PINCNTL259
DSIS: PIN
CLKIN32/
CLKOUT0/
TIM3_IO/
GP3[31]
IPD
DVDD
I/O
I/O
MM: MUX3
GPMC, GP1
PINCNTL108
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_A[19]/
TIM3_IO/
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
AC27
GP1[14]
MM: MUX2
AUD_CLKIN2/
MCA[0]_AXR[9]/
MCA[2]_AHCLKX/
MCA[5]_AHCLKX/
EDMA_EVT2/
TIM3_IO/
AUD_CLKIN2,
MCA[0], MCA[2].
MCA[5], EDMA,
GP0
PINCNTL16
DSIS: PIN
Timer 3 capture event input or PWM output
IPD
DVDD
H1
H2
I/O
I/O
GP0[9]
MM: MUX1
MCA[2], MCA[1],
GP0
PINCNTL44
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX0
MCA[2]_AXR[3]/
MCA[1]_AXR[7]/
TIM3_IO/
IPD
DVDD
GP0[15]
Timer 2
EMAC, GP1
PINCNTL232
DSIS: PIN
EMAC_RMREFCLK/
TIM2_IO/
GP1[10]
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
J27
I/O
I/O
MM: MUX3
GPMC, GP0
PINCNTL107
DSIS: PIN
GPMC_A[18]/
TIM2_IO/
GP0[13]
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
AE28
MM: MUX2
AUD_CLKIN1/
MCA[0]_AXR[8]/
MCA[1]_AHCLKX/
MCA[4]_AHCLKX/
EDMA_EVT3/
TIM2_IO/
AUD_CLKIN1,
MCA[0], MCA[1],
MCA[4], EDMA,
GP0
PINCNTL15
DSIS: PIN
Timer 2 capture event input or PWM output
IPD
DVDD
R5
V5
I/O
GP0[8]
MM: MUX1
MCA[2], MCA[1],
GP0
PINCNTL43
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX0
MCA[2]_AXR[2]/
MCA[1]_AXR[6]/
TIM2_IO/
IPD
DVDD
I/O
O
GP0[14]
Watchdog Timer 0
DIS
DVDD
–
RSTOUT_WD_OUT
Watchdog timer 0 event output
PINCNTL262
110
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
3.2.20 UART
Table 3-36. UART0 Terminal Functions
OTHER(2)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
(3)
NO.
UART0
–
IPU
DVDD
UART0 Receive Data Input. Functions as IrDA receive input
in IrDA modes and CIR receive input in CIR mode.
UART0_RXD
UART0_TXD
AH5
AG5
I
PINCNTL70
DSIS: PIN
–
IPU
DVDD
UART0 Transmit Data Output. Functions as CIR transmit
output in CIR mode.
O
PINCNTL71
DSIS: PIN
UART0_RTS/
UART4_TXD/
DCAN1_RX/
SPI[1]_SCS[2]/
SD2_SDCD
UART4, DCAN1,
SPI[1], SD2
PINCNTL73
DSIS: PIN
UART0 Request to Send Output. Indicates module is ready
to receive data. Functions as transmit data output in IrDA
modes.
IPU
DVDD
AF5
O
UART0_CTS/
UART4_RXD/
DCAN1_TX/
SPI[1]_SCS[3]/
SD0_SDCD
UART4, DCAN1,
SPI[1], SD0
PINCNTL72
DSIS: 1
IPU
DVDD
UART0 Clear to Send Input. Functions as SD transceiver
control output in IrDA and CIR modes.
AE6
AG2
I/O
O
UART0_DTR/
UART3_CTS/
UART1_TXD/
GP1[4]
UART3, UART1,
GP1
PINCNTL76
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD
UART0 Data Terminal Ready Output
UART0 Data Set Ready Input
UART0_DSR/
UART3_TXD/
SPI[0]_SCS[2]/
I2C[2]_SDA/
SD1_SDWP/
GP1[3]
UART3, SPI[0],
I2C[2], SD1, GP1
PINCNTL75
IPU
DVDD
AG4
I
DSIS: 1
UART0_DCD/
UART3_RXD/
SPI[0]_SCS[3]/
I2C[2]_SCL/
SD1_POW/
GP1[2]
UART3, SPI[0],
I2C[2], SD1, GP1
PINCNTL74
IPU
DVDD
AH4
AF4
I
I
UART0 Data Carrier Detect Input
UART0 Ring Indicator Input
DSIS: 1
UART0_RIN/
UART3_RTS/
UART1_RXD/
GP1[5]
UART3, UART1,
GP1
PINCNTL77
DSIS: 1
IPU
DVDD
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
111
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-37. UART1 Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
UART1
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
EMAC[0]_MTXD[5]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXC/
EMAC[1]_RMCRSDV/
GPMC_A[12]/
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1], GPMC
PINCNTL255
DSIS: 1
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
F27
I
I
UART1_RXD
MM: MUX1
UART1 Receive Data Input. Functions as IrDA receive
input in IrDA modes and CIR receive input in CIR mode.
UART0, UART3,
GP1
PINCNTL77
DSIS: 1
UART0_RIN/
UART3_RTS/
UART1_RXD/
GP1[5]
IPU
DVDD
AF4
J22
MM: MUX0
EMAC[0]_MTXD[6]/
EMAC[1]_RGRXD[0]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXD[0]/
GPMC_A[13]/
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1], GPMC
PINCNTL256
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
O
O
O
I/O
UART1_TXD
MM: MUX1
UART1 Transmit Data Output. Functions as CIR transmit
output in CIR mode.
UART0, UART3,
GP1
PINCNTL76
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX0
UART0_DTR/
UART3_CTS/
UART1_TXD/
GP1[4]
IPU
DVDD
AG2
J23
EMAC[0]_MTXEN/
EMAC[1]_RGRXD[2]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXEN/
GPMC_A[15]/
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1], GPMC
PINCNTL258
DSIS: PIN
UART1 Request to Send Output. Indicates module is
ready to receive data. Functions as transmit data output
in IrDA modes.
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
UART1_RTS
EMAC[0]_MTXD[7]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXD[3]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXD[1]/
GPMC_A[14]/
EMCA[0],
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
EMAC[1], GPMC UART1 Clear to Send Input. Functions as SD
PINCNTL257
DSIS: 1
H24
transceiver control output in IrDA and CIR modes.
UART1_CTS
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
112
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-38. UART2 Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
UART2
DESCRIPTION
NO.
SD2_DAT[7]/
GPMC_A[24]/
GPMC_A[20]/
UART2_RXD/
GP1[19]
SD2, GPMC, GP1
PINCNTL113
DSIS: 1
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
L25
I
MM: MUX3
DCAN0, I2C[3],
GP1
PINCNTL69
DSIS: 1
DCAN0_RX/
UART2_RXD/
I2C[3]_SCL/
GP1[1]
IPU
DVDD
AG6
U4
I
I
MM: MUX2
UART2 Receive Data Input. Functions as IrDA receive
input in IrDA modes and CIR receive input in CIR mode.
GP0
PINCNTL59
DSIS: 1
UART2_RXD/
GP0[29]
IPD
DVDD
MM: MUX1
VOUT[1],
CAMERA_I/F,
GPMC, GP0
PINCNTL172
DSIS: 1
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[1]/
CAM_HS/
GPMC_A[9]/
UART2_RXD/
GP0[26]
IPD
DVDD_C
AE23
N23
I
MM: MUX0
SD2_DAT[6]/
GPMC_A[25]/
GPMC_A[21]/
UART2_TXD/
GP1[20]
SD2, GPMC, GP1
PINCNTL114
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_GPMC
O
MM: MUX3
DCAN0, I2C[3],
GP1
PINCNTL68
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX2
DCAN0_TX/
UART2_TXD/
I2C[3]_SDA/
GP1[0]
IPU
DVDD
AH6
U3
O
O
UART2 Transmit Data Output. Functions as CIR
transmit output in CIR mode.
GP0
UART2_TXD/
GP0[31]
IPD
DVDD
PINCNTL61
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX1
VOUT[1],
CAMERA_I/F,
GPMC, GP0
PINCNTL173
DSIS: PIN
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[0]/
CAM_VS/
GPMC_A[10]/
UART2_TXD/
GP0[27]
IPU
DVDD_C
AD23
AF18
AB23
O
O
MM: MUX0
VOUT[0]_FLD/
CAM_PCLK/
GPMC_A[12]/
UART2_RTS/
GP2[2]
VOUT[0],
CAMERA_I/F,
GPMC, GP2
PINCNTL175
DSIS: PIN
UART2 Request to Send Output. Indicates module is
ready to receive data. Functions as transmit data output
in IrDA modes.
IPD
DVDD_C
VOUT[1]_FLD/
CAM_FLD/
CAM_WE/
GPMC_A[11]/
UART2_CTS/
GP0[28]
VOUT[1],
CAMERA_I/F,
GPMC, GP0
PINCNTL174
DSIS: 1
IPD
DVDD_C
UART2 Clear to Send Input. Functions as SD
transceiver control output in IrDA and CIR modes.
I/O
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
113
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-39. UART3 Terminal Functions
OTHER(2)
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
(3)
NAME
NO.
UART3
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A,
GP3
PINCNTL211
DSIS: 1
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[6]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[2]/
VIN[1]A_D[3]/
UART3_RXD/
GP3[3]
IPD
DVDD
AD25
I
MM: MUX1
UART3 Receive Data Input. Functions as IrDA receive input
in IrDA modes and CIR receive input in CIR mode.
UART0_DCD/
UART3_RXD/
SPI[0]_SCS[3]/
I2C[2]_SCL/
SD1_POW/
GP1[2]
UART0, SPI[0],
I2C[2], SD1, GP1
PINCNTL74
DSIS: 1
IPU
DVDD
AH4
AC25
AG4
I
MM: MUX0
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A,
GP3
PINCNTL212
DSIS: PIN
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[7]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[3]/
VIN[1]A_D[4]/
UART3_TXD/
GP3[4]
IPD
DVDD
O
O
MM: MUX1
UART3 Transmit Data Output. Functions as CIR transmit
output in CIR mode.
UART0_DSR/
UART3_TXD/
SPI[0]_SCS[2]/
I2C[2]_SDA/
SD1_SDWP/
GP1[3]
UART0, SPI[0],
I2C[2], SD1, GP1
PINCNTL75
IPU
DVDD
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX0
VOUT[1]_HSYNC/
EMAC[1]_MCOL/
VIN[1]A_VSYNC/
SPI[3]_D[1]/
UART3_RTS/
GP2[29]
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A,
SPI[3], GP2
PINCNTL205
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
AC24
AF4
O
O
UART3 Request to Send Output. Indicates module is ready
to receive data. Functions as transmit data output in IrDA
modes.
MM: MUX1
UART0, UART1,
GP1
PINCNTL77
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX0
UART0_RIN/
UART3_RTS/
UART1_RXD/
GP1[5]
IPU
DVDD
VOUT[1]_VSYNC/
EMAC[1]_MCRS/
VIN[1]A_FLD/
VIN[1]A_DE/
SPI[3]_D[0]/
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A,
SPI[3], GP2
PINCNTL206
DSIS: 1
IPD
DVDD
AA23
AG2
I/O
I/O
UART3_CTS/
GP2[30]
UART3 Clear to Send Input. Functions as SD transceiver
control output in IrDA and CIR modes.
MM: MUX1
UART3, UART1,
GP1
PINCNTL76
DSIS: 1
UART0_DTR/
UART3_CTS/
UART1_TXD/
GP1[4]
IPU
DVDD
MM: MUX0
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
114
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-40. UART4 Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
UART4
DESCRIPTION
NO.
UART0_CTS/
UART4_RXD/
DCAN1_TX/
SPI[1]_SCS[3]/
SD0_SDCD
UART0, DCAN1,
SPI[1], SD0
PINCNTL72
DSIS: 1
IPU
DVDD
AE6
I
MM: MUX3
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A,
GP3
PINCNTL209
DSIS: 1
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[4]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[0]/
VIN[1]A_D[1]/
UART4_RXD/
GP3[1]
IPD
DVDD
AG25
H25
I
MM: MUX2
UART4 Receive Data Input. Functions as IrDA receive
input in IrDA modes and CIR receive input in CIR mode.
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1], GPMC
PINCNTL251
DSIS: 1
EMAC[0]_MTXD[1]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXD[1]/
GPMC_A[8]/
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
I
UART4_RXD
MM: MUX1
VOUT[1],
CAMERA_I/F,
GPMC, GP0
PINCNTL168
DSIS: 1
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[1]/
CAM_D[3]/
GPMC_A[5]/
UART4_RXD/
GP0[22]
IPU
DVDD_C
AD18
AF5
I
MM: MUX0
UART0_RTS/
UART4_TXD/
DCAN1_RX/
SPI[1]_SCS[2]/
SD2_SDCD
UART0, DCAN1,
SPI[1], SD2
PINCNTL73
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD
O
O
O
O
MM: MUX3
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A,
GP3
PINCNTL210
DSIS: PIN
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[5]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[1]/
VIN[1]A_D[2]/
UART4_TXD/
GP3[2]
IPD
DVDD
AF25
H22
MM: MUX2
UART4 Transmit Data Output. Functions as CIR transmit
output in CIR mode.
EMAC[0]_MTXD[2]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXCTL/
EMAC[1]_RMRXD[0]/
GPMC_A[9]/
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1], GPMC
PINCNTL252
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
UART4_TXD
MM: MUX1
VOUT[1],
CAMERA_I/F,
GPMC, GP0
PINCNTL169
DSIS: PIN
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[0]/
CAM_D[2]/
GPMC_A[6]/
UART4_TXD/
GP0[23]
IPD
DVDD_C
AC18
MM: MUX0
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
115
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-40. UART4 Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
VOUT[1]_AVID/
EMAC[1]_MRXER/
VIN[1]A_CLK/
UART4_RTS/
TIM6_IO/
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A,
TIMER6, GP2
PINCNTL207
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
Y22
O
GP2[31]
MM: MUX2
EMAC[0]_MTXD[4]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXD[2]/
EMAC[1]_RMRXER/
GPMC_A[11]/
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1], GPMC UART4 Request to Send Output. Indicates module is
PINCNTL254
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
G23
O
O
ready to receive data. Functions as transmit data output
in IrDA modes.
UART4_RTS
MM: MUX1
VOUT[1],
CAMERA_I/F,
GPMC, GP0
PINCNTL171
DSIS: PIN
VOUT[1]_R_CR[0]/
CAM_D[0]/
GPMC_A[8]/
UART4_RTS/
GP0[25]
IPD
DVDD_C
AA22
MM: MUX0
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A,
GP3
PINCNTL208
DSIS: 1
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[3]/
EMAC[1]_MRCLK/
VIN[1]A_D[0]/
UART4_CTS/
GP3[0]
IPD
DVDD
AH25
H23
I/O
I/O
I/O
MM: MUX2
EMAC[0]_MTXD[3]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXD[0]/
EMAC[1]_RMRXD[1]/
GPMC_A[10]/
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1], GPMC
PINCNTL253
DSIS: 1
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
UART4 Clear to Send Input. Functions as SD transceiver
control output in IrDA and CIR modes.
UART4_CTS
MM: MUX1
VOUT[1],
CAMERA_I/F,
GPMC, GP0
PINCNTL170
DSIS: 1
VOUT[1]_R_CR[1]/
CAM_D[1]/
GPMC_A[7]/
UART4_CTS/
GP0[24]
IPD
DVDD_C
AC19
MM: MUX0
116
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-41. UART5 Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
UART5
DESCRIPTION
NO.
MCA[2]_AXR[0]/
SD0_DAT[6]/
UART5_RXD/
GP0[12]
MCA[2], SD0, GP0
PINCNTL41
DSIS: 1
IPU
DVDD
N2
I
MM: MUX3
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A,
GP3
PINCNTL226
DSIS: 1
VOUT[1]_R_CR[8]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[7]/
VIN[1]A_D[19]/
UART5_RXD/
GP3[18]
IPD
DVDD
W23
I
I
MM: MUX2
UART5 Receive Data Input. Functions as IrDA receive
input in IrDA modes and CIR receive input in CIR mode.
VIN[0]A_FLD/
VIN[0]B_VSYNC/
UART5_RXD/
I2C[2]_SCL/
GP2[1]
VIN[0]A, I2C[2],
GP2
PINCNTL136
DSIS: 1
IPU
DVDD
AA20
MM: MUX1
EMAC[0]_MRXD[3]/
EMAC[1]_RGRXCT
L/
GPMC_A[27]/
GPMC_A[26]/
GPMC_A[0]/
UART5_RXD
EMAC[0],
EMAC[1], GPMC
PINCNTL243
DSIS: 1
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
J25
I
MM: MUX0
MCA[2]_AXR[1]/
SD0_DAT[7]/
UART5_TXD/
GP0[13]
MCA[2], SD0, GP0
PINCNTL42
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD
V6
O
O
MM: MUX3
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], VIN[1]A,
GP3
PINCNTL227
DSIS: PIN
VOUT[1]_R_CR[9]/
EMAC[1]_MTXEN/
VIN[1]A_D[20]/
UART5_TXD/
GP3[19]
IPD
DVDD
Y24
MM: MUX2
UART5 Transmit Data Output. Functions as CIR transmit
output in CIR mode.
VIN[0]A_DE/
VIN[0]B_HSYNC/
UART5_TXD/
I2C[2]_SDA/
GP2[0]
VIN[0]A, I2C[2],
GP0
PINCNTL135
DSIS: PIN
MM: MUX1
IPU
DVDD
AE21
O
EMAC[0]_MRXD[4]/
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[3]
/
GPMC_A[1]/
UART5_TXD
EMAC[0], GPMC
PINCNTL244
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
T23
AC20
F28
O
O
O
MM: MUX0
VIN[0]A, GP2
PINCNTL138
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_HSYNC/
UART5_RTS/
GP2[3]
IPU
DVDD
MM: MUX1
UART5 Request to Send Output. Indicates module is
ready to receive data. Functions as transmit data output in
IrDA modes.
EMAC[0]_MRXD[6]/
EMAC[0]_RGTXD[2]
/
GPMC_A[3]/
UART5_RTS
EMAC[0], GPMC
PINCNTL246
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
MM: MUX0
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
117
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-41. UART5 Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
VIN[0]A, GP2
PINCNTL139
DSIS: 1
VIN[0]A_VSYNC/
UART5_CTS/
GP2[4]
IPU
DVDD
AD20
I/O
MM: MUX1
UART5 Clear to Send Input. Functions as SD transceiver
control output in IrDA and CIR modes.
EMAC[0]_MRXD[5]/
EMAC[0]_RGTXD[3]
/
GPMC_A[2]/
UART5_CTS
EMAC[0], GPMC
PINCNTL245
DSIS: 1
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
H26
I/O
MM: MUX0
118
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
3.2.21 USB
Table 3-42. USB Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
USB0
–
USB0 bidirectional data differential signal pair
[plus/minus].
USB0_DP
USB0_DM
AG11
AH11
A I/O
A I/O
–
VDDA_USB_3P3
–
When the USB0 PHY is powered down, these pins
should be left unconnected.
–
–
VDDA_USB_3P3
USB0 OTG identification input.
–
USB0_ID
USB0_CE
AG10
AH10
A I
When the USB0 PHY is powered down, this pin should
be left unconnected.
VDDA_USB_3P3
USB0 charger enable.
–
A O
–
–
When the USB0 PHY is powered down, this pin should
be left unconnected.
VDDA_USB_3P3
5-V USB0 VBUS comparator input.
This analog input pin senses the level of the USB VBUS
voltage and should connect directly to the USB VBUS
voltage. When the USB0 PHY is powered down, this pin
should be left unconnected.
–
USB0_VBUSIN
AG12
AF11
A I
VDDA_USB_3P3
When this pin is used as USB0_DRVVBUS and the
USB0 Controller is operating as a Host, this signal is
used by the USB0 Controller to enable the external
VBUS charge pump.
GP0
PINCNTL270
DSIS: N/A
USB0_DRVVBUS/
GP0[7]
IPD
DVDD
O
When the USB0 PHY is powered down, this pin should
be left unconnected.
USB1
–
USB1 bidirectional data differential signal pair
[plus/minus].
USB1_DP
USB1_DM
AG13
AH13
A I/O
A I/O
–
VDDA_USB_3P3
–
When the USB1 PHY is powered down, these pins
should be left unconnected.
–
–
VDDA_USB_3P3
USB1 OTG identification input.
–
USB1_ID
USB1_CE
AH12
AH14
A I
When the USB1 PHY is powered down, this pin should
be left unconnected.
VDDA_USB_3P3
USB1 charger enable.
–
A O
–
–
When the USB1 PHY is powered down, this pin should
be left unconnected.
VDDA_USB_3P3
5-V USB1 VBUS comparator input.
This analog input pin senses the level of the USB VBUS
voltage and should connect directly to the USB VBUS
voltage. When the USB1 PHY is powered down, this pin
should be left unconnected.
–
USB1_VBUSIN
AG14
A I
VDDA_USB_3P3
When this pin is used as USB1_DRVVBUS and the
USB1 Controller is operating as a Host, this signal is
used by the USB1 Controller to enable the external
VBUS charge pump.
AUD_CLKIN0/
AUD_CLKIN0,
MCA[0], MCA[3],
PINCNTL14
MCA[0]_AXR[7]/
MCA[0]_AHCLKX/
MCA[3]_AHCLKX/U
SB1_DRVVBUS
IPD
DVDD
L5
O
DSIS: N/A
When the USB1 PHY is powered down, this pin should
be left unconnected.
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
119
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
3.2.22 Video Input (Digital)
Table 3-43. Video Input 0 (Digital) Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1) OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
Video Input 0 (Digital)
CLKOUT0, GP1 Video Input 0 Port B Clock input. Input clock for 8-bit
VIN[0]B_CLK/
CLKOUT0/
GP1[9]
IPD
DVDD
AE17
AB20
I
I
PINCNTL134
DSIS: 0
Port B video capture. This signal is not used in 16-bit
and 24-bit capture modes.
GP2
PINCNTL137
DSIS: 0
VIN[0]A_CLK/
GP2[2]
IPD
DVDD
Video Input 0 Port A Clock input. Input clock for 8-bit ,
16-bit, or 24-bit Port A video capture.
VIN[0]A_D[23]/
CAM_D[15]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXEN/
SPI[3]_D[0]/
CAM_IF,
EMAC[1]_RM,
SPI[3], GP0
PINCNTL163
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_C
AC16
AC21
AE18
AC17
AF21
AF20
AB21
AA21
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GP0[17]
VIN[0]A_D[22]/
CAM_D[14]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXD[1]/
SPI[3]_D[1]/
CAM_IF,
EMAC[1]_RM,
SPI[3], GP0
PINCNTL162
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_C
GP0[16]
VIN[0]A_D[21]/
CAM_D[13]/
EMAC[1]_RMTXD[0]/
SPI[3]_SCLK/
GP0[15]
CAM_IF,
EMAC[1]_RM,
SPI[3], GP0
PINCNTL161
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_C
VIN[0]A_D[20]/
CAM_D[12]/
EMAC[1]_RMCRSDV/
SPI[3]_SCS[0]/
GP0[14]
CAM_IF,
EMAC[1]_RM,
SPI[3], GP0
PINCNTL160
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_C
Video Input 0 Data inputs. For 16-bit capture, D[7:0] are
Cb/Cr and [15:8] are Y Port A inputs. For 8-bit capture,
D[7:0] are Port A YCbCr data inputs and D[15:8] are Port
B YCbCr data inputs. For RGB capture, D[23:16] are R,
D[15:8] are G, and D[7:0] are B data inputs.
VIN[0]A_D[19]/
CAM_D[11]/
EMAC[1]_RMRXD[0]/
I2C[3]_SDA/
CAM_IF,
EMAC[1]_RM,
I2C[3], GP0
PINCNTL159
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_C
GP0[13]
VIN[0]A_D[18]/
CAM_D[10]/
EMAC[1]_RMRXD[1]/
I2C[3]_SCL/
CAM_IF,
EMAC[1]_RM,
I2C[3], GP0
PINCNTL158
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD_C
GP0[12]
CAM_IF,
EMAC[1]_RM,
I2C[3], GP0
PINCNTL157
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[17]/
CAM_D[9]/
EMAC[1]_RMRXER/
GP0[11]
IPD
DVDD_C
CAM_IF,
EMAC[1]_RM,
I2C[3], GP0
PINCNTL156
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[16]/
CAM_D[8]/
I2C[2]_SCL/
GP0[10]
IPU
DVDD_C
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal.
120
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-43. Video Input 0 (Digital) Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1) OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
VIN[0]A_D[15]_BD[7]/
CAM_SHUTTER/
GP2[20]
CAM_IF, GP2
PINCNTL155
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
AC14
I
VIN[0]A_D[14]_BD[6]/
CAM_STROBE/
GP2[19]
CAM_IF, GP2
PINCNTL154
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
AC12
AF17
AG17
AH17
AH9
I
VIN[0]A_D[13]_BD[5]/
CAM_RESET/
GP2[18]
CAM_IF, GP2
PINCNTL153
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
I
VIN[0]A_D[12]_BD[4]/
CLKOUT1/
GP2[17]
CLKOUT1, GP2
PINCNTL152
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
Video Input 0 Data inputs. For 16-bit capture, D[7:0] are
Cb/Cr and [15:8] are Y Port A inputs. For 8-bit capture,
D[7:0] are Port A YCbCr data inputs and D[15:8] are Port
B YCbCr data inputs. For RGB capture, D[23:16] are R,
D[15:8] are G, and D[7:0] are B data inputs.
I
VIN[0]A_D[11]_BD[3]/
CAM_WE/
GP2[16]
CAM_IF, GP2
PINCNTL151
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
I
GP2
PINCNTL150
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[10]_BD[2]/
GP2[15]
IPD
DVDD
I
GP2
PINCNTL149
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[9]_BD[1]/
GP2[14]
IPD
DVDD
AG9
I
GP2
PINCNTL148
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[8]_BD[0]/
GP2[13]
IPD
DVDD
AB15
AA11
AH16
AG16
AH8
I
GP2
PINCNTL147
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[7]/
GP2[12]
IPD
DVDD
I
GP2
PINCNTL146
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[6]/
GP2[11]
IPD
DVDD
I
GP2
PINCNTL145
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[5]/
GP2[10]
IPD
DVDD
I
GP2
PINCNTL144
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[4]/
GP2[9]
IPD
DVDD
Video Input 0 Data inputs. For 16-bit capture, D[7:0] are
Cb/Cr and [15:8] are Y Port A inputs. For 8-bit capture,
D[7:0] are Port A YCbCr data inputs and D[15:8] are Port
B YCbCr data inputs. For RGB capture, D[23:16] are R,
D[15:8] are G, and D[7:0] are B data inputs.
I
GP2
PINCNTL143
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[3]/
GP2[8]
IPD
DVDD
AE12
AC9
I
GP2
PINCNTL142
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[2]/
GP2[7]
IPD
DVDD
I
GP1
PINCNTL141
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[1]/
GP1[12]
IPD
DVDD
AB11
AF9
I
GP1
PINCNTL140
DSIS: PIN
VIN[0]A_D[0]/
GP1[11]
IPD
DVDD
I
VIN[0]A_DE/
VIN[0]B_HSYNC/
UART5_TXD/
I2C[2]_SDA/
GP2[0]
VIN[0]A, UART5, Video Input 0 Port B Horizontal Sync input. Discrete
IPU
DVDD
I2C[2], GP2
PINCNTL135
DSIS: 0
horizontal synchronization signal for Port B 8-bit YCbCr
capture without embedded syncs (“BT.601” modes). Not
used in RGB or 16-bit YCbCr capture modes
AE21
AC20
I
Video Input 0 Port A Horizontal Sync0 input. Discrete
horizontal synchronization signal for Port A RGB capture
mode or YCbCr capture without embedded syncs
(“BT.601” modes).
VIN[0]A_HSYNC/
UART5_RTS/
GP2[3]
UART5, GP2
PINCNTL138
DSIS: 0
IPU
DVDD
I
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
121
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-43. Video Input 0 (Digital) Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
VIN[0]A_FLD/
VIN[0]B_VSYNC/
UART5_RXD/
I2C[2]_SCL/
GP2[1]
TYPE(1) OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
VIN[0]A, UART5, Video Input 0 Port B Vertical Sync1 input. Discrete
IPU
I2C[2], GP2
PINCNTL136
DSIS:0
vertical synchronization signal for Port B 8-bit YCbCr
capture without embedded syncs (“BT.601” modes). Not
used in RGB or 16-bit YCbCr capture modes.
AA20
I
DVDD
Video Input 0 Port A Vertical Sync0 input. Discrete
vertical synchronization signal for Port A RGB capture
mode or YCbCr capture without embedded syncs
(“BT.601” modes).
VIN[0]A_VSYNC/
UART5_CTS/
GP2[4]
UART5, GP2
PINCNTL139
DSIS: 0
IPU
DVDD
AD20
AD17
I
CAMERA_I/F,
GP0
PINCNTL167
DSIS: 0
Video Input 0 Port B Field ID input. Discrete field
identification signal for Port B 8-bit YCbCr capture
without embedded syncs (“BT.601” modes). Not used in
RGB or 16-bit YCbCr capture modes.
VIN[0]B_FLD/
CAM_D[4]/
GP0[21]
IPU
DVDD_C
I
CAMERA_I/F,
GP0
PINCNTL166
DSIS: 0
VIN[0]A_FLD/
CAM_D[5]/
GP0[20]
IPU
DVDD_C
AC22
I
Video Input 0 Port A Field ID input. Discrete field
identification signal for Port A RGB capture mode or
YCbCr capture without embedded syncs (“BT.601”
modes).
MM: MUX1
VIN[0]A_FLD/
VIN[0]B_VSYNC/
UART5_RXD/
I2C[2]_SCL/
GP2[1]
VIN[0]B, UART5,
I2C[2], GP2
PINCNTL136
DSIS: 0
IPU
DVDD
AA20
AC15
AB17
I
MM: MUX0
CAMERA_I/F,
GP0
PINCNTL165
DSIS: 0
VIN[0]B_DE/
CAM_D[6]/
GP0[19]
Video Input 0 Port B Data Enable input. Discrete data
valid signal for Port B RGB capture mode or YCbCr
capture without embedded syncs (“BT.601” modes).
IPU
DVDD_C
I
CAMERA_I/F,
GP0
PINCNTL164
DSIS: 0
VIN[0]A_DE/
CAM_D[7]/
GP0[18]
IPU
DVDD_C
I
Video Input 0 Port A Data Enable input. Discrete data
valid signal for Port A RGB capture mode or YCbCr
capture without embedded syncs ("BT.601" modes).
MM: MUX1
VIN[0]A_DE/
VIN[0]B_HSYNC/
UART5_TXD/
I2C[2]_SDA/
GP2[0]
VIN[0]B, UART5,
I2C[2], GP2
PINCNTL135
DSIS: 0
IPU
DVDD
AE21
I
MM: MUX0
122
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-44. Video Input 1 (Digital) Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
Video Input 1 (Digital)
GPMC, SPI[2], Video Input 1 Port B Clock input. Input clock for 8-bit
GPMC_CS[3]/
VIN[1]B_CLK/
SPI[2]_SCS[0]/
GP1[26]
IPU
GP1
PINCNTL125
DSIS: 0
Port B video capture. Input data is sampled on the CLK1
edge. This signal is not used in 16-bit and 24-bit capture
modes.
P26
I
DVDD_GPMC
VOUT[1]_AVID/
EMAC[1]_MRXER/
VIN[1]A_CLK/
UART4_RTS/
TIM6_IO/
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1],
UART4, TIMER
6, GP2
PINCNTL207
DSIS: 0
Video Input 1 Port A Clock input. Input clock for 8-bit ,
16-bit, or 24-bit Port A video capture. Input data is
sampled on the CLK0 edge.
IPD
DVDD
Y22
I
I
GP2[31]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[2]/
GPMC_A[15]/
VIN[1]A_D[23]/
HDMI_HPDET/
SPI[2]_D[1]/
VOUT[1], GPMC,
HDMI, SPI[2],
GP3
PINCNTL230
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
AE27
GP3[22]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[3]/
GPMC_A[14]/
VIN[1]A_D[22]/
HDMI_SDA/
SPI[2]_SCLK/
I2C[2]_SDA/
GP3[21]
VOUT[1], GPMC,
HDMI, SPI[2],
I2C[2], GP3
PINCNTL229
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD
AG28
AF27
I
I
Video Input 1 Data inputs. For 16-bit capture, D[7:0] are
Cb/Cr and [15:8] are Y Port A inputs. For 8-bit capture,
D[7:0] are Port A YCbCr data inputs. For RGB capture,
D[23:16] are R, D[15:8] are G, and D[7:0] are B Port A
data inputs.
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[2]/
GPMC_A[13]/
VIN[1]A_D[21]/
HDMI_SCL/
SPI[2]_SCS[2]/
I2C[2]_SCL/
VOUT[1], GPMC,
HDMI, SPI[2],
I2C[2], GP3
PINCNTL228
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD
GP3[20]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[9]/
EMAC[1]_MTXEN/
VIN[1]A_D[20]/
UART5_TXD/
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1],
UART5, GP3
PINCNTL227
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
Y24
W23
V22
I
I
I
I
I
GP3[19]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[8]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[7]/
VIN[1]A_D[19]/
UART5_RXD/
GP3[18]
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1],
UART5, GP3
PINCNTL226
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
VOUT[1]_R_CR[7]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[6]/
VIN[1]A_D[18]/
SPI[3]_D[0]/
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], SPI[3],
GP3
PINCNTL225
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
Video Input 1 Data inputs. For 16-bit capture, D[7:0] are
Cb/Cr and [15:8] are Y Port A inputs. For 8-bit capture,
D[7:0] are Port A YCbCr data inputs. For RGB capture,
D[23:16] are R, D[15:8] are G, and D[7:0] are B Port A
data inputs.
GP3[17]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[6]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[5]/
VIN[1]A_D[17]/
SPI[3]_D[1]/
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], SPI[3],
GP3
PINCNTL224
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
AA25
AC26
GP3[16]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[5]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[4]/
VIN[1]A_D[16]/
SPI[3]_SCLK/
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], SPI[3],
GP3
PINCNTL223
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
GP3[15]
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
123
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-44. Video Input 1 (Digital) Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
VOUT[1]_R_CR[4]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[3]/
VIN[1]A_D[15]/
SPI[3]_SCS[1]/
GP3[14]
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], SPI[3],
GP3
PINCNTL222
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
AG27
I
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[9]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[2]/
VIN[1]A_D[14]/
GP3[13]
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], GP3
PINCNTL221
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
AD26
AE26
AF26
AH27
AG26
W22
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[8]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[1]/
VIN[1]A_D[13]/
GP3[12]
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], GP3
PINCNTL220
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[7]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[0]/
VIN[1]A_D[12]/
GP3[11]
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], GP3
PINCNTL219
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
Video Input 1 Data inputs. For 16-bit capture, D[7:0] are
Cb/Cr and [15:8] are Y Port A inputs. For 8-bit capture,
D[7:0] are Port A YCbCr data inputs. For RGB capture,
D[23:16] are R, D[15:8] are G, and D[7:0] are B Port A
data inputs.
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[6]/
EMAC[1]_GMTCLK/
VIN[1]A_D[11]/
GP3[10]
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], GP3
PINCNTL218
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[5]/
EMAC[1]_MRXDV/
VIN[1]A_D[10]/
GP3[9]
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], GP3
PINCNTL217
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[4]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[7]/
VIN[1]A_D[9]/
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], GP3
PINCNTL216
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
GP3[8]
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[3]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[6]/
VIN[1]A_D[8]/
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], GP3
PINCNTL215
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
Y23
GP3[7]
124
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-44. Video Input 1 (Digital) Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[2]/
GPMC_A[0]/
VIN[1]A_D[7]/
HDMI_CEC/
SPI[2]_D[0]/
VOUT[1], GPMC,
HDMI, SPI[2],
GP3
PINCNTL231
DSIS: PIN
IPU
DVDD
AF28
I
GP3[30]
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[9]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[5]/
VIN[1]A_D[6]/
I2C[3]_SDA/
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], I2C[3],
GP3
PINCNTL214
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
AA24
AH26
AC25
AD25
AF25
AG25
AH25
R23
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GP3[6]
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[8]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[4]/
VIN[1]A_D[5]/
I2C[3]_SCL/
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], I2C[3],
GP3
PINCNTL213
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
GP3[5]
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[7]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[3]/
VIN[1]A_D[4]/
UART3_TXD/
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1],
UART3, GP3
PINCNTL212
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
Video Input 1 Data inputs. For 16-bit capture, D[7:0] are
Cb/Cr and [15:8] are Y Port A inputs. For 8-bit capture,
D[7:0] are Port A YCbCr data inputs. For RGB capture,
D[23:16] are R, D[15:8] are G, and D[7:0] are B Port A
data inputs.
GP3[4]
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[6]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[2]/
VIN[1]A_D[3]/
UART3_RXD/
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1],
UART3, GP3
PINCNTL211
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
GP3[3]
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[5]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[1]/
VIN[1]A_D[2]/
UART4_TXD/
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1],
UART4, GP3
PINCNTL210
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
GP3[2]
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[4]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[0]/
VIN[1]A_D[1]/
UART4_RXD/
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1],
UART4, GP3
PINCNTL209
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
GP3[1]
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[3]/
EMAC[1]_MRCLK/
VIN[1]A_D[0]/
UART4_CTS/
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1],
UART4, GP3
PINCNTL208
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
GP3[0]
EMAC[0]_MRXD[2]/
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[1]/
VIN[1]B_D[7]/
EMAC[0]_RMTXEN/
GP3[30]
EMAC[0], GP3
PINCNTL242
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
EMAC[0]_MRXD[1]/
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[0]/
VIN[1]B_D[6]/
EMAC[0]_RMTXD[1]/
GP3[29]
EMAC[0], GP3
PINCNTL241
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
P23
Video Input 1 Port B Data inputs. For 8-bit capture,
B_D[7:0] are Port B YCbCr data inputs.
EMAC[0]_MRXD[0]/
EMAC[0]_RGTXD[0]/
VIN[1]B_D[5]/
EMAC[0]_RMTXD[0]/
GP3[28]
EMAC[0], GP3
PINCNTL240
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
G28
EMAC[0]_MRCLK/
EMAC[0]_RGTXC/
VIN[1]B_D[4]/
EMAC[0]_RMCRSDV/
SPI[3]_SCS[2]/
GP3[27]
EMAC[0], SPI[3],
GP3
PINCNTL239
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
H27
I
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
125
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-44. Video Input 1 (Digital) Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
NO.
EMAC[0]_MRXER/
EMAC[0]_RGTXCTL/
VIN[1]B_D[3]/
EMAC[0]_RMRXER/
GP3[26]
EMAC[0], GP3
PINCNTL238
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
J26
I
EMAC[0]_MCRS/
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[2]/
VIN[1]B_D[2]/
EMAC[0]_RMRXD[1]/
GP3[25]
EMAC[0], GP3
PINCNTL237
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
R25
L23
I
I
Video Input Port B Data inputs. For 8-bit capture,
B_D[7:0] are Port B YCbCr data inputs.
EMAC[0]_MCOL/
EMAC[0]_RGRXCTL/
VIN[1]B_D[1]/
EMAC[0]_RMRXD[0]/
GP3[24]
EMAC[0], GP3
PINCNTL236
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
EMAC[0]_MTCLK/
EMAC[0]_RGRXC/
VIN[1]B_D[0]/
SPI[3]_SCS[3]/
I2C[2]_SDA/
EMAC[0], SPI[3],
I2C[2], GP3
PINCNTL235
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD_GPMC
L24
I
I
I
GP3[23]
VOUT[1]_CLK/
EMAC[1]_MTCLK/
VIN[1]A_HSYNC/
GP2[28]
VOUT[1],
Video Input 1 Port A Horizontal Sync input. Discrete
IPD
DVDD
EMAC[1], GP2 horizontal synchronization signal forPort A YCbCr
PINCNTL204
DSIS: 0
AE24
AC24
capture modes without embedded syncs (“BT.601”
modes).
VOUT[1]_HSYNC/
EMAC[1]_MCOL/
VIN[1]A_VSYNC/
SPI[3]_D[1]/
UART3_RTS/
GP2[29]
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1], SPI[3], Video Input 1 Port A Vertical Sync input. Discrete vertical
IPD
DVDD
UART3, GP2
PINCNTL205
DSIS: 0
synchronization signal for Port A YCbCr capture modes
without embedded syncs (“BT.601” modes).
VOUT[1]_VSYNC/
EMAC[1]_MCRS/
VIN[1]A_FLD/
VIN[1]A_DE/
SPI[3]_D[0]/
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, SPI[3],
UART3, GP2
PINCNTL206
DSIS: 0
Video Input 1 Port A Data Enable input. Discrete data
valid signal for Port A YCbCr capture modes without
embedded syncs (“BT.601” modes).
IPD
DVDD
AA23
AA23
I
I
UART3_CTS/
GP2[30]
VOUT[1]_VSYNC/
EMAC[1]_MCRS/
VIN[1]A_FLD/
VIN[1]A_DE/
SPI[3]_D[0]/
VOUT[1],
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, SPI[3],
UART3, GP2
PINCNTL206
DSIS: 0
Video Input 1 Port A Field ID input. Discrete field
identification signal for Port A YCbCr capture modes
without embedded syncs (“BT.601” modes).
IPD
DVDD
UART3_CTS/
GP2[30]
126
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
3.2.23 Video Output (Digital)
Table 3-45. Video Output 0 (Digital) Terminal Functions
OTHER(2)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
(3)
NO.
Video Output 0
IPD
DVDD
–
VOUT[0]_CLK
AD12
AF14
AE14
AD14
AA8
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Video Output Clock output.
PINCNTL176
IPD
DVDD
–
VOUT[0]_G_Y_YC[9]
VOUT[0]_G_Y_YC[8]
VOUT[0]_G_Y_YC[7]
VOUT[0]_G_Y_YC[6]
VOUT[0]_G_Y_YC[5]
VOUT[0]_G_Y_YC[4]
PINCNTL195
IPD
DVDD
–
PINCNTL194
IPD
DVDD
–
PINCNTL193
IPD
DVDD
–
Video Output Data. These signals represent the 8 MSBs
of G/Y/YC video data. For RGB mode they are green
data bits, for YUV444 mode they are Y data bits, for Y/C
mode they are Y (Luma) data bits and for BT.656 mode
they are multiplexed Y/Cb/Cr (Luma and Chroma) data
bits.
PINCNTL192
IPD
DVDD
–
AB12
AB8
PINCNTL191
IPD
DVDD
–
PINCNTL190
GP2
PINCNTL189
DSIS: PIN
VOUT[0]_G_Y_YC[3]/
GP2[25]
IPD
DVDD
AH15
AH7
O
O
VOUT[0]_G_Y_YC[2]/
EMU3/
GP2[24]
EMU, GP2
PINCNTL188
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
IPD
DVDD
–
VOUT[0]_B_CB_C[9]
VOUT[0]_B_CB_C[8]
VOUT[0]_B_CB_C[7]
VOUT[0]_B_CB_C[6]
VOUT[0]_B_CB_C[5]
VOUT[0]_B_CB_C[4]
AG15
AF15
AB10
AC10
AD15
AD11
O
O
O
O
O
O
PINCNTL187
IPD
DVDD
–
PINCNTL186
IPD
DVDD
–
PINCNTL185
IPD
DVDD
–
Video Output Data. These signals represent the 8 MSBs
of B/CB/C video data. For RGB mode they are blue data
bits, for YUV444 mode they are Cb (Chroma) data bits,
for Y/C mode they are multiplexed Cb/Cr (Chroma) data
bits and for BT.656 mode they are unused.
PINCNTL184
IPD
DVDD
–
PINCNTL183
IPD
DVDD
–
PINCNTL182
GP2
PINCNTL181
DSIS: PIN
VOUT[0]_B_CB_C[3]/
GP2[23]
IPD
DVDD
AE15
AG7
O
O
VOUT[0]_B_CB_C[2]/
EMU2/
GP2[22]
EMU2, GP2
PINCNTL180
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
127
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-45. Video Output 0 (Digital) Terminal Functions (continued)
OTHER(2)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
(3)
NO.
IPD
DVDD
–
VOUT[0]_R_CR[9]/
VOUT[0]_R_CR[8]/
VOUT[0]_R_CR[7]/
VOUT[0]_R_CR[6]/
VOUT[0]_R_CR[5]/
VOUT[0]_R_CR[4]/
AC13
O
O
O
O
O
O
PINCNTL203
IPD
DVDD
–
AE8
AF12
AF6
PINCNTL202
IPD
DVDD
–
PINCNTL201
IPD
DVDD
–
PINCNTL200
Video Output Data. These signals represent the 8 MSBs
of R/CR video data. For RGB mode they are red data
bits, for YUV444 mode they are Cr (Chroma) data bits,
for Y/C mode and BT.656 modes they are unused.
IPD
DVDD
–
AF8
PINCNTL199
IPD
DVDD
–
AA9
PINCNTL198
GP2
PINCNTL197
DSIS: PIN
VOUT[0]_R_CR[3]/
GP2[27]
IPD
DVDD
AB9
AD9
O
O
O
O
VOUT[0]_R_CR[2]/
EMU4/
GP2[26]
EMU4, GP2
PINCNTL196
DSIS: PIN
IPD
DVDD
Video Output Vertical Sync output. This is the discrete
vertical synchronization output. This signal is not used
for embedded sync modes.
IPD
DVDD
–
VOUT[0]_VSYNC
VOUT[0]_HSYNC
AB13
AC11
PINCNTL178
Video Output Horizontal Sync output. This is the discrete
horizontal synchronization output. This signal is not used
for embedded sync modes.
IPD
DVDD
–
PINCNTL177
CAMERA_I/F,
GPMC, UART2,
GP2
PINCNTL175
DSIS: N/A
VOUT[0]_FLD/
CAM_PCLK/
GPMC_A[12]/
UART2_RTS/
GP2[2]
IPD
DVDD_C
AF18
O
Video Output Field ID output. This is the discrete field
identification output. This signal is not used for
embedded sync modes.
MM: MUX1
VOUT[0]_AVID/
VOUT[0]_FLD/
SPI[3]_SCLK/
TIM7_IO/
VOUT[0], SPI[3],
TIMER7, GP2
PINCNTL179
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD
AA10
AA10
O
O
GP2[21]
MM: MUX0
VOUT[0]_AVID/
VOUT[0]_FLD/
SPI[3]_SCLK/
TIM7_IO/
VOUT[0], SPI[3],
TIMER7, GP2
PINCNTL179
DSIS: N/A
Video Output Active Video output. This is the discrete
active video indicator output. This signal is not used for
embedded sync modes.
IPD
DVDD
GP2[21]
128
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-46. Video Output 1 Terminal Functions
OTHER(2)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
(3)
NO.
AE24
AD26
AE26
AF26
AH27
AG26
W22
Video Output 1
VOUT[1]_CLK/
EMAC[1]_MTCLK/
VIN[1]A_HSYNC/
GP2[28]
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, GP2
PINCNTL204
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Video Output Clock output
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[9]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[2]/
VIN[1]A_D[14]/
GP3[13]
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, GP3
PINCNTL221
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[8]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[1]/
VIN[1]A_D[13]/
GP3[12]
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, GP3
PINCNTL220
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD
Video Output Data. These signals represent the 8 MSBs
of G/Y/YC video data. For RGB mode they are green
data bits, for YUV444 mode they are Y data bits, for Y/C
mode they are Y (Luma) data bits and for BT.656 mode
they are multiplexed Y/Cb/Cr (Luma and Chroma) data
bits.
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[7]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[0]/
VIN[1]A_D[12]/
GP3[11]
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, GP3
PINCNTL219
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[6]/
EMAC[1]_GMTCLK/
VIN[1]A_D[11]/
GP3[10]
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, GP3
PINCNTL218
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[5]/
EMAC[1]_MRXDV/
VIN[1]A_D[10]/
GP3[9]
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, GP3
PINCNTL217
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[4]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[7]/
VIN[1]A_D[9]/
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, GP3
PINCNTL216
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD
Video Output Data. These signals represent the 8 MSBs
of G/Y/YC video data. For RGB mode they are green
data bits, for YUV444 mode they are Y data bits, for Y/C
mode they are Y (Luma) data bits and for BT.656 mode
they are multiplexed Y/Cb/Cr (Luma and Chroma) data
bits.
GP3[8]
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[3]
EMAC[1]_MRXD[6]/
VIN[1]A_D[8]/
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, GP3
PINCNTL215
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD
Y23
GP3[7]
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[2]/
GPMC_A[13]/
VIN[1]A_D[21]/
HDMI_SCL/
SPI[2]_SCS[2]/
I2C[2]_SCL/
GPMC, VIN[1]A,
HDMI, SPI[2],
I2C[2], GP3
PINCNTL228
DSIS: N/A
IPU
DVDD
AF27
O
GP3[20]
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[1]/
CAM_D[3]/
GPMC_A[5]/
UART4_RXD/
GP0[22]
CAMERA_I/F,
GPMC, UART4,
GP0
PINCNTL168
DSIS: N/A
IPU
DVDD_C
Video Output Data. These signals represent the 2 LSBs
of G/Y/YC video data for 10-bit, 20-bit, and 30-bit video
modes (VOUT[1] only). For RGB mode they are green
data bits, for YUV444 mode they are Y data bits, for Y/C
mode they are Y (Luma) data bits and for BT-656 mode
they are multiplexed Y/Cb/Cr (Luma and Chroma) data
bits. These signals are not used in 8/16/24-bit modes.
AD18
AC18
O
O
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[0]/
CAM_D[2]/
GPMC_A[6]/
UART4_TXD/
GP0[23]
CAMERA_I/F,
GPMC, UART4,
GP0
PINCNTL169
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_C
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
129
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-46. Video Output 1 Terminal Functions (continued)
OTHER(2)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
(3)
NO.
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[9]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[5]/
VIN[1]A_D[6]/
I2C[3]_SDA/
GP3[6]
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, I2C[3],
GP3
PINCNTL214
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD
AA24
O
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[8]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[4]/
VIN[1]A_D[5]/
I2C[3]_SCL/
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, I2C[3],
GP3
PINCNTL213
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD
AH26
AC25
AD25
AF25
AG25
AH25
O
O
O
O
O
O
Video Output Data. These signals represent the 8 MSBs
of B/CB/C video data. For RGB mode they are blue data
bits, for YUV444 mode they are Cb (Chroma) data bits,
for Y/C mode they are multiplexed Cb/Cr (Luma) data
bits, and for BT.656 mode they are not used.
GP3[5]
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[7]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[3]/
VIN[1]A_D[4]/
UART3_TXD/
GP3[4]
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, UART3,
GP3
PINCNTL212
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[6]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[2]/
VIN[1]A_D[3]/
UART3_RXD/
GP3[3]
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, UART3,
GP3
PINCNTL211
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[5]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[1]/
VIN[1]A_D[2]/
UART4_TXD/
GP3[2]
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, UART4,
GP3
PINCNTL210
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[4]/
EMAC[1]_MRXD[0]/
VIN[1]A_D[1]/
UART4_RXD/
GP3[1]
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, UART4,
GP3
PINCNTL209
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD
Video Output Data. These signals represent the 8 MSBs
of B/CB/C video data. For RGB mode they are blue data
bits, for YUV444 mode they are Cb (Chroma) data bits,
for Y/C mode they are multiplexed Cb/Cr (Luma) data
bits, and for BT.656 mode they are not used.
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[3]/
EMAC[1]_MRCLK/
VIN[1]A_D[0]/
UART4_CTS/
GP3[0]
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, UART4,
GP3
PINCNTL208
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[2]/
GPMC_A[0]/
VIN[1]A_D[7]/
HDMI_CEC/
SPI[2]_D[0]/
GP3[30]
GPMC, VIN[1]A,
HDMI, SPI[2],
GP3
PINCNTL231
DSIS: N/A
IPU
DVDD
AF28
O
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[1]/
CAM_HS/
GPMC_A[9]/
UART2_RXD/
GP0[26]
CAMERA_I/F,
GPMC, UART2,
GP0
PINCNTL172
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_C
Video Output Data. These signals represent the 2 LSBs
of B/CB/C video data for 20-bit, and 30-bit video modes.
For RGB mode they are blue data bits, for YUV444 mode
they are Cb (Chroma) data bits, for Y/C mode they are
multiplexed Cb/Cr (Chroma) data bits and for BT.656
mode they are unused. These signals are not used in
16/24-bit modes.
AE23
AD23
O
O
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[0]/
CAM_VS/
GPMC_A[10]/
UART2_TXD/
GP0[27]
CAMERA_I/F,
GPMC, UART2,
GP0
PINCNTL173
DSIS: N/A
IPU
DVDD_C
130
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-46. Video Output 1 Terminal Functions (continued)
OTHER(2)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
(3)
NO.
VOUT[1]_R_CR[9]/
EMAC[1]_MTXEN/
VIN[1]A_D[20]/
UART5_TXD/
GP3[19]
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, UART5,
GP3
PINCNTL227
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD
Y24
O
VOUT[1]_R_CR[8]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[7]/
VIN[1]A_D[19]/
UART5_RXD/
GP3[18]
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, UART5,
GP3
PINCNTL226
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD
W23
V22
O
O
O
O
O
Video Output Data. These signals represent the 8 MSBs
of R/CR video data. For RGB mode they are red data
bits, for YUV444 mode they are Cr (Chroma) data bits,
for Y/C mode and BT.656 mode they are not used.
VOUT[1]_R_CR[7]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[6]/
VIN[1]A_D[18]/
SPI[3]_D[0]/
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, SPI[3],
GP3
PINCNTL225
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD
GP3[17]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[6]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[5]/
VIN[1]A_D[17]/
SPI[3]_D[1]/
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, SPI[3],
GP3
PINCNTL224
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD
AA25
AC26
AG27
GP3[16]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[5]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[4]/
VIN[1]A_D[16]/
SPI[3]_SCLK/
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, SPI[3],
GP3
PINCNTL223
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD
GP3[15]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[4]/
EMAC[1]_MTXD[3]/
VIN[1]A_D[15]/
SPI[3]_SCS[1]/
GP3[14]
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, SPI[3],
GP3
PINCNTL222
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD
Video Output Data. These signals represent the 8 MSBs
of R/CR video data. For RGB mode they are red data
bits, for YUV444 mode they are Cr (Chroma) data bits,
for Y/C mode and BT.656 mode they are not used.
VOUT[1]_R_CR[3]/
GPMC_A[14]/
VIN[1]A_D[22]/
HDMI_SDA/
SPI[2]_SCLK/
I2C[2]_SDA/
GP3[21]
GPMC, VIN[1]A,
HDMI, SPI[2],
I2C[2], GP3
PINCNTL229
DSIS: N/A
IPU
DVDD
AG28
AE27
O
O
VOUT[1]_R_CR[2]/
GPMC_A[15]/
VIN[1]A_D[23]/
HDMI_HPDET/
SPI[2]_D[1]/
GPMC, VIN[1]A,
HDMI, SPI[2],
I2C[2], GP3
PINCNTL230
DSIS: N/A
IPU
DVDD
GP3[22]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[1]/
CAM_D[1]/
GPMC_A[7]/
UART4_CTS/
GP0[24]
CAMERA_I/F,
GPMC, UART4,
GP0
PINCNTL170
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_C
AC19
AA22
O
O
Video Output Data. These signals represent the 2 LSBs
of R/CR video data for 30-bit video modes. For RGB
mode they are red data bits, for YUV444 mode they are
Cr (Chroma) data bits, for Y/C mode and BT.656 modes
they are not used. These signals are not used in 24-bit
mode.
VOUT[1]_R_CR[0]/
CAM_D[0]/
GPMC_A[8]/
UART4_RTS/
GP0[25]
CAMERA_I/F,
GPMC, UART4,
GP0
PINCNTL171
DSIS: N/A
IPD
DVDD_C
VOUT[1]_VSYNC/
EMAC[1]_MCRS/
VIN[1]A_FLD/
VIN[1]A_DE/
SPI[3]_D[0]/
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, SPI[3], Video Output Vertical Sync output. This is the discrete
IPD
DVDD
AA23
O
UART3, GP2
PINCNTL206
DSIS: N/A
vertical synchronization output. This signal is not used for
embedded sync modes
UART3_CTS/
GP2[30]
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
131
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-46. Video Output 1 Terminal Functions (continued)
OTHER(2)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
MUXED
DESCRIPTION
(3)
NO.
VOUT[1]_HSYNC/
EMAC[1]_MCOL/
VIN[1]A_VSYNC/
SPI[3]_D[1]/
UART3_RTS/
GP2[29]
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, SPI[3], Video Output Horizontal Sync output. This is the discrete
IPD
DVDD
AC24
O
UART3, GP2
PINCNTL205
DSIS: N/A
horizontal synchronization output. This signal is not used
for embedded sync modes.
VOUT[1]_FLD/
CAM_FLD/
CAM_WE/
GPMC_A[11]/
UART2_CTS/
GP0[28]
CAMERA_I/F,
GPMC, UART2, Video Output Field ID output. This is the discrete field
IPD
DVDD_C
AB23
Y22
O
O
GP0
PINCNTL174
DSIS: N/A
identification output. This signal is not used for embedded
sync modes.
VOUT[1]_AVID/
EMAC[1]_MRXER/
VIN[1]A_CLK/
UART4_RTS/
TIM6_IO/
EMAC[1],
VIN[1]A, UART4, Video Output Active Video output. This is the discrete
IPD
DVDD
TIMER6, GP2
PINCNTL207
DSIS: N/A
active video indicator output. This signal is not used for
embedded sync modes.
GP2[31]
132
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
3.2.24 Video Output (Analog, TV)
Table 3-47. Video Outupt (Analog, TV) Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
DESCRIPTION
NO.
VIDEO INTERFACES (TV)
Composite/S-Video (Luminance) Amplifier Output.
In Normal mode (internal amplifier used), this pin drives the 75-Ω TV
load. An external resistor (Rout) should be connected between this pin
and the TV_VFB0 pin and be placed as close to the pins as possible.
The nominal value of Rout is 2700 Ω.
–
TV_OUT0
AH24
O
VDDA_VDAC_1P8
In TVOUT Bypass mode (internal amplifier not used), this pin is not
used.
When this pin is not used or the TV output is powered-down, this pin
should be left unconnected.
S-Video (Chrominance) Amplifier Output.
In Normal mode (internal amplifier used), this pin drives the 75-Ω TV
load.
An external resistor (Rout) should be connected between this pin and
the TV_VFB1 pin and be placed as close to the pins as possible. The
nominal value of Rout is 2700 Ω.
–
TV_OUT1
AH22
O
VDDA_VDAC_1P8
In TVOUT Bypass mode (internal amplifier not used), this pin is not
used.
When this pin is not used or the TV output is powered-down, this pin
should be left unconnected.
Composite/S-Video (Luminance) Feedback.
In Normal mode (internal amplifier used), this pin acts as the buffer
feedback node.
An external resistor (Rout) should be connected between this pin and
the TV_OUT0 pin.
–
TV_VFB0
AG23
A O
In TVOUT Bypass mode (internal amplifier not used), this pin acts as
the direct Video DAC output and should be connected to ground
through a load resistor (Rload) and to an external video amplifier. The
nominal value of Rload is 1500 Ω.
VDDA_VDAC_1P8
When this pin is not used or the TV output is powered-down, this pin
should be left unconnected.
S-Video (Chrominance) Feedback.
In Normal mode (internal amplifier used), this pin acts as the buffer
feedback node.
An external resistor (Rout) should be connected between this pin and
the TV_OUT1 pin.
–
TV_VFB1
AG22
A O
In TVOUT Bypass mode (internal amplifier not used), it acts as the
direct Video DAC output and should be connected to ground through
a load resistor (Rload) and to an external video amplifier. The nominal
value of Rload is 1500 Ω.
VDDA_VDAC_1P8
When this pin is not used or the TV output is powered-down, this pin
should be left unconnected.
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
(2) IPD = Internal Pulldown Active, IPU = Internal Pullup Active, DIS = Internal Pull Disabled. This represents the default state of the
Internal Pull after Reset. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown
resistors are required, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors and , Pin Behaviors at Reset.
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
133
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 3-47. Video Outupt (Analog, TV) Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2) (3)
DESCRIPTION
NO.
TV Input Reference Current Setting.
An external resistor (Rset) should be connected between this pin and
VSSA_VDAC to set the reference current of the video DAC. The value
of the resistor depends on the mode of operation.
In Normal mode (internal amplifier used), the nominal value for Rset
is 4700 Ω.
–
TV_RSET
AH23
A
VDDA_VDAC_1P8
In TVOUT Bypass mode (internal amplifier not used), the nominal
value for Rset is 10000 Ω.
When the TV output is not used, this pin should be connected to
ground (VSS).
134
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
3.2.25 Reserved Pins
Table 3-48. Reserved Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER
DESCRIPTION
Reserved. (Leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground.)
NAME
RSV1
NO.
AD8
U8
O
O
O
RSV2
Reserved. (Leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground.)
Reserved. (Leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground.)
RSV3
V8
RSV4
Y14
AC8
L27
L28
M27
M28
N28
N27
P28
P27
R27
R28
U1
S
Reserved. (Leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground.)
RSV5
RSV6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
RSV7
RSV8
RSV9
RSV10
RSV11
RSV12
RSV13
RSV14
RSV15
RSV16
RSV17
Reserved. (Leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground.)
Reserved. (Leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground.)
Reserved. (Leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground.)
U2
Reserved. For proper device operation, this pin must always be tied directly to a
1-µF capacitor to ground (VSS).
RSV18
RSV19
RSV20
RSV21
RSV22
N10
N11
P11
P10
M11
S
S
S
S
S
Reserved. For proper device operation, this pin must always be tied directly to a
1-µF capacitor to ground (VSS).
Reserved. For proper device operation, this pin must be tied directly to the 1.8-V
core supply.
Reserved. For proper device operation, this pin must always be tied directly to a
1-µF capacitor to ground (VSS).
Reserved. For proper device operation, this pin must always be tied directly to a
1-µF capacitor to ground (VSS).
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
135
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
3.2.26 Supply Voltages
Table 3-49. Supply Voltages Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER
DESCRIPTION
NAME
VREFSSTL_DDR[0]
VREFSSTL_DDR[1]
CVDD
NO.
G15
G14
S
S
S
Reference Power Supply DDR[0]
Reference Power Supply DDR[1]
K9, K10,
Variable Voltage Supply for the CORE_L Core Logic Voltage
Domain
For actual voltage supply ranges, see Section 6.2, Recommended
Operating Conditions.
K12, K18, L9,
L10, L11,
L12, L14,
L15, L17,
L19, M10,
M12, M13,
M14, M16,
M18, N9,
N13, N14,
N17, N19,
P12, P14,
P16, R15,
R17, R19,
T12, U11,
U13, U17,
U19, W11
CVDD_ARM
DVDD
T14, T15,
T16, U15,
U16, V15,
V16
S
S
Variable Voltage Supply for the ARM_L Core Logic Voltage
Domain
For actual voltage supply ranges, see Section 6.2, Recommended
Operating Conditions.
M8, N7, P8,
T7, U21,
U22,
3.3 V/1.8 V Power Supply for General I/Os
V20,Y11,
Y16, AA15,
AA17, AB14,
AB16
DVDD_GPMC
K20, L21,
M20
S
3.3 V/1.8 V Power Supply for GPMC I/Os
DVDD_GPMCB
DVDD_SD
P20, T20
P7, P9
S
S
S
3.3 V/1.8 V Power Supply for GPMCB I/Os
3.3 V/1.8 V Power Supply for MMC/SD/SDIO I/Os
1.5 V/1.8 V Power Supply for DDR[0] I/Os
DVDD_DDR[0]
E20, E21,
G16, H16,
H17, J15,
J16, J17, J18
DVDD_DDR[1]
DVDD_M
E8, E9, G13,
H12, H13,
H14, J10,
J11, J13
S
S
1.5 V/1.8 V Power Supply for DDR[1] I/Os
R10
1.8 V Power Supply . For proper device operation, this pin must
always be connected to a 1.8-V Power Supply.
DVDD_C
W19, W20
R13
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
3.3 V/1.8 V Power Supply for Camera I/F I/Os
1.8 V Analog Power Supply for PLL_ARM and PLL_SGX
1.8 V Analog Power Supply for PLL_VIDEO0
1.8 V Analog Power Supply for PLL_VIDEO1
1.8 V Analog Power Supply for PLL_AUDIO
1.8 V Analog Power Supply for PLL_DDR
VDDA_ARMPLL_1P8
VDDA_VID0PLL_1P8
VDDA_VID1PLL_1P8
AB18
AA18
VDDA_AUDIOPLL_1P8 R18
VDDA_DDRPLL_1P8
VDDA_L3PLL_1P8
H15
N18
1.8 V Analog Power Supply for PLL_L3, PLL_HDVPSS, and
PLL_MEDIACTL
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
136
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 3-49. Supply Voltages Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
VDDA_PCIE_1P8
VDDA_SATA_1P8
VDDA_HDMI_1P8
VDDA_USB0_1P8
VDDA_USB1_1P8
VDDA_VDAC_1P8
VDDA_USB_3P3
W9, W10
S
1.8 V Analog Power Supply for PCIe.
For proper device operation, this pin must always be connected
to a 1.8-V Power Supply, even if the PCIe is not being used.
U9, U10
W18
S
S
S
S
S
S
1.8 V Analog Power Supply for SATA.
For proper device operation, this pin must always be connected
to a 1.8-V Power Supply, even if the SATA is not being used.
1.8 V Analog Power Supply for HDMI.
For proper device operation, this pin must always be connected
to a 1.8-V Power Supply, even if the HDMI is not being used.
AA12
W13
1.8 V Analog Power Supply for USB0.
For proper device operation, this pin must always be connected
to a 1.8-V Power Supply, even if the USB0 is not being used.
1.8 V Analog Power Supply for USB1.
For proper device operation, this pin must always be connected
to a 1.8-V Power Supply, even if the USB1 is not being used.
AB19
AA13
1.8 V Reference Power Supply for VDAC.
For proper device operation, this pin must always be connected
to a 1.8-V Power Supply, even if the VDAC is not being used.
3.3 V Analog Power Supply for USB0 and USB1.
For proper device operation, this pin must always be connected
to a 3.3-V Power Supply, even if USB0 and USB1 are not being
used.
VDDA_1P8
L20, M7,
M22, R20,
U7, V10,
W15, Y13
S
1.8 V Power Supply for on-chip LDOs and I/O biasing
LDOCAP_ARM
LDOCAP_ARMRAM
LDOCAP_RAM0
LDOCAP_RAM1
LDOCAP_RAM2
LDOCAP_SGX
W14
V14
P18
R11
L18
T10
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
ARM Cortex-A8 VBB LDO output.
This pin must always be connected via a 1-uF capacitor to VSS.
ARM Cortex-A8 RAM LDO output.
This pin must always be connected via a 1-uF capacitor to VSS.
CORE RAM0 LDO output.
This pin must always be connected via a 1-uF capacitor to VSS.
CORE RAM1 LDO output.
This pin must always be connected via a 1-uF capacitor to VSS.
CORE RAM2 LDO output.
This pin must always be connected via a 1-uF capacitor to VSS.
SGX530 VBB LDO output.
This pin must always be connected via a 1-uF capacitor to VSS.
LDOCAP_SERDESCLK T11
SERDES_CLKP/N Pins LDO output.
This pin must always be connected via a 1-uF capacitor to VSS.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
137
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
3.2.27 Ground Pins (VSS)
Table 3-50. Ground Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
VSS
A1, A12,
GND
Ground (GND)
A17, A28,
D9, D20, J12,
J14, J19,
K11, K13,
K14, K15,
K16, K17,
K19, L8, L13,
L16, L22, M9,
M15, M17,
M19, M21,
N8, N12,
N15, N16,
N20, N21,
N22, P13,
P15, P17,
P19, P21,
R8, R9, R12,
R14, R16,
R21, R22,
T8, T9, T13,
T17, T18,
T19, T21,
T22, U12,
U14, U18,
U20, V7, V9,
V11, V17,
V19, V21,
W12, W16,
W17, Y1, Y2,
Y10, Y12,
Y15, Y17,
Y18, Y19,
AA14, AA16,
AD21, AE1,
AE2, AE9,
AE20, AF23,
AG1, AH1,
AH28
VSSA_VDAC
VSSA_HDMI
VSSA_USB
AA19
GND
GND
GND
Analog GND for VDAC.
For proper device operation, this pin must always be connected to ground,
even if the VDAC is not being used.
V18
Analog GND for HDMI
For proper device operation, this pin must always be connected to ground,
even if the HDMI is not being used.
V12, V13
Analog GND for USB0 and USB1.
For proper device operation, this pin must always be connected to ground,
even if USB0 and USB1 are not being used.
VSSA_DEVOSC AG3
VSSA_AUXOSC R2
GND
GND
Ground for Device Oscillator
Ground for Auxiliary Oscillator
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, MM = Multi Muxed, DSIS =
De-selected Input State
138
Device Pins
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
4 Device Configurations
4.1 Control Module Registers
4.2 Boot Modes
The state of the device after boot is determined by sampling the input states of the BTMODE[15:0] pins
when device reset (POR or RESET) is de-asserted. The sampled values are latched into the
CONTROL_STATUS register, which is part of the Control Module. The BTMODE[15:11] values determine
the following system boot settings:
•
•
RSTOUT_WD_OUT Control
GPMC CS0 Default Data Bus Width, Wait Enable, and Address/Data Multiplexing
For additional details on BTMODE[15:11] pin functions, see Table 3-1, Boot Configuration Terminal
Functions.
The BTMODE[4:0] values determine the boot mode order according to Table 4-1, Boot Mode Order. The
1st boot mode listed for each BTMODE[4:0] configuration is executed as the primary boot mode. If the
primary boot mode fails, the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th boot modes are executed in that order until a successful
boot is completed.
The BTMODE[7:5] pins are RESERVED and should be pulled down as indicated inTable 3-1, Boot
Configuration Terminal Functions.
When the EMAC bootmode is selected (see Table 4-1), the sampled value from BTMODE[9:8] pins are
used to determine the Ethernet PHY Mode selection (see Table 4-7).
When the XIP (MUX0), XIP (MUX1), XIP w/ WAiT (MUX0) or XIP w/ WAiT (MUX1) bootmode is selected
(see Table 4-1), the sampled value from BTMODE[10] pin is used to select between GPMC pin muxing
options shown in Table 4-2, XIP (on GPMC) Boot Options [Muxed or Non-Muxed].
For more detailed information on booting the device, see the ROM Code Memory and Peripheral Booting
chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature
Number: SPRUGZ7).
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Configurations
139
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. Boot Mode Order
BTMODE[4:0]
1st
2nd
RESERVED
XIP w/WAIT (MUX0)(1)(2)
SPI
3rd
RESERVED
MMC
4th
00000
00001
00010
00011
00100
00101
00110
00111
01000
01001
01010
01011
01100
01101
01110
01111
10000
10001
10010
10011
10100
10101
10110
10111
11000
11001
11010
11011
11100
11101
11110
11111
RESERVED
UART
RESERVED
SPI
UART
NAND
XIP (MUX0)(1)(2)
NANDI2C
MMC
UART
EMAC(3)
SPI
SPI
NAND
NANDI2C
RESERVED
RESERVED
XIP (MUX1)(1)(2)
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
PCIE_64(4)
MMC
RESERVED
RESERVED
EMAC(3)
RESERVED
RESERVED
MMC
RESERVED
RESERVED
SPI
PCIE_32(4)
PCIE_64(4)
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
Fast XIP (MUX0)(1)
XIP (MUX1)(1)(2)
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
UART
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
EMAC(3)
EMAC(3)
EMAC(3)
SPI
UART
XIP w/WAIT (MUX1)(1)(2)
UART
NANDI2C
NANDI2C
NANDI2C
MMC
MMC
NAND
UART
NAND
MMC
UART
EMAC(3)
NAND
SPI
EMAC(3)
NANDI2C
UART
EMAC(3)
EMAC(3)
SPI
MMC
UART
MMC
SPI
UART
SPI
MMC
PCIE_32(4)
PCIE_64(4)
SPI
RESERVED
RESERVED
MMC
SPI
MMC
XIP (MUX0)(1)(2)
XIP w/WAIT (MUX0)(1)(2)
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
Fast XIP (MUX0)(1)
UART
UART
SPI
MMC
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
EMAC(3)
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
UART
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
PCIE_32(4)
(1) GPMC CS0 eXecute In Place (XIP) boot for NOR/OneNAND/ROM. MUX0/1 refers to the multiplexing option for the GPMC_A[12:0] pins.
For more detailed information on booting the device, including which pins are used for each boot mode, see the ROM Code Memory
and Peripheral Booting chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number:
SPRUGZ7).
(2) When the XIP (MUX0), XIP (MUX1), XIP w/ WAiT (MUX0) or XIP w/ WAiT (MUX1) bootmode is selected, the sampled value from
BTMODE[10] pin is used to select between GPMC pin configuration options shown in Table 4-2, XIP (on GPMC) Boot Options.
(3) When the EMAC bootmode is selected, the sampled value from BTMODE[9:8] pins are used to determine the Ethernet PHY Mode
Selection (see Table 4-7).
(4) When the PCIe bootmode is selected (PCIE_32 or PCI_64), the sampled value from BTMODE[15:12] pins are used to determine the
addressing options. For more detailed information on the PCIe addressing options, see the ROM Code Memory and Peripheral Booting
chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number: SPRUGZ7).
4.2.1 XIP (NOR) Boot Options
Table 4-2 shows the XIP (NOR) boot mode GPMC pin configuration options (Option A: BTMODE[10] = 0
and Option B: BTMODE[10] = 1). For Option B, the pull state on select pins is reconfigured to IPD and
remains IPD after boot until the user software reconfigures it.
140
Device Configurations
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 4-2. XIP (on GPMC) Boot Options
CONTROLLED I/O FUNCTION DURING XIP (NOR) BOOT
BTMODE[10] = 0 [OPTION A] BTMODE[10] = 1 [OPTION B]
PULL PULL
SIGNAL NAME
PIN NO.
OTHER CONDITIONS
PIN FUNCTION
PIN FUNCTION
STATE
STATE
GPMC_CS[0]/*
T28
GPMC_CS[0]
GPMC_ADV_ALE
IPU
GPMC_CS[0]
IPU
M26
BTMODE[14:13] = 01b or 10b (Mux)
BTMODE[14:13] = 00b (Non-Mux)
IPU
GPMC_ADV_ALE
Default
IPU
GPMC_ADV_ALE/*
GPMC_OE_RE
T27
U27
V28
U28
W28
GPMC_OE_RE
GPMC_BE[0]_CLE
Default
IPU
IPD
IPD
IPU
IPU
GPMC_OE_RE
Default
IPU
IPD
GPMC_BE[0]_CLE/GPMC_A[25]/*
GPMC_BE[1]/GPMC_A[24]/*
GPMC_WE
Default
IPD
GPMC_WE
GPMC_WE
GPMC_WAIT[0]
Default
IPU
BTMODE[15] = 1b (WAIT Used/Enabled)
GPMC_WAIT[0]
IPU
IPD(1)
GPMC_WAIT[0]/GPMC_A[26]/*
BTMODE[15] = 0b (WAIT Not
Used/Disabled)
GPMC_CLK/*
R26
GPMC_CLK
IPU
Off
Default
IPU
Off
Y25,V24,U23,U24,AA27,Y26,AB
28,Y27,V25,U25,AA28,V26,W27,
V27,Y28,U26
GPMC_D[15:0]
GPMC_D[15:0]
GPMC_D[15:0]/*
J25
BTMODE[12] = 0b (8-bit Mode)
BTMODE[12] = 1b (16-bit Mode)
GPMC_A[0]
IPD
GPMC_A[0]
Default
IPD
*/GPMC_A[27]/GPMC_A[26]/GPMC_A[0]/*
*/GPMC_A[1:12]/* (M0)
T23,H26,F28,G27,K22,K23,J24, XIP_MUX0 Mode
GPMC_A[1:12]
Default
IPD
IPD
GPMC_A[1:12]
Default
IPD
IPD
H25,H22,H23,G23,F27
XIP_MUX1 Mode
J28,K27,M24,L26,AD18,AC18,A XIP_MUX0 Mode
Default
Default Default
Default
Default
*/GPMC_A[1:12]/* (M1)
C19,AA22,AE23,AD23,AB23,AF
XIP_MUX1 Mode
18
GPMC_A[1:12]
Default GPMC_A[1:12]
*/GPMC_A[13:15]/* (M0)
*/GPMC_A[0]/* (M1)
J22,H24,J23
Default
Default
IPD
IPU
Default
Default
IPD
IPU
AF28
AF27
AG28
BTMODE[12] = 0b (8-bit Mode)
BTMODE[12] = 1b (16-bit Mode)
BTMODE[14:13] = 01b or 10b (Mux)
BTMODE[14:13] = 00b (Non-Mux)
BTMODE[14:13] = 01b or 10b (Mux)
BTMODE[14:13] = 00b (Non-Mux)
Default
Default
IPU
IPU
Default
Default
IPU
IPD(1)
IPU
*/GPMC_A[13]/* (M1)
*/GPMC_A[14]/* (M1)
IPD(1)
*/GPMC_A[15]/* (M1)
GPMC_A[16:19]/*
GPMC_A[20] (M0)
GPMC_A[21] (M0)
GPMC_A[22] (M0)
GPMC_A[23] (M0)
AE27
Default
Default
Default
Default
Default
Default
IPD
IPD
IPU
IPD
IPU
IPD
Default
Default
Default
Default
Default
Default
IPD
AD27,V23,AE28,AC27
IPD
IPD(1)
AD28
AC28
AB27
AA26
IPD
IPD(1)
IPD
(1) After initial power-up the internal pullup (IPU) will be at its default configuration of IPU. During the boot ROM execution, the pull state is reconfigured to IPD and it remains IPD after boot
until the user software reconfigures it.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Configurations
141
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 4-2. XIP (on GPMC) Boot Options (continued)
CONTROLLED I/O FUNCTION DURING XIP (NOR) BOOT
BTMODE[10] = 0 [OPTION A] BTMODE[10] = 1 [OPTION B]
SIGNAL NAME
PIN NO.
OTHER CONDITIONS
PULL
STATE
PULL
STATE
PIN FUNCTION
PIN FUNCTION
*/GPMC_A[24]/GPMC_A[20]/*
*/GPMC_A[25]/GPMC_A[21]/*
*/GPMC_A[26]/GPMC_A[22]/*
*/GPMC_A[27]/GPMC_A[23]/*
GPMC_A[24] (M1)
L25
N23
P22
R24
M25
K28
Default
Default
Default
Default
Default
Default
IPU
IPU
IPU
IPU
IPU
IPU
Default
Default
Default
Default
Default
Default
IPD(1)
IPD(1)
IPD(1)
IPU
IPU
GPMC_A[25] (M1)
IPU
142
Device Configurations
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
4.2.2 NAND Flash Boot
Table 4-3 lists the device pins that are configured by the ROM for the NAND Flash boot mode.
NOTE: Table 4-3 lists the configuration of the GPMC_CLK pin (pin mux and pull state) in NAND
bootmodes.
The NAND flash memory is not XIP and requires shadowing before the code can be executed.
Table 4-3. Pins Used in NAND FLASH Bootmode
OTHER
CONDITIONS
SIGNAL NAME
PIN NO.
TYPE
GPMC_CS[0]/*
GPMC_ADV_ALE/*
T28
M26
T27
U27
V28
U28
W28
R26
O
O
O
O
O
O
I
BTMODE[12] = 0b
(8-bit Mode)
BTMODE[12] = 1b
(16-bit Mode)
GPMC_OE_RE
GPMC_BE[0]_CLE/GPMC_A[25]/*
GPMC_BE[1]/GPMC_A[24]/*
GPMC_WE
BTMODE[14:13] =
00b (GPMC CS0
not muxed)
GPMC_WAIT[0]/GPMC_A[26]/*(1)
GPMC_CLK/*
O
Y25,V24,U23,U24,
AA27,Y26,AB28,Y2
7,
BTMODE[15] = 0b
(wait disabled)
GPMC_D[15:0]/*
I/O
V25,U25,AA28,V26
,W27,V27,Y28,U26
(1) GPMC_CLK/* is not configured in BTMODE[10] = 1 [OPTION B]
4.2.3 NAND I2C Boot (I2C EEPROM)
Table 4-4 lists the device pins that are configured by the ROM for the NAND I2C boot mode.
Table 4-4. Pins Used in NAND I2C Bootmode
SIGNAL NAME
I2C[0]_SCL
I2C[0]_SDA
PIN NO.
AC4
TYPE
I/O
AB6
I/O
4.2.4 MMC/SD Cards Boot
Table 4-5 lists the device pins that are configured by the ROM for the MMC/SD boot mode.
Table 4-5. Pins Used in MMC/SD Bootmode
SIGNAL NAME
SD1_CLK
PIN NO.
P3
TYPE
O
SD1_CMD/GP0[0] [MUX0]
SD1_DAT[0]
P2
O
P1
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
SD1_DAT[1]_SDIRQ
SD_DAT[2]_SDRW
SD1_DAT[3]
P5
P4
P6
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Configurations
143
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
4.2.5 SPI Boot
Table 4-6 lists the device pins that are configured by the ROM for the SPI boot mode.
Table 4-6. Pins Used in SPI Bootmode
SIGNAL NAME
SPI[0]_SCS[0]
PIN NO.
AD6
TYPE
I/O
SPI[0]_D[0] (MISO)
SPI[0]_D[1] (MOSI)
SPI[0]_SCLK
AE3
I/O
AF3
I/O
AC7
I/O
4.2.6 Ethernet PHY Mode Selection
When the EMAC bootmode is selected, via the BTMODE[4:0] pins (see Table 4-1), Table 4-7 shows the
sampled value of BTMODE[9:8] pins and the Ethernet PHY Mode selection.
Table 4-8 shows the signal names (pin functions) and the associated pin numbers selected in each
particular EMAC mode.
Table 4-7. EMAC PHY Mode Selection
ETHERNET PHY MODE
BTMODE[9:8]
SELECTION
00b
01b
10b
11b
MII
RMII
RGMII
RESERVED
Table 4-8. Pins Used in EMAC[0] MII/GMII, RGMII, and RMII Boot Modes
SIGNAL NAMES
PIN NO.
MII/GMII
TYPE
RGMII
TYPE
RMII
TYPE
Output
only
J27
DEFAULT
DEFAULT
EMAC_RMREFCLK
L23
R25
K23
H27
G28
P23
R23
J25
T23
H26
F28
G27
K22
J26
L24
J24
H25
H22
EMAC[0]_MCOL
EMAC[0]_MCRS
I
I
EMAC[0]_RGRXCTL
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[2]
DEFAULT
I
I
EMAC[0]_RMRXD[0]
EMAC[0]_RMRXD[1]
DEFAULT
I
I
EMAC[0]_GMTCLK
EMAC[0]_MRCLK
EMAC[0]_MRXD[0]
EMAC[0]_MRXD[1]
EMAC[0]_MRXD[2]
EMAC[0]_MRXD[3]
EMAC[0]_MRXD[4]
EMAC[0]_MRXD[5]
EMAC[0]_MRXD[6]
EMAC[0]_MRXD[7]
EMAC[0]_MRXDV
EMAC[0]_MRXER
EMAC[0]_MTCLK
EMAC[0]_MTXD[0]
EMAC[0]_MTXD[1]
EMAC[0]_MTXD[2]
O
I
EMAC[0]_RGTXC
EMAC[0]_RGTXD[0]
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[0]
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[1]
DEFAULT
O
O
I
EMC[0]_RMCRSDV
EMAC[0]_RMTXD[0]
EMAC[0]_RMTXD[1]
EMAC[0]_RMTXEN
DEFAULT
I
I
O
O
O
I
I
I
I
I
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[3]
EMAC[0]_RGTXD[3]
EMAC[0]_RGTXD[2]
EMAC[0]_RGTXD[1]
DEFAULT
I
DEFAULT
I
O
O
O
DEFAULT
I
DEFAULT
I
DEFAULT
I
DEFAULT
I
EMAC[0]_RGTXCTL
EMAC[0]_RGRXC
DEFAULT
O
I
EMAC[0]_RMRXER
DEFAULT
I
I
O
O
O
DEFAULT
DEFAULT
DEFAULT
DEFAULT
DEFAULT
144
Device Configurations
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 4-8. Pins Used in EMAC[0] MII/GMII, RGMII, and RMII Boot Modes (continued)
SIGNAL NAMES
RGMII
PIN NO.
MII/GMII
TYPE
O
TYPE
RMII
TYPE
H23
G23
F27
J22
H24
J23
H28
P24
EMAC[0]_MTXD[3]
EMAC[0]_MTXD[4]
EMAC[0]_MTXD[5]
EMAC[0]_MTXD[6]
EMAC[0]_MTXD[7]
EMAC[0]_MTXEN
MDCLK
DEFAULT
DEFAULT
DEFAULT
DEFAULT
DEFAULT
DEFAULT
MDCLK
DEFAULT
DEFAULT
DEFAULT
DEFAULT
DEFAULT
DEFAULT
MDCLK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
MDIO
I/O
MDIO
I/O
MDIO
I/O
4.2.7 PCIe Bootmode (PCIE_32 and PCIE_64)
Table 4-9 lists the device pins that are configured by the ROM for the PCIe boot mode.
Table 4-9. Pins Used in PCIe Bootmode
SIGNAL NAME
PCIE_TXP0
PIN NO.
AD2
TYPE
O
O
I
PCIE_TXN0
AD1
PCIE_RXP0
AC2
PCIE_RXN0
AC1
I
SERDES_CLKIP
SERDES_CLKN
AF1
I
AF2
I
4.2.8 UART Bootmode
Table 4-10 lists the device pins that are configured by the ROM for the UART boot mode.
Table 4-10. Pins Used in UART Bootmode
SIGNAL NAME
UART0_RXD
PIN NO.
AH5
TYPE
I
UART0_TXD
AG5
O
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Configurations
145
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
4.3 Pin Multiplexing Control
Device level pin multiplexing is controlled on a pin-by-pin basis by the MUXMODE bits of the PINCNTL1 –
PINCNTL270 registers in the Control Module.
Pin multiplexing selects which one of several peripheral pin functions controls the pin's I/O buffer output
data values. Table 4-11 shows the peripheral pin functions associated with each MUXMODE setting for all
multiplexed pins. The default pin multiplexing control for almost every pin is to select MUXMODE = 0x0, in
which case the pin's I/O buffer is 3-stated.
In most cases, the input from each pin is routed to all of the peripherals that share the pin, regardless of
the MUXMODE setting. However, in some cases a constant "0" or "1" value is routed to the associated
peripheral when its peripheral function is not selected to control any output pin. For more details on the
De-Selected Input State (DSIS), see the "MUXED" columns of each Terminal Functions table (Section 3.2,
Terminal Functions).
Some peripheral pin functions can be routed to more than one device pin. These types of peripheral pin
functions are called Multimuxed (MM) and may have different Switching Characteristics and Timing
Requirements for each device pin option. The Multimuxed peripheral pin functions are labeled as "MM" in
Terminal Functions tables in Section 3.2, Terminal Functions and the associated timings for each MM pin
option are in Section 8, Peripheral Information and Timings.
(1) "(M0)" represents multimuxed option "0" for this pin function, "(M1)" represents multimuxed option "1" for this pin function, ... etc.
(2) Within this MUXMODE setting, EMAC[x] GMII or RGMII pin functions are selected via the RGMII0_EN and/or RGMII1_EN bits (8 and 9,
respectively) in the GMII_SEL register [0x4814_0650] of the Control Module. "0" = GMII (default) and "1" = RGMII.
146
Device Configurations
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 4-11. PINCNTLx Registers MUXMODE Functions
HEX
ADDRESS
MUXMODE[7:0] SETTINGS(1)
REGISTER
NAME
PIN
NO.
0x1
0x2
0x4
0x8
0x10
0x20
0x40
0x80
0x4814 0800
0x4814 0804
PINCNTL1
PINCNTL2
P3
P2
SD1_CLK
SD1_CMD(M0)
GP0[0]
0x4814 0808
0x4814 080C
0x4814 0810
0x4814 0814
0x4814 0818
PINCNTL3
PINCNTL4
PINCNTL5
PINCNTL6
PINCNTL7
P1
P5
P4
P6
W6
SD1_DAT[0]
SD1_DAT[1]_SDIRQ
SD1_DAT[2]_SDRW
SD1_DAT[3]
TIM5_IO(M1)
GP1[7](M0)
GP0[1]
DEVOSC_WAKE
SPI[1]_SCS[1]
0x4814 081C
0x4814 0820
PINCNTL8
PINCNTL9
Y6
N1
SD0_CLK
SD0_CMD
SD1_CMD(M1)
SD1_DAT[4]
SD1_DAT[5]
SD1_DAT[6]
SD1_DAT[7]
GP0[2]
0x4814 0824
0x4814 0828
0x4814 082C
0x4814 0830
0x4814 0834
PINCNTL10
PINCNTL11
PINCNTL12
PINCNTL13
PINCNTL14
R7
Y5
Y3
Y4
L5
SD0_DAT[0]
GP0[3]
SD0_DAT[1]_SDIRQ
SD0_DAT[2]_SDRW
SD0_DAT[3]
GP0[4]
GP0[5]
GP0[6]
MCA[0]_AXR[7](M1)
MCA[0]_AXR[8](M1)
MCA[0]_AXR[9](M1)
AUD_CLKIN0
MCA[0]_AHCLKX
MCA[1]_AHCLKX
MCA[2]_AHCLKX
MCA[3]_AHCLKX
MCA[4]_AHCLKX
MCA[5]_AHCLKX
USB1_DRVVBUS
EDMA_EVT3(M1)
EDMA_EVT2(M1)
TIM2_IO(M1)
TIM3_IO(M1)
0x4814 0838
0x4814 083C
PINCNTL15
PINCNTL16
R5
H1
AUD_CLKIN1
AUD_CLKIN2
GP0[8]
GP0[9]
0x4814 0840
0x4814 0844
0x4814 0848
0x4814 084C
0x4814 0850
0x4814 0854
PINCNTL17
PINCNTL18
PINCNTL19
PINCNTL20
PINCNTL21
PINCNTL22
R4
L3
K2
K1
J2
J1
MCA[0]_ACLKX
MCA[0]_AFSX
MCA[0]_ACLKR
MCA[0]_AFSR
MCA[0]_AXR[0]
MCA[0]_AXR[1]
MCA[5]_AXR[2]
MCA[5]_AXR[3]
I2C[3]_SCL(M0)
I2C[3]_SDA(M0)
0x4814 0858
PINCNTL23
L4
MCA[0]_AXR[2]
0x4814 085C
0x4814 0860
PINCNTL24
PINCNTL25
M5
R6
MCA[0]_AXR[3]
MCA[0]_AXR[4]
MCA[1]_AXR[8](M0)
MCA[1]_AXR[9](M0)
MCB_DR
0x4814 0864
PINCNTL26
M3
MCA[0]_AXR[5]
MCA[0]_AXR[6]
MCA[0]_AXR[7](M0)
MCA[0]_AXR[8](M0)
0x4814 0868
0x4814 086C
PINCNTL27
PINCNTL28
M4
L2
MCB_DX
MCB_FSR(M1)
0x4814 0870
0x4814 0874
PINCNTL29
PINCNTL30
L1
MCB_FSX
MCA[0]_AXR[9](M0)
MCA[1]_ACLKX
MCA[1]_AFSX
MCB_CLKR(M1)
M6
MCB_CLKX
0x4814 0878
0x4814 087C
0x4814 0880
0x4814 0884
0x4814 0888
PINCNTL31
PINCNTL32
PINCNTL33
PINCNTL34
PINCNTL35
U5
V3
M1
M2
V4
MCA[1]_ACLKR
MCA[1]_AFSR
MCA[1]_AXR[0]
MCA[1]_AXR[4]
MCA[1]_AXR[5]
SD0_DAT[4]
(1) "(M0)" represents multimuxed option "0" for this pin function, "(M1)" represents multi-muxed option "1" for this pin function, ... etc.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Configurations
147
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 4-11. PINCNTLx Registers MUXMODE Functions (continued)
HEX
ADDRESS
MUXMODE[7:0] SETTINGS(1)
REGISTER
NAME
PIN
NO.
0x1
MCA[1]_AXR[1]
MCA[1]_AXR[2]
0x2
0x4
0x8
0x10
0x20
0x40
0x80
0x4814 088C
0x4814 0890
PINCNTL36
PINCNTL37
T6
R3
SD0_DAT[5]
MCB_FSR(M0)
MCB_CLKR(M0)
0x4814 0894
0x4814 0898
0x4814 089C
0x4814 08A0
0x4814 08A4
0x4814 08A8
0x4814 08AC
0x4814 08B0
0x4814 08B4
0x4814 08B8
0x4814 08BC
0x4814 08C0
0x4814 08C4
0x4814 08C8
0x4814 08CC
0x4814 08D0
0x4814 08D4
0x4814 08D8
0x4814 08DC
0x4814 08E0
0x4814 08E4
0x4814 08E8
PINCNTL38
PINCNTL39
PINCNTL40
PINCNTL41
PINCNTL42
PINCNTL43
PINCNTL44
PINCNTL45
PINCNTL46
PINCNTL47
PINCNTL48
PINCNTL49
PINCNTL50
PINCNTL51
PINCNTL52
PINCNTL53
PINCNTL54
PINCNTL55
PINCNTL56
PINCNTL57
PINCNTL58
PINCNTL59
N6
U6
AA5
N2
V6
V5
H2
G6
H4
G1
G2
F2
J6
MCA[1]_AXR[3]
MCA[2]_ACLKX
MCA[2]_AFSX
MCA[2]_AXR[0]
MCA[2]_AXR[1]
MCA[2]_AXR[2]
MCA[2]_AXR[3]
MCA[3]_ACLKX
MCA[3]_AFSX
MCA[3]_AXR[0]
MCA[3]_AXR[1]
MCA[3]_AXR[2]
MCA[3]_AXR[3]
MCA[4]_ACLKX
MCA[4]_AFSX
MCA[4]_AXR[0]
MCA[4]_AXR[1]
MCA[5]_ACLKX
MCA[5]_AFSX
MCA[5]_AXR[0]
MCA[5]_AXR[1]
GP0[10](M1)
GP0[11](M1)
GP0[12](M1)
GP0[13](M1)
GP0[14](M1)
GP0[15](M1)
GP0[16](M1)
GP0[17](M1)
GP0[18](M1)
GP0[19](M1)
GP0[20](M1)
UART5_RXD(M3)
UART5_TXD(M3)
SD0_DAT[6]
SD0_DAT[7]
TIM2_IO(M0)
MCA[1]_AXR[6]
MCA[1]_AXR[7]
TIM3_IO(M0)
TIM4_IO(M0)
TIM5_IO(M0)
MCA[1]_AXR[8](M1)
MCA[1]_AXR[9](M1)
GP0[21](M1)
GP0[22](M1)
GP0[23](M1)
GP0[24](M1)
GP0[25](M1)
GP0[26](M1)
GP0[27](M1)
K7
H3
H6
J4
TIM6_IO(M0)
J3
H5
L7
MCA[4]_AXR[2]
MCA[4]_AXR[3]
TIM7_IO(M0)
GP0[28](M1)
GP0[29]
L6
UART2_RXD(M1)
TCLKIN
U4
0x4814 08EC
0x4814 08F0
PINCNTL60
PINCNTL61
T2
U3
GP0[30]
GP0[31]
UART2_TXD(M1)
GP1[7](M1)
GP1[8](M1)
GP1[9](M1)
GP1[10](M1)
0x4814 08F4
0x4814 08F8
0x4814 08FC
0x4814 0900
PINCNTL62
PINCNTL63
PINCNTL64
PINCNTL65
W1
W2
V1
V2
0x4814 0904
0x4814 0908
0x4814 090C
PINCNTL66
PINCNTL67
PINCNTL68
–
–
Reserved. Do Not Program this Register.
Reserved. Do Not Program this Register.
UART2_TXD(M2)
DCAN0_TX
I2C[3]_SDA(M1)
AH6
GP1[0]
148
Device Configurations
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 4-11. PINCNTLx Registers MUXMODE Functions (continued)
HEX
ADDRESS
MUXMODE[7:0] SETTINGS(1)
REGISTER
NAME
PIN
NO.
0x1
DCAN0_RX
0x2
UART2_RXD(M2)
0x4
0x8
0x10
0x20
0x40
0x80
I2C[3]_SCL(M1)
0x4814 0910
PINCNTL69
AG6
GP1[1]
0x4814 0914
0x4814 0918
0x4814 091C
PINCNTL70
PINCNTL71
PINCNTL72
AH5
AG5
AE6
UART0_RXD
UART0_TXD
UART0_CTS
UART4_RXD(M3)
UART4_TXD(M3)
UART3_RXD(M0)
UART3_TXD(M0)
UART3_CTS(M0)
UART3_RTS(M0)
HDMI_SCL(M0)
DCAN1_TX
DCAN1_RX
SPI[1]_SCS[3]
SPI[1]_SCS[2]
SPI[0]_SCS[3]
SPI[0]_SCS[2]
SD0_SDCD
0x4814 0920
0x4814 0924
0x4814 0928
0x4814 092C
0x4814 0930
0x4814 0934
0x4814 0938
0x4814 093C
PINCNTL73
PINCNTL74
PINCNTL75
PINCNTL76
PINCNTL77
PINCNTL78
PINCNTL79
PINCNTL80
AF5
AH4
AG4
AG2
AF4
UART0_RTS
UART0_DCD
UART0_DSR
UART0_DTR
UART0_RIN
I2C[1]_SCL
SD2_SDCD
SD1_POW
SD1_SDWP
I2C[2]_SCL(M0)
I2C[2]_SDA(M0)
GP1[2]
GP1[3]
GP1[4]
GP1[5]
UART1_TXD(M0)
UART1_RXD(M0)
AF24
AG24
AE5
HDMI_SDA(M0)
SD1_SDCD
I2C[1]_SDA
SPI[0]_SCS[1]
EDMA_EVT1(M1)
TIM4_IO(M1)
SATA_ACT0_LED
GP1[6]
0x4814 0940
0x4814 0944
0x4814 0948
0x4814 094C
0x4814 0950
PINCNTL81
PINCNTL82
PINCNTL83
PINCNTL84
PINCNTL85
AD6
AC7
AF3
AE3
AD3
SPI[0]_SCS[0]
SPI[0]_SCLK
SPI[0]_D[1]
SPI[0]_D[0]
GP1[16](M1)
GP1[17](M1)
GP1[18](M1)
SPI[1]_SCS[0]
0x4814 0954
0x4814 0958
0x4814 095C
PINCNTL86
PINCNTL87
PINCNTL88
AC3
AA3
AA6
SPI[1]_SCLK
SPI[1]_D[1]
SPI[1]_D[0]
GP1[26](M1)
0x4814 0960
0x4814 0964
0x4814 0968
0x4814 096C
0x4814 0970
0x4814 0974
0x4814 0978
0x4814 097C
0x4814 0980
0x4814 0984
0x4814 0988
PINCNTL89
PINCNTL90
PINCNTL91
PINCNTL92
PINCNTL93
PINCNTL94
PINCNTL95
PINCNTL96
PINCNTL97
PINCNTL98
PINCNTL99
U26
Y28
V27
W27
V26
AA28
U25
V25
Y27
AB28
Y26
AA27
U24
U23
V24
Y25
GPMC_D[0]
GPMC_D[1]
GPMC_D[2]
GPMC_D[3]
GPMC_D[4]
GPMC_D[5]
GPMC_D[6]
GPMC_D[7]
GPMC_D[8]
GPMC_D[9]
GPMC_D[10]
GPMC_D[11]
GPMC_D[12]
GPMC_D[13]
GPMC_D[14]
GPMC_D[15]
BTMODE[0]
BTMODE[1]
BTMODE[2]
BTMODE[3]
BTMODE[4]
BTMODE[5]
BTMODE[6]
BTMODE[7]
BTMODE[8]
BTMODE[9]
BTMODE[10]
BTMODE[11]
BTMODE[12]
BTMODE[13]
BTMODE[14]
BTMODE[15]
0x4814 098C PINCNTL100
0x4814 0990
0x4814 0994
0x4814 0998
PINCNTL101
PINCNTL102
PINCNTL103
0x4814 099C PINCNTL104
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Configurations
149
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 4-11. PINCNTLx Registers MUXMODE Functions (continued)
HEX
ADDRESS
MUXMODE[7:0] SETTINGS(1)
REGISTER
NAME
PIN
NO.
0x1
GPMC_A[16]
0x2
0x4
0x8
0x10
0x20
0x40
0x80
GP2[5](M0)
0x4814 09A0 PINCNTL105
0x4814 09A4 PINCNTL106
0x4814 09A8 PINCNTL107
0x4814 09AC PINCNTL108
0x4814 09B0 PINCNTL109
0x4814 09B4 PINCNTL110
0x4814 09B8 PINCNTL111
0x4814 09BC PINCNTL112
0x4814 09C0 PINCNTL113
0x4814 09C4 PINCNTL114
0x4814 09C8 PINCNTL115
0x4814 09CC PINCNTL116
0x4814 09D0 PINCNTL117
0x4814 09D4 PINCNTL118
0x4814 09D8 PINCNTL119
0x4814 09DC PINCNTL120
0x4814 09E0 PINCNTL121
AD27
V23
GP2[6](M0)
GPMC_A[17]
GPMC_A[18]
GPMC_A[19]
TIM2_IO(M2)
GP1[13](M0)
GP1[14](M0)
GP1[15](M0)
GP1[16](M0)
GP1[17](M0)
AE28
AC27
AD28
AC28
AB27
AA26
L25
TIM3_IO(M2)
GPMC_A[20](M0)
GPMC_A[21](M0)
GPMC_A[22](M0)
SPI[2]_SCS[1]
SPI[2]_D[0](M0)
SPI[2]_D[1](M0)
SPI[2]_SCLK(M0)
GPMC_A[20](M1)
GPMC_A[21](M1)
GPMC_A[22](M1)
GPMC_A[23](M1)
HDMI_CEC(M0)
TIM4_IO(M2)
TIM5_IO(M2)
GPMC_A[23](M0)
SD2_DAT[7]
HDMI_HPDET(M0)
GP1[18](M0)
GP1[19]
GPMC_A[24](M0)
UART2_RXD(M3)
UART2_TXD(M3)
GPMC_A[25](M0)
GPMC_A[26](M0)
GPMC_A[27](M0)
GPMC_A[1](M1)
GPMC_A[2](M1)
GPMC_A[3](M1)
GPMC_A[4](M1)
N23
SD2_DAT[6]
GP1[20]
GP1[21]
GP1[22]
TIM6_IO(M2)
TIM7_IO(M2)
P22
SD2_DAT[5]
EDMA_EVT0(M1)
R24
SD2_DAT[4]
GPMC_CS[7]
GP2[5](M1)
GP2[6](M1)
GP1[13](M1)
GP1[14](M1)
J28
SD2_DAT[3]
K27
SD2_DAT[2]_SDRW
SD2_DAT[1]_SDIRQ
SD2_DAT[0]
M24
L26
GP1[15](M1)
GP1[23]
M23
SD2_CLK
0x4814 09E4 PINCNTL122
0x4814 09E8 PINCNTL123
T28
K28
GPMC_CS[0]
GPMC_CS[1]
GPMC_A[25](M1)
GP1[24]
GPMC_A[24](M1)
VIN[1]B_CLK
0x4814 09EC PINCNTL124
0x4814 09F0 PINCNTL125
0x4814 09F4 PINCNTL126
0x4814 09F8 PINCNTL127
0x4814 09FC PINCNTL128
M25
P26
P25
R26
M26
GPMC_CS[2]
GPMC_CS[3]
GPMC_CS[4]
GPMC_CLK
GP1[25]
GP1[26](M0)
SPI[2]_SCS[0]
GP1[8](M0)
GP1[27]
SD2_CMD
EDMA_EVT3(M0)
TIM4_IO(M3)
TIM5_IO(M3)
GPMC_CS[5]
GPMC_CS[6]
GPMC_WAIT[1]
CLKOUT1
GPMC_ADV_ALE
GP1[28]
0x4814 0A00 PINCNTL129
0x4814 0A04 PINCNTL130
0x4814 0A08 PINCNTL131
T27
U28
U27
GPMC_OE_RE
GPMC_WE
GPMC_A[25](M2)
GPMC_A[24](M2)
GPMC_A[26](M2)
EDMA_EVT2(M0)
EDMA_EVT1(M0)
TIM6_IO(M3)
TIM7_IO(M3)
GPMC_BE[0]_CLE
GP1[29]
GP1[30]
GP1[31]
0x4814 0A0C PINCNTL132
0x4814 0A10 PINCNTL133
0x4814 0A14 PINCNTL134
0x4814 0A18 PINCNTL135
0x4814 0A1C PINCNTL136
0x4814 0A20 PINCNTL137
V28
GPMC_BE[1]
GPMC_WAIT[0]
VIN[0]B_CLK
EDMA_EVT0(M0)
CLKOUT0
W28
GP1[9](M0)
GP2[0]
AE17
AE21
AA20
AB20
VIN[0]A_DE(M0)
UART5_TXD(M1)
UART5_RXD(M1)
I2C[2]_SDA(M1)
I2C[2]_SCL(M3)
VIN[0]B_HSYNC
VIN[0]B_VSYNC
VIN[0]A_FLD(M0)
VIN[0]A_CLK
GP2[1]
GP2[2](M1)
150
Device Configurations
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 4-11. PINCNTLx Registers MUXMODE Functions (continued)
HEX
ADDRESS
MUXMODE[7:0] SETTINGS(1)
REGISTER
NAME
PIN
NO.
0x1
0x2
0x4
0x8
0x10
0x20
UART5_RTS(M1)
UART5_CTS(M1)
0x40
0x80
0x4814 0A24 PINCNTL138
0x4814 0A28 PINCNTL139
0x4814 0A2C PINCNTL140
0x4814 0A30 PINCNTL141
AC20
AD20
AF9
VIN[0]A_HSYNC
GP2[3]
GP2[4]
VIN[0]A_VSYNC
VIN[0]A_D[0]
VIN[0]A_D[1]
GP1[11](M1)
GP1[12](M1)
GP2[7]
AB11
0x4814 0A34 PINCNTL142
0x4814 0A38 PINCNTL143
0x4814 0A3C PINCNTL144
0x4814 0A40 PINCNTL145
0x4814 0A44 PINCNTL146
0x4814 0A48 PINCNTL147
0x4814 0A4C PINCNTL148
0x4814 0A50 PINCNTL149
0x4814 0A54 PINCNTL150
0x4814 0A58 PINCNTL151
AC9
AE12
AH8
VIN[0]A_D[2]
VIN[0]A_D[3]
GP2[8]
VIN[0]A_D[4]
GP2[9]
AG16
AH16
AA11
AB15
AG9
VIN[0]A_D[5]
GP2[10]
GP2[11]
GP2[12]
GP2[13]
GP2[14]
GP2[15]
GP2[16]
VIN[0]A_D[6]
VIN[0]A_D[7]
VIN[0]A_D[8]_BD[0]
VIN[0]A_D[9]_BD[1]
VIN[0]A_D[10]_BD[2]
VIN[0]A_D[11]_BD[3]
AH9
CAM_WE(M1)
CLKOUT1
AH17
0x4814 0A5C PINCNTL152
0x4814 0A60 PINCNTL153
0x4814 0A64 PINCNTL154
0x4814 0A68 PINCNTL155
0x4814 0A6C PINCNTL156
AG17
AF17
AC12
AC14
AA21
VIN[0]A_D[12]_BD[4]
VIN[0]A_D[13]_BD[5]
VIN[0]A_D[14]_BD[6]
VIN[0]A_D[15]_BD[7]
VIN[0]A_D[16]
GP2[17]
GP2[18]
GP2[19]
GP2[20]
CAM_RESET
CAM_STROBE
CAM_SHUTTER
I2C[2]_SCL(M1)
GP0[10](M0)
GP0[11](M0)
GP0[12](M0)
GP0[13](M0)
GP0[14](M0)
GP0[15](M0)
GP0[16](M0)
GP0[17](M0)
GP0[18](M0)
GP0[19](M0)
GP0[20](M0)
GP0[21](M0)
GP0[22](M0)
GP0[23](M0)
GP0[24](M0)
GP0[25](M0)
GP0[26](M0)
CAM_D[8]
CAM_D[9]
CAM_D[10]
CAM_D[11]
CAM_D[12]
CAM_D[13]
CAM_D[14]
CAM_D[15]
CAM_D[7]
CAM_D[6]
CAM_D[5]
CAM_D[4]
CAM_D[3]
CAM_D[2]
CAM_D[1]
CAM_D[0]
CAM_HS
EMAC[1]_RMRXER(M1)
EMAC[1]_RMRXD[1](M1)
EMAC[1]_RMRXD[0](M1)
EMAC[1]_RMCRSDV(M1)
EMAC[1]_RMTXD[0](M1)
EMAC[1]_RMTXD[1](M1)
EMAC[1]_RMTXEN(M1)
0x4814 0A70 PINCNTL157
0x4814 0A74 PINCNTL158
0x4814 0A78 PINCNTL159
0x4814 0A7C PINCNTL160
0x4814 0A80 PINCNTL161
0x4814 0A84 PINCNTL162
0x4814 0A88 PINCNTL163
0x4814 0A8C PINCNTL164
0x4814 0A90 PINCNTL165
0x4814 0A94 PINCNTL166
0x4814 0A98 PINCNTL167
0x4814 0A9C PINCNTL168
0x4814 0AA0 PINCNTL169
0x4814 0AA4 PINCNTL170
0x4814 0AA8 PINCNTL171
0x4814 0AAC PINCNTL172
AB21
AF20
AF21
AC17
AE18
AC21
AC16
AB17
AC15
AC22
AD17
AD18
AC18
AC19
AA22
AE23
VIN[0]A_D[17]
VIN[0]A_D[18]
VIN[0]A_D[19]
VIN[0]A_D[20]
VIN[0]A_D[21]
VIN[0]A_D[22]
VIN[0]A_D[23]
I2C[3]_SCL(M2)
I2C[3]_SDA(M2)
SPI[3]_SCS[0]
SPI[3]_SCLK(M0)
SPI[3]_D[1](M0)
SPI[3]_D[0](M0)
VIN[0]A_DE(M1)
VIN[0]B_DE
VIN[0]A_FLD(M1)
VIN[0]B_FLD
GPMC_A[5](M1)
GPMC_A[6](M1)
GPMC_A[7](M1)
GPMC_A[8](M1)
GPMC_A[9](M1)
UART4_RXD(M0)
UART4_TXD(M0)
UART4_CTS(M0)
UART4_RTS(M0)
UART2_RXD(M0)
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[1]
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[0]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[1]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[0]
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[1]
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Configurations
151
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 4-11. PINCNTLx Registers MUXMODE Functions (continued)
HEX
ADDRESS
MUXMODE[7:0] SETTINGS(1)
REGISTER
NAME
PIN
NO.
0x1
0x2
0x4
0x8
0x10
GPMC_A[10](M1)
GPMC_A[11](M1)
GPMC_A[12](M1)
0x20
0x40
0x80
GP0[27](M0)
UART2_TXD(M1)
UART2_CTS
0x4814 0AB0 PINCNTL173
0x4814 0AB4 PINCNTL174
0x4814 0AB8 PINCNTL175
AD23
AB23
AF18
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[0]
CAM_VS
CAM_WE(M0)
GP0[28](M0)
GP2[2](M0)
VOUT[1]_FLD
CAM_FLD
CAM_PCLK
VOUT[0]_FLD(M1)
VOUT[0]_CLK
UART2_RTS
0x4814 0ABC PINCNTL176
0x4814 0AC0 PINCNTL177
0x4814 0AC4 PINCNTL178
0x4814 0AC8 PINCNTL179
AD12
AC11
AB13
AA10
VOUT[0]_HSYNC
VOUT[0]_VSYNC
VOUT[0]_AVID
VOUT[0]_FLD(M0)
EMU2
SPI[3]_SCLK(M2)
TIM7_IO(M1)
GP2[21]
0x4814 0ACC PINCNTL180
0x4814 0AD0 PINCNTL181
0x4814 0AD4 PINCNTL182
0x4814 0AD8 PINCNTL183
0x4814 0ADC PINCNTL184
0x4814 0AE0 PINCNTL185
0x4814 0AE4 PINCNTL186
0x4814 0AE8 PINCNTL187
0x4814 0AEC PINCNTL188
0x4814 0AF0 PINCNTL189
0x4814 0AF4 PINCNTL190
0x4814 0AF8 PINCNTL191
0x4814 0AFC PINCNTL192
AG7
AE15
AD11
AD15
AC10
AB10
AF15
AG15
AH7
VOUT[0]_B_CB_C[2]
VOUT[0]_B_CB_C[3]
VOUT[0]_B_CB_C[4]
VOUT[0]_B_CB_C[5]
VOUT[0]_B_CB_C[6]
VOUT[0]_B_CB_C[7]
VOUT[0]_B_CB_C[8]
VOUT[0]_B_CB_C[9]
VOUT[0]_G_Y_YC[2]
VOUT[0]_G_Y_YC[3]
VOUT[0]_G_Y_YC[4]
VOUT[0]_G_Y_YC[5]
VOUT[0]_G_Y_YC[6]
VOUT[0]_G_Y_YC[7]
VOUT[0]_G_Y_YC[8]
VOUT[0]_G_Y_YC[9]
VOUT[0]_R_CR[2]
VOUT[0]_R_CR[3]
VOUT[0]_R_CR[4]
VOUT[0]_R_CR[5]
VOUT[0]_R_CR[6]
VOUT[0]_R_CR[7]
VOUT[0]_R_CR[8]
VOUT[0]_R_CR[9]
VOUT[1]_CLK
GP2[22]
GP2[23]
EMU3
GP2[24]
GP2[25]
AH15
AB8
AB12
AA8
0x48140B00
0x48140B04
0x48140B08
0x48140B0C
PINCNTL193
PINCNTL194
PINCNTL195
PINCNTL196
AD14
AE14
AF14
AD9
EMU4
GP2[26]
GP2[27]
0x4814 0B10 PINCNTL197
0x4814 0B14 PINCNTL198
0x4814 0B18 PINCNTL199
0x4814 0B1C PINCNTL200
0x4814 0B20 PINCNTL201
0x4814 0B24 PINCNTL202
0x4814 0B28 PINCNTL203
0x4814 0B2C PINCNTL204
0x4814 0B30 PINCNTL205
AB9
AA9
AF8
AF6
AF12
AE8
AC13
AE24
AC24
EMAC[1]_MTCLK
EMAC[1]_MCOL
VIN[1]A_HSYNC
VIN[1]A_VSYNC
GP2[28]
GP2[29]
SPI[3]_D[1](M2)
SPI[3]_D[0](M2)
UART3_RTS(M1)
UART3_CTS(M1)
UART4_RTS(M2)
UART4_CTS(M2)
UART4_RXD(M2)
VOUT[1]_HSYNC
0x4814 0B34 PINCNTL206
0x4814 0B38 PINCNTL207
0x4814 0B3C PINCNTL208
0x4814 0B40 PINCNTL209
AA23
Y22
VOUT[1]_VSYNC
VOUT[1]_AVID
EMAC[1]_MCRS
EMAC[1]_MRXER
EMAC[1]_MRCLK
EMAC[1]_MRXD[0]
VIN[1]A_FLD
VIN[1]A_CLK
VIN[1]A_D[0]
VIN[1]A_D[1]
VIN[1]A_DE
GP2[30]
GP2[31]
GP3[0]
GP3[1]
TIM6_IO(M1)
AH25
AG25
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[3]
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[4]
152
Device Configurations
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 4-11. PINCNTLx Registers MUXMODE Functions (continued)
HEX
ADDRESS
MUXMODE[7:0] SETTINGS(1)
REGISTER
NAME
PIN
NO.
0x1
0x2
0x4
VIN[1]A_D[2]
0x8
0x10
0x20
UART4_TXD(M2)
UART3_RXD(M1)
UART3_TXD(M1)
I2C[3]_SCL(M3)
I2C[3]_SDA(M3)
0x40
0x80
0x4814 0B44 PINCNTL210
0x4814 0B48 PINCNTL211
AF25
AD25
AC25
AH26
AA24
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[5]
EMAC[1]_MRXD[1]
GP3[2]
GP3[3]
GP3[4]
GP3[5]
GP3[6]
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[6]
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[7]
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[8]
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[9]
EMAC[1]_MRXD[2]
EMAC[1]_MRXD[3]
EMAC[1]_MRXD[4]
EMAC[1]_MRXD[5]
VIN[1]A_D[3]
VIN[1]A_D[4]
VIN[1]A_D[5]
VIN[1]A_D[6]
0x48140B4C
PINCNTL212
0x4814 0B50 PINCNTL213
0x4814 0B54 PINCNTL214
0x4814 0B58 PINCNTL215
0x4814 0B5C PINCNTL216
0x4814 0B60 PINCNTL217
0x4814 0B64 PINCNTL218
0x4814 0B68 PINCNTL219
0x4814 0B6C PINCNTL220
0x4814 0B70 PINCNTL221
0x4814 0B74 PINCNTL222
0x4814 0B78 PINCNTL223
Y23
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[3]
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[4]
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[5]
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[6]
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[7]
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[8]
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[9]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[4]
EMAC[1]_MRXD[6]
EMAC[1]_MRXD[7]
EMAC[1]_MRXDV
EMAC[1]_GMTCLK
EMAC[1]_MTXD[0]
EMAC[1]_MTXD[1]
EMAC[1]_MTXD[2]
EMAC[1]_MTXD[3]
EMAC[1]_MTXD[4]
VIN[1]A_D[8]
VIN[1]A_D[9]
VIN[1]A_D[10]
VIN[1]A_D[11]
VIN[1]A_D[12]
VIN[1]A_D[13]
VIN[1]A_D[14]
VIN[1]A_D[15]
VIN[1]A_D[16]
GP3[7]
GP3[8]
GP3[9]
W22
AG26
AH27
AF26
AE26
AD26
AG27
AC26
GP3[10]
GP3[11]
GP3[12]
GP3[13]
GP3[14]
GP3[15]
SPI[3]_SCS[1]
SPI[3]_SCLK(M1)
SPI[3]_D[1](M1)
SPI[3]_D[0](M1)
UART5_RXD(M2)
VOUT[1]_R_CR[5]
0x4814 0B7C PINCNTL224
0x4814 0B80 PINCNTL225
0x4814 0B84 PINCNTL226
0x4814 0B88 PINCNTL227
0x4814 0B8C PINCNTL228
0x4814 0B90 PINCNTL229
0x4814 0B94 PINCNTL230
0x4814 0B98 PINCNTL231
0x4814 0B9C PINCNTL232
0x4814 0BA0 PINCNTL233
0x4814 0BA4 PINCNTL234
0x4814 0BA8 PINCNTL235
AA25
V22
VOUT[1]_R_CR[6]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[7]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[8]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[9]
VOUT[1]_G_Y_YC[2]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[3]
VOUT[1]_R_CR[2]
VOUT[1]_B_CB_C[2]
EMAC_RMREFCLK
MDCLK
EMAC[1]_MTXD[5]
EMAC[1]_MTXD[6]
EMAC[1]_MTXD[7]
EMAC[1]_MTXEN
VIN[1]A_D[17]
VIN[1]A_D[18]
VIN[1]A_D[19]
VIN[1]A_D[20]
VIN[1]A_D[21]
VIN[1]A_D[22]
VIN[1]A_D[23]
VIN[1]A_D[7]
GP3[16]
GP3[17]
GP3[18]
GP3[19]
GP3[20]
GP3[21]
GP3[22]
W23
Y24
UART5_TXD(M2)
SPI[2]_SCS[2]
GPMC_A[13](M1)
GPMC_A[14](M1)
GPMC_A[15](M1)
GPMC_A[0](M1)
HDMI_SCL(M1)
HDMI_SDA(M1)
HDMI_HPDET(M1)
HDMI_CEC(M1)
I2C[2]_SCL(M2)
I2C[2]_SDA(M2)
AF27
AG28
AE27
AF28
J27
SPI[2]_SCLK(M1)
SPI[2]_D[1](M1)
SPI[2]_D[0](M1)
GP3[30](M0)
GP1[10](M0)
GP1[11](M0)
TIM2_IO(M3)
H28
GP1[12](M0)
GP3[23]
P24
MDIO
I2C[2]_SDA(M3)
L24
EMAC[0]_MTCLK/
VIN[1]B_D[0]
VIN[1]B_D[1]
VIN[1]B_D[2]
VIN[1]B_D[3]
VIN[1]B_D[4]
SPI[3]_SCS[3]
EMAC[0]_RGRXC(2)
0x4814 0BAC PINCNTL236
0x4814 0BB0 PINCNTL237
0x4814 0BB4 PINCNTL238
0x4814 0BB8 PINCNTL239
L23
R25
J26
H27
EMAC[0]_MCOL/
EMAC[0]_RMRXD[0]
EMAC[0]_RMRXD[1]
EMAC[0]_RMRXER
EMAC[0]_RMCRSDV
GP3[24]
GP3[25]
GP3[26]
GP3[27]
EMAC[0]_RGRXCTL(2)
EMAC[0]_MCRS/
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[2](2)
EMAC[0]_MRXER/
EMAC[0]_RGTXCTL(2)
EMAC[0]_MRCLK/
EMAC[0]_RGTXC(2)
SPI[3]_SCS[2]
(2) Within this MUXMODE setting, EMAC[x] GMII or RGMII pin functions are selected via the RGMII0_EN and/or RGMII1_EN bits (8 and 9, respectively) in the GMII_SEL register
[0x4814_0650] of the Control Module. "0" = GMII (default) and "1" = RGMII.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Configurations
153
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 4-11. PINCNTLx Registers MUXMODE Functions (continued)
HEX
ADDRESS
MUXMODE[7:0] SETTINGS(1)
REGISTER
NAME
PIN
NO.
0x1
0x2
0x4
0x8
0x10
0x20
0x40
0x80
GP3[28]
0x4814 0BBC PINCNTL240
0x4814 0BC0 PINCNTL241
0x4814 0BC4 PINCNTL242
0x4814 0BC8 PINCNTL243
0x4814 0BCC PINCNTL244
0x4814 0BD0 PINCNTL245
0x4814 0BD4 PINCNTL246
0x4814 0BD8 PINCNTL247
0x4814 0BDC PINCNTL248
0x4814 0BE0 PINCNTL249
0x4814 0BE4 PINCNTL250
0x4814 0BE8 PINCNTL251
0x4814 0BEC PINCNTL252
0x4814 0BF0 PINCNTL253
0x4814 0BF4 PINCNTL254
0x4814 0BF8 PINCNTL255
0x4814 0BFC PINCNTL256
0x4814 0C00 PINCNTL257
0x4814 0C04 PINCNTL258
0x4814 0C08 PINCNTL259
G28
P23
R23
J25
T23
H26
F28
G27
K22
K23
J24
H25
H22
H23
G23
F27
J22
H24
J23
J7
EMAC[0]_MRXD[0]/
VIN[1]B_D[5]
VIN[1]B_D[6]
VIN[1]B_D[7]
EMAC[0]_RMTXD[0]
EMAC[0]_RGTXD[0](2)
EMAC[0]_MRXD[1]/
EMAC[0]_RMTXD[1]
EMAC[0]_RMTXEN
GP3[29]
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[0](2)
GP3[30](M0)
EMAC[0]_MRXD[2]/
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[1](2)
GPMC_A[27](M1)
GPMC_A[26](M1)
GPMC_A[0](M0)
GPMC_A[1](M0)
GPMC_A[2](M0)
GPMC_A[3](M0)
GPMC_A[4](M0)
GPMC_A[5](M0)
GPMC_A[6](M0)
GPMC_A[7](M0)
GPMC_A[8](M0)
GPMC_A[9](M0)
GPMC_A[10](M0)
GPMC_A[11](M0)
GPMC_A[12](M0)
GPMC_A[13](M0)
GPMC_A[14](M0)
GPMC_A[15](M0)
UART5_RXD(M0)
UART5_TXD(M0)
UART5_CTS(M0)
EMAC[0]_MRXD[3]/
EMAC[1]_RGRXCTL(2)
EMAC[0]_MRXD[4]/
EMAC[0]_RGRXD[3](2)
EMAC[0]_MRXD[5]/
EMAC[0]_RGTXD[3](2)
UART5_RTS(M0)
SPI[2]_SCS[3]
EMAC[0]_MRXD[6]/
EMAC[0]_RGTXD[2](2)
EMAC[0]_MRXD[7]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXD[1](2)
SPI[2]_SCLK(M2)
SPI[2]_D[1](M2)
SPI[2]_D[0](M2)
UART4_RXD(M1)
UART4_TXD(M1)
UART4_CTS(M1)
UART4_RTS(M1)
UART1_RXD(M1)
EMAC[0]_MRXDV/
EMAC[1]_RGRXD[1](2)
EMAC[0]_GMTCLK/
EMAC[1]_RGRXC(2)
EMAC[0]_MTXD[0]/
EMAC[1]_RGRXD[3](2)
EMAC[0]_MTXD[1]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXD[1](3)
EMAC[1]_RMRXD[0](M0)
EMAC[0]_MTXD[2]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXCTL(3)
EMAC[1]_RMRXD[1](M0)
EMAC[1]_RMRXER
EMAC[0]_MTXD[3]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXD[0](3)
EMAC[0]_MTXD[4]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXD[2](3)
EMAC[1]_RMCRSDV(M0)
EMAC[1]_RMTXD[0](M0)
EMAC[1]_RMTXD[1](M0)
EMAC[1]_RMTXEN(M0)
EMAC[0]_MTXD[5]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXC(3)
UART1_TXD(M1)
UART1_CTS
EMAC[0]_MTXD[6]/
EMAC[1]_RGRXD[0](3)
EMAC[0]_MTXD[7]/
EMAC[1]_RGTXD[3](3)
EMAC[0]_MTXEN/
UART1_RTS
EMAC[1]_RGRXD[2](3)
TIM3_IO(M3)
CLKIN32
CLKOUT0
GP3[31]
0x4814 0C0C PINCNTL260
0x4814 0C10 PINCNTL261
0x4814 0C14 PINCNTL262
0x4814 0C18 PINCNTL263
0x4814 0C1C PINCNTL264
J5
H7
RESET
NMI
K6
RSTOUT_WD_OUT
I2C[0]_SCL
I2C[0]_SDA
AC4
AB6
(3) Within this MUXMODE setting, EMAC[x] GMII or RGMII pin functions are selected via the RGMII0_EN and/or RGMII1_EN bits (8 and 9, respectively) in the GMII_SEL register
[0x4814_0650] of the Control Module. "0" = GMII (default) and "1" = RGMII.
154
Device Configurations
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 4-11. PINCNTLx Registers MUXMODE Functions (continued)
HEX
ADDRESS
MUXMODE[7:0] SETTINGS(1)
REGISTER
NAME
PIN
NO.
0x1
0x2
0x4
0x8
0x10
0x20
0x40
0x80
0x4814 0C20 PINCNTL265
0x4814 0C24 PINCNTL266
0x4814 0C28 PINCNTL267
0x4814 0C2C PINCNTL268
0x4814 0C30 PINCNTL269
0x4814 0C34 PINCNTL270
–
Reserved. Do Not Program this Register.
Reserved. Do Not Program this Register.
Reserved. Do Not Program this Register.
Reserved. Do Not Program this Register.
Reserved. Do Not Program this Register.
–
–
–
–
AF11
USB0_DRVVBUS
GP0[7]
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Configurations
155
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
4.4 Handling Unused Pins
When device signal pins are unused in the system, they can be left unconnected unless otherwise noted
in the Terminal Functions tables (see Section 3.2). For unused input pins, the internal pull resistor should
be enabled, or an external pull resistor should be used, to prevent floating inputs. All supply pins must
always be connected to the correct voltage, even when their associated signal pins are unused.
4.5 DeBugging Considerations
4.5.1 Pullup/Pulldown Resistors
Proper board design should ensure that input pins to the AM387x Sitara™ ARM Processors (MPUs)
device always be at a valid logic level and not floating. This may be achieved via pullup/pulldown resistors.
The device features internal pullup (IPU) and internal pulldown (IPD) resistors on most pins to eliminate
the need, unless otherwise noted, for external pullup/pulldown resistors.
An external pullup/pulldown resistor needs to be used in the following situations:
•
Boot Configuration Pins: If the pin is both routed out and 3-stated (not driven), an external
pullup/pulldown resistor is strongly recommended, even if the IPU/IPD matches the desired
value/state.
•
Other Input Pins: If the IPU/IPD does not match the desired value/state, use an external
pullup/pulldown resistor to pull the signal to the opposite rail.
For the boot configuration pins (listed in Table 3-1, Boot Configuration Terminal Functions), if they are
both routed out and 3-stated (not driven), it is strongly recommended that an external pullup/pulldown
resistor be implemented. Although, internal pullup/pulldown resistors exist on these pins and they may
match the desired configuration value, providing external connectivity can help ensure that valid logic
levels are latched on these device boot configuration pins. In addition, applying external pullup/pulldown
resistors on the boot and configuration pins adds convenience to the user in debugging and flexibility in
switching operating modes.
Tips for choosing an external pullup/pulldown resistor:
•
Consider the total amount of current that may pass through the pullup or pulldown resistor. Make sure
to include the leakage currents of all the devices connected to the net, as well as any internal pullup or
pulldown resistors.
•
Decide a target value for the net. For a pulldown resistor, this should be below the lowest VIL level of
all inputs connected to the net. For a pullup resistor, this should be above the highest VIH level of all
inputs on the net. A reasonable choice would be to target the VOL or VOH levels for the logic family of
the limiting device; which, by definition, have margin to the VIL and VIH levels.
•
•
Select a pullup/pulldown resistor with the largest possible value; but, which can still ensure that the net
will reach the target pulled value when maximum current from all devices on the net is flowing through
the resistor. The current to be considered includes leakage current plus, any other internal and
external pullup/pulldown resistors on the net.
For bidirectional nets, there is an additional consideration which sets a lower limit on the resistance
value of the external resistor. Verify that the resistance is small enough that the weakest output buffer
can drive the net to the opposite logic level (including margin).
•
•
Remember to include tolerances when selecting the resistor value.
For pullup resistors, also remember to include tolerances on the DVDD rail.
For most systems, a 1-kΩ resistor can be used to oppose the IPU/IPD while meeting the above criteria.
Users should confirm this resistor value is correct for their specific application.
For most systems, a 20-kΩ resistor can be used to compliment the IPU/IPD on the boot and configuration
pins while meeting the above criteria. Users should confirm this resistor value is correct for their specific
application.
156
Device Configurations
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
For most systems, a 20-kΩ resistor can also be used as an external PU/PD on the pins that have
IPUs/IPDs disabled and require an external PU/PD resistor while still meeting the above criteria. Users
should confirm this resistor value is correct for their specific application.
For more detailed information on input current (II), and the low-/high-level input voltages (VIL and VIH) for
the device, see Section 6.3, Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended Ranges of Supply Voltage and
Operating Temperature.
For the internal pullup/pulldown resistors for all device pins, see the peripheral/system-specific terminal
functions table.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Configurations
157
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
5 System Interconnect
The device’s various processors, subsystems, and peripherals are interconnected through a switch fabric
architecture. The switch fabric is composed of an L3 and L4 interconnect, a switched central resource
(SCR), and multiple bridges (for an overview, see Figure 5-1). Not all Initiators in the switch fabric are
connected to all Target peripherals. The supported initiator and target connections are designated by a "X"
in Table 5-1, Target/Initiator Connectivity.
For more detailed information on the device System Interconnect Architecture, see the TBD chapter of the
AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number:
SPRUGZ7).
158
System Interconnect
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
EDMATC RD 0/1
EDMATC WR 0/1
L3F
Initiators
L3F
Initiators
PCIe
L3F
Initiators
EDMATC RD 2/3
EDMATC WR 2/3
HDVPSS (2 I/F)
ISS
L3S Initiators
USB2.0 (2 I/F)
EMAC SW
SATA
DAP
ARM Cortex
A8
MEDIACTL
SGX530
64b
128b
64b
128b
128b
32b
32b
1 I/F
9 I/F
4 I/F
2 I/F
7 I/F
4 I/F
L3F/L3Mid
Interconnect
L3S Interconnect
100 MHz (Note 1)
200 MHz (Note 1)
2 I/F
5 I/F
64b
11 I/F
32b
8 I/F
2 I/F
2 I/F
32b
128b
128b
32b
32b
DMM
L3F
Targets
L3F
Targets
L3S Targets
L4F
Interconnect
L4S
Interconnect
100 MHz
(Note1)
MCASP 0/1 / 2 Data
MCBSP
GPMC
PCIe
ISS
MMCSD 2
200 MHz
MEDIACTL
SGX530
OCMC SRAM
DDR0
DDR1
EDMATC 0/1/2/3
EDMACC
DEBUGSS
(Note 1)
HDMI
USB
11 I/F
32b
58 I/F
32b
L4S Targets
L4F Targets
MMU
UART 0/1/2/3/4/5
I2C 0/1/2/3
DMTimer 0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8
SPI 0/1/2/3
GPIO 0/1/2/3
MCASP 0/1/2 CFG
MMCSD 0 /1
ELM
EMAC SW
SATA
MCASP #3/4/5 CFG
MCASP #3/4/5 DATA
RTC
WDT 0/1
Mailbox
Spinlock
HDVPSS
HDMIPHY
PLLSS
Control Module
PRCM
SmartReflex 0/1
DCAN 0/1
OCPWP
Note : The frequencies specified are for 100% OPP
1
SYNCTIMER32K
Figure 5-1. System Interconnect
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
System Interconnect
159
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 5-1. L3 Master/Slave Connectivity(1)
(1) X = Connection exists.
SLAVES
MASTERS
SD2
ARM M1 (128-bit)
ARM M2 (64-bit)
HDVPSS Mstr0
HDVPSS Mstr1
SGX530 BIF
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SATA
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
EMAC SW
USB2.0 DMA
USB2.0 Queue Mgr
PCIe Gen2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Media Controller
DAP
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
EDMA TPTC0 RD
EDMA TPTC0 WR
EDMA TPTC1 RD
EDMA TPTC1 WR
EDMA TPTC2 RD
EDMA TPTC2 WR
EDMA TPTC3 RD
EDMA TPTC3 WR
ISS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
160
System Interconnect
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
The L4 interconnect is a non-blocking peripheral interconnect that provides low-latency access to a large
number of low-bandwidth, physically-dispersed target cores. The L4 can handle incoming traffic from up to
four initiators and can distribute those communication requests to and collect related responses from up to
63 targets.
The device provides two interfaces with L3 interconnect for high-speed peripheraland standard peripheral.
Table 5-2. L4 Peripheral Connectivity(1)
MASTERS
L4 PERIPHERALS
ARM Cortex-A8
M2 (64-bit)
EDMA TPTC0 EDMA TPTC1 EDMA TPTC2 EDMA TPTC3
PCIe
L4 Fast Peripherals Port 0/1
EMAC SW
SATA
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
McASP3 CFG
McASP4 CFG
McASP5 CFG
McASP3 DATA
McASP4 DATA
McASP5 DATA
L4 Slow Peripherals Port 0/1
I2C0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
I2C1
I2C2
I2C3
SPI0
SPI1
SPI2
SPI3
UART0
UART1
UART2
UART3
UART4
UART5
Timer1
Timer2
Timer3
Timer4
Timer5
Timer6
Timer7
Timer8
GPIO0
GPIO1
MMC/SD0/SDIO
MMC/SD1/SDIO
MMC/SD2/SDIO
WDT0
RTC
(1) X, Port0, Port1 = Connection exists.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
System Interconnect
161
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 5-2. L4 Peripheral Connectivity(1) (continued)
MASTERS
L4 PERIPHERALS
ARM Cortex-A8
EDMA TPTC0 EDMA TPTC1 EDMA TPTC2 EDMA TPTC3
M2 (64-bit)
PCIe
DEMMU
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port1
Port0
Port1
Port0
Port1
SmartReflex0
SmartReflex1
Mailbox
Spinlock
HDVPSS
PLLSS
Port1
Port0
Port1
Port0
Port1
Port1
Port1
Control/Top Regs (Control
Module)
PRCM
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port0
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
ELM
HDMIPHY
DCAN0
Port1
Port1
Port0
Port0
Port1
Port1
Port0
Port0
DCAN1
OCPWP
McASP0 CFG
McASP1 CFG
McASP2 CFG
SYNCTIMER32K
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port1
Port0
Port0
Port0
Port0
162
System Interconnect
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
6 Device Operating Conditions
(1)(2)
6.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Core (CVDD, CVDD_ARM)
-0.3 V to 1.5 V
-0.3 V to 2.1 V
I/O, 1.8 V (DVDD_M, DVDD_DDR[0], DVDD_DDR[1], VDDA_1P8,
VDDA_ARMPLL_1P8, VDDA_VID0PLL_1P8, VDDA_VID1PLL_1P8,
VDDA_AUDIOPLL_1P8, VDDA_DDRPLL_1P8, VDDA_L3PLL_1P8,
VDDA_PCIE_1P8, VDDA_SATA_1P8, VDDA_HDMI_1P8,
Supply voltage ranges (Steady
State):
VDDA_USB0_1P8, VDDA_USB1_1P8, VDDA_VDAC_1P8)
I/O 3.3 V (DVDD, DVDD_GPMC, DVDD_GPMCB, DVDD_SD, DVDD_C)
DDR Reference Voltage (VREFSSTL_DDR[0], VREFSSTL_DDR[1])
V I/O, 1.5-V pins (Steady State)
-0.3 V to 4.0 V
-0.3 V to 1.1 V
-0.3 V to DVDD_DDR[x] +
0.3 V
V I/O, 1.5-V pins (Transient Overshoot/Undershoot)
V I/O, 1.8-V pins (Steady State)
30% of DVDD_DDR[x] for up
to 30% of the signal period
-0.3 V to DVDD + 0.3 V
-0.3 V to DVDD_x + 0.3 V
Input and Output voltage ranges:
V I/O, 1.8-V pins (Transient Overshoot/Undershoot)
V I/O, 3.3-V pins (Steady State)
30% of DVDDx for up to
30% of the signal period
-0.3 V to DVDD + 0.3 V
-0.3 V to DVDD_x + 0.3 V
V I/O, 3.3-V pins (Transient Overshoot/Undershoot)
30% of DVDDx for up to
30% of the signal period
Commercial Temperature
Industrial
0°C to 90°C
-40°C to 90°C
-40°C to 105°C
-55°C to 150°C
±2000 V
Operating junction temperature
range, TJ:
Extended
Storage temperature range, Tstg
:
ESD-HBM (Human Body Model)(3)
ESD-CDM (Charged-Device Model)(4)
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Performance:
±500 V
ESD-CDM (Charged-Device Model)
Corner Balls (A1, A28, AH1, AH28)(4)
±750 V
(1) Stresses beyond those listed under "absolute maximum ratings" may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings
only, and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under "recommended operating
conditions" is not implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
(2) All voltage values are with respect to their associated VSS or VSSA_x.
(3) Based on JEDEC JESD22-A114E [Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitivity Testing Human Body Model (HBM)].
(4) Based on JEDEC JESD22-C101C (Field-Induced Charged-Device Model Test Method for Electrostatic-Discharge-Withstand Thresholds
of Microelectronic Components).
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Operating Conditions
163
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
6.2 Recommended Operating Conditions
PARAMETER
MIN
TBD
1.14
1.05
0.90
0.79
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
1.14
1.05
0.90
0.79
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
3.14
1.71
3.14
1.71
3.14
1.71
3.14
1.71
3.14
1.71
NOM
TBD
1.20
1.10
0.95
0.83
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
1.20
1.10
0.95
0.83
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
3.3
MAX UNIT
TBD
Supply voltage, Core
(Scalable)
DVFS only, No AVS
166% OPP
120% OPP
100% OPP
50% OPP
1.26
1.16
1.00
CVDD
Deep Sleep
166% OPP
120% OPP
100% OPP
50% OPP
0.87
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
1.26
1.16
1.00
0.87
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
3.47
1.89
3.47
1.89
3.47
1.89
3.47
1.89
3.47
1.89
V
Supply voltage, Core
(Scalable)
With SmartReflex
Supply voltage, Core ARM
(Scalable)
DVFS only, No AVS
166% OPP
120% OPP
100% OPP
50% OPP
CVDD_ARM
Deep Sleep
166% OPP
120% OPP
100% OPP
50% OPP
V
Supply voltage, Core, ARM
(Scalable)
With SmartReflex
Supply voltage, I/O, standard 3.3 V
pins(1)
DVDD
V
V
V
V
1.8 V
1.8
Supply voltage, I/O, GPMC
pin group
3.3 V
1.8 V
3.3
DVDD_GPMC
DVDD_GPMCB
DVDD_SD
1.8
Supply voltage, I/O, GPMCB 3.3 V
3.3
pin group
1.8 V
1.8
Supply voltage, I/O, SD pin
group
3.3 V
1.8 V
3.3 V
1.8 V
1.8 V
3.3
1.8
Supply voltage, I/O, C pin
group
3.3
DVDD_C
DVDD_M
V
V
V
V
1.8
Supply voltage, I/O, M pin
group
1.71
1.8
1.89
Supply voltage, I/O, DDR[0]
and DDR[1]
LPDDR and DDR2
DDR3 mode
1.71
1.43
1.8
1.5
1.89
1.58
DVDD_DDR[0]
DVDD_DDR[1]
VDDA_USB_3P Supply voltage, I/O, Analog, USB 3.3 V
3
3.14
1.71
3.3
1.8
3.47
1.89
Supply Voltage, I/O, Analog, (VDDA_1P8,
VDDA_ARMPLL_1P8, VDDA_VID0PLL_1P8,
VDDA_VID1PLL_1P8, VDDA_AUDIOPLL_1P8,
VDDA_DDRPLL_1P8, VDDA_L3PLL_1P8, VDDA_PCIE_1P8,
VDDA_SATA_1P8, VDDA_HDMI_1P8, VDDA_USB0_1P8,
VDDA_USB1_1P8, VDDA_VDAC_1P8)
VDDA_1P8
VDDA_x_1P8
V
V
Note: HDMI, USB0/1, and VDAC relative to their respective
VSSA.
Supply Ground (VSS, VSSA_HDMI, VSSA_USB,
VSS
0
VSSA_VDAC, VSSA_DEVOSC(2), VSSA_AUXOSC(2)
)
IO Reference Voltage, (VREFSSTL_DDR[0],
VREFSSTL_DDR[x] VREFSSTL_DDR[1])
0.49 *
DVDD_DDR[
x]
0.50 *
0.51 *
V
V
DVDD_DDR[x] DVDD_DDR[x]
USBx_VBUSIN USBx VBUS Comparator Input
4.75
5
5.25
(1) LVCMOS pins are all I/O pins powered by DVDD, DVDD_GPMC, DVDD_GPMCB, DVDD_SD, DVDD_C supplies except for I2C[0] and
I2C[1] pins.
(2) When using the internal Oscillators, the oscillator grounds (VSSA_DEVOSC, VSSA_AUXOSC) must be kept separate from other
grounds and connected directly to the crystal load capacitor ground.
164
Device Operating Conditions
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Recommended Operating Conditions (continued)
PARAMETER
MIN
2
NOM
MAX UNIT
High-level input voltage, LVCMOS (JTAG[TCK] pins), 3.3 V(1)
V
V
V
V
High-level input voltage, JTAG[TCK]
VIH
2.15
High-level input voltage, I2C (I2C[0] and I2C[1])
0.7DVDD
0.65DVDDx
High-level input voltage, LVCMOS(1), 1.8 V
Low-level input voltage, LVCMOS(1), 3.3 V
0.8
0.55
V
V
V
V
Low-level input voltage, JTAG[TCK]
VIL
Low-level input voltage, I2C (I2C[0] and I2C[1])
Low-level input voltage, LVCMOS(1), 1.8 V
0.3DVDDx
0.35DVDDx
High-level output current
6 mA I/O buffers
-6 mA
IOH
DDR[0], DDR[1] buffers @
50-Ω impedance setting
-8 mA
Low-level output current
6 mA I/O buffers
6
8
mA
mA
V
IOL
VID
tt
DDR[0], DDR[1] buffers @
50-Ω impedance setting
Differential input voltage (SERDES_CLKN/P), [AC coupled]
0.250
2.0
Transition time, 10% - 90%, All inputs (unless otherwise
specified in the Electrical Data/Timing sections of each
peripheral)
0.25P or 10(3)
ns
Commercial Temperature
(default)
0
90
°C
Operating junction
TJ
temperature range(4)
Industrial
Extended
-40
-40
90
°C
°C
105
(3) Whichever is smaller. P = the period of the applied signal. Maintaining transition times as fast as possible is recommended to improve
noise immunity on input signals.
(4) For more detailed information on estimating junction temps within systems, see the IC Package Thermal Metrics Application Report
(Literature Number: SPRA953).
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Operating Conditions
165
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
MAX UNIT
6.3 Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended Ranges of Supply Voltage and
Operating Temperature (Unless Otherwise Noted)
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS(1)
MIN
TYP
Low/Full speed: USB_DM
and USB_DP
2.8
VDD_USB_3P3
V
mV
V
High speed: USB_DM and
USB_DP
360
2.4
440
VOH
High-level output voltage,
LVCMOS(2) (3.3-V I/O)
3.3 V, DVDDx = MIN,
IOH = MAX
High-level output voltage,
LVCMOS(2) (1.8-V I/O)
1.8 V, DVDDx = MIN,
IOH = MAX
1.26
0.0
V
Low/Full speed: USB_DM
and USB_DP
0.3
10
V
High speed: USB_DM and
USB_DP
-10
mV
V
Low-level output voltage,
LVCMOS(2) (3.3-V I/O)
3.3 V, DVDDx = MAX,
IOL = MAX
0.4
0.4
VOL
Low-level output voltage,
LVCMOS(2) (1.8-V I/O)
1.8 V, DVDDx = MAX,
IOL = MAX
V
Low-level output voltage, I2C 1.8/3.3 V, IOL = 4mA
(I2C[0], I2C[1])
0.4
1.5
V
LDOs (applies to all
LDOCAP_x pins)
V
Input current, LVCMOS(2)
3.3 V mode
,
0 < VI < DVDDx, 3.3 V
pull disabled
-20
20
20
µA
µA
µA
µA
µA
µA
0 < VI < DVDDx, 3.3 V
100
300
-300
5
pulldown enabled(4)
0 < VI < DVDDx, 3.3 V
-20
-5
-100
pullup enabled(4)
Input current, LVCMOS(2)
1.8 V mode
,
0 < VI < DVDDx, 1.8 V
pull disabled
II(3)
0 < VI < DVDDx, 1.8 V
50
100
200
-200
pulldown enabled(4)
0 < VI < DVDDx, 1.8 V
-50
-100
pullup enabled(4)
Input current, I2C (I2C[0],
I2C[1])
3.3 V mode
1.8 V mode
-20
-5
20
5
µA
µA
3.3 V mode, pull
enabled
-300
-20
-200
-5
300
20
µA
µA
µA
3.3 V mode, pull
disabled
(5)
IOZ
I/O Off-state output current
1.8 V mode, pull
enabled
200
5
1.8 V mode, pull
disabled
µA
Core (CVDD) supply current TBD
(scalable)
TBD
TBD
mA
ICDD
(6)
ARM Core Current
(Scalable)
mA
ICVDD_ARM
(1) For test conditions shown as MIN, MAX, or TYP, use the appropriate value specified in the recommended operating conditions table.
(2) LVCMOS pins are all I/O pins powered by DVDD, DVDD_GPMC, DVDD_GPMCB, DVDD_SD, DVDD_C supplies except for I2C[0] and
I2C[1] pins.
(3) II applies to input-only pins and bi-directional pins. For input-only pins, II indicates the input leakage current. For bi-directional pins, II
indicates the input leakage current and off-state (Hi-Z) output leakage current.
(4) Applies only to pins with an internal pullup (IPU) or pulldown (IPD) resistor.
(5) IOZ applies to output-only pins, indicating off-state (Hi-Z) output leakage current.
(6) Measured under the following conditions: TBD. The actual current draw varies across manufacturing processes and is highly
application-dependent. For more details on core and I/O activity, as well as information relevant to board power supply design, see the
AM387x Power Consumption Summary Application Report (Literature Number: TBD).
166
Device Operating Conditions
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating Temperature
(Unless Otherwise Noted) (continued)
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS(1)
MIN
TYP
MAX UNIT
3.3-V I/O (DVDD,
TBD
TBD
mA
DVDD_GPMC,
DVDD_GPMCB, DVDD_SD,
DVDD_C) supply current(6)
1.8-V I/O (DVDD,
DVDD_GPMC,
DVDD_GPMCB, DVDD_SD,
DVDD_C DVDD_M,
DVDD_DDR[0],
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
mA
mA
IDDD
DVDD_DDR[1]) supply
current(6)
1.5-V I/O (DVDD_DDR[0],
DVDD_DDR[1]) supply
current(6)
1.8-V Analog Current Core
Current (Scalable)
VDDA_x_1P8
TBD
TBD
mA
mA
IVDDAx
3.3-V Analog Current Core
Current (Scalable)
(VDDA_USB_3P3)
Input capacitance
LVCMOS(2)
12
12
pF
pF
CI
Output capacitance
LVCMOS(2)
Co
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Operating Conditions
167
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
7 Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
7.1 Power, Reset and Clock Management (PRCM) Module
The PRCM module is the centralized management module for the power, reset, and clock control signals
of the device. It interfaces with all the components on the device for power, clock, and reset management
through power-control signals. It integrates enhanced features to allow the device to adapt energy
consumption dynamically, according to changing application and performance requirements. The
innovative hardware architecture allows a substantial reduction in leakage current.
The PRCM module is composed of two main entities:
•
Power reset manager (PRM): Handles the power, reset, wake-up management, and system clock
source control (oscillator)
•
Clock manager (CM): Handles the clock generation, distribution, and management.
For more details on the PRCM, see the Power, Reset, and Clock Management (PRCM) Module chapter of
the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number:
SPRUGZ7).
7.2 Power
7.2.1 Voltage and Power Domains
Every Module within the device belongs to a Core Logic Voltage Domain, Memory Voltage Domain, and a
Power Domain (see Table 7-1).
Table 7-1. Voltage and Power Domains
CORE LOGIC
VOLTAGE DOMAIN
MEMORY VOLTAGE
DOMAIN
POWER
DOMAIN
MODULE(S)
ARM_L
ARM_M
ARM Cortex-A8 Subsystem, SmartReflex Sensor 0
DCAN0/1, DMM, EDMA, ELM, DDR0/1, EMAC Switch,
GPIO Banks 0/1/2/3,GPMC, I2C0/1/2/3, IPC,
MCASP0/1/2/3/4/5, MCBSP, OCMC SRAM, PCIE,
PRCM, RTC, SATA, SD/MMC0/1/2, SPI01/2/3,
Timer1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8, UART0/1/2/3/4/5, USB0/1,
WDT0, System Interconnect, JTAG, Media Controller,
ISS , SmartReflex Control Module 0/1, SmartReflex
Sensor 1
ALWAYS ON
CORE_L
CORE_M
GFX
SGX530
HDVPSS
HDVPSS, HDMI, SD-DAC
7.2.1.1 Core Logic Voltage Domains
The device contains four Core Logic Voltage Domains. These domains define groups of Modules that
share the same supply voltage for their core logic. Each Core Logic Voltage Domain is powered by a
dedicated supply voltage rail that can be independently scaled using SmartReflex technology to trade off
power versus performance. Table 7-2 shows the mapping between the Core Logic Voltage Domains and
their associated supply pins.
168
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 7-2. Core Logic Voltage Domains and Supply Pin Associations
CORE LOGIC
SUPPLY PIN NAME
VOLTAGE DOMAIN
ARM_L
CVDD_ARM
CVDD
CORE_L
Note: A regulated supply voltage must be supplied to each Core Logic Voltage Domain at all times,
regardless of the Core Logic Power Domain states.
7.2.1.2 Memory Voltage Domains
The SRAM within each Device Module is assigned to one of four Memory Voltage Domains. The voltage
of each Memory Voltage Domain is independently controlled by internal LDO regulators, which are
supplied by the VDDA_1P8 pins.
The voltage level output by each of these LDO regulators is controlled through software by programming
the RAMLDO_CTRLx registers in the Control Module. The Memory Voltage Domain voltage must be
programmed based on the Core Logic Voltage Domain voltage for that domain (i.e., the corresponding
Core Logic Voltage Domain for the ARM_M Voltage Domain is ARM_C, etc). Table 7-3 shows the
Memory Voltage Domain voltage requirements.
Table 7-3. Memory Voltage Domain LDO Requirements
CORE LOGIC VOLTAGE
DOMAIN VOLTAGE (V)
MEMORY VOLTAGE DOMAIN
VOLTAGE (V)
0.83 – 1.20
1.20
7.2.1.3 Power Domains
The device contains six Power Domains which supply power to both the Core Logic and SRAM within their
associated modules. Each Power Domain, except for the ALWAYS ON domain, has an internal power
switch that can completely remove power from that domain. All power switches are turned "OFF" by
default after reset, and software can individually turn them "ON/OFF" via Control Module registers.
Note: All Modules within a Power Domain are unavailable when the domain is powered "OFF". For
instructions on powering "ON/OFF" the Power domains, see the Power, Reset, and Clock Management
(PRCM) Module chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference
Manual (Literature Number: SPRUGZ7).
7.2.2 SmartReflex™
The device contains SmartReflex modules that help to minimize power consumption on the Core Logic
Voltage Domains by using external variable-voltage power supplies. Based on the device process,
temperature, and desired performance, the SmartReflex modules advise the host processor to raise or
lower the supply voltage to each domain for minimal power consumption.
The communication link between the host processor and the external regulators is a system-level decision
and can be accomplished using GPIOs, I2C, SPI, or other methods. The following sections briefly
describe the two major techniques employed by SmartReflex: Dynamic Voltage Frequency Scaling
(DVFS) and Adaptive Voltage Scaling (AVS).
For specifics on implementing the SmartReflex techniques, see the DM814x SmartReflex Application
Report (Literature Number: SPRTBD).
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
169
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
7.2.2.1 Dynamic Voltage Frequency Scaling (DVFS)
Each device Core Logic Voltage Domain can be run independently at one of several Operating
Performance Points (OPPs). An OPP for a specific Core Logic Voltage Domain is defined by: (1)
maximum frequencies of operation for Modules within the Domain and (2) an associated supply voltage
range. Trading off power versus performance, OPPs with lower maximum frequencies also have lower
voltage ranges for power savings.
The OPP for a domain can be changed in real-time without requiring a reset. This feature is called
Dynamic Voltage Frequency Scaling (DVFS). For detailed procedures on implementing DVFS, see the
DM814x SmartReflex Application Report (Literature Number: SPRTBD). Table 7-4 contains a list of
voltage ranges and maximum module frequencies for the OPPs of each Core Logic Voltage Domain.
Table 7-4. Device Operating Points (OPPs)
CORE LOGIC VOLTAGE DOMAINS
ARM
CORE
L3/L4,
Core
(MHz)
Cortex A8
(MHz)
HDVPSS
(MHz)
SGX
(MHz)
ISS
(MHz)
Media Ctlr.
(MHz)
DDR
OPP
(MHz)(1)
50%(2)
100%
120%
300
600
TBD
200
TBD
200
TBD
400
TBD
200
TBD
200
TBD
400
720
220
250
400
200
220
400
800
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
166%
1000
(1) All DDR access must be suspended prior to changing the DDR frequency of operation.
(2) OPP 50% does not support all CORE peripherals (e.g., EMAC GMII/RGMII, USB2.0, PCIe, SD-DAC, SATA, TBD are not supported).
Although the OPP for each Core Logic Voltage Domain is independently selectable, not all combinations
of OPPs are supported. marks the supported ARM OPPs for a given CORE OPP.
Table 7-5. Supported OPP Combinations(1)(2)
ARM
CORE
OPP166
OPP120
OPP100
OPP50
OPP166
TBD
OPP120
OPP100
OPP50
TBD
X
TBD
X
X
X
X
X
(1) "X" denotes supported combinations.
(2) The maximum voltage differences between CVDD and any other CVDD_x voltage domain must be <
150 mV.
7.2.2.2 Adaptive Voltage Scaling
As mentioned in Section 7.2.2.1, Dynamic Voltage Frequency Scaling (DVFS) above, every OPP has an
associated voltage range. Based on the silicon process, temperature, and chosen OPP, the SmartReflex
modules guide software in adjusting the Core Logic Voltage Domain supply voltages within these ranges.
This technique is called Adaptive Voltage Scaling (AVS). AVS occurs continuously and in real-time,
helping to minimize power consumption in response to changing operating conditions. For detailed
procedures on implementing AVS, see the DM814x SmartReflex Application Report (Literature Number:
SPRTBD).
7.2.3 Memory Power Management
In order to reduce SRAM leakage, many SRAM blocks can be switched from ACTIVE mode to
SHUTDOWN mode. When SRAM is put in SHUTDOWN mode, the voltage supplied to it is automatically
removed and all data in that SRAM is lost.
170
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
All SRAM located in a switchable power domain (all domains except ALWAYS_ON) automatically enters
SHUTDOWN mode whenever its associated power domain goes into the "OFF" state. The SRAM returns
to the ACTIVE state when the corresponding Power Domain returns to the "ON" state.
In addition, the following SRAM within the ALWAYS_ON Power Domain can also be independently put
into SHUTDOWN by programming the x_MEM_PWRDN registers in the Control Module:
•
•
Media Controller SRAM
OCMC SRAM
For detailed instructions on powering up/down the various device SRAM, see the TBD chapter of the
AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number:
SPRUGZ7).
7.2.4 SERDES_CLKP/N LDO
The SERDES_CLKP/N input buffers are powered by an internal LDO which is programmed through the
REFCLK_LJCBLDO_CTRL register in the Control Module.
For more information on programming the SERDES_CLKN/P LDO, see TBD chapter of the AM387x Sitara
ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number: SPRUGZ7).
7.2.5 Dual Voltage I/Os
The device supports dual voltages on some of its I/Os. These I/Os are partitioned into the following
groups, and each group has its own dedicated supply pins: DVDD, DVDD_GPMC, DVDD_C, DVDD_SD,
and DVDD_M. The supply voltage for each group can be independently powered with either 1.8 V or
3.3 V.
For the mapping between pins and power groups, see Section 3.2, Terminal Functions of the datasheet.
In addition, the I/O voltage on each DDR interface is independently selectable between either 1.5 V or 1.8
V to support various DDR device types. The I/O supplies for each DDR interface are separate and isolated
to allow populating different memory types on each interface.
7.2.6 I/O Power-Down Modes
On the device, there are power-down modes available for the following PHYs:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Video DAC
DDR
USB
HDMI
PCIE
SATA
When a PHY controller is in a power domain that is to be turned "OFF", software must configure the
corresponding PHY into power-down mode, prior to putting the power domain in the "OFF" state.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
171
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
7.2.7 Standby and Deep Sleep Modes
The device supports Low-Power Standby and Deep-Sleep Modes as described below.
Standby Mode is defined as a state in which:
•
•
•
All switchable power domains are in "OFF" state
The ARM Cortex-A8 is executing an IDLE loop at its lowest frequency of operation
All functional blocks not needed for a given application are clock gated
Deep Sleep Mode is defined to be the same as Standby Mode, with the addition of gating the crystal
oscillator to further eliminate all active power. The device core voltages can be reduced to 0.83 V for
optimal power savings.
For detailed instructions on entering and exiting from Standby and Deep Sleep Modes, see the Power,
Reset, and Clock Management (PRCM) Module chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors
(MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number: SPRUGZ7).
7.2.8 Supply Sequencing
The device power supplies are organized into four Supply Sequencing Groups:
1. All CVDD supplies (CVDD, CVDD_x)
2. All 1.5-V Supplies (DVDD_DDR[x] at 1.5 V [only needed if using DDR3])
3. All 1.8-V Supplies (DVDD_x, DVDD_M, DVDD_DDR[x] at 1.8 V [if using LPDDR, DDR2],
VDDA_x_1P8, VDDA_1P8)
4. All 3.3-V Supplies (DVDD, DVDD_x, DVDD_C, VDDA_x_3P3)
To ensure proper device operation, a specific power-up and power-down sequence must be followed.
Some TI power-supply devices include features that facilitate these power sequencing requirements — for
example, TI’s TPS659113 integrated PMIC. For more information on TI power supplies and their features,
visit www.ti.com/processorpower.
For more detailed information on the actual power supply names and their descriptions, see Table 3-49,
Supply Voltages Terminal Functions.
7.2.8.1 Power-Up Sequence
For proper device operation, the following power-up sequence in Table 7-6 and Figure 7-1 must be
followed.
Table 7-6. Power-Up Sequence Ramping Values
NO.
1
DESCRIPTION
1.8 V supplies to 3.3 V supplies
MIN
(1)
MAX
UNIT
ms
2
1.8 V supplies to 1.5 V (DVDD_DDR[x]) supplies
0(2)
0(2)
ms
3
1.8 V supplies stable to CVDD, CVDD_x supplies ramp start
ms
Master
Clocks
4
All supplies valid to power-on-reset (POR high)
4 096
(1) The 3.3 V supplies must never be more than 2 V above the 1.8 V supplies (see Figure 7-2).
(2) The 1.8 V supplies must be ≥ 1.5 V (DVDD_DDR[x]) and CVDD, CVDD_x supplies.
172
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
POR
1.8 V Supplies
(DVDD, DVDD_x, DVDD_M,
DVDD_DDR[x], VDDA_x_1P8, VDDA_1P8)
3.3 V Supplies
(DVDD, DVDD_x,
DVDD_C, VDDA_x_3P3)
1.5 V (DVDD_DDR[x])
CVDD, CVDD_x
1
2
3
4
Figure 7-1. Power-Up Sequence
3.3 V Supplies
V Delta (A)
1.8 V Supplies
A. V Delta Max = 2 V.
Figure 7-2. 3.3 V Supplies Rising Before 1.8 V Supplies Delta
7.2.8.2 Power-Down Sequence
For proper device operation, the following power-down sequence in Table 7-7 and Figure 7-3 must be
followed.
Table 7-7. Power-Down Sequence Ramping Values
NO.
5
DESCRIPTION
CVDD, CVDD_x supplies to 1.8 V supplies
1.5 V (DVDD_DDR[x]) supplies to 1.8 V supplies
3.3 V supplies to 1.8 V supplies
MIN
(1)
MAX
(1)
UNIT
ms
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
6
ms
7
ms
(1) The 1.8 V supplies must be ≥ 1.5 V (DVDD_DDR[x]) and CVDD, CVDD_x supplies.
(2) The 3.3 V supplies must never be more than 2 V above the 1.8 V supplies (see Figure 7-2).
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
173
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
1.8 V Supplies
(DVDD, DVDD_x, DVDD_M,
DVDD_DDR[x], VDDA_x_1P8, VDDA_1P8)
3.3 V Supplies
(DVDD, DVDD_x,
DVDD_C, VDDA_x_3P3)
1.5 V (DVDD_DDR[x])
CVDD, CVDD_x
7
6
5
Figure 7-3. Power-Down Sequence
7.2.9 Power-Supply Decoupling
7.2.9.1 Analog and PLL
PLL and Analog supplies benefit from filters or ferrite beads to keep the noise from causing problems. The
minimum recommendation is a ferrite bead along with at least one capacitor on the device side of the
bead. An additional recommendation is to add one capacitor just before the bead to form a Pi filter. The
filter needs to be as close as possible to the device pin, with the device side capacitor being the most
important component to be close to the device pin. PLL pins close together can be combined on the same
supply, but analog pins should all have their own filters. PLL pins farther away from each other may need
their own filtered supply.
7.2.9.2 Digital
Recommended capacitors for power supply decoupling are all 0.1uF in the smallest body size that can be
used. Capacitors are more effective in the smallest physical size to limit lead inductance. For example,
0201 sized capacitors are better than 0402 sized capacitors, and so on. TI recommends using capacitors
no larger than 0402. Place at least one capacitor for every two power pins. For those power pins that have
only one pin, a capacitor is still required. Place one bulk (10 uF or larger) capacitor for every 10 or so
power pins as closely as possible to the chip. These larger caps do not need to be under the chip
footprint.
Pay special attention not to put so much capacitance on the supply that it slows the start-up voltage ramp
enough to change the power sequencing order. Also be sure to verify that the main chip reset is low until
after all supplies are at their correct voltage and stable.
DDR peripheral related supply capacitor numbers are provided in Section 8.13, LPDDR/DDR2/DDR3
Memory Controller.
174
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
7.3 Reset
7.3.1 System-Level Reset Sources
The device has several types of system-level resets. Table 7-8 lists these reset types, along with the reset
initiator, and the effects of each reset on the device.
Table 7-8. System-Level Reset Types
RESETS ALL
MODULES,
EXCLUDING EMAC
SWITCH,
EMULATION, PLL
AND CLOCK
CONFIG
ASSERTS
RSTOUT_WD_OUT
PIN
RESETS EMAC
SWITCH
RESETS
EMULATION
PLL AND CLOCK
CONFIG
LATCHES
BOOT PINS
TYPE
INITIATOR
Power-on Reset (POR)
External Warm Reset
POR pin
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Optional(1)(2)
Optional(1)(2)
RESET pin
Optional(3)
On-Chip Emulation
Logic
Emulation Warm Reset
Yes
Optional(3)
No
No
No
Optional(1)
Watchdog Reset
Watchdog Timer
Software
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Optional(3)
Optional(3)
Optional(3)
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Optional(1)
Optional(1)
No
Software Global Cold Reset
Software Global Warm Reset
Test Reset
Software
TRST pin
Yes
No
(1) RSTOUT_WD_OUT pin asserted only if BTMODE[11] was latched as "0" when coming out of reset.
(2) While POR and/or RESET is asserted, the RSTOUT_WD_OUT pin is 3-stated and the internal pull resistor is disabled; therefore, an
external pullup/pulldown can be used to set the state of this pin (high/low) while POR and/or RESET is asserted. For more detailed
information on external PUs/PDs, see , Pullup/Pulldown Resistors.
(3) EMAC Switch is NOT reset when the ISO_CONTROL bit in the RESET_ISO Control Module register is set to "1".
7.3.2 Power-on Reset (POR pin)
Power-on Reset (POR) is initiated by the POR pin and is used to reset the entire chip, including the Test
and Emulation logic, and the EMAC Switch. POR is also referred to as a cold reset since it is required to
be asserted when the device goes through a power-up cycle. However, a device power-up cycle is not
required to initiate a Power-on Reset.
The following sequence must be followed during a Power-on Reset:
1. Wait for the power supplies to reach normal operating conditions while keeping the POR pin asserted.
2. Wait for the input clock sources DEV_CLKIN, AUX_CLKIN, and SERDES_CLKN/P to be stable (if
used by the system) while keeping the POR pin asserted (low).
3. Once the power supplies and the input clock sources are stable, the POR pin must remain asserted
(low) [see Section 7.3.18, Reset Electrical Data/Timing]. Within the low period of the POR pin, the
following happens:
(a) All pins except Emulation pins enter a Hi-Z mode and the associated pulls, if applicable, will be
enabled.
(b) The PRCM asserts reset to all modules within the device.
(c) The PRCM begins propagating these clocks to the chip with the PLLs in BYPASS mode.
4. The POR pin may now be de-asserted (driven high). When the POR pin is de-asserted (high):
(a) The BTMODE[15:0] pins are latched.
(b) Reset to the ARM Cortex-A8 and Modules without a local processor is de-asserted.
(c) RSTOUT_WD_OUT is briefly asserted if BTMODE[11] was latched as "0".
(d) The clock, reset, and power-down state of each peripheral is determined by the default settings of
the PRCM.
(e) The ARM Cortex-A8 begins executing from the Boot ROM.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
175
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
7.3.3 External Warm Reset (RESET pin)
An external warm reset is activated by driving the RESET pin active-low. This resets everything in the
device, except for the Test and Emulation logic, and the EMAC Switch (optional). An emulator session
stays alive during warm reset.
The following sequence must be followed during a warm reset:
1. Power supplies and input clock sources should already be stable.
2. The RESET pin must be asserted (low)[see Section 7.3.18, Reset Electrical Data/Timing]. Within the
low period of the RESET pin, the following happens:
(a) All pins, except Test and Emulation pins, enter a Hi-Z mode and the associated pulls, if applicable,
will be enabled.
(b) The PRCM asserts reset to all modules within the device, except for the Test and Emulation logic,
EMAC Switch (optional), PLL, and Clock configuration.
3. The RESET pin may now be de-asserted (driven high). When the RESET pin is de-asserted (high):
(a) The BTMODE[15:0] pins are latched.
(b) Reset to the ARM Cortex-A8 and modules without a local processor is de-asserted, with the
exception of Test and Emulation logic, EMAC Switch (optional), PLL, and Clock configuration.
(c) RSTOUT_WD_OUT is asserted [see Section 7.3.18, Reset Electrical Data/Timing], if BTMODE[11]
was latched as "0".
(d) The clock, reset, and power-down state of each peripheral is determined by the default settings of
the PRCM.
(e) The ARM Cortex-A8 begins executing from the Boot ROM.
7.3.4 Emulation Warm Reset
An Emulation Warm Reset is activated by the on-chip Emulation Module. It has the same effect and
requirements as an External Warm Reset (RESET), with the following exceptions:
•
•
BTMODE[15:0] pins are not re-latched
RSTOUT_WD_OUT is not 3-stated and is actively driven based on the value previously latched on the
BTMODE[11] pin.
The emulator initiates an Emulation Warm Reset via the ICEPICK module. To invoke the Emulation Warm
Reset via the ICEPICK module, the user can perform the following from the Code Composer Studio™ IDE
menu: Target -> Reset -> System Reset.
7.3.5 Watchdog Reset
A Watchdog Reset is initiated when the Watchdog Timer counter reaches zero. It has the same effect and
requirements as an External Warm Reset (RESET pin), with the following exceptions:
•
•
BTMODE[15:0] pins are not re-latched
RSTOUT_WD_OUT is not 3-stated and is actively driven based on the value previously latched on the
BTMODE[11] pin.
In addition, a Watchdog Reset always results in RSTOUT_WD_OUT being asserted, regardless of
whether the BTMODE[11] pin was latched as "0" or "1".
7.3.6 Software Global Cold Reset
A Software Global Cold Reset is initiated under software control. It has the same effect and requirements
as a POR Reset, with the following exceptions:
•
•
BTMODE[15:0] pins are not re-latched and EMAC Switch (optional) is not reset
RSTOUT_WD_OUT is not 3-stated and is actively driven based on the value previously latched on the
BTMODE[11] pin.
176
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Software initiates a Software Global Cold Reset by writing a "1" to the RST_GLOBAL_COLD_SW bit in
the PRM_RSTCTRL register in the PRCM.
For more detailed information on the PRM_RSTCTRL register, see the PRCM Registers section of the
Power, Reset, and Clock Management (PRCM) Module chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM
Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number: SPRUGZ7).
7.3.7 Software Global Warm Reset
A Software Global Warm Reset is initiated under software control. It has the same effect and requirements
as a External Warm Reset (RESET pin), with the following exceptions:
•
•
BTMODE[15:0] pins are not re-latched
RSTOUT_WD_OUT is not 3-stated and is actively driven based on the value previously latched on the
BTMODE[11] pin.
Software initiates a Software Global Warm Reset by writing a "1" to the RST_GLOBAL_WARM_SW bit in
the PRM_RSTCTRL register in the PRCM.
For more detailed information on the PRM_RSTCTRL register, see the PRCM Registers section of the
Power, Reset, and Clock Management (PRCM) Module chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM
Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number: SPRUGZ7).
7.3.8 Test Reset (TRST pin)
A Test Reset is activated by the emulator asserting the TRST pin. The only effect a Test Reset has is to
reset the Test and Emulation Logic.
7.3.9 Local Reset
The Local Reset for various Modules within the device is controlled by programming the PRCM and/or the
Peripheral Module’s internal registers. Only the associated Module is reset when a Local Reset is
asserted, leaving the rest of the device unaffected.
For more details on Peripheral Local Resets, see the Reset Management section of the Power, Reset,
and Clock Management (PRCM) Module chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs)
Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number: SPRUGZ7).
7.3.10 Reset Priority
If any of the above reset sources occur simultaneously, the device only processes the highest-priority
reset request. The reset request priorities, from high-to-low, are as follows:
1. Power-on Reset (POR)
2. Test Reset (TRST)
3. External Warm Reset (RESET pin)
4. Emulation Warm Resets
5. Watchdog Reset
6. Software Global Cold/Warm Resets
7.3.11 Reset Status Register
The Reset Status Register (PRM_RSTST) contains information about the last reset that occurred in the
system. For more information on this register, see the TBD chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM
Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number: SPRUGZ7).
7.3.12 PCIE Reset Isolation
The device supports reset isolation for the PCI Express (PCIE) module. This means that the PCI Express
Subsystem can be reset without resetting the rest of the device.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
177
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
When the devcie is a PCI Express Root Complex (RC), the PCIE Subsystem can be reset by software
through the PRCM. Software should ensure that there are no ongoing PCIE transactions before asserting
this reset by first taking the PCIE Subsystem into the IDLE state. After bringing the PCIE Subsystem out
of reset, bus enumeration should be performed again and should treat all Endpoints (EP) as if they had
just been connected.
When the device is a PCI Express Endpoint (EP), the PCIE Subsystem will generate an interrupt when an
in-band reset is received. Software should process this interrupt by putting the PCIE Subsystem in the
IDLE state and then asserting the PCIE local reset through the PRCM.
All device level resets mentioned in the previous sections, except Test Reset, will also reset the PCIE
Subsystem. Therefore, the PCIE peripheral should issue a Hot Reset to all downstream devices and
re-enumerate the bus upon coming out of reset.
For more detailed information on reset isolation procedures, see the PCIe Reset Isolation section of the
Power, Reset, and Clock Management (PRCM) Module chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM
Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number: SPRUGZ7).
7.3.13 EMAC Switch Reset Isolation
The device supports reset isolation for the Ethernet Switch (EMAC Switch). This allows the device to
undergo all resets listed in Section 7.3.1, System-Level Reset Sources, with the exception of POR Reset,
without disrupting the Ethernet Switch or the traffic being routed through the switch during the reset
condition. The following reset types can optionally provide an EMAC Switch reset isolation by setting the
ISO_CONTROL bit in the RESET_ISO Control Module register to a "1":
•
•
•
•
•
External Warm Reset
Emulation Warm Reset
Watchdog Reset
Software Global Cold Reset
Software Global Warm Reset
When one of above resets occurs and the Ethernet Switch (EMAC Switch) is programmed to be isolated:
•
The switch function of the EMAC Switch and the PLL embedded in the SATA SERDES Module (which
provides the reference clocks to the EMAC Switch) will not be reset.
•
Several Control Module registers are not reset. For more details, see the description of the
RESET_ISO register in the TBD chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs)
Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number: SPRUGZ7).
•
The pin multiplexing of some of the EMAC Switch pins is unaffected. For more details, see the
description of the RESET_ISO register in the TBD chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors
(MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number: SPRUGZ7).
The EMAC Switch is always reset when:
•
•
One of the above resets occurs and the Ethernet Switch is programmed to be “not isolated”
A POR Reset occurs
7.3.14 RSTOUT_WD_OUT Pin
The RSTOUT_WD_OUT pin reflects device reset status and is de-asserted (high) when the device is out
reset. This output will always be asserted when a Watchdog Timer reset (Watchdog Reset) occurs. In
addition, this output is always 3-stated and the internal pull resistor is disabled on this pin while POR
and/or RESET is asserted; therefore, an external pullup/pulldown can be used to set the state of this pin
(high/low) while POR and/or RESET is asserted. For more detailed information on external PUs/PDs, see
Section 4.5.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors.
If the BTMODE[11] pin is latched as a "0" at the rising edge of POR or RESET, then RSTOUT_WD_OUT
is also asserted when any of the below resets occur:
178
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
•
•
•
•
Power-On Reset (asserted after the BTMODE[11] pin is latched)
External Warm Reset (asserted after the BTMODE[11] pin is latched)
Emulation Warm Reset
Software Global Cold/Warm Reset
The RSTOUT_WD_OUT pin remains asserted until the PRCM releases the host ARM Cortex-A8
processor for reset.
7.3.15 Effect of Reset on Emulation & Trace
The device Emulation & Trace Logic will only be reset by the following sources:
•
•
•
Power-On Reset
Software Global Cold Reset
Test Reset
Other than these three reset types, none of the other resets will affect the Emulation and Trace Logic.
However, the multiplexing of the EMU[4:2] pins is reset by all system reset types except Test Reset.
7.3.16 Reset During Power Domain Switching
Each Power Domain has a dedicated Warm Reset and Cold Reset. Warm Reset for a Power Domain is
asserted under either of the following two conditions:
1. An External Warm Reset, Emulation Warm Reset, or Software Global Warm Reset occurs
2. When that Power Domain switches from the "ON" state to the "OFF" state
Cold Reset for a Power Domain is asserted under either of the following two conditions:
1. Power-On Reset or Software Global Cold Reset occurs
2. When that Power Domain switches from the "OFF" state to the "ON" state
7.3.17 Pin Behaviors at Reset
When any reset, other than Test Reset, (all described in Section 7.3.1, System-Level Reset Sources) is
asserted, all device I/O pins are reset into a Hi-Z state except for:
•
•
Emulation Pins. These pins are only put into a Hi-Z state when Test Reset (TRST) is asserted.
EMAC Switch Pins. These pins are always put into a Hi-Z state during Power-On Reset. However,
some EMAC Switch pins will not be put into a Hi-Z state during the other reset modes when the
ISO_CONTROL bit in the RESET_ISO register of the Control Module is programmed as a "1". For
more details, see the description of the RESET_ISO register in the TBD chapter of the AM387x Sitara
ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number: SPRUGZ7).
•
•
RSTOUT_WD_OUT Pin during any reset types except for POR and RESET. For more detailed
information on RSTOUT_WD_OUT pin behavior, see Section 7.3.14, RSTOUT_WD_OUT Pin.
DDR[0]/[1] Address/Control Pins (CLK, CLK, CKE, WE, CS[1]/[0], RAS, CAS, ODT[1]/[0], RST,
BA[2:0], A[14:0]). These pins are 3-stated during reset. However, these pins are then driven to the
same value as their internal pull resistor reset value when reset is released (For the direction of the
internal pull during reset, see the DDR[0]/[1] Terminal Functions tables in the Section 3.2.4,
LPDDR/DDR2/DDR3 Memory Controller of this document).
In addition, the PINCNTL registers, which control pin multiplexing, enabling the IPUs/IPDs, and enabling
the receiver, are reset to their default state. Again, enabling the EMAC Switch reset isolation prevents
some PINCTRL registers from being reset.
For details on EMAC Switch reset isolation, see the descriptions of the RESET_ISO register and the
PINCNTL registers in the TBD chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical
Reference Manual (Literature Number: SPRUGZ7).
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
179
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Internal pull-up/down (IPU/IPD) resistors are enabled during and immediately after reset as described in
Section 3.2, Terminal Functions of this document.
NOTE
Upon coming out of reset, the ARM Cortex-A8 starts executing code from the internal Boot
ROM. The Boot ROM code modifies the PINCNTLx registers to configure the associated
pins for the chosen primary and backup Bootmodes. For more details on the Boot ROM
effects on pin multiplexing, see the TBD chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors
(MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number: SPRUGZ7).
7.3.18 Reset Electrical Data/Timing
Table 7-9. Timing Requirements for Reset (see Figure 7-4 and Figure 7-5)
OPP100
NO.
1
UNIT
MIN
12P(1)
2P(2)
2P(2)
0
MAX
tw(RESET)
tsu(BOOT)
th(BOOT)
Pulse duration, POR low or RESET low
ns
ns
ns
ns
POR
Setup time, BTMODE[15:0] pins valid before POR high or
RESET high
2
RESET
3
Hold time, BTMODE[15:0] pins valid after POR high or RESET high
(1) The device clock source must be stable and at a valid frequency prior to meeting the tw(RESET) requirement.
(2) P = 1/(DEV Clock) frequency in ns.
Table 7-10. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions During Reset
(see Figure 7-5)
OPP100
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
td(RSTL-
IORST)
4
5
Delay time, RESET low or POR low to all I/Os entering their reset state
Delay time, RESET high or POR high to all I/Os exiting their reset state
14 ns
14 ns
2P ns
td(RSTH-
IOFUNC)
RESET assertion tw(RESET)
0
0
0
0
0
0
≥ 30P
td(RSTH-
RSTOUTH)
6
Delay time, RESET high to RSTOUT_WD_OUT high(1)(2)
RESET assertion tw(RESET)
32P -
tw(RESET)
ns
< 30P
td(PORH-
RSTOUTH)
td(RSTL-
RSTOUTZ)
td(PORH-
RSTOUTL)
td(RSTH-
RSTOUTD)
7
8
Delay time, POR high to RSTOUT_WD_OUT high(1)(2)
Delay time, RESET low to RSTOUT_WD_OUT Hi-Z(1)(2)
TBD ns
2P ns
2P ns
2P ns
Delay time, POR high to RSTOUT_WD_OUT driven based on latched BTMODE[11]
value(1)(2)
9
Delay time, RESET high to RSTOUT_WD_OUT driven based on latched BTMODE[11]
value(1)(2)
10
(1) For more detailed information on RSTOUT_WD_OUT pin behavior, see Section 7.3.14, RSTOUT_WD_OUT Pin.
(2) P = 1/(DEV Clock) frequency in ns.
180
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Figure 7-4 shows the Power-Up Timing. Figure 7-5 shows the Warm Reset (RESET) Timing. Max Reset
Timing is identical to Warm Reset Timing, except the BTMODE[15:0] pins are not re-latched.
Power
Supplies
Ramping
Power Supplies Stable
Clock Source Stable
DEV_CLKIN/
AUX_CLKIN(A)
1
POR
RESET
7
9
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
BTMODE[11](B)
RSTOUT_WD_OUT
5
2
3
BTMODE[15:0]
Other I/O Pins(C)
Config
5
RESET STATE
A. Power supplies and DEV_CLKIN/AUX_CLKIN must be stable before the start of tw(RESET)
.
B. RSTOUT_WD_OUT only asserted if BTMODE[11] was latched as a "0" when coming out of reset.
C. For more detailed information on the RESET STATE of each pin, see Section 7.3.17, Pin Behaviors at Reset. Also
see Section 3.2, Terminal Functions for the IPU/IPD settings during reset.
Figure 7-4. Power-Up Timing
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
181
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Power Supplies Stable
DEV_CLKIN/
AUX_CLKIN
POR
1
RESET
8
4
4
6
10
BTMODE[11](A)
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
RSTOUT_WD_OUT
5
2
3
BTMODE[15:0]
Other I/O Pins(B)
Config
5
RESET STATE
A. RSTOUT_WD_OUT only asserted if BTMODE[11] was latched as a "0" when coming out of reset.
B. For more detailed information on the RESET STATE of each pin, see Section 7.3.17, Pin Behaviors at Reset. Also
see Section 3.2, Terminal Functions for the IPU/IPD settings during reset.
Figure 7-5. Warm Reset (RESET) Timing
182
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
7.4 Clocking
The device clocks are generated from several reference clocks that are fed to on-chip PLLs and dividers
(both inside and outside of the PRCM Module). Figure 7-6 shows a high-level overview of the device
system clocking structure (Note: to reduce complexity, not all clocking connections are shown). For
detailed information on the device clocks, see the Clock Generation and Management section of the
Power, Reset, and Clock Management (PRCM) Module chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM
Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number: SPRUGZ7).
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
183
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
PLL_HDVPSS
HDVPSS
PLL_MEDIACTL
ISS, Media Controller
SYSCLK4
L3 Fast/Medium, L4 Fast,
EDMA, OCMC, MMU
PLL_L3
PRCM
PRCM
L3/L4 Slow, GPMC, ELM,
McASP, McBSP,
UART3/4/5 (opt),
SYSCLK6
Mailbox, Spinlock
SYSCLK23
PLL_SGX
CLKDCO
SGX530
USB0/1
PLL_USB
CLKOUT
SYSCLK10
SYSCLK8
SPI0/1/2/3, I2C0/1/2/3,
UART0/1/2, HDMI CEC
DEVOSC/
DEV_CLKIN
M
U
X
/5
PRCM
MMC0/1/2
AUXOSC/
AUX_CLKIN
(Note: Separate MUX
exists for each PLL)
M
U
X
UART3/4/5
From SYSCLK6
PLL_DDR
DDR0/1
DMM
/2
HDVPSS SD VENC
PLL_VIDEO0
PLL_VIDEO2
HDMI
HDVPSS VOUT1
M
U
X
HDMI PHY
PLL_VIDEO1
PLL_AUDIO
M
U
X
HDVPSS VOUT0
SYSCLK20
SYSCLK21
PRCM
PRCM
M
U
X
MCASP0/1/2 AUX_CLK
From PLL_VIDEO0/1/2
M
U
X
MCBSP CLKS,
HDMI I2S
From AUX Clock, AUD_CLK0/1/2
From PLL_AUDIO, PLL_VIDEO0/1/2, AUX Clock, AUD_CLK0/1/2
MCASP3/4/5 AUX_CLK
Cortex-A8
PLL_ARM
(Embedded PLL)
M
U
X
RTCDIVIDER
SYSCLK18
RTC, GPIO, SyncTimer,
Cortex-A8 (Optional)
PRCM
From CLKIN32 Pin
M
U
X
TIMER1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8
From DEV/AUX Clock, AUD_CLK0/1/2, TCLKIN
WDT0 (Optional)
DCAN0/1, SmartReflex
M
U
X
SATA SERDES
(Embedded PLL)
SERDES_CLK
EMAC Switch
PCIE SERDES
(Embedded PLL)
WDT0 (Optional)
RCOSC32K
Figure 7-6. System Clocking Overview
184
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
7.4.1 Device (DEV) and Auxiliary (AUX) Clock Inputs
The device provides two clock inputs, Device (DEVOSC_MXI/DEV_CLKIN) and Auxiliary
(AUXOSC_MXI/AUX_CLKIN). The Device (DEV) clock is used to generate the majority of the internal
reference clocks, while the Auxiliary (AUX) clock can optionally be used as a source for the Audio and/or
Video PLLs.
The DEV and AUX clocks can be sourced in two ways:
1. Using an external crystal in conjunction with the internal oscillator or
2. Using an external 1.8-V LVCMOS-compatible clock input
Note: The external crystals used with the internal oscillators must operate in fundamental parallel
resonant mode only. There is no overtone support.
The DEV Clock should in most cases be 20 MHz. However, it can optionally range anywhere from 20 - 30
MHz if the following are true:
•
•
•
The DEV Clock is not used to source the SATA reference clock
A precise 32768-Hz clock is not needed for Real-Time Clock functionality
If the boot mode is FAST XIP
The AUX Clock is optional and can range from 20-30 MHz. It can be used to source the Audio and/or
Video PLLs when a very precise audio or video frequency is required.
7.4.1.1 Using the Internal Oscillators
When the internal oscillators are used to generate the DEV and AUX clocks, external crystals are required
to be connected across the DEVOSC or AUXOSC oscillator MXI and MXO pins, along with two load
capacitors (see Figure 7-7 and Figure 7-8). The external crystal load capacitors should also be connected
to the associated oscillator ground pin (VSSA_DEVOSC or VSSA_AUXOSC). The capacitors should not
be connected to board ground (VSS).
Figure 7-7. Device Oscillator
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
185
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
AUXOSC_MXI/
AUX_CLKIN
AUXOSC_MXO
Rd
VSSA_AUXOSC
Crystal
(Optional)
C1
C2
Figure 7-8. Auxiliary Oscillator
The load capacitors, C1 and C2 in the above pictures, should be chosen such that the below equation is
satisfied. CL in the equation is the load specified by the crystal manufacturer. All discrete components
used to implement the oscillator circuit should be placed as close as possible to the associated oscillator
MXI, MXO, and VSS pins.
C C
1
2
C
=
L
C
+ C
2
(
)
1
Table 7-11. Input Requirements for Crystal Circuit on the Device Oscillator (DEVOSC)
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
MAX
4
UNIT
ms
Start-up time (from power up until oscillating at stable frequency)
Crystal Oscillation frequency(1)
Parallel Load Capacitance (C1 and C2)
Crystal ESR
20
12
20
30
24
50
5
MHz
pF
Ω
Crystal Shunt Capacitance
pF
Crystal Oscillation Mode
Fundamental Only
n/a
ppm
Crystal Frequency stability
±50
(1) 20-MHz DEV clock is required for all bootmodes other than Fast XIP. For more detailed information on boot modes, see the ROM Code
Memory and Peripheral Booting chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature
Number: SPRUGZ7).
Table 7-12. Input Requirements for Crystal Circuit on the Auxiliary Oscillator (AUXOSC)
PARAMETER
Start-up time (from power up until oscillating at stable frequency)
Crystal Oscillation frequency
MIN
MAX
4
UNIT
ms
20
12
30
24
50
5
MHz
pF
Parallel Load Capacitance (C1 and C2)
Crystal ESR
Ω
Crystal Shunt Capacitance
pF
Crystal Oscillation Mode
Crystal Frequency stability(1)
Fundamental Only
n/a
ppm
±50
(1) Applies only when sourcing the HDMI or HDVPSS DAC clocks from the AUXOSC
186
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
7.4.1.2 Using a 1.8V LVCMOS-Compatible Clock Input
A 1.8-V LVCMOS-Compatible Clock Input can be used instead of the internal oscillators as the DEV and
AUX clock inputs to the system. The external connections to support this are shown in Figure 7-9 and
Figure 7-10. The DEV_CLKIN and AUX_CLKIN pins are connected to the 1.8-V LVCMOS-Compatible
clock sources. The DEV_MXO and AUX_MXO pins are left unconnected. The VSSA_DEVOSC and
VSSA_AUXOSC pins are connected to board ground (VSS).
DEVOSC_MXI/
DEV_CLKIN
DEVOSC_MXO
VSSA_DEVOSC
NC
Figure 7-9. 1.8-V LVCMOS-Compatible Clock Input (DEV_OSC)
AUXOSC_MXI/
AUX_CLKIN
AUXOSC_MXO
VSSA_AUXOSC
NC
Figure 7-10. 1.8-V LVCMOS-Compatible Clock Input (AUX_OSC)
The clock source must meet the DEVOSC_MXI/DEV_CLKIN timing requirements shown in Table 7-15,
Timing Requirements for DEVOSC_MXI/DEV_CLKIN.
The clock source must meet the AUXOSC_MXI/AUX_CLKIN timing requirements shown in Table 7-16,
Timing Requirements for AUXOSC_MXI/AUX_CLKIN.
7.4.2 SERDES_CLKN/P Input Clock
A high-quality, low-jitter differential clock source is required for the PCIE PHY and is an optional clock
source for the SATA PHY. The clock is required to be AC coupled to the device's SERDES_CLKP and
SERDES_CLKN pins according to the specifications in Table 7-13. Both the clock source and the coupling
capacitors should be placed physically as close to the processor as possible. In addition, make sure to
follow any PCB routing and termination recommendations that the clock source manufacturer
recommends.
Table 7-13. SERDES_CLKN/P AC Coupling Capacitors Recommendations
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
SERDES_CLKN/P AC coupling capacitor value
0.24
0.27
1.0
nF
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
187
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 7-13. SERDES_CLKN/P AC Coupling Capacitors Recommendations (continued)
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
SERDES_CLKN/P AC coupling capacitor package size(1)(2)
0402
0603
EIA
(1) L x W, 10 Mil units, i.e., a 0402 is a 40 x 20 Mil surface mount capacitor.
(2) The physical size of the capacitor should be as small as practical. Use the same size on both lines in each pair placed side-by-side.
The differential clock source is required to meet the REFCLK AC Specifications outlined in the PCI
EXPRESS CARD ELECTROMECHANICAL SPECIFICATION, REV. 2.0, at the input to the AC coupling
capacitors.
In addition, LVDS clock sources that are compliant to the above specification, but with the following
exceptions, are also acceptable:
Table 7-14. Acceptable Exceptions to the REFCLK AC Specifications for LVDS Clock Sources
PARAMETER
Differential High-Level Input Voltage
Differential Low-Level Input Voltage
MIN
125
MAX
1000
-125
UNIT
mV
VIH
VIL
-1000
mV
7.4.3 CLKIN32 Input Clock
An external 32768-Hz clock input can optionally be provided at the CLKIN32 pin to serve as a reference
clock in place of the RTCDIVIDER clock for the following Modules:
•
•
•
•
•
RTC
GPIO0/1/2/3
TIMER1/2/3/4/5/6/7
ARM Cortex-A8
SYNCTIMER
The CLKIN32 source must meet the timing requirements shown in Table 7-17.
7.4.4 Output Clocks Select Logic
The device includes two selectable general-purpose clock outputs (CLKOUT0 and CLKOUT1). The source
for these output clocks is controlled by the CLKOUT_MUX register in the Control Module (see
Figure 7-11).
188
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
CLKOUT_MUX
RESERVED
1011-1111
RCOSC32K Output
1010
1001
1000
0111
0110
0101
0100
0011
0010
0001
0000(A)
PLL_SGX Output
ARM Cortex-A8 Functional Clock
AUX Clock
CLKOUT0
CLKOUT1
DEV Clock
PLL_L3 Output
PLL_MEDIACTL Output / 2
PLL_DSS Output / 2
PCIE SERDES Observation Clock
SATA SERDES Observation Clock
PRCM SYSCLK Output
A. Muxed output of PLL_VIDEO0, PLL_AUDIO, and RTCDIVIDER.
Figure 7-11. CLKOUTx Source Selection Logic
For detailed information on the CLKOUTx switching characteristics, see Table 7-18.
7.4.5 Input/Output Clocks Electrical Data/Timing
Note: If an external clock oscillator is used, a single clean power supply should be used to power both the
device and the external clock oscillator circuit.
Table 7-15. Timing Requirements for DEVOSC_MXI/DEV_CLKIN(1) (2) (3)(see Figure 7-12)
OPP100
NO.
UNIT
MIN
33.33
0.45C
0.45C
NOM
MAX
50
1
2
3
4
5
tc(DMXI)
tw(DMXIH)
tw(DMXIL)
tt(DMXI)
Cycle time, DEVOSC_MXI/DEV_CLKIN
Pulse duration, DEVOSC_MXI/DEV_CLKIN high
Pulse duration, DEVOSC_MXI/DEV_CLKIN low
Transition time, DEVOSC_MXI/DEV_CLKIN
Period jitter, DEVOSC_MXI/DEV_CLKIN
Frequency Stability
50
ns
ns
0.55C
0.55C
7
ns
ns
tJ(DMXI)
0.02C
±50
ns
ppm
(1) The DEVOSC_MXI/DEV_CLKIN frequency and PLL settings should be chosen such that the resulting SYSCLKs and Module Clocks are
within the specific ranges shown in the Section 7.4.7, SYSCLKs and Section 7.4.8, Module Clocks.
(2) The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
(3) C = DEV_CLKIN cycle time in ns. For example, when DEVOSC_MXI/DEV_CLKIN frequency is 20 MHz, use C = 50 ns.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
189
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
5
1
4
1
2
DEVOSC_MXI/
DEV_CLKIN
3
4
Figure 7-12. DEV_MXI/DEV_CLKIN Timing
190
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 7-16. Timing Requirements for AUX_MXI/AUX_CLKIN (1) (2) (see Figure 7-13)
OPP100
NOM
50
NO.
UNIT
MIN
33.3
MAX
50 ns
1
2
3
4
5
6
tc(AMXI)
Cycle time, AUXOSC_MXI/AUX_CLKIN
tw(AMXIH)
tw(AMXIL)
tt(AMXI)
tJ(AMXI)
Sf
Pulse duration, AUXOSC_MXI/AUX_CLKIN high
Pulse duration, AUXOSC_MXI/AUX_CLKIN low
Transition time, AUXOSC_MXI/AUX_CLKIN
Period jitter, AUXOSC_MXI/AUX_CLKIN
0.45C
0.45C
0.55C ns
0.55C ns
7
ns
0.02C ns
Frequency stability, AUXOSC_MXI/AUX_CLKIN(3)
± 50 ppm
(1) The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
(2) C = AUX_CLKIN cycle time in ns. For example, when AUXOSC_MXI/AUX_CLKIN frequency is 20 MHz, use C = 50 ns.
(3) Applies only when sourcing the HDMI or HDVPSS DAC clocks from the AUXOSC.
5
1
4
1
2
AUXOSC_MXI/
AUX_CLKIN
3
4
Figure 7-13. AUX_MXI/AUX_CLKIN Timing
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
191
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
UNIT
Table 7-17. Timing Requirements for CLKIN32 (1)(2) (see Figure 7-14)
OPP100
NOM
NO.
MIN
1/32768
0.45C
MAX
1
2
3
4
5
tc(CLKIN32)
tw(CLKIN32H)
tw(CKIN32L)
tt(CLKIN32)
tJ(CLKIN32)
Cycle time, CLKIN32
s
Pulse duration, CLKIN32 high
Pulse duration, CLKIN32 low
Transition time, CLKIN32
Period jitter, CLKIN32
0.55C
0.55C
7
ns
ns
ns
ns
0.45C
0.02C
(1) The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
(2) C = CLKIN32 cycle time in ns. For example, when CLKIN32 frequency is 32768 Hz, use C = 1/32768 s.
5
1
4
1
2
CLKIN32
3
4
Figure 7-14. CLKIN32 Timing
192
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 7-18. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for CLKOUTx (CLKOUT0
and CLKOUT1)(1) (2)
(see Figure 7-15)
OPP100
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
5
MAX
1
2
3
4
tc(CLKOUTx)
tw(CLKOUTxH)
tw(CLKOUTxL)
tt(CLKOUTx)
Cycle time, CLKOUTx
ns
ns
ns
ns
Pulse duration, CLKOUTx high
Pulse duration, CLKOUTx low
Transition time, CLKOUTx
0.45P
0.45P
0.55P
0.55P
0.05P
(1) The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VOL MAX and VOH MIN.
(2) P = 1/CLKOUTx clock frequency in nanoseconds (ns). For example, when CLKOUTx frequency is 200 MHz, use P = 5 ns.
2
4
1
CLKOUTx
(Divide-by-1)
3
4
Figure 7-15. CLKOUTx Timing
7.4.6 PLLs
The device contains 12 top-level PLLs, and 4 embedded PLLs (within the ARM Cortex-A8, PCIE, SATA,
and CSI) that provide clocks to different parts of the system. Figure 7-16 and Figure 7-17 show simplified
block diagrams of the Top-Level PLL and PLL_ARM. In addition, see the System Clocking Overview
(Figure 7-6) for a high-level view of the device clock architecture including the PLL reference clock
sources and connections.
DEV/AUX
Clock
REFCLK
CLKDCO
1
1
xM
Multiplier
(N +1)
M2
CLKOUT
1
(N2 +1)
Figure 7-16. Top-Level PLL Simplified Block Diagram
DEV Clock
REFCLK
DCOCLK
1
1
1
2
x2M
Multiplier
(N +1)
M2
CLKOUT
1
(N2 +1)
Figure 7-17. PLL_ARM Simplified Block Diagram
The reference clock for most of the PLLs comes from the DEV input clock, with select PLLs also having
the option to use the AUX input clock as a reference. Also, each PLL supports a Bypass mode in which
the reference clock can be directly passed to the PLL CLKOUT through a divider. All device PLL’s will
come-up in Bypass mode after reset.
For details on programming the device PLLs, see the TBD chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM
Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number: SPRUGZ7).
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
193
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
7.4.6.1 PLL Power Supply Filtering
The device PLLs are supplied externally via the VDDA_xPLL_1P8 power-supply pins (where "x"
represents ARM, VID0, VID1, AUDIO, DDR, and/or L3). External filtering must be added on the PLL
supply pins to ensure that the requirements in Table 7-19 are met.
Table 7-19. PLL Power Supply Requirements
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
UNIT
Dynamic noise at VDDA_xPLL_1P8 pins
50
mV p-p
7.4.6.2 PLL Multipliers and Dividers
The Top-Level and PLL_ARM PLLs support the internal multiplier and divider values shown in Table 7-20,
Top-Level PLL Multiplier and Divider Limits and Table 7-21, PLL_ARM Multiplier and Divider Limits. The
PLLs must be programmed to conform to the various REFCLK, CLKDCO, DCOCLK, and CLKOUT limits
described in Section 7.4.6.3, PLL Frequency Limits.
Table 7-20. Top-Level PLL Multiplier and Divider Limits
PARAMETER
MIN
0
MAX
255
N Pre-Divider
PLL Multiplier (M)
M2 Post Divider
N2 Bypass Divider
2
4095(1)
1
127
0
15
(1) The PLL Multiplier supports fractional values (up to 18-bits of fraction) except when the PLL Multiplier is > 4093.
Table 7-21. PLL_ARM Multiplier and Divider Limits
PARAMETER
MIN
0
MAX
127
N Pre-Divider
PLL Multiplier (M)(1)
2
2047(2)
M2 Post Divider
1
31
N2 Bypass Divider
0
15
(1) This parameter describes the limits on the programmable multiplier value M. The multiplication factor for the PLL_ARM is equal to 2 * M
(also see Figure 7-17).
(2) The PLL Multiplier supports fractional values (up to 18-bits of fraction) except when the PLL Multiplier is < 20 OR > 2045.
7.4.6.3 PLL Frequency Limits
Each PLL supports a minimum and maximum operating frequency for its REFCLK, CKLDCO, and
CLKOUT values. The PLLs must be configured not to exceed any of the constraints placed on these
values shown in Table 7-22 through Table 7-24. Care must be taken to stay within these limits when
selecting external clock input frequencies, internal divider values, and PLL multiply ratios. In addition,
limits shown in these tables may be further restricted by the clock frequency limitations of the device
modules using these clocks. For more detailed information on the SYSCLK and Module Clock frequency
limits, see Section 7.4.7, SYSCLKs and Section 7.4.8, Module Clocks.
Table 7-22. Top-Level PLL Frequency Ranges (ALL OPPs)
CLOCK
MIN
0.5
MAX
2.5
UNIT
MHz
MHz
MHz
REFCLK
CLKDCO (HS1)(1)
CLKDCO (HS2)(2)
1000
500
2000
1000
(1) The PLL has two modes of operation: HS1 and HS2. The mode of operation should be set, according to the desired CLKDCO
frequency, by programming the SELFREQDCO field of the ADPLLLJx_CLKCTRL registers in the Control Module.
(2) CLKDCO of the PLL_USB is used undivided by the USB modules; therefore, CLKDCO for the PLL_USB PLL must be programmed to
960 MHz for proper operation.
194
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 7-22. Top-Level PLL Frequency Ranges (ALL OPPs) (continued)
CLOCK
MIN
MAX
UNIT
CLKOUT
see Table 7-24
see Table 7-24
MHz
Table 7-23. ARM Cortex-A8 Embedded PLL (PLL_ARM) Frequency Ranges (ALL OPPs)
CLOCK
REFCLK
DCOCLK
CLKOUT
MIN
0.032
MAX
52
UNIT
MHz
MHz
MHz
20
2000
see Table 7-24
see Table 7-24
Table 7-24. PLL CLKOUT Frequency Ranges
OPP100
PLL
UNIT
MIN
10
MAX
600
200
200
400
200
200
400
960
200
200
200
PLL_ARM
PLL_SGX
PLL_L3
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
10
10
PLL_DDR
10
PLL_HDVPSS
PLL_AUDIO
PLL_MEDIACTL
PLL_USB
10
10
10
10(1)
PLL_VIDEO0
PLL_VIDEO1
PLL_VIDEO2
10
10
10
(1) When the USB is used, PLL_USB must be fixed at 960 MHz.
7.4.6.4 PLL Register Description(s)
The PLL Control Registers reside in the Control Module and are listed in Section TBD, Control Module of
this datasheet.
7.4.6.5 PLL Electrical Data/Timing
TBD
7.4.7 SYSCLKs
In some cases, the system clock inputs and PLL outputs are sent to the PRCM Module for division and
multiplexing before being routed to the various device Modules. These clock outputs from the PRCM
Module are called SYSCLKs. Table Table 7-25 lists the device SYSCLKs along with their maximum
supported clock frequencies. In addition, limits shown in these tables may be further restricted by the clock
frequency limitations of the device modules using these clocks. For more details on Module Clock
frequency limits, see Section 7.4.8 Module Clocks.
Table 7-25. Maximum SYSCLK Clock Frequencies
MAX CLOCK FREQUENCY
SYSCLK
OPP100 (MHz)
SYSCLK1
SYSCLK2
SYSCLK3
RSV
RSV
266
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
195
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 7-25. Maximum SYSCLK Clock Frequencies (continued)
MAX CLOCK FREQUENCY
OPP100 (MHz)
SYSCLK
SYSCLK4
SYSCLK5
SYSCLK6
SYSCLK7
SYSCLK8
SYSCLK9
SYSCLK10
SYSCLK11
SYSCLK12
SYSCLK13
SYSCLK14
SYSCLK15
SYSCLK16
SYSCLK17
SYSCLK18
SYSCLK19
SYSCLK20
SYSCLK21
SYSCLK22
SYSCLK23
200
RSV
100
RSV
192
RSV
48
RSV
RSV
RSV
27
RSV
27
RSV
0.32768
192
192
192
RSV
200
7.4.8 Module Clocks
Device Modules either receive their clock directly from an external clock input, directly from a PLL, or from
a PRCM SYSCLK output. Table 7-26 lists the clock source options for each Module on this device, along
with the maximum frequency that Module can accept. To ensure proper Module functionality, the device
PLLs and dividers must be programmed not to exceed the maximum frequencies listed in this table.
Table 7-26. Maximum Module Clock Frequencies
MAX FREQUENCY
OPP100 (MHz)
MODULE
CLOCK SOURCE(S)
PLL_ARM
SYSCLK18
Cortex-A8
600
DCAN0/1
DDR0/1
DEV Clock
PLL_DDR
30
400
DMM
PLL_DDR/2
SYSCLK4
200
EDMA
200
EMAC Switch (GMII)
SATA SERDES
Fixed 125
PLL_VIDEO0
PLL_VIDEO1
PLL_VIDEO02
PLL_L3
EMAC Switch (RGMII)
Fixed 250
SATA SERDES
EMAC_RMREFCLK Pin
EMAC Switch (RMII and MII)
Fixed 50
GPIO
GPIO Debounce
GPMC
SYSCLK6
SYSCLK18
SYSCLK6
100
Fixed 0.032768
100
HDMI
PLL_VIDEO2
SYSCLK10
186
HDMI CEC
Fixed 48
196
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 7-26. Maximum Module Clock Frequencies (continued)
MAX FREQUENCY
OPP100 (MHz)
MODULE
CLOCK SOURCE(S)
SYSCLK20
SYSCLK21
AUD_CLK0/1/2
AUX Clock
HDMI I2S
HDVPSS
50
PLL_HDVPSS
200
186
PLL_VIDEO2
HDMI PHY
HDVPSS VOUT1
HDVPSS VOUT0
PLL_VIDEO1
PLL_VIDEO2
165
HDVPSS SD VENC
I2C0/1/2/3
ISS
PLL_VIDEO0
SYSCLK10
PLL_ MEDIACTL
SYSCLK4
Fixed 54
48
400
200
200
100
200
100
100
100
L3 Fast
L3 Medium
L3 Slow
SYSCLK4
SYSCLK6
L4 Fast
SYSCLK4
L4 Slow
SYSCLK6
Mailbox
SYSCLK6
McASP
SYSCLK6
SYSCLK20
SYSCLK21
McASP0/1/2 AUX_CLK
McASP3/4/5 AUX_CLK
192
PLL_AUDIO
PLL_VIDEO0/1/2
AUD_CLK0/1/2
AUX Clock
192
SYSCLK20
SYSCLK21
AUD_CLK0/1/2
AUX Clock
McBSP CLKS
192
Media Controller
MMCSD0/1/2
OCMC RAM
PLL_MEDIACTL
SYSCLK8
400
192
200
100
SYSCLK4
PCIe SERDES
SERDES_CLKx Pins
DEV Clock
SERDES_CLKx Pins
SATA SERDES
20 or 100
SGX530
SmartReflex
SPI0/1/2/3
Spinlock
SYSCLK23
DEV Clock
SYSCLK10
SYSCLK6
SYSCLK18
200
30
48
100
Sync Timer
Fixed 0.032768
SYSCLK18
DEV Clock
AUX Clock
AUD_CLK0/1/2
TCLKIN
TIMER1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8
30
UART0/1/2
UART3/4/5
SYSCLK10
48
SYSCLK6
SYSCLK8
SYSCLK10
192
USB
PLL_USB CLKDCO
Fixed 960
RTCDIVIDER
RCOSC32K
WDT0
Fixed 0.032768
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
197
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
7.5 Interrupts
The device has a large number of interrupts to service the needs of its many peripherals and subsystems.
The ARM Cortex-A8 and Media Controller are capable of servicing these interrupts. The following sections
list the device interrupt mapping and multiplexing schemes.
7.5.1 ARM Cortex-A8 Interrupts
The ARM Cortex-A8 Interrupt Controller (AINTC) is responsible for prioritizing all service requests from the
System peripherals and generating either IRQs or FIQs to the Cortex-A8. The AINTC has the capability to
handle up to 128 requests, and the priority of the interrupt inputs are programmable. Table 7-27 lists the
interrupt sources for the AINTC.
For more details on ARM Cortex-A8 interrupt control, see the Interrupt Controller section of the Chip Level
Resources chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual
(Literature Number: SPRUGZ7).
Table 7-27. ARM Cortex-A8 Interrupt Controller (AINTC) Interrupt Sources
Cortex-A8
INTERRUPT NUMBER
ACRONYM
SOURCE
0
1
EMUINT
COMMTX
COMMRX
BENCH
Cortex-A8 Emulation
Cortex-A8 Emulation
Cortex-A8 Emulation
Cortex-A8 Emulation
ELM
2
3
4
ELM_IRQ
–
5
Reserved
6
–
Reserved
7
NMI
NMIn Pin
8
–
Reserved
9
L3DEBUG
L3APPINT
TINT8
L3 Interconnect
L3 Interconnect
TIMER8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20-27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
EDMACOMPINT
EDMAMPERR
EDMAERRINT
WDTINT0
SATAINT
USBSSINT
USBINT0
USBINT1
–
EDMA CC Completion
EDMA Memory Protection Error
EDMA CC Error
Watchdog Timer 0
SATA
USB Subsystem
USB0
USB1
Reserved
SDINT1
MMC/SD1
SDINT2
MMC/SD2
I2CINT2
I2C2
I2CINT3
I2C3
GPIOINT2A
GPIOINT2B
USBWAKEUP
PCIeWAKEUP
DSSINT
GPIO2 A
GPIO2 B
USB Subsystem Wakeup
PCIe Wakeup
HDVPSS
GFXINT
SGX530
HDMIINT
HDMI
198
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 7-27. ARM Cortex-A8 Interrupt Controller (AINTC) Interrupt Sources (continued)
Cortex-A8
INTERRUPT NUMBER
ACRONYM
SOURCE
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58-61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
ISS_IRQ_5
3PGSWRXTHR0
3PGSWRXINT0
3PGSWTXINT0
3PGSWMISC0
UARTINT3
UARTINT4
UARTINT5
-
ISS
EMAC Switch RX Threshold
EMAC Switch Receive
EMAC Switch Transmit
EMAC Switch Miscellaneous
UART3
UART4
UART5
Reserved
PCIINT0
PCIe
PCIINT1
PCIe
PCIINT2
PCIe
PCIINT3
PCIe
DCAN0_INT0
DCAN0_INT1
DCAN0_PARITY
DCAN1_INT0
DCAN1_INT1
DCAN1_PARITY
–
DCAN0
DCAN0
DCAN0 Parity
DCAN1
DCAN1
DCAN1 Parity
Reserved
GPIOINT3A
GPIOINT3B
SDINT0
GPIO3
GPIO3
MMC/SD0
SPI0
SPIINT0
-
Reserved
TINT1
TIMER1
TINT2
TIMER2
TINT3
TIMER3
I2CINT0
I2C0
I2CINT1
I2C1
UARTINT0
UARTINT1
UARTINT2
RTCINT
UART0
UART1
UART2
RTC
RTCALARMINT
MBINT
RTC Alarm
Mailbox
–
Reserved
PLLINT
PLL Recalculation Interrupt
McASP0 Transmit
McASP0 Receive
McASP1 Transmit
McASP1 Receive
McASP2 Transmit
McASP2 Receive
McBSP
MCATXINT0
MCARXINT0
MCATXINT1
MCARXINT1
MCATXINT2
MCARXINT2
MCBSPINT
–
Reserved
–
Reserved
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
199
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 7-27. ARM Cortex-A8 Interrupt Controller (AINTC) Interrupt Sources (continued)
Cortex-A8
INTERRUPT NUMBER
ACRONYM
SOURCE
89
90
–
–
Reserved
Reserved
91
–
Reserved
92
TINT4
TIMER4
93
TINT5
TIMER5
94
TINT6
TIMER6
95
TINT7
TIMER7
96
GPIOINT0A
GPIOINT0B
GPIOINT1A
GPIOINT1B
GPMCINT
DDRERR0
DDRERR1
–
GPIO0
97
GPIO0
98
GPIO1
99
GPIO1
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116-119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
GPMC
DDR0
DDR1
Reserved
–
Reserved
MCATXINT3
MCARXINT3
–
McASP3 Transmit
McASP3 Receive
Reserved
MCATXINT4
MCARXINT4
MCATXINT5
MCARXINT5
TCERRINT0
TCERRINT1
TCERRINT2
TCERRINT3
–
McASP4 Transmit
McASP4 Receive
McASP5 Transmit
McASP5 Receive
EDMA TC 0 Error
EDMA TC 1 Error
EDMA TC 2 Error
EDMA TC 3 Error
Reserved
SMRFLX_ARM
SMRFLX_CORE
MMUINT
MCMMUINT
DMMINT
SPIINT1
SmartReflex ARM Domain
SmartReflex CORE Domain
System MMU
Media Controller
DMM
SPI1
SPIINT2
SPI2
SPIINT3
SPI3
200
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
8 Peripheral Information and Timings
8.1 Parameter Information
Tester Pin Electronics
Data Sheet Timing Reference Point
42 Ω
3.5 nH
Output
Under
Test
Transmission Line
Z0 = 50 Ω
(see Note)
Device Pin
(see Note)
4.0 pF
1.85 pF
NOTE: The data sheet provides timing at the device pin. For output timing analysis, the tester pin electronics and its transmission line effects must be
taken into account.Atransmission line with a delay of 2 ns can be used to produce the desired transmission line effect. The transmission line is
intended as a load only. It is not necessary to add or subtract the transmission line delay (2 ns) from the data sheet timings.
Input requirements in this data sheet are tested with an input slew rate of < 4 Volts per nanosecond (4 V/ns) at the device pin.
Figure 8-1. Test Load Circuit for AC Timing Measurements
The load capacitance value stated is only for characterization and measurement of AC timing signals. This
load capacitance value does not indicate the maximum load the device is capable of driving.
8.1.1 1.8-V and 3.3-V Signal Transition Levels
All input and output timing parameters are referenced to Vref for both "0" and "1" logic levels. For 3.3-V I/O,
Vref = 1.5 V. For 1.8-V I/O, Vref = 0.9 V.
Vref
Figure 8-2. Input and Output Voltage Reference Levels for AC Timing Measurements
All rise and fall transition timing parameters are referenced to VIL MAX and VIH MIN for input clocks, VOL
MAX and VOH MIN for output clocks.
Vref = VIH MIN (or VOH MIN)
Vref = VIL MAX (or VOL MAX)
Figure 8-3. Rise and Fall Transition Time Voltage Reference Levels
8.1.2 3.3-V Signal Transition Rates
All timings are tested with an input edge rate of 4 volts per nanosecond (4 V/ns).
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
201
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
8.1.3 Timing Parameters and Board Routing Analysis
The timing parameter values specified in this data manual do not include delays by board routings. As a
good board design practice, such delays must always be taken into account. Timing values may be
adjusted by increasing/decreasing such delays. TI recommends utilizing the available I/O buffer
information specification (IBIS) models to analyze the timing characteristics correctly. To properly use IBIS
models to attain accurate timing analysis for a given system, see the Using IBIS Models for Timing
Analysis application report (Literature Number: SPRA839). If needed, external logic hardware such as
buffers may be used to compensate any timing differences.
8.2 Recommended Clock and Control Signal Transition Behavior
All clocks and control signals must transition between VIH and VIL (or between VIL and VIH) in a monotonic
manner.
8.3 Controller Area Network Interface (DCAN)
The device provides two DCAN interfaces for supporting distributed realtime control with a high level of
security. The DCAN interfaces implement the following features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Supports CAN protocol version 2.0 part A, B
Bit rates up to 1 MBit/s
64 message objects
Individual identifier mask for each message object
Programmable FIFO mode for message objects
Programmable loop-back modes for self-test operation
Suspend mode for debug support
Software module reset
Automatic bus on after Bus-Off state by a programmable 32-bit timer
Message RAM parity check mechanism
Direct access to Message RAM during test mode
CAN Rx/Tx pins are configurable as general-purpose IO pins
Two interrupt lines (plus additional parity-error interrupts line)
RAM initialization
DMA support
For more detailed information on the DCAN peripheral, see the DCAN Controller Area Network chapter of
the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number:
SPRUGZ7).
8.3.1 DCAN Peripheral Register Description(s)
202
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
8.3.2 DCAN Electrical Data/Timing
Table 8-1. Timing Requirements for DCANx Receive(1) (see Figure 8-4)
OPP100
NOM
NO.
UNIT
MIN
MAX
1
f(baud)
Maximum programmable baud rate
Pulse duration, receive data bit (DCANx_RX)
Mbps
ns
1
tw(DCANRX)
H - 2
H + 2
(1) H = period of baud rate, 1/programmed baud rate.
Table 8-2. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for DCANx Transmit
(1)(see Figure 8-4)
OPP100
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
1
f(baud)
Maximum programmable baud rate
Mbps
ns
2
tw(DCANTX)
Pulse duration, transmit data bit (DCANx_TX)
H - 2
H + 2
(1) H = period of baud rate, 1/programmed baud rate.
1
2
DCANx_RX
DCANx_TX
Figure 8-4. DCANx Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
203
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
8.4 EDMA
The EDMA controller handles all data transfers between memories and the device slave peripherals on
the device. These data transfers include cache servicing, non-cacheable memory accesses,
user-programmed data transfers, and host accesses.
8.4.1 EDMA Channel Synchronization Events
The EDMA channel controller supports up to 64 channels which service peripherals and memory. Each
EDMA channel is mapped to a default EDMA synchronization event as shown in Table 8-3. In addition,
each EDMA channel can alternatively be mapped to one of the 31 multiplexed EDMA synchronization
events shown in Table 8-4. The EVT_MUX_x registers in the Control Module are used to select between
the default event and the multiplexed events for each channel.
For more detailed information on the EDMA module and how EDMA events are enabled, captured,
processed, linked, chained, and cleared, etc., see the Enhanced Direct Memory Access Controller chapter
of the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number:
SPRUGZ7).
Table 8-3. EDMA Default Synchronization Events
EVENT
NUMBER
DEFAULT
EVENT NAME
DEFAULT EVENT DESCRIPTION
0-1
2
–
Reserved
SDTXEVT1
SDRXEVT1
–
SD1 Transmit
3
SD1 Receive
4-7
8
Reserved
AXEVT0
McASP0 Transmit
McASP0 Receive
McASP1 Transmit
McASP1 Receive
McASP2 Transmit
McASP2 Receive
McBSP Transmit
McBSP Receive
SPI0 Transmit 0
SPI0 Receive 0
SPI0 Transmit 1
SPI0 Receive 1
SPI0 Transmit 2
SPI0 Receive 2
SPI0 Transmit 3
SPI0 Receive 3
SD0 Transmit
9
AREVT0
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32-35
36
37
AXEVT1
AREVT1
AXEVT2
AREVT2
BXEVT
BREVT
SPI0XEVT0
SPI0REVT0
SPI0XEVT1
SPI0REVT1
SPI0XEVT2
SPI0REVT2
SPI0XEVT3
SPI0REVT3
SDTXEVT0
SDRXEVT0
UTXEVT0
URXEVT0
UTXEVT1
URXEVT1
UTXEVT2
URXEVT2
–
SD0 Receive
UART0 Transmit
UART0 Receive
UART1 Transmit
UART1 Receive
UART2 Transmit
UART2 Receive
Reserved
ISS_DMA_REQ1
ISS_DMA_REQ2
ISS Event 1
ISS Event 2
204
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 8-3. EDMA Default Synchronization Events (continued)
EVENT
NUMBER
DEFAULT
EVENT NAME
DEFAULT EVENT DESCRIPTION
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
ISS_DMA_REQ3
ISS_DMA_REQ4
CAN_IF1DMA
CAN_IF2DMA
SPI1XEVT0
SPI1REVT0
SPI1XEVT1
SPI1REVT1
–
ISS Event 3
ISS Event 4
DCAN0 IF1
DCAN0 IF2
SPI1 Transmit 0
SPI1 Receive 0
SPI1 Transmit 1
SPI1 Receive 1
Reserved
CAN_IF3DMA
TINT4
DCAN0 IF3
TIMER4
TINT5
TIMER5
TINT6
TIMER6
TINT7
TIMER7
GPMCEVT
HDMIEVT
PCIE_TX
GPMC
HDMI
PCIE Transmit
PCIE Receive
McASP3 Transmit
McASP3 Receive
I2C0 Transmit
I2C0 Receive
I2C1 Transmit
I2C1 Receive
McASP4 Transmit
McASP4 Receive
PCIE_RX
AXEVT3
AREVT3
I2CTXEVT0
I2CRXEVT0
I2CTXEVT1
I2CRXEVT1
AXEVT4
AREVT4
Table 8-4. EDMA Multiplexed Synchronization Events
EVT_MUX_x
VALUE
MULTIPLEXED
EVENT NAME
MULTIPLEXED EVENT DESCRIPTION
0
1
-
Default Event
SD2 Transmit
SD2 Receive
I2C2 Transmit
I2C2 Receive
I2C3 Transmit
I2C3 Receive
UART3 Transmit
UART3 Receive
UART4 Transmit
UART4 Receive
UART5 Transmit
UART5 Receive
DCAN1 IF1
SDTXEVT2
SDRXEVT2
I2CTXEVT2
I2CRXEVT2
I2CTXEVT3
I2CRXEVT3
UTXEVT3
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
URXEVT3
UTXEVT4
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
URXEVT4
UTXEVT5
URXEVT5
CAN_IF1DMA
CAN_IF2DMA
CAN_IF3DMA
SPI2XEVT0
DCAN1 IF2
DCAN1 IF3
SPI2 Transmit 0
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
205
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 8-4. EDMA Multiplexed Synchronization Events (continued)
EVT_MUX_x
VALUE
MULTIPLEXED
EVENT NAME
MULTIPLEXED EVENT DESCRIPTION
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
SPI2REVT0
SPI2XEVT1
SPI2REVT1
SPI3XEVT0
SPI3REVT0
–
SPI2 Receive 0
SPI2 Transmit 1
SPI2 Receive 1
SPI3 Transmit 0
SPI3 Receive 0
Reserved
TINT1
TIMER1
TINT2
TIMER2
TINT3
TIMER3
AXEVT5
McASP5 Transmit
McASP5 Receive
EDMA_EVT0 Pin
EDMA_EVT1 Pin
EDMA_EVT2 Pin
EDMA_EVT3 Pin
AREVT5
EDMAEVT0
EDMAEVT1
EDMAEVT2
EDMAEVT3
8.4.2 EDMA Peripheral Register Description(s)
TBD
206
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
8.5 Emulation Features and Capability
8.5.1 Advanced Event Triggering (AET)
The device supports Advanced Event Triggering (AET). This capability can be used to debug complex
problems as well as understand performance characteristics of user applications. AET provides the
following capabilities:
•
Hardware Program Breakpoints: specify addresses or address ranges that can generate events such
as halting the processor or triggering the trace capture.
•
Data Watchpoints: specify data variable addresses, address ranges, or data values that can generate
events such as halting the processor or triggering the trace capture.
•
•
Counters: count the occurrence of an event or cycles for performance monitoring.
State Sequencing: allows combinations of hardware program breakpoints and data watchpoints to
precisely generate events for complex sequences.
For more information on AET, see the following documents:
•
Using Advanced Event Triggering to Find and Fix Intermittent Real-Time Bugs application report
(Literature Number: SPRA753)
•
Using Advanced Event Triggering to Debug Real-Time Problems in High Speed Embedded
Microprocessor Systems application report (Literature Number: SPRA387)
8.5.2 Trace
The device supports Trace at the Cortex™-A8 and System levels. Trace is a debug technology that
provides a detailed, historical account of application code execution, timing, and data accesses. Trace
collects, compresses, and exports debug information for analysis. The debug information can be exported
to the Embedded Trace Buffer (ETB), or to the 5-pin Trace Interface (system trace only). Trace works in
real-time and does not impact the execution of the system.
For more information on board design guidelines for Trace Advanced Emulation, see the Emulation and
Trace Headers Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number: SPRU655).
8.5.3 IEEE 1149.1 JTAG
The JTAG (IEEE Standard 1149.1-1990 Standard-Test-Access Port and Boundary Scan Architecture)
interface is used for BSDL testing and emulation of the device. The TRST pin only needs to be released
when it is necessary to use a JTAG controller to debug the device or exercise the device's boundary scan
functionality. For maximum reliability, the device includes an internal pulldown (IPD) on the TRST pin to
ensure that TRST is always asserted upon power up and the device's internal emulation logic is always
properly initialized. JTAG controllers from Texas Instruments actively drive TRST high. However, some
third-party JTAG controllers may not drive TRST high but expect the use of a pullup resistor on TRST.
When using this type of JTAG controller, assert TRST to initialize the device after powerup and externally
drive TRST high before attempting any emulation or boundary-scan operations.
The main JTAG features include:
•
•
•
•
•
32KB embedded trace buffer (ETB)
5-pin system trace interface for debug
Supports Advanced Event Triggering (AET)
All processors can be emulated via JTAG ports
All functions on EMU pins of the device:
–
–
EMU[1:0] - cross-triggering, boot mode (WIR), STM trace
EMU[4:2] - STM trace only (single direction)
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
207
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
8.5.3.1 JTAG ID (JTAGID) Register Description
Table 8-5. JTAG ID Register(1)
HEX ADDRESS
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
0x4814 0600
JTAGID
JTAG Identification Register(2)
(1) IEEE Standard 1149.1-1990 Standard-Test-Access Port and Boundary Scan Architecture.
(2) Read-only. Provides the device 32-bit JTAG ID.
The JTAG ID register is a read-only register that identifies to the customer the JTAG/device ID. For this
device, the JTAG ID register resides at address location 0x4814 0600. The register hex value for the
device is: 0x0B8F 202F. For the actual register bit names and their associated bit field descriptions, see
Figure 8-5 and Table 8-6.
31
28 27
12 11
1
0
VARIANT
(4-bit)
PART NUMBER (16-bit)
R-1011 1000 1111 0010
MANUFACTURER (11-bit)
R-0000 0010 111
LSB
R-1
R-xxxx
LEGEND: R/W = Read/Write; R = Read only; -n = value after reset
Figure 8-5. JTAG ID Register Description - Device Register Value: 0x0B8F 202F
Table 8-6. JTAG ID Register Selection Bit Descriptions
Bit
Field
Description
31:28
VARIANT
Variant (4-bit) value. Device value: xxxx. This value reflects the device silicon revision [For example, 0x0
(0000) for initial silicon (1.0)]. For more detailed information on the current device silicon revision(s), see
the AM387x Sitara™ ARM Processors Silicon Errata (Silicon Revision 2.1) (Literature Number: SPRZ345).
27:12
11:1
0
PART NUMBER
Part Number (16-bit) value. Device value: 0xB8F2 (1011 1000 1111 0010)
MANUFACTURER Manufacturer (11-bit) value. Device value: 0x017 (0000 0010 111)
LSB LSB. This bit is read as a ""1 for this device.
8.5.3.2 JTAG Electrical Data/Timing
Table 8-7. Timing Requirements for IEEE 1149.1 JTAG
(see Figure 8-6)
OPP100
MIN
NO.
UNIT
MAX
1
tc(TCK)
1a tw(TCKH)
1b tw(TCKL)
Cycle time, TCK
51.15
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
Pulse duration, TCK high (40% of tc)
20.46
20.46
5.115
5.115
10
Pulse duration, TCK low (40% of tc)
3
3
tsu(TDI-TCK)
Input setup time, TDI valid to TCK high (20% of (tc * 0.5))
Input setup time, TMS valid to TCK high (20% of (tc * 0.5))
Input hold time, TDI valid from TCK high
Input hold time, TMS valid from TCK high
tsu(TMS-TCK)
th(TCK-TDI)
th(TCK-TMS)
4
10
Table 8-8. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for IEEE 1149.1 JTAG
(see Figure 8-6)
OPP100
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
2
td(TCKL-TDOV)
Delay time, TCK low to TDO valid
0
23.575(1)
ns
(1) (0.5 * tc) - 2
208
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
1
1a
1b
TCK
TDO
2
3
4
TDI/TMS
Figure 8-6. JTAG Timing
Table 8-9. Timing Requirements for IEEE 1149.1 JTAG With RTCK
(see Figure 8-6)
OPP100
NO.
UNIT
MIN
51.15
20.46
20.46
5.115
5.115
10
MAX
1
tc(TCK)
1a tw(TCKH)
1b tw(TCKL)
Cycle time, TCK
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
Pulse duration, TCK high (40% of tc)
Pulse duration, TCK low (40% of tc)
3
3
tsu(TDI-TCK)
Input setup time, TDI valid to TCK high (20% of (tc * 0.5))
Input setup time, TMS valid to TCK high (20% of (tc * 0.5))
Input hold time, TDI valid from TCK high
Input hold time, TMS valid from TCK high
tsu(TMS-TCK)
th(TCK-TDI)
th(TCK-TMS)
4
10
Table 8-10. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for IEEE 1149.1 JTAG
With RTCK
(see Figure 8-7)
OPP100
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
Delay time, TCK to RTCK with no selected subpaths (i.e., ICEPick
is the only tap selected - when the ARM is in the scan chain, the
delay time is a function of the ARM functional clock.)
5
td(TCK-RTCK)
0
21
ns
6
7
8
tc(RTCK)
Cycle time, RTCK
51.15
20.46
20.46
ns
ns
ns
tw(RTCKH)
tw(RTCKL)
Pulse duration, RTCK high (40% of tc)
Pulse duration, RTCK low (40% of tc)
5
TCK
6
7
8
RTCK
Figure 8-7. JTAG With RTCK Timing
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
209
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 8-11. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for STM Trace
(see Figure 8-8)
OPP100
MIN
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MAX
Pulse duration, EMUx high detected at 50% VOH with 60/40 duty
cycle
tw(EMUH50)
tw(EMUH90)
tw(EMUL50)
tw(EMUL10)
tsko(EMU)
4(1)
3.5
ns
ns
ns
ns
ps
1
Pulse duration, EMUx high detected at 90% VOH
Pulse duration, EMUx low detected at 50% VOH with 60/40 duty
cycle
4(1)
2
3
Pulse duration, EMUx low detected at 10% VOH
3.5
Output skew time, time delay difference between EMUx pins
configured as trace.
–500
500
1(1)
Pulse skew, magnitude of difference between high-to-low (tPHL
)
tskp(EMU)
ns
and low-to-high (tPLH) propagation delays
tsldp_o(EMU)
Output slew rate EMUx
3.3
V/ns
(1) This parameter applies to the maximum trace export frequency operating in a 40/60 duty cycle.
A
Buffer
Inputs
Buffers
EMUx Pins
tPHL
tPLH
1
2
B
C
B
C
A
3
Figure 8-8. STM Trace Timing
210
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
8.6 Ethernet MAC Switch (EMAC SW)
The EMAC SW controls the flow of packet data between the device and two external Ethernet PHYs, with
hardware flow control and quality-of-service (QOS) support. The EMAC SW contains a 3-port gigabit
switch, where one port is internally connected and the other two ports are brought out externally. Each of
the external EMAC ports supports 10Base-T (10 Mbits/second [Mbps]), and 100BaseTX (100 Mbps), in
either half- or full-duplex mode, and 1000BaseT (1000 Mbps) in full-duplex mode.
The EMAC SW controls the flow of packet data from the device to the external PHYs. The EMAC0/1 ports
on the device support four interface modes: Media Independent Interface (MII), Gigabit Media
Independent Interface (GMII), Reduced Media Independent Interface (RMII) and Reduced Gigabit Media
Independent Interface (RGMII). In addition, a single MDIO interface is pinned out to control the PHY
configuration and status monitoring. Multiple external PHYs can be controlled by the MDIO interface.
The EMAC SW module conforms to the IEEE 802.3-2002 standard, describing the “Carrier Sense Multiple
Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer” specifications. The IEEE
802.3 standard has also been adopted by ISO/IEC and re-designated as ISO/IEC 8802-3:2000(E).
Deviating from this standard, the EMAC SW module does not use the Transmit Coding Error signal
MTXER. Instead of driving the error pin when an underflow condition occurs on a transmitted frame, the
EMAC SW will intentionally generate an incorrect checksum by inverting the frame CRC, so that the
transmitted frame will be detected as an error by the network. In addition, the EMAC SW I/Os operate at
3.3 V and are not compatible with 2.5-V I/O signaling. Therefore, only Ethernet PHYs with 3.3-V I/O
interface should be used.
In networking systems, packet transmission and reception are critical tasks. The communications port
programming interface (CPPI) protocol maximizes the efficiency of interaction between the host software
and communications modules. The CPPI block contains 2048 words of 32-bit buffer descriptor memory
that holds up to 512 buffer descriptors.
For more detailed information on the EMAC SW module, see the 3PSW Ethernet Subsystem chapter of
the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number:
SPRUGZ7).
8.6.1 EMAC Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 8-12. Ethernet MAC Switch Registers
ARM/L3 MASTERS
EMAC HEX
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
ADDRESS RANGE
0x4A10 0000
0x4A10 0004
0x4A10 0008
0x4A10 000C
0x4A10 0010
0x4A10 0014
0x4A10 0018
0x4A10 001C
0x4A10 0020
0x4A10 0024
0x4A10 0028
0x4A10 002C
0x4A10 0030
0x4A10 0034
0x4A10 0038
CPSW_ID_VER
CPSW_CONTROL
CPSW_SOFT_RESET
CPSW ID Version Register
CPSW Switch Control Register
CPSW Soft Reset Register
CPSW_STAT_PORT_EN CPSW Statistics Port Enable Register
CPSW_PTYPE
CPSW_SOFT_IDLE
CPSW_THRU_RATE
CPSW_GAP_THRESH
CPSW Transmit Priority Type Register
CPSW Software Idle
CPSW Throughput Rate
CPSW CPGMAC_SL Short Gap Threshold
CPSW_TX_START_WDS CPSW Transmit Start Words
CPSW_FLOW_CONTROL CPSW Flow Control
P0_MAX_BLKS
P0_BLK_CNT
CPSW Port 0 Maximum FIFO Blocks Register
CPSW Port 0 FIFO Block Usage Count Register (Read Only)
CPSW Port 0 Transmit FIFO Control
P0_TX_IN_CTL
P0_PORT_VLAN
P0_TX_PRI_MAP
CPSW Port 0 VLAN Register
CPSW Port 0 Tx Header Priority to Switch Priority Mapping Register
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
211
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 8-12. Ethernet MAC Switch Registers (continued)
ARM/L3 MASTERS
EMAC HEX
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
ADDRESS RANGE
0x4A10 003C
CPDMA_TX_PRI_MAP
CPDMA_RX_CH_Map
CPSW CPDMA TX (Port 0 Rx) Packet Priority to Header Priority Mapping
Register
0x4A10 0040
CPSW CPDMA RX (Port 0 Tx) Switch Priority to DMA Channel Mapping
Register
0x4A10 0050
0x4A10 0054
0x4A10 0058
0x4A10 005C
0x4A10 0060
0x4A10 0064
0x4A10 0068
0x4A10 006C
0x4A10 0070
0x4A10 0074
0x4A10 0078
0x4A10 007C – 0x4A10 008C
0x4A10 0090
0x4A10 0094
0x4A10 0098
0x4A10 009C
0x4A10 00A0
0x4A10 00A4
0x4A10 00A8
0x4A10 00AC
0x4A10 00B0
0x4A10 00B4
0x4A10 00B8
0x4A10 00BC – 0x4A10 00FC
0x4A10 0100
0x4A10 0104
0x4A10 0108
0x4A10 010C
0x4A10 0110
0x4A10 0114
0x4A10 0118
0x4A10 011C
0x4A10 0120
0x4A10 0124
0x4A10 0128
0x4A10 012C
0x4A10 0130
0x4A10 0134
0x4A10 0138
0x4A10 013C
0x4A10 0140
0x4A10 0144
P1_MAX_BLKS
P1_BLK_CNT
P1_TX_IN_CTL
P1_PORT_VLAN
P1_TX_PRI_MAP
P1_TS_CTL
CPSW Port 1 Maximum FIFO Blocks Register
CPSW Port 1 FIFO Block Usage Count (Read Only)
CPSW Port 1 Transmit FIFO Control
CPSW Port 1 VLAN Register
CPSW Port 1 Tx Header Priority to Switch Priority Mapping Register
CPSW_3GF Port 1 Time Sync Control Register
CPSW_3GF Port 1 Time Sync LTYPE (and SEQ_ID_OFFSET)
CPSW_3GF Port 1 Time Sync VLAN2 and VLAN2 Register
CPSW CPGMAC_SL1 Source Address Low Register
CPSW CPGMAC_SL1 Source Address High Register
CPSW Port 1 Transmit Queue Send Percentages
Reserved
P1_TS_SEQ_LTYPE
P1_TS_VLAN
SL1_SA_LO
SL1_SA_HI
P1_SEND_PERCENT
–
P2_MAX_BLKS
P2_BLK_CNT
P2_TX_IN_CTL
P2_PORT_VLAN
P2_TX_PRI_MAP
P2_TS_CTL
CPSW Port 2 Maximum FIFO Blocks Register
CPSW Port 2 FIFO Block Usage Count (Read Only)
CPSW Port 2 Transmit FIFO Control
CPSW Port 2 VLAN Register
CPSW Port 2 Tx Header Priority to Switch Priority Mapping Register
CPSW_3GF Port 2 Time Sync Control Register
CPSW_3GF Port 2 Time Sync LTYPE (and SEQ_ID_OFFSET)
CPSW_3GF Port 2 Time Sync VLAN2 and VLAN2 Register
CPSW CPGMAC_SL2 Source Address Low Register
CPSW CPGMAC_SL2 Source Address High Register
CPSW Port 2 Transmit Queue Send Percentages
Reserved
P2_TS_SEQ_LTYPE
P2_TS_VLAN
SL2_SA_LO
SL2_SA_HI
P2_SEND_PERCENT
–
TX_IDVER
CPDMA_REGS TX Identification and Version Register
CPDMA_REGS TX Control Register
TX_CONTROL
TX_TEARDOWN
–
CPDMA_REGS TX Teardown Register
Reserved
RX_IDVER
CPDMA_REGS RX Identification and Version Register
CPDMA_REGS RX Control Register
RX_CONTROL
RX_TEARDOWN
SOFT_RESET
DMACONTROL
DMASTATUS
RX_BUFFER_OFFSET
EMCONTROL
TX_PRI0_RATE
TX_PRI1_RATE
TX_PRI2_RATE
TX_PRI3_RATE
TX_PRI4_RATE
TX_PRI5_RATE
CPDMA_REGS RX Teardown Register
CPDMA_REGS Soft Reset Register
CPDMA_REGS CPDMA Control Register
CPDMA_REGS CPDMA Status Register
CPDMA_REGS Receive Buffer Offset
CPDMA_REGS Emulation Control
CPDMA_REGS Transmit (Ingress) Priority 0 Rate
CPDMA_REGS Transmit (Ingress) Priority 1 Rate
CPDMA_REGS Transmit (Ingress) Priority 2 Rate
CPDMA_REGS Transmit (Ingress) Priority 3 Rate
CPDMA_REGS Transmit (Ingress) Priority 4 Rate
CPDMA_REGS Transmit (Ingress) Priority 5 Rate
212
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 8-12. Ethernet MAC Switch Registers (continued)
ARM/L3 MASTERS
EMAC HEX
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
ADDRESS RANGE
0x4A10 0148
0x4A10 014C
0x4A10 0150 – 0x4A10 017C
0x4A10 0180
0x4A10 0184
0x4A10 0188
0x4A10 018C
0x4A10 0190
0x4A10 0194
0x4A10 0198 – 0x4A10 019C
0x4A10 01A0
0x4A10 01A4
0x4A10 01A8
0x4A10 01AC
0x4A10 01B0
0x4A10 01B4
0x4A10 01B8
0x4A10 01BC
0x4A10 01C0
0x4A10 01C4
0x4A10 01C8
0x4A10 01CC
0x4A10 01D0
0x4A10 01D4
0x4A10 01D8
0x4A10 01DC
0x4A10 01E0
0x4A10 01E4
0x4A10 01E8
0x4A10 01EC
0x4A10 01F0
0x4A10 01F4
0x4A10 01F8
0x4A10 01FC
0x4A10 0200
0x4A10 0204
0x4A10 0208
0x4A10 020C
0x4A10 0210
0x4A10 0214
0x4A10 0218
0x4A10 021C
0x4A10 0220
0x4A10 0224
0x4A10 0228
TX_PRI6_RATE
TX_PRI7_RATE
CPDMA_REGS Transmit (Ingress) Priority 6 Rate
CPDMA_REGS Transmit (Ingress) Priority 7 Rate
Reserved
–
TX_INTSTAT_RAW
TX_INTSTAT_MASKED
TX_INTMASK_SET
TX_INTMASK_CLEAR
CPDMA_IN_VECTOR
CPDMA_EOI_VECTOR
–
CPDMA_INT TX Interrupt Status Register (Raw Value)
CPDMA_INT TX Interrupt Status Register (Masked Value)
CPDMA_INT TX Interrupt Mask Set Register
CPDMA_INT TX Interrupt Mask Clear Register
CPDMA_INT Input Vector (Read Only)
CPDMA_INT End Of Interrupt Vector
Reserved
RX_INTSTAT_RAW
RX_INTSTAT_MASKED
RX_INTMASK_SET
RX_INTMASK_CLEAR
DMA_INTSTAT_RAW
CPDMA_INT RX Interrupt Status Register (Raw Value)
CPDMA_INT RX Interrupt Status Register (Masked Value)
CPDMA_INT RX Interrupt Mask Set Register
CPDMA_INT RX Interrupt Mask Clear Register
CPDMA_INT DMA Interrupt Status Register (Raw Value)
DMA_INTSTAT_MASKED CPDMA_INT DMA Interrupt Status Register (Masked Value)
DMA_INTMASK_SET CPDMA_INT DMA Interrupt Mask Set Register
DMA_INTMASK_CLEAR CPDMA_INT DMA Interrupt Mask Clear Register
RX0_PENDTHRESH
RX1_PENDTHRESH
RX2_PENDTHRESH
RX3_PENDTHRESH
RX4_PENDTHRESH
RX5_PENDTHRESH
RX6_PENDTHRESH
RX7_PENDTHRESH
RX0_FREEBUFFER
RX1_FREEBUFFER
RX2_FREEBUFFER
RX3_FREEBUFFER
RX4_FREEBUFFER
RX5_FREEBUFFER
RX6_FREEBUFFER
RX7_FREEBUFFER
TX0_HDP
CPDMA_INT Receive Threshold Pending Register Channel 0
CPDMA_INT Receive Threshold Pending Register Channel 1
CPDMA_INT Receive Threshold Pending Register Channel 2
CPDMA_INT Receive Threshold Pending Register Channel 3
CPDMA_INT Receive Threshold Pending Register Channel 4
CPDMA_INT Receive Threshold Pending Register Channel 5
CPDMA_INT Receive Threshold Pending Register Channel 6
CPDMA_INT Receive Threshold Pending Register Channel 7
CPDMA_INT Receive Free Buffer Register Channel 0
CPDMA_INT Receive Free Buffer Register Channel 1
CPDMA_INT Receive Free Buffer Register Channel 2
CPDMA_INT Receive Free Buffer Register Channel 3
CPDMA_INT Receive Free Buffer Register Channel 4
CPDMA_INT Receive Free Buffer Register Channel 5
CPDMA_INT Receive Free Buffer Register Channel 6
CPDMA_INT Receive Free Buffer Register Channel 7
(1)
CPDMA_STATERAM TX Channel 0 Head Desc Pointer
(1)
TX1_HDP
CPDMA_STATERAM TX Channel 1 Head Desc Pointer
(1)
TX2_HDP
CPDMA_STATERAM TX Channel 2 Head Desc Pointer
(1)
TX3_HDP
CPDMA_STATERAM TX Channel 3 Head Desc Pointer
(1)
TX4_HDP
CPDMA_STATERAM TX Channel 4 Head Desc Pointer
(1)
TX5_HDP
CPDMA_STATERAM TX Channel 5 Head Desc Pointer
(1)
TX6_HDP
CPDMA_STATERAM TX Channel 6 Head Desc Pointer
(1)
TX7_HDP
CPDMA_STATERAM TX Channel 7 Head Desc Pointer
(1)
RX0_HDP
CPDMA_STATERAM RX 0 Channel 0 Head Desc Pointer
(1)
RX1_HDP
CPDMA_STATERAM RX 1 Channel 1 Head Desc Pointer
(1)
RX2_HDP
CPDMA_STATERAM RX 2 Channel 2 Head Desc Pointer
(1) Denotes CPPI 3.0 registers.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
213
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 8-12. Ethernet MAC Switch Registers (continued)
ARM/L3 MASTERS
EMAC HEX
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
ADDRESS RANGE
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
0x4A10 022C
0x4A10 0230
0x4A10 0234
0x4A10 0238
0x4A10 023C
0x4A10 0240
0x4A10 0244
0x4A10 0248
0x4A10 024C
0x4A10 0250
0x4A10 0254
0x4A10 0258
0x4A10 025C
0x4A10 0260
0x4A10 0264
0x4A10 0268
0x4A10 026C
0x4A10 0270
0x4A10 0274
0x4A10 0278
0x4A10 027C
0x4A10 02C0 - 0x4A10 03FC
0x4A10 0400
0x4A10 0404
0x4A10 0408
0x4A10 040C
0x4A10 0410
0x4A10 0414
0x4A10 0418
0x4A10 041C
0x4A10 0420
0x4A10 0424
0x4A10 0428 - 0x4A10 042C
0x4A10 0430
0x4A10 0434
0x4A10 0438
0x4A10 043C
0x4A10 0440
0x4A10 0444
0x4A10 0448
0x4A10 044C
0x4A10 0450
0x4A10 0454
RX3_HDP
RX4_HDP
RX5_HDP
RX6_HDP
RX7_HDP
TX0_CP
TX1_CP
TX2_CP
TX3_CP
TX4_CP
TX5_CP
TX6_CP
TX7_CP
RX0_CP
RX1_CP
RX2_CP
RX3_CP
RX4_CP
RX5_CP
Rx6_CP
CPDMA_STATERAM RX 3 Channel 3 Head Desc Pointer
CPDMA_STATERAM RX 4 Channel 4 Head Desc Pointer
CPDMA_STATERAM RX 5 Channel 5 Head Desc Pointer
CPDMA_STATERAM RX 6 Channel 6 Head Desc Pointer
CPDMA_STATERAM RX 7 Channel 7 Head Desc Pointer
CPDMA_STATERAM TX Channel 0 Completion Pointer Register(1)
(1)
CPDMA_STATERAM TX Channel 1 Completion Pointer Register
CPDMA_STATERAM TX Channel 2 Completion Pointer Register
CPDMA_STATERAM TX Channel 3 Completion Pointer Register
CPDMA_STATERAM TX Channel 4 Completion Pointer Register
CPDMA_STATERAM TX Channel 5 Completion Pointer Register
CPDMA_STATERAM TX Channel 6 Completion Pointer Register
CPDMA_STATERAM TX Channel 7 Completion Pointer Register
CPDMA_STATERAM RX Channel 0 Completion Pointer Register
CPDMA_STATERAM RX Channel 1 Completion Pointer Register
CPDMA_STATERAM RX Channel 2 Completion Pointer Register
CPDMA_STATERAM RX Channel 3 Completion Pointer Register
CPDMA_STATERAM RX Channel 4 Completion Pointer Register
CPDMA_STATERAM RX Channel 5 Completion Pointer Register
CPDMA_STATERAM RX Channel 6 Completion Pointer Register
CPDMA_STATERAM RX Channel 7 Completion Pointer Register
Reserved
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
Rx7_CP
–
RXGOODFRAMES
CPSW_STATS Total Number of Good Frames Received
RXBROADCASTFRAMES CPSW_STATS Total Number of Good Broadcast Frames Received
RXMULTICASTFRAMES CPSW_STATS Total Number of Good Multicast Frames Received
RXPAUSEFRAMES
RXCRCERRORS
CPSW_STATS PauseRxFrames
CPSW_STATS Total Number of CRC Errors Frames Received
RXALIGNCODEERRORS CPSW_STATS Total Number of Alignment/Code Errors Received
RXOVERSIZEDFRAMES CPSW_STATS Total Number of Oversized Frames Received
RXJABBERFRAMES
CPSW_STATS Total number of Jabber Frames Received
RXUNDERSIZEDFRAMES CPSW_STATS Total Number of Undersized Frames Received
RXFRAGMENTS
–
CPSW_STATS RxFragments Received
Reserved. Read as Zero
RXOCTETS
TXGOODFRAMES
CPSW_STATS Total Number of Received Bytes in Good Frames
CPSW_STATS GoodTxFrames
TXBROADCASTFRAMES CPSW_STATS BroadcastTxFrames
TXMULTICASTFRAMES CPSW_STATS MulticastTxFrames
TXPAUSEFRAMES
TXDEFERREDFRAMES
TXCOLLISIONFRAMES
CPSW_STATS PauseTxFrames
CPSW_STATS Deferred Frames
CPSW_STATS Collisions
TXSINGLECOLLFRAMES CPSW_STATS SingleCollisionTxFrames
TXMULTCOLLFRAMES CPSW_STATS MultipleCollisionTxFrames
TXEXCESSIVECOLLISION CPSW_STATS ExcessiveCollisions
S
0x4A10 0458
TXLATECOLLISIONS
CPSW_STATS LateCollisions
(2) Denotes CPPI 3.0 registers.
214
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 8-12. Ethernet MAC Switch Registers (continued)
ARM/L3 MASTERS
EMAC HEX
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
ADDRESS RANGE
0x4A10 045C
0x4A10 0460
TXUNDERRUN
CPSW_STATS Transmit Underrun Error
TXCARRIERSENSEERRO CPSW_STATS CarrierSenseErrors
RS
0x4A10 0464
0x4A10 0468
0x4A10 046C
0x4A10 0470
0x4A10 0474
0x4A10 0478
0x4A10 047C
0x4A10 0480
0x4A10 0484
0x4A10 0488
0x4A10 048C
TXOCTETS
CPSW_STATS TxOctets
64OCTETFRAMES
65T127OCTETFRAMES
CPSW_STATS 64octetFrames
CPSW_STATS 65-127octetFrames
128T255OCTETFRAMES CPSW_STATS 128-255octetFrames
256T511OCTETFRAMES CPSW_STATS 256-511octetFrames
512T1023OCTETFRAMES CPSW_STATS 512-1023octetFrames
1024TUPOCTETFRAMES CPSW_STATS 1023-1518octetFrames
NETOCTETS
CPSW_STATS NetOctets
RXSOFOVERRUNS
RXMOFOVERRUNS
RXDMAOVERRUNS
CPSW_STATS Receive FIFO or DMA Start of Frame Overruns
CPSW_STATS Receive FIFO or DMA Mid of Frame Overruns
CPSW_STATS Receive DMA Start of Frame and Middle of Frame
Overruns
0x4A10 0490 - 0x4A10 04FC
0x4A10 0500
–
Reserved
CPTS_IDVER
Identification and Version Register
Time Sync Control Register
Reference Clock Select Register
Time Stamp Event Push Register
Time Stamp Load Value Register
Time Stamp Load Enable Register
Reserved
0x4A10 0504
CPTS_CONTROL
CPTS_RFTCLK_SEL
CPTS_TS_PUSH
CPTS_TS_LOAD_VAL
CPTSTS_LOAD_EN
–
0x4A10 0508
0x4A10 050C
0x4A10 0510
0x4A10 0514
0x4A10 0518 - 0x4A10 051C
0x4A10 0520
CPTS_INTSTAT_RAW
Time Sync Interrupt Status Raw Register
0x4A10 0524
CPTS_INTSTAT_MASKED Time Sync Interrupt Status Masked Register
0x4A10 0528
CPTS_INT_ENABLE
Time Sync Interrupt Enable Register
Reserved
0x4A10 052C
–
CPTS_EVENT_POP
CPTS_EVENT_LOW
CPTS_EVENT_HIGH
–
0x4A10 0530
Event Interrupt Pop Register
Lower 32-Bits of the Event Value
Upper 32-Bits of the Event Value
Reserved
0x4A10 0534
0x4A10 0538
0x4A10 053C - 0x4A10 05FC
0x4A10 0600
ALE_IDVER
–
Address Lookup Engine ID/Version Register
Reserved
0x4A10 0604
0x4A10 0608
ALE_CONTROL
–
Address Lookup Engine Control Register
Reserved
0x4A10 060C
0x4A10 0610
ALE_PRESCALE
–
Address Lookup Engine Prescale Register
Reserved
0x4A10 0614
0x4A10 0618
ALE_UNKNOWN_VLAN
–
Address Lookup Engine Unknown VLAN Register
Reserved
0x4A10 061C
0x4A10 0620
ALE_TBLCTL
–
Address Lookup Engine Table Control
Reserved
0x4A10 0624 - 0x4A10 0630
0x4A10 0634
ALE_TBLW2
ALE_TBLW1
ALE_TBLW0
ALE_PORTCTL0
ALE_PORTCTL1
Address Lookup Engine Table Word 2 Register
Address Lookup Engine Table Word 1 Register
Address Lookup Engine Table Word 0 Register
Address Lookup Engine Port 0 Control Register
Address Lookup Engine Port 1 Control Register
0x4A10 0638
0x4A10 063C
0x4A10 0640
0x4A10 0644
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
215
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 8-12. Ethernet MAC Switch Registers (continued)
ARM/L3 MASTERS
EMAC HEX
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
ADDRESS RANGE
0x4A10 0648
0x4A10 064C
0x4A10 0650
ALE_PORTCTL2
–
Address Lookup Engine Port 2 Control Register
Reserved
–
Reserved
0x4A10 0654
–
Reserved
0x4A10 0658 - 0x4A10 06FF
0x4A10 0700
–
Reserved
SL1_IDVER
CPGMAC_SL1 ID/Version Register
CPGMAC_SL1 Mac Control Register
CPGMAC_SL1 Mac Status Register
CPGMAC_SL1 Soft Reset Register
CPGMAC_SL1 RX Maximum Length Register
CPGMAC_SL1 Backoff Test Register
CPGMAC_SL1 Receive Pause Timer Register
CPGMAC_SL1 Transmit Pause Timer Register
CPGMAC_SL1 Emulation Control Register
0x4A10 0704
SL1_MACCONTROL
SL1_MACSTATUS
SL1_SOFT_RESET
SL1_RX_MAXLEN
SL1_BOFFTEST
SL1_RX_PAUSE
SL1_TX_PAUSE
SL1_EMCONTROL
SL1_RX_PRI_MAP
–
0x4A10 0708
0x4A10 070C
0x4A10 0710
0x4A10 0714
0x4A10 0718
0x4A10 071C
0x4A10 0720
0x4A10 0724
CPGMAC_SL1 Rx Pkt Priority to Header Priority Mapping Register
Reserved
0x4A10 0728 - 0x4A10 073C
0x4A10 0740
SL2_IDVER
CPGMAC_SL2 ID/Version Register
0x4A10 0744
SL2_MACCONTROL
SL2_MACSTATUS
SL2_SOFT_RESET
SL2_RX_MAXLEN
SL2_BOFFTEST
SL2_RX_PAUSE
SL2_TX_PAUSE
SL2_EMCONTROL
SL2_RX_PRI_MAP
–
CPGMAC_SL2 Mac Control Register
0x4A10 0748
CPGMAC_SL2 Mac Status Register
0x4A10 074C
0x4A10 0750
CPGMAC_SL2 Soft Reset Register
CPGMAC_SL2 RX Maximum Length Register
CPGMAC_SL2 Backoff Test Register
0x4A10 0754
0x4A10 0758
CPGMAC_SL2 Receive Pause Timer Register
CPGMAC_SL2 Transmit Pause Timer Register
CPGMAC_SL2 Emulation Control
0x4A10 075C
0x4A10 0760
0x4A10 0764
CPGMAC_SL2 Rx Pkt Priority to Header Priority Mapping Register
Reserved
0x4A10 0768 - 0x4A10 07FF
0x4A10 0800 - 0x4A10 08FF
0x4A10 0900
see Table 8-25
IDVER
MDIO Registers
Subsystem ID Version Register
0x4A10 0904
SOFT_RESET
CONTROL
Subsystem Soft Reset Register
0x4A10 0908
Subsystem Control Register
0x4A10 090C
0x4A10 0910
INT_CONTROL
C0_RX_THRESH_EN
C0_RX_EN
Subsystem Interrupt Control
Subsystem Core 0 Receive Threshold Int Enable Register
Subsystem Core 0 Receive Interrupt Enable Register
Subsystem Core 0 Transmit Interrupt Enable Register
Subsystem Core 0 Misc Interrupt Enable Register
Subsystem Core 1 Receive Threshold Int Enable Register
Subsystem Core 1 Receive Interrupt Enable Register
Subsystem Core 1 Transmit Interrupt Enable Register
Subsystem Core 1 Misc Interrupt Enable Register
Subsystem Core 2 Receive Threshold Int Enable Register
Subsystem Core 2 Receive Interrupt Enable Register
Subsystem Core 2 Transmit Interrupt Enable Register
Subsystem Core 2 Misc Interrupt Enable Register
0x4A10 0914
0x4A10 0918
C0_TX_EN
0x4A10 091C
0x4A10 0920
C0_MISC_EN
C1_RX_THRESH_EN
C1_RX_EN
0x4A10 0924
0x4A10 0928
C1_TX_EN
0x4A10 092C
0x4A10 0930
C1_MISC_EN
C2_RX_THRESH_EN
C2_RX_EN
0x4A10 0934
0x4A10 0938
C2_TX_EN
0x4A10 093C
0x4A10 0940
C2_MISC_EN
C0_RX_THRESH_STAT Subsystem Core 0 Rx Threshold Masked Int Status Register
C0_RX_STAT Subsystem Core 0 Rx Interrupt Masked Int Status Register
0x4A10 0944
216
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 8-12. Ethernet MAC Switch Registers (continued)
ARM/L3 MASTERS
EMAC HEX
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
ADDRESS RANGE
0x4A10 0948
0x4A10 094C
0x4A10 0950
C0_TX_STAT
Subsystem Core 0 Tx Interrupt Masked Int Status Register
Subsystem Core 0 Misc Interrupt Masked Int Status Register
C0_MISC_STAT
C1_RX_THRESH_STAT Subsystem Core 1 Rx Threshold Masked Int Status Register
0x4A10 0954
C1_RX_STAT
C1_TX_STAT
Subsystem Core 1 Receive Masked Interrupt Status Register
Subsystem Core 1 Transmit Masked Interrupt Status Register
Subsystem Core 1 Misc Masked Interrupt Status Register
0x4A10 0958
0x4A10 095C
0x4A10 0960
C1_MISC_STAT
C2_RX_THRESH_STAT Subsystem Core 2 Rx Threshold Masked Int Status Register
0x4A10 0964
C2_RX_STAT
C2_TX_STAT
C2_MISC_STAT
C0_RX_IMAX
C0_TX_IMAX
C1_RX_IMAX
C1_TX_IMAX
C2_RX_IMAX
C2_TX_IMAX
CPPI_RAM
Subsystem Core 2 Receive Masked Interrupt Status Register
Subsystem Core 2 Transmit Masked Interrupt Status Register
Subsystem Core 2 Misc Masked Interrupt Status Register
Subsystem Core 0 Receive Interrupts Per Millisecond
Subsystem Core 0 Transmit Interrupts Per Millisecond
Subsystem Core 1 Receive Interrupts Per Millisecond
Subsystem Core 1 Transmit Interrupts Per Millisecond
Subsystem Core 2 Receive Interrupts Per Millisecond
Subsystem Core 2 Transmit Interrupts Per Millisecond
CPPI RAM(3)
0x4A10 0968
0x4A10 096C
0x4A10 0970
0x4A10 0974
0x4A10 0978
0x4A10 097C
0x4A10 0980
0x4A10 0984
0x4A10 2000 -0x4A10 3FFF
(3) Denotes CPPI 3.0 registers.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
217
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
8.6.2 EMAC Electrical Data/Timing
8.6.2.1 EMAC MII and GMII Electrical Data/Timing
GMII mode is not supported for OPP50.
Table 8-13. Timing Requirements for EMAC[x]_MRCLK - [G]MII Operation
(see Figure 8-9)
1000 Mbps (1 Gbps)
(GMII Only)
100 Mbps
10 Mbps
NO.
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
1
2
tc(MRCLK)
Cycle time, EMAC[x]_MRCLK
8
40
400
ns
ns
Pulse duration,
EMAC[x]_MRCLK high
tw(MRCLKH)
2.8
2.8
14
14
140
140
Pulse duration,
EMAC[x]_MRCLK low
3
4
tw(MRCLKL)
tt(MRCLK)
ns
ns
Transition time,
EMAC[x]_MRCLK
1
3
3
1
4
2
3
EMAC[x]_MRCLK
4
Figure 8-9. EMAC[x]_MRCLK Timing (EMAC Receive) - [G]MII Operation
Table 8-14. Timing Requirements for EMAC[x]_MTCLK - [G]MII Operation
(see Figure 8-14)
1000 Mbps (1 Gbps)
(GMII Only)
100 Mbps
10 Mbps
NO.
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
1
2
tc(MTCLK)
Cycle time, EMAC[x]_MTCLK
8
40
400
ns
ns
Pulse duration,
EMAC[x]_MTCLK high
tw(MTCLKH)
2.8
2.8
14
14
140
140
Pulse duration,
EMAC[x]_MTCLK low
3
4
tw(MTCLKL)
tt(MTCLK)
ns
ns
Transition time,
EMAC[x]_MTCLK
1
3
3
1
4
2
3
EMAC[x]_MTCLK
4
Figure 8-10. EMAC[x]_MTCLK Timing (EMAC Transmit) - [G]MII Operation
218
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 8-15. Timing Requirements for EMAC [G]MII Receive 10/100/1000 Mbit/s
(see Figure 8-11)
1000 Mbps (1
Gbps)
100/10 Mbps
NO.
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
tsu(MRXD-MRCLK)
Setup time, receive selected signals valid before
EMAC[1:0]_MRCLK
1
2
tsu(MRXDV-MRCLK)
tsu(MRXER-MRCLK)
th(MRCLK-MRXD)
th(MRCLK-MRXDV)
th(MRCLK-MRXER)
2
8
ns
Hold time, receive selected signals valid after
EMAC[1:0]_MRCLK
0
8
ns
1
2
EMAC[x]_MRCLK (Input)
EMAC[x]_MRXD3−EMAC[x]_MRXD0,
EMAC[x]_MRXDV, EMAC[x]_MRXER (Inputs)
Figure 8-11. EMAC Receive Interface Timing [G]MII Operation
Table 8-16. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMAC [G]MII
Transmit 10/100 Mbits/s
(see Figure 8-12)
100/10 Mbps
MIN
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MAX
td(MTXCLK-MTXD)
td(MTCLK-MTXEN)
1
Delay time, EMAC[x]_MTCLK to transmit selected signals valid
2.5
25
ns
Table 8-17. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMAC [G]MII
Transmit 1000 Mbits/s
(see Figure 8-12)
1000 Mbps (1 Gbps)
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
td(GMTCLK-MTXD)
1
Delay time, EMAC[x]_GMTCLK to transmit selected signals valid
0.5
5
ns
td(GMTCLK-MTXEN)
1
EMAC[x]_MTCLK (Input)
EMAC[x]_MTXD3−EMAC[x]_MTXD0,
EMAC[x]_MTXEN (Outputs)
Figure 8-12. EMAC Transmit Interface Timing [G]MII Operation
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
219
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
8.6.2.2 EMAC RMII Electrical Data/Timing
Table 8-18. Timing Requirements for EMAC[x]_RMREFCLK - RMII Operation
(see Figure 8-13)
OPP100
MIN
NO.
UNIT
MAX
20.001
13
1
2
3
4
tc(RMREFCLK)
Cycle time, EMAC[x]_RMREFCLK
19.999
ns
ns
ns
ns
tw(RMREFCLKH)
tw(RMREFCLKL)
tt(RMREFCLK)
Pulse duration, EMAC[x]_RMREFCLK high
Pulse duration, EMAC[x]_RMREFCLK low
Transition time, EMAC[x]_RMREFCLK
7
7
13
3
1
2
4
RMREFCLK
(Input)
3
4
Figure 8-13. RMREFCLK Timing RMII Operation
Table 8-19. Timing Requirements for EMAC RMII Receive
(see Figure 8-13)
OPP100
NO.
UNIT
MIN
MAX
tsu(RMRXD-RMREFCLK)
Setup time, receive selected signals valid before
EMAC[x]_RMREFCLK
1
2
tsu(RMCRSDV-RMREFCLK)
tsu(RMRXER-RMREFCLK)
th(RMREFCLK-RMRXD)
th(RMREFCLK-RMCRSDV)
th(RMREFCLK-RMRXER)
4
ns
Hold time, receive selected signals valid after
EMAC[x]_RMREFCLK
2
ns
1
2
RMREFCLK (input)
RMRXD1−RMRXD0,
RMCRSDV, RMRXER (inputs)
Figure 8-14. EMAC Receive Interface Timing RMII Operation
Table 8-20. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMAC RMII Transmit
10/100 Mbits/s
(see Figure 8-15)
OPP100
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
Delay time, EMAC[x]_RMREFCLK high to EMAC[x]_RMTXD[x]
valid
1
2
td(RMREFCLK-RMTXD)
2.5
13
ns
Delay time, EMAC[x]_RMREFCLK high to EMAC[x]_RMTXEN
valid
tdd(RMREFCLK-RMTXEN)
2.5
13
220
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
1
RMREFCLK (Input)
RMTXD1−RMTXD0,
RMTXEN (Outputs)
Figure 8-15. EMAC Transmit Interface Timing RMII Operation
8.6.2.3 EMAC RGMII Electrical Data/Timing
RGMII mode is not supported for OPP50.
Table 8-21. Timing Requirements for EMAC[x]_RGRXC - RGMII Operation
(see Figure 8-16)
OPP100
MIN
NO.
UNIT
MAX
440
44
10 Mbps
360
1
2
3
4
tc(RGRXC)
tw(RGRXCH)
tw(RGRXCL)
tt(RGRXC)
Cycle time, EMAC[x]_RGRXC
100 Mbps
1000 Mbps
10 Mbps
36
ns
7.2
8.8
0.40*tc(RGRXC) 0.60*tc(RGRXC)
0.40*tc(RGRXC) 0.60*tc(RGRXC)
0.45*tc(RGRXC) 0.55*tc(RGRXC)
0.40*tc(RGRXC) 0.60*tc(RGRXC)
0.40*tc(RGRXC) 0.60*tc(RGRXC)
0.45*tc(RGRXC) 0.55*tc(RGRXC)
0.75
Pulse duration, EMAC[x]_RGRXC high
Pulse duration, EMAC[x]_RGRXC low
Transition time, EMAC[x]_RGRXC
100 Mbps
1000 Mbps
10 Mbps
ns
ns
ns
100 Mbps
1000 Mbps
10 Mbps
100 Mbps
1000 Mbps
0.75
0.75
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
221
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 8-22. Timing Requirements for EMAC RGMII Input Receive for 10/100/1000 Mbps(1)
(see Figure 8-16)
OPP100
MIN
NO.
UNIT
MAX
Internal delay
enabled
1.0
-0.5
1.0
ns
ns
ns
ns
tsu(RGRXD-
RGRXCH)
Setup time, receive selected signals valid before
EMAC[x]_RGRXC (at DSP) high/low
5
Internal delay
disabled
Internal delay
enabled
th(RGRXCH-
RGRXD)
Hold time, receive selected signals valid after
EMAC[x]_RGRXC (at DSP) high/low
6
Internal delay
disabled
-0.5
(1) For RGMII, receive selected signals include: EMAC[x]_RGRXD[3:0] and EMAC[x]_RGRXCTL.
1
4
2
4
3
EMAC[x]_RGRXC
(at DSP)(A)
5
1st Half-byte
2nd Half-byte
6
EMAC[x]_RGRXD[3:0](B)
RGRXD[3:0]
RXDV
RGRXD[7:4]
EMAC[x]_RGRXCTL(B)
RXERR
A. EMAC[x]_RGRXC must be externally delayed relative to the data and control pins. The internal delay can be enabled
or disabled via the EMAC RGMII_ID_MODE_N register.
B. Data and control information is received using both edges of the clocks. EMAC[x]_RGRXD[3:0] carries data bits 3-0
on the rising edge of EMAC[x]_RGRXC and data bits 7-4 on the falling edge of EMAC[x]_RGRXC. Similarly,
EMAC[x]_RGRXCTL carries RXDV on rising edge of EMAC[x]_RGRXC and RXERR on falling edge of
EMAC[x]_RGRXC.
Figure 8-16. EMAC Receive Interface Timing [RGMII Operation]
Table 8-23. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for RGTXC - RGMII
Operation for 10/100/1000 Mbit/s
(see Figure 8-17)
OPP100
NO.
UNIT
MIN
MAX
10 Mbps
360
36
440
44
1
tc(RGTXC)
tw(RGTXCH)
tw(RGTXCL)
tt(RGTXC)
Cycle time, EMAC[x]_RGTXC
100 Mbps
1000 Mbps
10 Mbps
ns
7.2
8.8
0.40*tc(RGTXC)
0.40*tc(RGTXC)
0.45*tc(RGTXC)
0.40*tc(RGTXC)
0.40*tc(RGTXC)
0.45*tc(RGTXC)
0.60*tc(RGTXC)
0.60*tc(RGTXC)
0.55*tc(RGTXC)
0.60*tc(RGTXC)
0.60*tc(RGTXC)
0.55*tc(RGTXC)
0.75
2
3
4
Pulse duration, EMAC[x]_RGTXC high
Pulse duration, EMAC[x]_RGTXC low
Transition time, EMAC[x]_RGTXC
100 Mbps
1000 Mbps
10 Mbps
ns
ns
ns
100 Mbps
1000 Mbps
10 Mbps
100 Mbps
1000 Mbps
0.75
0.75
222
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 8-24. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMAC RGMII
Transmit(1)
(see Figure 8-17)
OPP100
MIN
NO.
5
PARAMETER
UNIT
MAX
Internal delay enabled
Internal delay disabled
Internal delay enabled
Internal delay disabled
1.2
ns
ns
ns
ns
tsu(RGTXD-
RGTXCH)
Setup time, transmit selected signals valid before
EMAC[x]_RGTXC (at DSP) high/low
-0.5
1.2
th(RGTXCH-
RGTXD)
Hold time, transmit selected signals valid after
EMAC[x]_RGTXC (at DSP) high/low
6
-0.5
(1) For RGMII, transmit selected signals include: EMAC[x]_RGTXD[3:0] and EMAC[x]_RGTXCTL.
RGTXC at DSP pins
Internal RGTXC
1
4
2
4
3
EMQAC[x]_RGTXC
(at DSP)(A)
1
5
EMAC[x]_RGTXD[3:0](B)
EMAC[x]_RGTXCTL(B)
1st Half-byte
2nd Half-byte
TXERR
6
2
TXEN
A. RGTXC is delayed internally before being driven to the EMAC[x]_RGTXC pin. The internal delay can be enabled or
disabled via the EMAC RGMII_ID_MODE_N register.
B. Data and control information is transmitted using both edges of the clocks. EMAC[x]_RGTXD[3:0] carries data bits 3-0
on the rising edge of EMAC[x]_RGTXC and data bits 7-4 on the falling edge of EMAC[x]_RGTXC. Similarly,
EMAC[x]_RGTXCTL carries TXEN on rising edge of EMAC[x]_RGTXC and TXERR of falling edge of
EMAC[x]_RGTXC.
Figure 8-17. EMAC Transmit Interface Timing [RGMII Operation]
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
223
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
8.6.3 Management Data Input/Output (MDIO)
The Management Data Input/Output (MDIO) module continuously polls all 32 MDIO addresses in order to
enumerate all PHY devices in the system.
The MDIO module implements the 802.3 serial management interface to interrogate and control Ethernet
PHY(s) using a shared two-wire bus. Host software uses the MDIO module to configure the
auto-negotiation parameters of each PHY attached to the EMAC SW, retrieve the negotiation results, and
configure required parameters in the EMAC SW module for correct operation. The module is designed to
allow almost transparent operation of the MDIO interface, with very little maintenance from the core
processor. A single MDIO interface is pinned out to control the PHY configuration and status monitoring.
Multiple external PHYs can be controlled by the MDIO interface.
For more detailed information on the MDIO peripheral, see the 3PSW Ethernet Subsystem chapter of the
AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number:
SPRUGZ7).
8.6.3.1 MDIO Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 8-25. MDIO Registers
HEX ADDRESS
0x4A10 0800
ACRONYM
VERSION
REGISTER NAME
MDIO Version
0x4A10 0804
CONTROL
MDIO Control
0x4A10 0808
ALIVE
PHY Alive Status
0x4A10 080C
LINK
PHY Link Status
0x4A10 0810
LINKINTRAW
LINKINTMASKED
-
MDIO Link Status Change Interrupt (Unmasked)
MDIO Link Status Change Interrupt (Masked)
Reserved
0x4A10 0814
0x4A10 0818
0x4A10 081C
USERINTRAW
USERINTMASKED
USERINTMASKSET
USERINTMASKCLEAR
-
MDIO User Command Complete Interrupt (Unmasked)
MDIO User Command Complete Interrupt (Masked)
MDIO User Command Complete Interrupt Mask Set
MDIO User Command Complete Interrupt Mask Clear
Reserved
0x4A10 0820
0x4A10 0824
0x4A10 0828
0x4A10 082C
0x4A10 0830 - 0x4A10 087C
0x4A10 0880
USERACCESS0
USERPHYSEL0
USERACCESS1
USERPHYSEL1
-
MDIO User Access 0
MDIO User PHY Select 0
0x4A10 0884
MDIO User Access 1
0x4A10 0888
MDIO User PHY Select 1
0x4A10 088C - 0x4A10 08FF
Reserved
8.6.3.2 MDIO Electrical Data/Timing
Table 8-26. Timing Requirements for MDIO Input
(see Figure 8-18)
OPP100
MIN
400
180
20
NO.
UNIT
MAX
1
tc(MDCLK)
Cycle time, MDCLK
ns
ns
ns
ns
tw(MDCLK)
Pulse duration, MDCLK high or low
4
5
tsu(MDIO-MDCLKH)
th(MDCLKH-MDIO)
Setup time, MDIO data input valid before MDCLK high
Hold time, MDIO data input valid after MDCLK high
0
224
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
1
MDCLK
4
5
MDIO
(input)
Figure 8-18. MDIO Input Timing
Table 8-27. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for MDIO Output
(see Figure 8-19)
OPP100
MIN
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MAX
7
td(MDCLKL-MDIO)
Delay time, MDCLK low to MDIO data output valid
100
ns
1
MDCLK
7
MDIO
(output)
Figure 8-19. MDIO Output Timing
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
225
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
8.7 General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO)
The GPIO peripheral provides general-purpose pins that can be configured as either inputs or outputs.
When configured as an output, a write to an internal register controls the state driven on the output pin.
When configured as an input, the state of the input is detectable by reading the state of an internal
register. In addition, the GPIO peripheral can produce CPU interrupts in different interrupt generation
modes. The GPIO peripheral provides generic connections to external devices.
The device contains four GPIO modules and each GPIO module is made up of 32 identical channels.
The device GPIO peripheral supports the following:
•
Up to 128 1.8-V/3.3-V GPIO pins, GP0[0:31], GP1[0:31], GP2[0:31], and GP3[0:31] (the exact number
available varies as a function of the device configuration). Each channel can be configured to be used
in the following applications:
–
–
–
Data input/output
Keyboard interface with a de-bouncing cell
Synchronous interrupt generation (in active mode) upon the detection of external events (signal
transition(s) and/or signal level(s)).
•
•
Synchronous interrupt requests from each channel are processed by four identical interrupt generation
sub-modules to be used independently by the ARM or Media Controller. Interrupts can be triggered by
rising and/or falling edge, specified for each interrupt-capable GPIO signal.
Shared registers can be accessed through "Set & Clear" protocol. Software writes 1 to corresponding
bit position(s) to set or to clear GPIO signal(s). This allows multiple software processes to toggle GPIO
output signals without critical section protection (disable interrupts, program GPIO, re-enable interrupts,
to prevent context switching to another process during GPIO programming).
•
•
Separate input/output registers.
Output register in addition to set/clear so that, if preferred by software, some GPIO output signals can
be toggled by direct write to the output register(s).
•
Output register, when read, reflects output drive status. This, in addition to the input register reflecting
pin status and open-drain I/O cell, allows wired logic to be implemented.
For more detailed information on GPIOs, see the General-Purpose I/O (GPIO) Interface chapter of the
AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number:
SPRUGZ7).
8.7.1 GPIO Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 8-28. GPIO Registers
HEX ADDRESS
GPIO0
GPIO1
GPIO2
GPIO3
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
0x4803 2000
0x4803 2010
0x4803 2020
0x4803 2024
0x4804 C000
0x4804 C010
0x4804 C020
0x4804 C024
0x481A C000
0x481A C010
0x481A C020
0x481A C024
0x481A E000
0x481A E010
0x481A E020
0x481A E024
GPIO_REVISION
GPIO Revision
GPIO_SYSCONFIG System Configuration
GPIO_EOI End of Interrupt
GPIO_IRQSTATUS Status Raw for Interrupt 1
_RAW_0
0x4803 2028
0x4803 202C
0x4803 2030
0x4803 2034
0x4803 2038
0x4804 C028
0x4804 C02C
0x4804 C030
0x4804 C034
0x4804 C038
0x481A C028
0x481A C02C
0x481A C030
0x481A C034
0x481A C038
0x481A E028
0x481A E02C
0x481A E030
0x481A E034
0x481A E038
GPIO_IRQSTATUS Status Raw for Interrupt 2
_RAW_1
GPIO_IRQSTATUS Status for Interrupt 1
_0
GPIO_IRQSTATUS Status for Interrupt 2
_1
GPIO_IRQSTATUS Enable Set for Interrupt 1
_SET_0
GPIO_IRQSTATUS Enable Set for Interrupt 2
_SET_1
226
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 8-28. GPIO Registers (continued)
HEX ADDRESS
GPIO2
GPIO0
GPIO1
GPIO3
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
0x4803 203C
0x4804 C03C
0x481A C03C
0x481A C040
0x481A C044
0x481A C048
0x481A E03C
GPIO_IRQSTATUS Enable Clear for Interrupt 1
_CLR_0
0x4803 2040
0x4803 2044
0x4803 2048
0x4804 C040
0x4804 C044
0x4804 C048
0x481A E040
0x481A E044
0x481A E048
GPIO_IRQSTATUS Enable Clear for Interrupt 2
_CLR_1
GPIO_IRQWAKEN_ Wakeup Enable for Interrupt
0
1
GPIO_IRQWAKEN_ Wakeup Enable for Interrupt
1
2
0x4803 2114
0x4803 2130
0x4803 2134
0x4803 2138
0x4803 213C
0x4803 2140
0x4804 C114
0x4804 C130
0x4804 C134
0x4804 C138
0x4804 C13C
0x4804 C140
0x481A C114
0x481A C130
0x481A C134
0x481A C138
0x481A C13C
0x481A C140
0x481A E114
0x481A E130
0x481A E134
0x481A E138
0x481A E13C
0x481A E140
GPIO_SYSSTATUS System Status
GPIO_CTRL
GPIO_OE
Module Control
Output Enable
Data Input
GPIO_DATAIN
GPIO_DATAOUT
Data Output
GPIO_LEVELDETE Detect Low Level
CT0
0x4803 2144
0x4803 2148
0x4803 214C
0x4803 2150
0x4803 2154
0x4803 2190
0x4803 2194
0x4804 C144
0x4804 C148
0x4804 C14C
0x4804 C150
0x4804 C154
0x4804 C190
0x4804 C194
0x481A C144
0x481A C148
0x481A C14C
0x481A C150
0x481A C154
0x481A C190
0x481A C194
0x481A E144
0x481A E148
0x481A E14C
0x481A E150
0x481A E154
0x481A E190
0x481A E194
GPIO_LEVELDETE Detect High Level
CT1
GPIO_RISINGDETE Detect Rising Edge
CT
GPIO_FALLINGDET Detect Falling Edge
ECT
GPIO_DEBOUNCE Debouncing Enable
NABLE
GPIO_DEBOUNCIN Debouncing Value
GTIME
GPIO_CLEARDATA Clear Data Output
OUT
GPIO_SETDATAOU Set Data Output
T
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
227
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
8.7.2 GPIO Electrical Data/Timing
Table 8-29. Timing Requirements for GPIO Inputs
(see Figure 8-20)
OPP100
MIN
NO.
UNIT
MAX
1
2
tw(GPIH)
tw(GPIL)
Pulse duration, GPx[31:0] input high
Pulse duration, GPx[31:0] input low
12P(1)
12P(1)
ns
ns
(1) P = Module clock.
Table 8-30. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for GPIO Outputs
(see Figure 8-20)
OPP100
MIN
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MAX
3
4
tw(GPOH)
tw(GPOL)
Pulse duration, GPx[31:0] output high
Pulse duration, GPx[31:0] output low
36P-8(1)
36P-8(1)
ns
ns
(1) P = Module clock.
2
1
GPx[31:0]
input
4
3
GPx[31:0]
output
Figure 8-20. GPIO Port Timing
228
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
8.8 General-Purpose Memory Controller (GPMC) and Error Location Module (ELM)
The GPMC is a device memory controller used to provide a glueless interface to external memory devices
such as NOR Flash, NAND Flash (with BCH and Hamming Error Code Detection for 8-bit or 16-bit NAND
Flash), SRAM, and Pseudo-SRAM. It includes flexible asynchronous protocol control for interface to
SRAM-like memories and custom logic (FPGA, CPLD, ASICs, etc.).
Other supported features include:
•
•
•
•
8-/16-bit wide multiplexed address/data bus
512 MBytes maximum addressing capability divided among up to eight chip selects
Non-multiplexed address/data mode
Pre-fetch and write posting engine associated with system DMA to get full performance from NAND
device with minimum impact on NOR/SRAM concurrent access.
The device also contains an Error Locator Module (ELM) which is used to extract error addresses from
syndrome polynomials generated using a BCH algorithm. Each of these polynomials gives a status of the
read operations for a 512 bytes block from a NAND flash and its associated BCH parity bits, plus
optionally spare area information. The ELM has the following features:
•
•
•
•
4-bit, 8-bit and 16-bit per 512byte block error location based on BCH algorithms
Eight simultaneous processing contexts
Page-based and continuous modes
Interrupt generation on error location process completion
–
–
When the full page has been processed in page mode
For each syndrome polynomial in continuous mode
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
229
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
8.8.1 GPMC and ELM Peripherals Register Descriptions
Table 8-31. GPMC Registers
HEX ADDRESS
0x5000 0000
ACRONYM
GPMC_REVISION
REGISTER NAME
GPMC Revision
0x5000 0010
GPMC_SYSCONFIG
GPMC_SYSSTATUS
GPMC_IRQSTATUS
GPMC_IRQENABLE
GPMC_TIMEOUT_CONTROL
GPMC_ERR_ADDRESS
GPMC_ERR_TYPE
GPMC_CONFIG
System Configuration
System Status
0x5000 0014
0x5000 0018
Status for Interrupt
Interrupt Enable
0x5000 001C
0x5000 0040
Timeout Counter Start Value
Error Address
0x5000 0044
0x5000 0048
Error Type
0x5000 0050
GPMC Global Configuration
GPMC Global Status
Parameter Configuration 1_0-7
0x5000 0054
0x5000 0060 + (0x0000 0030 * i)(1)
GPMC_STATUS
GPMC_CONFIG1_0 -
GPMC_CONFIG1_7
0x5000 0064 + (0x0000 0030 * i)(1)
0x5000 0068 + (0x0000 0030 * i)(1)
0x5000 006C + (0x0000 0030 * i)(1)
0x5000 0070 + (0x0000 0030 * i)(1)
0x5000 0074 + (0x0000 0030 * i)(1)
0x5000 0078 + (0x0000 0030 * i)(1)
0x5000 007C + (0x0000 0030 * i)(1)
0x5000 0080 + (0x0000 0030 * i)(1)
0x5000 0084 + (0x0000 0030 * i)(1)
GPMC_CONFIG2_0 -
GPMC_CONFIG2_7
Parameter Configuration 2_0-7
Parameter Configuration 3_0-7
Parameter Configuration 4_0-7
Parameter Configuration 5_0-7
Parameter Configuration 6_0-7
Parameter Configuration 7_0-7
NAND Command 0-7
GPMC_CONFIG3_0 -
GPMC_CONFIG3_7
GPMC_CONFIG4_0 -
GPMC_CONFIG4_7
GPMC_CONFIG5_0 -
GPMC_CONFIG5_7
GPMC_CONFIG6_0 -
GPMC_CONFIG6_7
GPMC_CONFIG7_0 -
GPMC_CONFIG7_7
GPMC_NAND_COMMAND_0 -
GPMC_NAND_COMMAND_7
GPMC_NAND_ADDRESS_0 -
GPMC_NAND_ADDRESS_7
NAND Address 0-7
GPMC_NAND_DATA_0 -
GPMC_NAND_DATA_7
NAND Data 0-7
0x5000 01E0
0x5000 01E4
GPMC_PREFETCH_CONFIG1
GPMC_PREFETCH_CONFIG2
GPMC_PREFETCH_CONTROL
GPMC_PREFETCH_STATUS
GPMC_ECC_CONFIG
Prefetch Configuration 1
Prefetch Configuration 2
Prefetch Control
0x5000 01EC
0x5000 01F0(1)
Prefetch Status
0x5000 01F4
ECC Configuration
ECC Control
0x5000 01F8
GPMC_ECC_CONTROL
0x5000 01FC
0x5000 0200 + (0x0000 0004 * j)(2)
GPMC_ECC_SIZE_CONFIG
ECC Size Configuration
ECC0-8 Result
GPMC_ECC0_RESULT -
GPMC_ECC8_RESULT
0x5000 0240 + (0x0000 0010 * i)(1)
0x5000 0244 + (0x0000 0010 * i)(1)
0x5000 0248 + (0x0000 0010 * i)(1)
0x5000 024C + (0x0000 0010 * i)(1)
0x5000 0300 + (0x0000 0010 * i)(1)
GPMC_BCH_RESULT0_0 -
GPMC_BCH_RESULT0_7
BCH Result 0_0-7
BCH Result 1_0-7
BCH Result 2_0-7
BCH Result 3_0-7
BCH Result 4_0-7
GPMC_BCH_RESULT1_0 -
GPMC_BCH_RESULT1_7
GPMC_BCH_RESULT2_0 -
GPMC_BCH_RESULT2_7
GPMC_BCH_RESULT3_0 -
GPMC_BCH_RESULT3_7
GPMC_BCH_RESULT4_0 -
GPMC_BCH_RESULT4_7
(1) i = 0 to 7
(2) j = 0 to 8
230 Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 8-31. GPMC Registers (continued)
HEX ADDRESS
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
0x5000 0304 + (0x0000 0010 * i)(1)
0x5000 0308 + (0x0000 0010 * i)(1)
0x5000 02D0
GPMC_BCH_RESULT5_0 -
GPMC_BCH_RESULT5_7
BCH Result 5_0-7
BCH Result 6_0-7
BCH Data
GPMC_BCH_RESULT6_0 -
GPMC_BCH_RESULT6_7
GPMC_BCH_SWDATA
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
231
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
8.8.2 GPMC Electrical Data/Timing
8.8.2.1 GPMC/NOR Flash Interface Synchronous Mode Timing (Non-Multiplexed and Multiplexed Modes)
Table 8-32. Timing Requirements for GPMC/NOR Flash Interface - Synchronous Mode
(see Figure 8-21, Figure 8-22, Figure 8-23 for Non-Multiplexed Modes)
(see Figure 8-24, Figure 8-25, Figure 8-26 for Multiplexed Modes)
OPP100
NO.
UNIT
MIN
4
MAX
13 tsu(DV-CLKH)
14 th(CLKH-DV)
22 tsu(WAITV-CLKH)
23 th(CLKH-WAITV)
Setup time, read GPMC_D[15:0] valid before GPMC_CLK high
Hold time, read GPMC_D[15:0] valid after GPMC_CLK high
Setup time, GPMC_WAIT[x] valid before GPMC_CLK high
Hold time, GPMC_WAIT[x] valid after GPMC_CLK high
ns
ns
ns
ns
3
4
3
Table 8-33. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for GPMC/NOR Flash
Interface - Synchronous Mode
(see Figure 8-21, Figure 8-22, Figure 8-23 for Non-Multiplexed Modes)
(see Figure 8-24, Figure 8-25, Figure 8-26 for Multiplexed Modes)
OPP100
MIN
16(1)
NO
.
PARAMETER
UNIT
ns
MAX
1
2
tc(CLK)
Cycle time, output clock GPMC_CLK period
tw(CLKH)
Pulse duration, output clock GPMC_CLK high
0.5P(2)
ns
tw(CLKL)
Pulse duration, output clock GPMC_CLK low
0.5P(2)
F - 3(3)
E - 3(4)
3
4
td(CLKH-nCSV)
td(CLKH-nCSIV)
Delay time, GPMC_CLK rising edge to GPMC_CS[x] transition
Delay time, GPMC_CLK rising edge to GPMC_CS[x] invalid
F + 6(3)
E + 6(4)
ns
ns
MUX0 and Non-Multi
Muxed pins
B - 6(5)
B + 3(5)
B + 6(5)
MUX1 for
GPMC_A[15:0]
B - 10(5)
Delay time, GPMC_A[27:0] address bus valid to
GPMC_CLK first edge
5
td(ADDV-CLK)
ns
MUX1/2 for
GPMC_A[27:20]
B - 10(5)
B - 10(5)
-3
B + 6(5)
B + 6(5)
GPMC_AD[15:0]
MUX0 and Non-Multi
Muxed pins
MUX1 for
GPMC_A[15:0]
-6
-6
Delay time, GPMC_CLK rising edge to GPMC_A[27:0]
GPMC address bus invalid
6
7
td(CLKH-ADDIV)
ns
ns
MUX1/2 for
GPMC_A[27:20]
GPMC_AD[15:0]
-6
B - 3(5)
td(nBEV-CLK)
Delay time, GPMC_BE0_CLE, GPMC_BE1 valid to GPMC_CLK first edge
B + 3(5)
(1) Sync mode = 62.5 MHz; Async mode = 125 MHz.
(2) P = GPMC_CLK period.
(3) For nCS falling edge (CS activated):
•
For GpmcFCLKDivider = 0:
F = 0.5 * CSExtraDelay * GPMC_FCLK
For GpmcFCLKDivider = 1:
•
F = 0.5 * CSExtraDelay * GPMC_FCLK if (ClkActivationTime and CSOnTime are odd) or (ClkActivationTime and CSOnTime are
even)
F = (1 + 0.5 * CSExtraDelay) * GPMC_FCLK otherwise
•
For GpmcFCLKDivider = 2:
F = 0.5 * CSExtraDelay * GPMC_FCLK if ((CSOnTime – ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 3)
F = (1 + 0.5 * CSExtraDelay) * GPMC_FCLK if ((CSOnTime – ClkActivationTime – 1) is a multiple of 3)
F = (2 + 0.5 * CSExtraDelay) * GPMC_FCLK if ((CSOnTime – ClkActivationTime – 2) is a multiple of 3)
(4) For single read: E = (CSRdOffTime – AccessTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) * GPMC_FCLK
For burst read: E = (CSRdOffTime – AccessTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) * GPMC_FCLK
For burst write: E = (CSWrOffTime – AccessTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) * GPMC_FCLK
(5) B = ClkActivationTime * GPMC_FCLK
232
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 8-33. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for GPMC/NOR Flash
Interface - Synchronous Mode (continued)
(see Figure 8-21, Figure 8-22, Figure 8-23 for Non-Multiplexed Modes)
(see Figure 8-24, Figure 8-25, Figure 8-26 for Multiplexed Modes)
OPP100
MIN
D - 3(6)
G - 3(7)
D - 3(6)
H - 3(8)
NO
.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MAX
D + 3(6)
G + 6(7)
D + 6(6)
H + 5(8)
8
9
td(CLKH-nBEIV)
td(CLKH-nADV)
Delay time, GPMC_CLK rising edge to GPMC_BE0_CLE, GPMC_BE1 invalid
Delay time, GPMC_CLK rising edge to GPMC_ADV_ALE transition
Delay time, GPMC_CLK rising edge to GPMC_ADV_ALE invalid
Delay time, GPMC_CLK rising edge to GPMC_OE_RE transition
ns
ns
ns
ns
10 td(CLKH-nADVIV)
11 td(CLKH-nOE)
(6) For single read: D = (RdCycleTime – AccessTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) * GPMC_FCLK
For burst read: D = (RdCycleTime – AccessTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) * GPMC_FCLK
For burst write: D = (WrCycleTime – AccessTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) * GPMC_FCLK
(7) For ADV falling edge (ADV activated):
•
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 0:
G = 0.5 * ADVExtraDelay * GPMC_FCLK
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 1:
•
G = 0.5 * ADVExtraDelay * GPMC_FCLK if (ClkActivationTime and ADVOnTime are odd) or (ClkActivationTime and ADVOnTime are
even)
G = (1 + 0.5 * ADVExtraDelay) * GPMC_FCLK otherwise
•
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 2:
G = 0.5 * ADVExtraDelay * GPMC_FCLK if ((ADVOnTime – ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 3)
G = (1 + 0.5 * ADVExtraDelay) * GPMC_FCLK if ((ADVOnTime – ClkActivationTime – 1) is a multiple of 3)
G = (2 + 0.5 * ADVExtraDelay) * GPMC_FCLK if ((ADVOnTime – ClkActivationTime – 2) is a multiple of 3)
For ADV rising edge (ADV deactivated) in Reading mode:
•
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 0:
G = 0.5 * ADVExtraDelay * GPMC_FCLK
•
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 1:
G = 0.5 * ADVExtraDelay * GPMC_FCLK if (ClkActivationTime and ADVRdOffTime are odd) or (ClkActivationTime and
ADVRdOffTime are even)
G = (1 + 0.5 * ADVExtraDelay) * GPMC_FCLK otherwise
•
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 2:
G = 0.5 * ADVExtraDelay * GPMC_FCLK if ((ADVRdOffTime – ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 3)
G = (1 + 0.5 * ADVExtraDelay) * GPMC_FCLK if ((ADVRdOffTime – ClkActivationTime – 1) is a multiple of 3)
G = (2 + 0.5 * ADVExtraDelay) * GPMC_FCLK if ((ADVRdOffTime – ClkActivationTime – 2) is a multiple of 3)
For ADV rising edge (ADV deactivated) in Writing mode:
•
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 0:
G = 0.5 * ADVExtraDelay * GPMC_FCLK
•
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 1:
G = 0.5 * ADVExtraDelay * GPMC_FCLK if (ClkActivationTime and ADVWrOffTime are odd) or (ClkActivationTime and
ADVWrOffTime are even)
G = (1 + 0.5 * ADVExtraDelay) * GPMC_FCLK otherwise
•
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 2:
G = 0.5 * ADVExtraDelay * GPMC_FCLK if ((ADVWrOffTime – ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 3)
G = (1 + 0.5 * ADVExtraDelay) * GPMC_FCLK if ((ADVWrOffTime – ClkActivationTime – 1) is a multiple of 3)
G = (2 + 0.5 * ADVExtraDelay) * GPMC_FCLK if ((ADVWrOffTime – ClkActivationTime – 2) is a multiple of 3)
(8) For OE falling edge (OE activated) / IO DIR rising edge (IN direction) :
•
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 0:
H = 0.5 * OEExtraDelay * GPMC_FCLK
•
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 1:
H = 0.5 * OEExtraDelay * GPMC_FCLK if (ClkActivationTime and OEOnTime are odd) or (ClkActivationTime and OEOnTime are
even)
H = (1 + 0.5 * OEExtraDelay) * GPMC_FCLK otherwise
•
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 2:
H = 0.5 * OEExtraDelay * GPMC_FCLK if ((OEOnTime – ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 3)
H = (1 + 0.5 * OEExtraDelay) * GPMC_FCLK if ((OEOnTime – ClkActivationTime – 1) is a multiple of 3)
H = (2 + 0.5 * OEExtraDelay) * GPMC_FCLK if ((OEOnTime – ClkActivationTime – 2) is a multiple of 3)
For OE rising edge (OE deactivated):
•
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 0:
H = 0.5 * OEExtraDelay * GPMC_FCLK
•
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 1:
H = 0.5 * OEExtraDelay * GPMC_FCLK if (ClkActivationTime and OEOffTime are odd) or (ClkActivationTime and OEOffTime are
even)
H = (1 + 0.5 * OEExtraDelay) * GPMC_FCLK otherwise
•
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 2:
H = 0.5 * OEExtraDelay * GPMC_FCLK if ((OEOffTime – ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 3)
H = (1 + 0.5 * OEExtraDelay) * GPMC_FCLK if ((OEOffTime – ClkActivationTime – 1) is a multiple of 3)
H = (2 + 0.5 * OEExtraDelay) * GPMC_FCLK if ((OEOffTime – ClkActivationTime – 2) is a multiple of 3)
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
233
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 8-33. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for GPMC/NOR Flash
Interface - Synchronous Mode (continued)
(see Figure 8-21, Figure 8-22, Figure 8-23 for Non-Multiplexed Modes)
(see Figure 8-24, Figure 8-25, Figure 8-26 for Multiplexed Modes)
OPP100
MIN
E - 3(4)
NO
.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MAX
E + 5(4)
I + 6(9)
12 td(CLKH-nOEIV)
15 td(CLKH-nWE)
16 td(CLKH-Data)
18 td(CLKH-nBE)
19 tw(nCSV)
Delay time, GPMC_CLK rising edge to GPMC_OE_RE invalid
Delay time, GPMC_CLK rising edge to GPMC_WE transition
Delay time, GPMC_CLK rising edge to GPMC_D[15:0] data bus transition
Delay time, GPMC_CLK rising edge to GPMC_BE0_CLE, GPMC_BE1 transition
Pulse duration, GPMC_CS[x] low
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
I - 3(9)
J - 3(10)
J - 3(10)
A(11)
J + 3(10)
J + 3(10)
20 tw(nBEV)
Pulse duration, GPMC_BE0_CLE, GPMC_BE1 low
C(12)
K(13)
21 tw(nADVV)
Pulse duration, GPMC_ADV_ALE low
(9) For WE falling edge (WE activated):
•
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 0:
I = 0.5 * WEExtraDelay * GPMC_FCLK
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 1:
•
I = 0.5 * WEExtraDelay * GPMC_FCLK if (ClkActivationTime and WEOnTime are odd) or (ClkActivationTime and WEOnTime are
even)
I = (1 + 0.5 * WEExtraDelay) * GPMC_FCLK otherwise
•
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 2:
I = 0.5 * WEExtraDelay * GPMC_FCLK if ((WEOnTime – ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 3)
I = (1 + 0.5 * WEExtraDelay) * GPMC_FCLK if ((WEOnTime – ClkActivationTime – 1) is a multiple of 3)
I = (2 + 0.5 * WEExtraDelay) * GPMC_FCLK if ((WEOnTime – ClkActivationTime – 2) is a multiple of 3)
For WE rising edge (WE deactivated):
•
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 0:
I = 0.5 * WEExtraDelay * GPMC_FCLK
•
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 1:
I = 0.5 * WEExtraDelay * GPMC_FCLK if (ClkActivationTime and WEOffTime are odd) or (ClkActivationTime and WEOffTime are
even)
I = (1 + 0.5 * WEExtraDelay) * GPMC_FCLK otherwise
•
Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 2:
I = 0.5 * WEExtraDelay * GPMC_FCLK if ((WEOffTime – ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 3)
I = (1 + 0.5 * WEExtraDelay) * GPMC_FCLK if ((WEOffTime – ClkActivationTime – 1) is a multiple of 3)
I = (2 + 0.5 * WEExtraDelay) * GPMC_FCLK if ((WEOffTime – ClkActivationTime – 2) is a multiple of 3)
(10) J = GPMC_FCLK period.
(11) For single read: A = (CSRdOffTime - CSOnTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) * GPMC_FCLK period
For burst read: A = (CSRdOffTime - CSOnTime + (n - 1) * PageBurstAccessTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) * GPMC_FCLK period [n
= page burst access number]
For burst write: A = (CSWrOffTime - CSOnTime + (n - 1) * PageBurstAccessTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) * GPMC_FCLK period [n
= page burst access number]
(12) For single read: C = RdCycleTime * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) * GPMC_FCLK
For burst read: C = (RdCycleTime + (n – 1) * PageBurstAccessTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) * GPMC_FCLK [n = page burst
access number]
For Burst write: C = (WrCycleTime + (n – 1) * PageBurstAccessTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) * GPMC_FCLK [n = page burst
access number]
(13) For read: K = (ADVRdOffTime - ADVOnTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) * GPMC_FCLK
For write: K = (ADVWrOffTime - ADVOnTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) * GPMC_FCLK
234
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
2
1
2
GPMC_CLK
3
4
19
GPMC_CS[x]
5
7
GPMC_A[27:0]
Address
8
8
20
GPMC_BE1
7
20
GPMC_BE0_CLE
9
9
21
10
GPMC_ADV_ALE
GPMC_OE
11
12
14
13
GPMC_AD[15:0]
GPMC_WAIT[x]
D0
23
22
Figure 8-21. GPMC Non-Multiplexed NOR Flash - Synchronous Single Read (GPMCFCLKDIVIDER = 0)
2
1
2
GPMC_CLK
3
4
19
GPMC_CS[x]
5
GPMC_A[27:0]
GPMC_BE1
Address
20
8
8
7
7
Valid
20
Valid
GPMC_BE0_CLE
9
9
10
12
21
GPMC_ADV_ALE
GPMC_OE
11
14
13
13
13
13
GPMC_D[15:0]
(Non-Multplexed Mode)
D0
22
D1
D2
D3
23
GPMC_WAIT[x]
Figure 8-22. GPMC Non-Multiplexed NOR Flash - 14x16-bit Synchronous Burst Read
(GPMCFCLKDIVIDER = 0)
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
235
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
2
2
1
GPMC_CLK
GPMC_CS[x]
3
4
19
5
7
GPMC_A[27:0]
GPMC_BE1
Address
18
18
18
18
18
18
7
GPMC_BE0_CLE
9
9
10
21
GPMC_ADV_ALE
GPMC_WE
15
15
16
16
16
16
GPMC_D[15:0]
(Non-Multiplexed Mode)
D0
23
D1
22
D2
D3
GPMC_WAIT[x]
Figure 8-23. GPMC Non-Multiplexed NOR Flash - Synchronous Burst Write (GPMCFCLKDIVIDER = 0)
2
1
2
GPMC_CLK
3
4
19
GPMC_CS[x]
5
7
GPMC_A[27:16]
Address
20
8
8
GPMC_BE1
7
20
GPMC_BE0_CLE
9
9
21
10
12
GPMC_ADV_ALE
GPMC_OE
11
5
6
13
14
GPMC_D[15:0]
(Multiplexed Mode)
Address (LSB)
23
D0
22
GPMC_WAIT[x]
Figure 8-24. GPMC Multiplexed NOR Flash - Synchronous Single Read (GPMCFCLKDIVIDER = 0)
236
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
2
1
2
GPMC_CLK
3
4
19
GPMC_CS[x]
GPMC_A[27:16]
GPMC_BE1
5
7
Address (MSB)
8
8
20
Valid
7
20
Valid
GPMC_BE0_CLE
9
9
10
12
21
GPMC_ADV_ALE
GPMC_OE
11
14
13
13
13
13
5
6
GPMC_D[15:0]
(Multplexed Mode)
Address (LSB)
D0
22
D1
D2
D3
23
GPMC_WAIT[x]
Figure 8-25. GPMC Multiplexed NOR Flash - 14x16-bit Synchronous Burst Read (GPMCFCLKDIVIDER = 0)
2
2
1
GPMC_CLK
GPMC_CS[x]
3
4
19
5
7
6
GPMC_A[27:16]
GPMC_BE1
Address (MSB)
18
18
18
18
18
18
7
GPMC_BE0_CLE
9
9
10
21
GPMC_ADV_ALE
GPMC_WE
15
15
16
6,16
5
16
16
GPMC_D[15:0]
(Multiplexed Mode)
Address (LSB)
D0
D1
22
D2
D3
23
GPMC_WAIT[x]
Figure 8-26. GPMC Non-Multiplexed NOR Flash - Synchronous Burst Write (GPMCFCLKDIVIDER = 0)
8.8.2.2 GPMC/NOR Flash Interface Asynchronous Mode Timing (Non-Multiplexed and Multiplexed
Modes)
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
237
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 8-34. Timing Requirements for GPMC/NOR Flash Interface - Asynchronous Mode
(see Figure 8-27, Figure 8-28 for Non-Multiplexed Mode )
(see Figure 8-29, Figure 8-31 for Multiplexed Mode)
OPP100
MIN
NO.
UNIT
H(1) cycles
MAX
6
tacc(DAT)
21 tacc1-pgmode(DAT)
22 tacc2-pgmode(DAT)
Data maximum access time (GPMC_FCLK cycles)
Page mode successive data maximum access time (GPMC_FCLK
cycles)
P(2)
H(1)
cycles
cycles
Page mode first data maximum access time (GPMC_FCLK cycles)
(1) H = AccessTime * (TimeParaGranularity + 1)
(2) P = PageBurstAccessTime * (TimeParaGranularity + 1).
Table 8-35. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for GPMC/NOR Flash
Interface - Asynchronous Mode
(see Figure 8-27, Figure 8-28, Figure 8-29, Figure 8-30 for Non-Multiplexed Modes)
(see Figure 8-31, Figure 8-32 for Multiplexed Modes)
OPP100
MIN
NO
.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MAX
N(1)
A(2)
1
2
4
5
tw(nBEV)
Pulse duration, GPMC_BE0_CLE, GPMC_BE1 valid time
Pulse duration, GPMC_CS[x] low
ns
ns
ns
ns
tw(nCSV)
td(nCSV-nADVIV)
td(nCSV-nOEIV)
Delay time, GPMC_CS[x] valid to GPMC_NADV_ALE invalid
Delay time, GPMC_CS[x] valid to GPMC_OE_RE invalid (single read)
B - 2(3)
B + 4(3)
C + 4(4)
C - 2(4)
MUX0 and Non-Multi
Muxed pins
J - 2(5)
J + 4(5)
J + 4(5)
J + 4(5)
ns
ns
ns
Delay time, GPMC_A[27:0] address bus valid to
GPMC_CS[x] valid
MUX1 for
GPMC_A[15:0]
10 td(AV-nCSV)
J - 2(5)
J - 2(5)
MUX1/2 for
GPMC_A[27:20]
11 td(nBEV-nCSV)
13 td(nCSV-nADVV)
14 td(nCSV-nOEV)
Delay time, GPMC_BE0_CLE, GPMC_BE1 valid to GPMC_CS[x] valid
Delay time, GPMC_CS[x] valid to GPMC_ADV_ALE valid
Delay time, GPMC_CS[x] valid to GPMC_OE_RE valid
J - 2(5)
K - 2(6)
L - 2(7)
J + 4(5)
K + 4(6)
L + 4(7)
ns
ns
ns
MUX0 and Non-Multi
Muxed pins
G(8)
G(8)
ns
ns
MUX1 for
GPMC_A[15:0]
Pulse duration, GPMC_A[27:0] address bus invalid
between 2 successive R/W accesses
17 tw(AIV)
MUX1/2 for
GPMC_A[27:20]
G(8)
G(8)
ns
ns
GPMC_D[15:0]
(1) For single read: N = RdCycleTime * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) * GPMC_FCLK
For single write: N = WrCycleTime * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) * GPMC_FCLK
For burst read: N = (RdCycleTime + (n - 1) * PageBurstAccessTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) * GPMC_FCLK
For burst write: N = (WrCycleTime + (n - 1) * PageBurstAccessTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) * GPMC_FCLK
(2) For single read: A = (CSRdOffTime - CSOnTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) * GPMC_FCLK
For single write: A = (CSWrOffTime - CSOnTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) * GPMC_FCLK
For burst read: A = (CSRdOffTime - CSOnTime + (n - 1) * PageBurstAccessTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) * GPMC_FCLK
For burst write: A = (CSWrOffTime - CSOnTime + (n - 1) * PageBurstAccessTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) * GPMC_FCLK
(3) = B - nCS Max Delay + nADV Min Delay
For reading: B = ((ADVRdOffTime - CSOnTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 * (ADVExtraDelay - CSExtraDelay)) * GPMC_FCLK
For writing: B = ((ADVWrOffTime - CSOnTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 * (ADVExtraDelay - CSExtraDelay)) * GPMC_FCLK
(4) = C - nCS Max Delay + nOE Min Delay
C = ((OEOffTime - CSOnTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 * (OEExtraDelay - CSExtraDelay)) * GPMC_FCLK
(5) = J - Address Max Delay + nCS Min Delay
J = (CSOnTime * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 * CSExtraDelay) * GPMC_FCLK
(6) = K - nCS Max Delay + nADV Min Delay
K = ((ADVOnTime - CSOnTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 * (ADVExtraDelay - CSExtraDelay)) * GPMC_FCLK
(7) = L - nCS Max Delay + nOE Min Delay
L = ((OEOnTime - CSOnTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 * (OEExtraDelay - CSExtraDelay)) * GPMC_FCLK
(8) G = Cycle2CycleDelay * GPMC_FCLK
238
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 8-35. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for GPMC/NOR Flash
Interface - Asynchronous Mode (continued)
(see Figure 8-27, Figure 8-28, Figure 8-29, Figure 8-30 for Non-Multiplexed Modes)
(see Figure 8-31, Figure 8-32 for Multiplexed Modes)
OPP100
MIN
NO
.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MAX
19 td(nCSV-nOEIV)
Delay time, GPMC_CS[x] valid to GPMC_OE_RE invalid (burst read)
I - 2(9)
I + 4(9)
ns
ns
MUX0 and Non-Multi
Muxed pins
D(10)
D(10)
D(10)
MUX1 for
GPMC_A[15:0]
ns
ns
Pulse duration, GPMC_A[27:0] address bus valid:
second, third and fourth accesses
21 tw(AV)
MUX1/2 for
GPMC_A[27:20]
GPMC_D[15:0]
D(10)
E - 2(11)
F - 2(12)
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
26 td(nCSV-nWEV)
28 td(nCSV-nWEIV)
29 td(nWEV-DV)
30 td(DV-nCSV)
Delay time, GPMC_CS[x] valid to GPMC_WE valid
Delay time, GPMC_CS[x] valid to GPMC_WE invalid
E + 4(11)
F + 4(12)
2.0
Delay time, GPMC_WE valid to GPMC_D[15:0] data bus valid
Delay time, GPMC_D[15:0] data bus valid to GPMC_CS[x] valid
Delay time, GPMC_ADV_ALE valid to GPMC_D[15:0] MUX0 and Non-Multi
J - 2(5)
J + 4(5)
37? td(ADVV-AIV)
2.0
ns
address invalid
Muxed pins
MUX0 and Non-Multi
Muxed pins
2.0
2.0
ns
ns
MUX1 for
GPMC_A[15:0]
Delay time, GPMC_OE_RE valid to GPMC_D[15:0]
address/data busses phase end
38 td(nOEV-AIV)
MUX1/2 for
2.0
2.0
2.0
ns
ns
ns
GPMC_A[27:20]
GPMC_D[15:0]
MUX0 and Non-Multi
Muxed pins
39? td(AIV-ADVV)
Delay time, GPMC_ ???
(9) = I - nCS Max Delay + nOE Min Delay
I = ((OEOffTime + (n - 1) * PageBurstAccessTime - CSOnTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 * (OEExtraDelay - CSExtraDelay)) *
GPMC_FCLK
(10) D = PageBurstAccessTime * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) * GPMC_FCLK
(11) = E - nCS Max Delay + nWE Min Delay
E = ((WEOnTime - CSOnTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 * (WEExtraDelay - CSExtraDelay)) * GPMC_FCLK
(12) = F - nCS Max Delay + nWE Min Delay
F = ((WEOffTime - CSOnTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 * (WEExtraDelay - CSExtraDelay)) * GPMC_FCLK
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
239
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
GPMC_FCLK
GPMC_CLK
6
2
GPMC_CS[x]
10
GPMC_A[10:1]
GPMC_BE1
Valid Address
1
11
11
1
GPMC_BE0_CLE
GPMC_ADV_ALE
4
13
5
14
GPMC_OE
GPMC_AD[15:0]
Data In 0
Data In 0
GPMC_WAIT[x]
Figure 8-27. GPMC/Non-Multiplexed NOR Flash - Asynchronous Read - Single Word Timing
GPMC_FCLK
GPMC_CLK
6
6
2
2
GPMC_CS[x]
17
10
11
10
11
GPMC_A[10:1]
Address 2
1
Address 1
1
GPMC_BE1
GPMC_BE0_CLE
GPMC_ADV_ALE
11
11
1
1
4
4
13
13
5
5
14
14
GPMC_OE
GPMC_AD[15:0]
Data Upper
GPMC_WAIT[x]
Figure 8-28. GPMC/Non-Multiplexed NOR Flash - Asynchronous Read - 32-Bit Access Timing
240
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
GPMC_FCLK
GPMC_CLK
22
21
21
21
2
GPMC_CS[x]
10
11
GPMC_A[10:1]
Add0
Add1
Add2
Add3
Add4
1
1
GPMC_BE1
11
GPMC_BE0_CLE
GPMC_ADV_ALE
13
19
14
GPMC_OE
GPMC_AD[15:0]
D0
D1
D2
D3
D3
GPMC_WAIT[x]
Figure 8-29. GPMC/Non-Multiplexed Only NOR Flash - Asynchronous Read - Page Mode 4x16-Bit Timing
GPMC_FCLK
GPMC_CLK
2
GPMC_CS[x]
10
GPMC_A[10:1]
GPMC_BE1
Valid Address
1
11
11
1
GPMC_BE0_CLE
GPMC_ADV_ALE
4
13
28
26
GPMC_WE
30
GPMC_AD[15:0]
Data OUT
GPMC_WAIT[x]
Figure 8-30. GPMC/Non-Multiplexed NOR Flash - Asynchronous Write - Single Word Timing
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
241
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
GPMC_FCLK
GPMC_CLK
GPMC_CS[x]
2
6
10
Address (MSB)
1
GPMC_A[26:17]
11
GPMC_BE1
11
1
GPMC_BE0_CLE
13
4
GPMC_ADV_ALE
GPMC_OE
5
14
30
38
GPMC_A[16:1]
GPMC_AD[15:0]
Address (LSB)
Data IN
Data IN
GPMC_WAIT[x]
Figure 8-31. GPMC/Multiplexed NOR Flash - Asynchronous Read - Single Word Timing
GPMC_FCLK
GPMC_CLK
GPMC_CS[x]
2
10
11
Address (MSB)
1
GPMC_A[26:17]
GPMC_BE1
11
1
GPMC_BE0_CLE
13
4
GPMC_ADV_ALE
GPMC_WE
28
26
30
Valid Address (LSB)
29
GPMCA[16:1]
GPMC_AD[15:0]
Data OUT
GPMC_WAIT[x]
Figure 8-32. GPMC/Multiplexed NOR Flash - Asynchronous Write - Single Word Timing
242
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
8.8.2.3 GPMC/NAND Flash and ELM Interface Timing
Table 8-36. Timing Requirements for GPMC/NAND Flash Interface
(see Figure 8-35)
NO.
OPP100
UNIT
MIN
MAX
13 tacc(DAT)
Data maximum access time (GPMC_FCLK cycles)
J(1)
cycles
(1) J = AccessTime * (TimeParaGranularity + 1)
Table 8-37. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for GPMC/NAND Flash
Interface
(see Figure 8-33, Figure 8-34, Figure 8-35, Figure 8-36)
OPP100
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
A(1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
tw(nWEV)
Pulse duration, GPMC_WE valid time
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
td(nCSV-nWEV)
td(CLEH-nWEV)
td(nWEV-DV)
Delay time, GPMC_CS[X] valid to GPMC_WE valid
Delay time, GPMC_BE0_CLE high to GPMC_WE valid
Delay time, GPMC_D[15:0] valid to GPMC_WE valid
Delay time, GPMC_WE invalid to GPMC_AD[15:0] invalid
Delay time, GPMC_WE invalid to GPMC_BE0_CLE invalid
Delay time, GPMC_WE invalid to GPMC_CS[X] invalid
Delay time, GPMC_ADV_ALE High to GPMC_WE valid
Delay time, GPMC_WE invalid to GPMC_ADV_ALE invalid
Cycle time, write cycle time
B - 2(2)
C - 2(3)
D - 2(4)
E - 2(5)
F - 2(6)
G - 2(7)
C - 2(3)
F - 2(6)
B + 4(2)
C + 4(3)
D + 4(4)
E + 4(5)
F + 4(6)
G + 4(7)
C + 4(3)
F + 4(6)
H(8)
td(nWEIV-DIV)
td(nWEIV-CLEIV)
td(nWEIV-nCSIV)
td(ALEH-nWEV)
td(nWEIV-ALEIV)
10 tc(nWE)
11 td(nCSV-nOEV)
12 tw(nOEV)
Delay time, GPMC_CS[X] valid to GPMC_OE_RE valid
Pulse duration, GPMC_OE_RE valid time
I - 2(9)
I + 4(9)
K(10)
L(11)
13 tc(nOE)
Cycle time, read cycle time
14 td(nOEIV-nCSIV)
Delay time, GPMC_OE_RE invalid to GPMC_CS[X] invalid
M - 2(12)
M + 4(12)
(1) A = (WEOffTime - WEOnTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) * GPMC_FCLK
(2) = B + nWE Min Delay - nCS Max Delay
B = ((WEOnTime - CSOnTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 * (WEExtraDelay - CSExtraDelay)) * GPMC_FCLK
(3) = C + nWE Min Delay - CLE Max Delay
C = ((WEOnTime - ADVOnTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 * (WEExtraDelay - ADVExtraDelay)) * GPMC_FCLK
(4) = D + nWE Min Delay - Data Max Delay
D = (WEOnTime * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 * WEExtraDelay ) * GPMC_FCLK
(5) =E + Data Min Delay - nWE Max Delay
E = ((WrCycleTime - WEOffTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) - 0.5 * WEExtraDelay ) * GPMC_FCLK
(6) = F + CLE Min Delay - nWE Max Delay
F = ((ADVWrOffTime - WEOffTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 * (ADVExtraDelay - WEExtraDelay )) * GPMC_FCLK
(7) =G + nCS Min Delay - nWE Max Delay
G = ((CSWrOffTime - WEOffTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 * (CSExtraDelay - WEExtraDelay )) * GPMC_FCLK
(8) H = WrCycleTime * (1 + TimeParaGranularity) * GPMC_FCLK
(9) = I + nOE Min Delay - nCS Max Delay
I = ((OEOnTime - CSOnTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 * (OEExtraDelay - CSExtraDelay)) * GPMC_FCLK
(10) K = (OEOffTime - OEOnTime) * (1 + TimeParaGranularity) * GPMC_FCLK
(11) L = RdCycleTime * (1 + TimeParaGranularity) * GPMC_FCLK
(12) =M + nCS Min Delay - nOE Max Delay
M = ((CSRdOffTime - OEOffTime) * (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 * (CSExtraDelay - OEExtraDelay ))* GPMC_FCLK
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
243
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
GPMC_FCLK
2
3
7
GPMC_CS[x]
6
GPMC_BE0_CLE
GPMC_ADV_ALE
GPMC_OE
1
GPMC_WE
4
5
GPMC_A[16:1]
GPMC_AD[15:0]
Command
Figure 8-33. GPMC/NAND Flash - Command Latch Cycle Timing
GPMC_FCLK
GPMC_CS[x]
2
7
GPMC_BE0_CLE
8
9
GPMC_ADV_ALE
GPMC_OE
10
1
GPMC_WE
5
4
GPMC_A[16:1]
GPMC_AD[15:0]
Address
Figure 8-34. GPMC/NAND Flash - Address Latch Cycle Timing
244
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
GPMC_FCLK
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
13
11
16
GPMC_CS[x]
GPMC_BE0_CLE
GPMC_ADV_ALE
GPMC_OE
15
14
GPMC_A[16:1]
GPMC_AD[15:0]
Data
GPMC_WAIT[x]
Figure 8-35. GPMC/NAND Flash - Data Read Cycle Timing
GPMC_FCLK
2
7
GPMC_CS[x]
GPMC_BE0_CLE
GPMC_ADV_ALE
GPMC_OE
10
1
GPMC_WE
4
5
GPMC_A[16:1]
GPMC_AD[15:0]
Data
Figure 8-36. GPMC/NAND Flash - Data Write Cycle Timing
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
245
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
8.9 High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI)
The device includes an HDMI 1.3a-compliant transmitter for digital video and audio data to display
devices. The HDMI interface consists of a digital HDMI transmitter core with TMDS encoder, a core
wrapper with interface logic and control registers, and a transmit PHY, with the following features:
•
•
•
•
•
Hot-plug detection
Consumer electronics control (CEC) messages
DVI 1.0 compliant (only RGB pixel format)
CEA 861-D and VESA DMT formats
Supports up to 165-MHz pixel clock
–
–
1920 x 1080p @75 Hz with 8-bit/component color depth
1600 x 1200 @60 Hz with 8-bit/component color depth
•
Support for deep-color mode:
–
–
10-bit/component color depth up to 1080p @60 Hz (Max pixel clock = 148.5 MHz)
12-bit/component color depth up to 720p/1080i @60 Hz (Max pixel clock = 123.75 MHz)
•
•
TMDS clock to the HDMI-PHY is up to 185.625 MHz
Maximum supported pixel clock:
–
–
–
165 MHz for 8-bit color depth
148.5 MHz for 10-bit color depth
123.75 MHz for 12-bit color depth
•
•
•
Uncompressed multichannel (up to eight channels) audio (L-PCM) support
Master I2C interface for display data channel (DDC) connection
Options available to support HDCP encryption engine for transmitting protected audio and video (for
information, contact your local TI sales representative).
For more details on the HDMI, see the High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) chapter of the AM387x
Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number: SPRUGZ7).
8.9.1 HDMI Design Guidelines
This section provides PCB design and layout guidelines for the HDMI interface. The design rules constrain
PCB trace length, PCB trace skew, signal integrity, cross-talk, and signal timing. Simulation and system
design work has been done to ensure the HDMI interface requirements are met.
8.9.1.1 HDMI Interface Schematic
The HDMI bus is separated into three main sections:
1. Transition Minimized Differential Signaling (TMDS) high-speed digital video interface
2. Display Data Channel (I2C bus for configuration and status exchange between two devices)
3. Consumer Electronics Control (optional) for remote control of connected devices.
The DDC and CEC are low-speed interfaces, so nothing special is required for PCB layout of these
signals. Their connection is shown in Figure 8-37, HDMI Interface High-Level Schematic.
The TMDS channels are high-speed differential pairs and, therefore, require the most care in layout.
Specifications for TMDS layout are below.
Figure 8-37 shows the HDMI interface schematic. The specific pin numbers can be obtained from
Table 3-15, HDMI Terminal Functions.
246
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
DEVICE
HDMI CONNECTOR
TD0
HDMI_DP0
TD0+
Shld
TD0-
HDMI_DN0
TD1
HDMI_DP1
HDMI_DN1
TD1+
Shld
TD1-
TPD12S521
or other
ESD Protection
w/I2C-Level
Translation
TD2
Shld
HDMI_DP2
HDMI_DN2
TD2+
TD2-
HDMI_CLKP
HDMI_CLKN
TCLK
TCLK
Shld
TCLK+
HDMI_CEC
CEC
DDC
Gnd
3.3 V
Rpullup(A)
HDMI_SDA
HDMI_SCL
SDA
SCL
A. 5K-10K Ω pullup resistors are required if not integrated in the ESD protection chip.
Figure 8-37. HDMI Interface High-Level Schematic
8.9.1.2 TMDS Routing
The TMDS signals are high-speed differential pairs. Care must be taken in the PCB layout of these signals
to ensure good signal integrity.
The TMDS differential signal traces must be routed to achieve 100 Ω (±10%) differential impedance and
60 Ω (±10%) single-ended impedance. Single-ended impedance control is required because differential
signals are extremely difficult to closely couple on PCBs and, therefore, single-ended impedance becomes
important.
These impedances are impacted by trace width, trace spacing, distance to reference planes, and dielectric
material. Verify with a PCB design tool that the trace geometry for both data signal pairs results in as
close to 60 Ω impedance traces as possible. For best accuracy, work with your PCB fabricator to ensure
this impedance is met.
In general, closely coupled differential signal traces are not an advantage on PCBs. When differential
signals are closely coupled, tight spacing and width control is necessary. Very small width and spacing
variations affect impedance dramatically, so tight impedance control can be more problematic to maintain
in production.
Loosely coupled PCB differential signals make impedance control much easier. Wider traces and spacing
make obstacle avoidance easier, and trace width variations do not affect impedance as much; therefore, it
is easier to maintain an accurate impedance over the length of the signal. The wider traces also show
reduced skin effect and, therefore, often result in better signal integrity.
Table 8-38 shows the routing specifications for the TMDS signals.
Table 8-38. TMDS Routing Specifications
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
MAX
7000
0
UNIT
Mils
Stubs
Ω
MPU-to-HDMI header trace length
Number of stubs allowed on TMDS traces
TX/RX pair differential impedance
TX/RX single ended impedance
90
54
100
60
110
66
Ω
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
247
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 8-38. TMDS Routing Specifications (continued)
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
Number of vias on each TMDS trace
2
Vias(1)
TMDS differential pair to any other trace spacing
2*DS(2)
(1) Vias must be used in pairs with their distance minimized.
(2) DS = differential spacing of the HDMI traces.
8.9.1.3 DDC Signals
As shown in Figure 8-37, HDMI Interface High-Level Schematic, the DDC connects just like a standard
I2C bus. As such, resistor pullups must be used to pull up the open drain buffer signals unless they are
integrated into the ESD protection chip used. If used, these pullup resistors should be connected to a
3.3-V supply.
8.9.1.4 HDMI ESD Protection Device (Required)
Interfaces that connect to a cable such as HDMI generally require more ESD protection than can be built
into the processor's outputs. Therefore, this HDMI interface requires the use of an ESD protection chip to
provide adequate ESD protection and to translate I2C voltage levels from the 3.3 V supplied by the device
to the 5 volts required by the HDMI specification.
When selecting an ESD protection chip, choose the lowest capacitance ESD protection available to
minimize signal degradation. In no case should the ESD protection circuit capacitance be more than 5 pF.
TI manufactures devices that provide ESD protection for HDMI signals such as the TPD12S521. For more
information see the www.ti.com website.
8.9.1.5 PCB Stackup Specifications
Table 8-39 shows the stackup and feature sizes required for HDMI.
Table 8-39. HDMI PCB Stackup Specifications
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
6
MAX
UNIT
Layers
Layers
Cuts
PCB routing/plane layers
Signal routing layers
4
2
-
-
-
3
Number of ground plane cuts allowed within HDMI routing region
Number of layers between HDMI routing region and reference ground plane
PCB trace width
-
0
0
-
-
-
Layers
Mils
-
4
PCB BGA escape via pad size
-
20
10
0.4
-
Mils
PCB BGA escape via hole size
MPU device BGA pad size(1)(2)
-
Mils
mm
(1) Non-solder mask defined pad.
(2) Per IPC-7351A BGA pad size guideline.
8.9.1.6 Grounding
Each TMDS channel has its own shield pin which should be grounded to provide a return current path for
the TMDS signal.
248
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
8.10 High-Definition Video Processing Subsystem (HDVPSS)
The device High-Definition Video Processing Subsystem (HDVPSS) provides a video input interface for
external imaging peripherals (i.e., image sensors, video decoders, etc.) and a video output interface for
display devices, such as analog SDTV displays, digital HDTV displays, digital LCD panels, etc. It includes
HD and SD video encoders and an HDMI transmitter interface.
The device HDVPSS features include:
•
Two display processing pipelines with de-interlacing, scaling, alpha blending, chroma keying, color
space conversion, flicker filtering, and pixel format conversion.
•
•
HD/SD compositor features for PIP support.
Format conversions (up to 1080p 60 Hz) include scan format conversion, scan rate conversion,
aspect-ratio conversion, and frame size conversion.
•
•
Supports additional video processing capabilities by using the subsystem's memory-to-memory feature.
Two parallel video processing pipelines support HD (up to 1080p60) and SD (NTSC/PAL)
simultaneous outputs.
–
SD analog output with OSD with embedded timing codes (BT.656)
•
•
•
S-video or Composite output
2-channel SD-DAC with 10-bit resolution
Options available to support MacroVision and CGMS-A (contact local TI Sales rep for
information).
–
Digital HDMI 1.3a-compliant transmitter (for details, see Section 8.9, High-Definition Multimedia
Interface (HDMI)).
–
–
One digital video output supporting up to 30-bits @ 165 MHz
One digital video output supporting up to 24-bits @ 165 MHz
•
Two independently configurable external video input capture ports (up to 165 MHz).
–
–
–
–
16/24-bit HD digital video input or dual clock independent 8-bit SD inputs on each capture port.
8/16/24-bit digital video input
8-bit digital video input
Embedded sync and external sync modes are supported for all input configurations (VIN1 Port B
supports embedded sync only).
–
–
De-multiplexing of both pixel-to-pixel and line-to-line multiplexed streams, effectively supporting up
to 16 simultaneous SD inputs with a glueless interface to an external multiplexer such as the
TVP5158.
Additional features include: programmable color space conversion, scaler and chroma
downsampler, ancillary VANC/VBI data capture (decoded by software).
•
Graphics features:
–
–
–
–
Three independently-generated graphics layers.
Each supports full-screen resolution graphics in HD, SD or both.
Up/down scaler optimized for graphics.
Global and pixel-level alpha blending supported.
For more detailed information on specific features and registers, see the High Definition Video Processing
Subsystem chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual
(Literature Number: SPRUGZ7).
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
249
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
8.10.1 HDVPSS Electrical Data/Timing
Table 8-40. Timing Requirements for HDVPSS Input
(see Figure 8-38 and Figure 8-39)
OPP100
MIN
NO.
UNIT
MAX
VIN[X]A_CLK
1
2
3
7
tc(CLK)
Cycle time, VIN[x]A_CLK
6.06(1)
ns
ns
ns
ns
tw(CLKH)
Pulse duration, VIN[x]A_CLK high (45% of tc)
Pulse duration, VIN[x]A_CLK low (45% of tc)
Transition time, VIN[x]A_CLK (10%-90%)
3.02
3.02
tw(CLKH)
tt(CLK)
2.64
tsu(DE-CLK)
tsu(VSYNC-CLK)
tsu(FLD-CLK)
tsu(HSYNC-CLK)
tsu(D-CLK)
Input setup time, control valid to VIN[x]A_CLK high
Input setup time, data valid to VIN[x]A_CLK high
Input hold time, control valid from VIN[x]A_CLK high
4
4
0
0
4
5
ns
ns
th(CLK-DE)
th(CLK-VSYNC)
th(CLK-FLD)
th(CLK-HSYNC)
th(CLK-D)
Input hold time, data valid from VIN[x]A_CLK high
VIN[x]B_CLK
1
2
3
7
tc(CLK)
Cycle time, VIN[x]B_CLK
6.7(1)
3.02
3.02
ns
ns
ns
ns
tw(CLKH)
Pulse duration, VIN[x]B_CLK high (45% of tc)
Pulse duration, VIN[x]B_CLK low (45% of tc)
Transition time, VIN[x]B_CLK (10%-90%)
tw(CLKH)
tt(CLK)
2.64
tsu(DE-CLK)
tsu(VSYNC-CLK)
tsu(FLD-CLK)
tsu(HSYNC-CLK)
tsu(D-CLK)
Input setup time, control valid to VIN[x]B_CLK high
Input setup time, data valid to VIN[x]B_CLK high
Input hold time, control valid from VIN[x]B_CLK high
Input hold time, data valid from VIN[x]B_CLK high
4
4
0
0
4
5
ns
ns
th(CLK-DE)
th(CLK-VSYNC)
th(CLK-FLD)
th(CLK-HSYNC)
th(CLK-D)
(1) For maximum frequency of 165 MHz.
250
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 8-41. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for HDVPSS Output
(see Figure 8-38 and Figure 8-40)
OPP100
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
6.06(1)
3.02
MAX
1
2
3
7
tc(CLK)
Cycle time, VOUT[x]_CLK
ns
ns
ns
ns
tw(CLKH)
Pulse duration, VOUT[x]_CLK high (45% of tc)
Pulse duration, VOUT[x]_CLK low (45% of tc)
Transition time, VOUT[x]_CLK (10%-90%)
tw(CLKL)
3.02
tt(CLK)
2.64
1.4
td(CLK-AVID)
td(CLK-FLD)
td(CLK-VSYNC)
td(CLK-HSYNC)
td(CLK-RCR)
td(CLK-GYYC)
td(CLK-BCBC)
td(CLK-YYC)
td(CLK-C)
Delay time, VOUT[x]_CLK low (falling) to control valid
-1.6
-1.6
ns
6
Delay time, VOUT[0]_CLK low (falling) to data valid
Delay time, VOUT[1]_CLK low (falling) to data valid
1.4
ns
(1) For maximum frequency of 165 MHz.
3
2
1
VIN[x]A_CLK/
VIN[x]B_CLK/
VOUT[x]_CLK
7
1
7
Figure 8-38. HDVPSS Clock Timing
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
251
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
VIN[x]A_CLK/
VIN[x]B_CLK
(positive-edge clocking)
VIN[x]A_CLK/
VIN[x]B_CLK
(negative-edge clocking)
5
4
VIN[x]A/
VIN[x]B
Figure 8-39. HDVPSS Input Timing
VOUT[x]_CLK
VOUT[x]
6
Figure 8-40. HDVPSS Output Timing
252
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
8.10.2 Video DAC Guidelines and Electrical Data/Timing
The device's analog video DAC outputs can be operated in one of two modes: Normal mode and TVOUT
Bypass mode. In Normal mode, the device’s internal video amplifier is used. In TVOUT Bypass mode, the
internal video amplifier is bypassed and an external amplifier is required.
Figure 8-41 shows a typical circuit that permits connecting the analog video output from the device to
standard 75-Ω impedance video systems in Normal mode. Figure 8-42 shows a typical circuit that permits
connecting the analog video output from the device to standard 75-Ω impedance video systems in TVOUT
Bypass mode.
Reconstruction
Filter(A)
~9.5 MHz
TV_OUTx
(B)
CAC
ROUT
TV_VFBx
A. Reconstruction Filter (optional)
B. AC coupling capacitor (optional)
Figure 8-41. TV Output (Normal Mode)
75 Ω
Reconstruction
Filter(A)
~9.5 MHz
Amplifier
3.7 V/V
TV_VFBx
(B)
CAC
RLOAD
A. Reconstruction Filter (optional). Note: An amplifier with an integrated reconstruction filter can alternatively be used
instead of a discrete reconstruction filter.
B. AC coupling capacitor (optional)
Figure 8-42. TV Output (TVOUT Bypass Mode)
During board design, the onboard traces and parasitics must be matched for the channel. The video DAC
output pins (TV_OUTx/TV_VFBx) are very high-frequency analog signals and must be routed with
extreme care. As a result, the paths of these signals must be as short as possible, and as isolated as
possible from other interfering signals. In TVOUT Bypass mode, the load resistor and amplifier/buffer
should be placed as close as possible to the TV_VFBx pins. Other layout guidelines include:
•
Take special care to bypass the VDDA_VDAC_1P8 power supply pin with a capacitor. For more
information, see Section 7.2.9, Power-Supply Decoupling.
•
In TVOUT Bypass mode, place the RLOAD resistor as close as possible to the Reconstruction Filter
and Amplifier. In addition, place the 75-Ω resistor as close as possible (< 0.5 ") to the Amplifier/buffer
output pin. To maintain a high-quality video signal, the onboard traces after the 75-Ω resistor should
have a characteristic impedance of 75 Ω (± 20%).
•
In Normal mode, TV_VFBx is the most sensitive pin in the TV out system. The ROUT resistor should
be placed as close as possible to the device pins. To maintain a high-quality video signal, the onboard
traces leading to the TV_OUTx pin should have a characteristic impedance of 75 Ω (± 20%) starting
from the closest possible place to the device pin output.
•
•
•
Minimize input trace lengths to the device to reduce parasitic capacitance.
Include solid ground return paths.
Match trace lengths as close as possible within a video format group (i.e., Y and C for S-Video output
should match each other).
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
253
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
For additional Video DAC Design guidelines, see the High Definition Video Processing Subsystem chapter
of the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number:
SPRUGZ7).
Table 8-42. Static and Dynamic DAC Specifications
VDAC STATIC SPECIFICATIONS
PARAMETER
Reference Current Setting Resistor Normal Mode
(RSET
TEST CONDITIONS
MIN
4653
9900
2673
TYP
4700
10000
2700
MAX
4747
10100
2727
UNIT
Ω
)
TVOUT Bypass Mode
Ω
Output resistor between TV_OUTx Normal Mode
Ω
and TV_VFBx pins (ROUT
Load Resistor (RLOAD
)
TVOUT Bypass Mode
Normal Mode
N/A
)
75-Ω Inside the Display
TVOUT Bypass Mode
Normal Mode
1485
220
1500
1515
Ω
AC-Coupling Capacitor (Optional)
[CAC
uF
]
TVOUT Bypass Mode
Normal Mode
See External Amplifier Specification
Total Capacitance from TV_OUTx
to VSSA_VDAC_1P8
300
pF
TVOUT Bypass Mode
N/A
Resolution
10
Bits
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
V
Integral Non-Linearity (INL), Best
Fit
Normal Mode
-4
-1
4
TVOUT Bypass Mode
Normal Mode
1
Differential Non-Linearity (DNL)
-2.5
-1
2.5
1
TVOUT Bypass Mode
Normal Mode (RLOAD = 75 Ω)
Full-Scale Output Voltage
1.3
TVOUT Bypass Mode (RLOAD
1.5 kΩ)
=
0.7
V
Full-Scale Output Current
Gain Error
Normal Mode
N/A
TVOUT Bypass Mode
470
uA
Normal Mode (Composite) and
TVOUT Bypass Mode
-10
-20
10
%FS
%FS
Normal Mode (S-Video)
Normal Mode (Composite)
Normal Mode (S-Video)
Looking into TV_OUTx nodes
20
Gain Mismatch (Luma-to-Chroma)
Output Impedance
N/A
-10
10
%
75
Ω
VDAC DYNAMIC SPECIFICATIONS
TEST CONDITIONS MIN
PARAMETER
TYP
54
6
MAX
UNIT
MHz
MHz
Output Update Rate (FCLK
Signal Bandwidth
)
60
3 dB
Spurious-Free Dynamic Range
(SFDR) within bandwidth
FCLK = 54 MHz, FOUT = 1 MHz
FCLK = 54 MHz, FOUT = 1 MHz
50
54
6
dBc
dB
Signal-to-Noise Ration (SNR)
Normal Mode, 100 mVpp @ 6
MHz on VDDA_VDAC_1P8
Power Supply Rejection (PSR)
dB
TVOUT Bypass Mode, 100
mVpp @ 6 MHz on
20
VDDA_VDAC_1P8
254
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
8.11 Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C)
The device includes four inter-integrated circuit (I2C) modules which provide an interface to other devices
compliant with Philips Semiconductors Inter-IC bus (I2C-bus™) specification version 2.1. External
components attached to this 2-wire serial bus can transmit/receive 8-bit data to/from the device through
the I2C module. The I2C port does not support CBUS compatible devices.
The I2C port supports the following features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Compatible with Philips I2C Specification Revision 2.1 (January 2000)
Standard and fast modes from 10 - 400 Kbps (no fail-safe I/O buffers)
Noise filter to remove noise 50 ns or less
Seven- and ten-bit device addressing modes
Multimaster transmitter/slave receiver mode
Multimaster receiver/slave transmitter mode
Combined master transmit/receive and receive/transmit modes
Two DMA channels, one interrupt line
Built-in FIFO (32 byte) for buffered read or write.
For more detailed information on the I2C peripheral, see the Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Controller
Module chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual
(Literature Number: SPRUGZ7).
8.11.1 I2C Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 8-43. I2C Registers
HEX ADDRESS
I2C0
I2C1
I2C2
I2C3
ACRONYM
I2C_REVNB_LO
I2C_REVNB_HI
I2C_SYSC
REGISTER NAME
0x4802 8000
0x4802 8004
0x4802 8010
0x4802 8020
0x4802 8024
0x4802 A000
0x4802 A004
0x4802 A010
0x4802 A020
0x4802 A024
0x4819 C000
0x4819 C004
0x4819 C010
0x4819 C020
0x4819 C024
0x4819 E000
0x4819 E004
0x4819 E010
0x4819 E020
0x4819 E024
Module Revision (LOW BYTES)
Module Revision (HIGH BYTES)
System configuration
I2C_EOI
I2C End of Interrupt
I2C_IRQSTATUS_RA I2C Status Raw
W
0x4802 8028
0x4802 802C
0x4802 8030
0x4802 8034
0x4802 8038
0x4802 A028
0x4802 A02C
0x4802 A030
0x4802 A034
0x4802 A038
0x4819 C028
0x4819 C02C
0x4819 C030
0x4819 C034
0x4819 C038
0x4819 E028
0x4819 E02C
0x4819 E030
0x4819 E034
0x4819 E038
I2C_IRQSTATUS
I2C Status
I2C_IRQENABLE_SET I2C Interrupt Enable Set
I2C_IRQENABLE_CLR I2C Interrupt Enable Clear
I2C_WE
I2C Wakeup Enable
I2C_DMARXENABLE_ Receive DMA Enable Set
SET
0x4802 803C
0x4802 8040
0x4802 8044
0x4802 A03C
0x4802 A040
0x4802 A044
0x4819 C03C
0x4819 C040
0x4819 C044
0x4819 E03C
0x4819 E040
0x4819 E044
I2C_DMATXENABLE_ Transmit DMA Enable Set
SET
I2C_DMARXENABLE_ Receive DMA Enable Clear
CLR
I2C_DMATXENABLE_ Transmit DMA Enable Clear
CLR
0x4802 8048
0x4802 804C
0x4802 8090
0x4802 8094
0x4802 8098
0x4802 809C
0x4802 80A4
0x4802 80A8
0x4802 A048
0x4802 A04C
0x4802 A090
0x4802 A094
0x4802 A098
0x4802 A09C
0x4802 A0A4
0x4802 A0A8
0x4819 C048
0x4819 C04C
0x4819 C090
0x4819 C094
0x4819 C098
0x4819 C09C
0x4819 C0A4
0x4819 C0A8
0x4819 E048
0x4819 E04C
0x4819 E090
0x4819 E094
0x4819 E098
0x4819 E09C
0x4819 E0A4
0x4819 E0A8
I2C_DMARXWAKE_EN Receive DMA Wakeup
I2C_DMATXWAKE_EN Transmit DMA Wakeup
I2C_SYSS
I2C_BUF
I2C_CNT
I2C_DATA
I2C_CON
I2C_OA
System Status
Buffer Configuration
Data Counter
Data Access
I2C Configuration
I2C Own Address
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
255
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 8-43. I2C Registers (continued)
HEX ADDRESS
I2C0
I2C1
I2C2
I2C3
ACRONYM
I2C_SA
REGISTER NAME
I2C Slave Address
I2C Clock Prescaler
I2C SCL Low Time
I2C SCL High Time
System Test
0x4802 80AC
0x4802 80B0
0x4802 80B4
0x4802 80B8
0x4802 80BC
0x4802 80C0
0x4802 80C4
0x4802 80C8
0x4802 80CC
0x4802 80D0
0x4802 80D4
0x4802 A0AC
0x4802 A0B0
0x4802 A0B4
0x4802 A0B8
0x4802 A0BC
0x4802 A0C0
0x4802 A0C4
0x4802 A0C8
0x4802 A0CC
0x4802 A0D0
0x4802 A0D4
0x4819 C0AC
0x4819 C0B0
0x4819 C0B4
0x4819 C0B8
0x4819 C0BC
0x4819 C0C0
0x4819 C0C4
0x4819 C0C8
0x4819 C0CC
0x4819 C0D0
0x4819 C0D4
0x4819 E0AC
0x4819 E0B0
0x4819 E0B4
0x4819 E0B8
0x4819 E0BC
0x4819 E0C0
0x4819 E0C4
0x4819 E0C8
0x4819 E0CC
0x4819 E0D0
0x4819 E0D4
I2C_PSC
I2C_SCLL
I2C_SCLH
I2C_SYSTEST
I2C_BUFSTAT
I2C_OA1
I2C Buffer Status
I2C Own Address 1
I2C Own Address 2
I2C Own Address 3
Active Own Address
I2C_OA2
I2C_OA3
I2C_ACTOA
I2C_SBLOCK
I2C Clock Blocking Enable
256
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
8.11.2 I2C Electrical Data/Timing
Table 8-44. Timing Requirements for I2C Input Timings(1)
(see Figure 8-43)
OPP100
STANDARD
MODE
NO.
FAST MODE
UNIT
MIN MAX
MIN MAX
1
2
tc(SCL)
Cycle time, SCL
10
2.5
0.6
µs
µs
Setup time, SCL high before SDA low (for a repeated START
condition)
tsu(SCLH-SDAL)
4.7
4
Hold time, SCL low after SDA low (for a START and a
repeated START condition)
3
th(SDAL-SCLL)
0.6
µs
4
5
6
7
tw(SCLL)
Pulse duration, SCL low
4.7
1.3
0.6
100(2)
µs
µs
ns
µs
tw(SCLH)
Pulse duration, SCL high
4
tsu(SDAV-SCLH)
th(SCLL-SDAV)
Setup time, SDA valid before SCL high
Hold time, SDA valid after SCL low
250
0(3) 3.45(4)
0(3) 0.9(4)
Pulse duration, SDA high between STOP and START
conditions
8
tw(SDAH)
4.7
1.3
µs
(5)
9
tr(SDA)
Rise time, SDA
1000 20 + 0.1Cb
300
300
300
300
ns
ns
ns
ns
µs
ns
pF
(5)
(5)
(5)
10
11
12
13
14
15
tr(SCL)
Rise time, SCL
1000 20 + 0.1Cb
tf(SDA)
Fall time, SDA
300 20 + 0.1Cb
300 20 + 0.1Cb
tf(SCL)
Fall time, SCL
tsu(SCLH-SDAH)
tw(SP)
Setup time, SCL high before SDA high (for STOP condition)
Pulse duration, spike (must be suppressed)
Capacitive load for each bus line
4
0.6
0
50
(5)
Cb
400
400
(1) The I2C pins SDA and SCL do not feature fail-safe I/O buffers. These pins could potentially draw current when the device is powered
down.
(2) A Fast-mode I2C-bus™ device can be used in a Standard-mode I2C-bus system, but the requirement tsu(SDA-SCLH)≥ 250 ns must then be
met. This will automatically be the case if the device does not stretch the LOW period of the SCL signal. If such a device does stretch
the LOW period of the SCL signal, it must output the next data bit to the SDA line tr max + tsu(SDA-SCLH)= 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns
(according to the Standard-mode I2C-Bus Specification) before the SCL line is released.
(3) A device must internally provide a hold time of at least 300 ns for the SDA signal (referred to the VIHmin of the SCL signal) to bridge the
undefined region of the falling edge of SCL.
(4) The maximum th(SDA-SCLL) has only to be met if the device does not stretch the low period [tw(SCLL)] of the SCL signal.
(5) Cb = total capacitance of one bus line in pF. If mixed with HS-mode devices, faster fall-times are allowed.
9
11
I2C[x]_SDA
I2C[x]_SCL
6
8
14
4
13
5
10
1
12
3
7
2
3
Stop
Start
Repeated
Start
Stop
Figure 8-43. I2C Receive Timing
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
257
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 8-45. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for I2C Output Timings
(see Figure 8-44)
OPP100
STANDARD
NO.
PARAMETER
FAST MODE
UNIT
MODE
MIN MAX
MIN
MAX
16
17
tc(SCL)
Cycle time, SCL
10
2.5
µs
µs
Setup time, SCL high before SDA low (for a repeated START
condition)
tsu(SCLH-SDAL)
4.7
0.6
0.6
Hold time, SCL low after SDA low (for a START and a repeated
START condition)
18
th(SDAL-SCLL)
4
µs
19
20
21
22
tw(SCLL)
Pulse duration, SCL low
4.7
4
1.3
0.6
100
0
µs
µs
ns
µs
tw(SCLH)
Pulse duration, SCL high
tsu(SDAV-SCLH)
th(SCLL-SDAV)
Setup time, SDA valid before SCL high
Hold time, SDA valid after SCL low (for I2C bus devices)
250
0
3.45
0.9
Pulse duration, SDA high between STOP and START
conditions
23
24
25
26
27
tw(SDAH)
tr(SDA)
tr(SCL)
tf(SDA)
tf(SCL)
4.7
1.3
µs
ns
ns
ns
ns
20 + 0.1Cb
Rise time, SDA
Rise time, SCL
Fall time, SDA
Fall time, SCL
1000
1000
300
300
300
300
300
(1)
20 + 0.1Cb
(1)
20 + 0.1Cb
(1)
20 + 0.1Cb
300
(1)
28
29
tsu(SCLH-SDAH)
Cp
Setup time, SCL high before SDA high (for STOP condition)
Capacitance for each I2C pin
4
0.6
µs
10
10
pF
(1) Cb = total capacitance of one bus line in pF. If mixed with HS-mode devices, faster fall-times are allowed.
26
24
I2C[x]_SDA
21
23
19
28
20
25
I2C[x]_SCL
27
16
18
22
17
18
Stop
Start
Repeated
Start
Stop
Figure 8-44. I2C Transmit Timing
258
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
8.12 Imaging Subsystem (ISS)
The device Imaging Subsystem captures and processes pixel data from external image and video inputs.
The inputs can be connected to the Image Processing block through the Parallel Camera Interface
(CAM). . In addition, a Timing control module provides flash strobe and mechanical shutter interfaces.
The features of each component of the ISS are described below.
•
Parallel Camera (CAM) interface features:
–
Input format
•
•
Bayer pattern Raw (up to 16bit) or YCbCr 422 (8bit or 16bit) data.
ITU-R BT.656/1120 standard format
–
–
Generates HD/VD timing signals and field ID to an external timing generator, or can synchronize to
the external timing generator.
Support for progressive and interlaced sensors (hardware support for up to 2 fields and firmware
supports for higher number of fields, typically 3-, 4-, and 5-field sensors.
•
Image Sensor Interface (ISIF) features:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Support for up to 32K pixels (image size) in both the horizontal and vertical direction
Color space conversion for non-Bayer pattern Raw data
Digital black clamping with Horizontal/Vertical offset drift compensation
Vertical Line defect correction based on a lookup table
Color-dependent gain control and black level offset control
Ability to control output to the LPDDR/DDR2/DDR3 via an external write enable signal
Down sampling via programmable culling patterns
A-law/DPCM compression
Generating 16, 12 or 8bit output to memory
•
Two independent Resizers
–
–
–
–
–
–
Providing two different sizes of outputs simultaneously on one input
Maximum line width is 5376 and 2336, respectively
YUV422 to YUV420 conversion
Data output format: RGB565, ARGB888, YUV422 co sited and YUV4:2:0 planar
Resizer Ratio: x1/4096 ~ x20
Input from memory
•
Timing control module features:
–
–
–
STROBE signal for flash pre-strobe and flash strobe
SHUTTER signal for mechanical shutter control
Global reset control
For more detailed information on the ISS, see the ISS Overview section, the ISS Interfaces section, and
the ISS ISP section of the Watchdog Timer chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs)
Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number: SPRUGZ7).
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
259
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
8.12.1 ISSCAM Electrical Data/Timing
Table 8-46. Timing Requirements for ISSCAM(1) (see Figure 8-45)
OPP100
NOM
NO.
UNIT
MIN
6.73
3.03
3.03
MAX
1
2
3
4
tc(PCLK)
Cycle time, PCLK
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
tw(PCLKH)
Pulse duration, PCLK high
Pulse duration, PCLK low
Transition time, PCLK
tw(PCLKL)
tt(PCLK)
2.64
tsu(DATA-PCLK)
tsu(DE-PCLK)
tsu(VS-PCLK)
tsu(HS-PCLK)
tsu(FLD-PCLK)
th(PCLK-DATA)
th(PCLK-DE)
th(PCLK-VS)
th(PCLK-HS)
th(PCLK-FLD)
4
4
4
4
4
0
0
0
0
0
5
6
Input setup time, Data/Control valid before PCLK high/low
Input hold time, Data/Control valid after PCLK high/low
(1) H = period of baud rate, 1/programmed baud rate.
260
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 8-47. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for ISSCAM (see
Figure 8-45)
OPP100
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
MAX
14
15 td(PCLK-FLD)
16 td(PCLK-VS)
Delay time, PCLK rising/falling clock edge to Control valid
Delay time, PCLK rising/falling clock edge to Control valid
Delay time, PCLK rising/falling clock edge to Control valid
Delay time, PCLK rising/falling clock edge to Control valid
Delay time, PCLK rising/falling clock edge to Control valid
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
14
17 td(PCLK-HS)
14
18 td(PCLK-STROBE)
19 td(PCLK-SHUTTER)
14
14
PCLK
(negative edge clocking)
4
1
3
PCLK
(positive edge clocking)
2
4
Data/Control input
Data/Control output
5
6
7
Figure 8-45. ISSCAM Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
261
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
8.13 LPDDR/DDR2/DDR3 Memory Controller
The device has a dedicated interface to DDR3, DDR2, and LPDDR SDRAM. It supports JEDEC standard
compliant LPDDR, DDR2 and DDR3 SDRAM devices with the following features:
•
•
•
16-bit or 32-bit data path to external SDRAM memory
Memory device capacity: 64Mb, 128Mb, 256Mb, 512Mb, 1Gb, and 2Gb devices
Support for two independent chip selects, with their corresponding register sets, and independent page
tracking
•
•
Two interfaces with associated LPDDR/DDR2/DDR3 PHYs
Dynamic memory manager allows for interleaving of data between the two DDR interfaces.
For details on the LPDDR/DDR2/DDR3 Memory Controller, see the DDR2/DDR3 Memory Controller
chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature
Number: SPRUGZ7).
8.13.1 LPDDR/DDR2/DDR3 Memory Controller Electrical Data/Timing
Table 8-48. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for LPDDR/DDR2/DDR3
(1)
Memory Controller
OPP100
NO.
UNIT
MIN
5
MAX
LPDDR mode
1
tc(DDR_CLK)
Cycle time, DDR[x]_CLK
ns
DDR2/DDR3 mode
2.5
(1) The PLL_DDR Controller must be programmed such that the resulting DDR[x]_CLK clock frequency is within the specified range.
1
DDR[x]_CLK
Figure 8-46. LPDDR/DDR2/DDR3 Memory Controller Clock Timing
8.13.1.1 DDR2 Routing Guidelines
8.13.1.1.1 Board Designs
TI only supports board designs that follow the guidelines outlined in this document. The switching
characteristics and the timing diagram for the DDR2 memory controller are shown in Table 8-49 and
Figure 8-47.
Table 8-49. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for DDR2 Memory
Controller
-1G
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
1
tc(DDR_CLK)
Cycle time, DDR_CLK
2.5
8
ns
1
DDR_CLK
Figure 8-47. DDR2 Memory Controller Clock Timing
8.13.1.1.2 DDR2 Interface
This section provides the timing specification for the DDR2 interface as a PCB design and manufacturing
262
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
specification. The design rules constrain PCB trace length, PCB trace skew, signal integrity, cross-talk,
and signal timing. These rules, when followed, result in a reliable DDR2 memory system without the need
for a complex timing closure process. For more information regarding the guidelines for using this DDR2
specification, see the Understanding TI’s PCB Routing Rule-Based DDR Timing Specification Application
Report (Literature Number: SPRAAV0).
8.13.1.1.2.1 DDR2 Interface Schematic
Figure 8-48 shows the DDR2 interface schematic for a x32 DDR2 memory system. In Figure 8-49 the x16
DDR2 system schematic is identical except that the high-word DDR2 device is deleted.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
263
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
DDR2
DQ0
DDR[x]_D[0]
DDR[x]_D[7]
DQ7
LDM
LDQS
DDR[x]_DQM[0]
DDR[x]_DQS[0]
DDR[x]_DQS[0]
DDR[x]_D[8]
LDQS
DQ8
DDR[x]_D[15]
DDR[x]_DQM[1]
DDR[x]_DQS[1]
DQ15
UDM
UDQS
DDR[x]_DQS[1]
UDQS
ODT
DDR[x]_ODT[0]
T0
DDR2
ODT
DDR_ODT1
DDR_D16
NC
DQ0
DDR[x]_D[23
DDR[x]_DQM[2]
DDR[x]_DQS[2]
DQ7
LDM
LDQS
DDR[x]_DQS[2]
DDR[x]_D[24]
LDQS
DQ8
DDR[x]_D[31]
DDR[x]_DQM[3]
DDR[x]_DQS[3]
DDR[x]_DQS[3]
DQ15
UDM
UDQS
UDQS
DDR[x]_BA[0]
T0
BA0
BA0
DDR[x]_BA[2]
DDR[x]_A[0]
T0
T0
BA2
A0
BA2
A0
DDR[x]_A[14]
DDR[x]_CS[0]
T0
T0
A14
CS
A14
CS
DDR[x]_CS[1]
DDR[x]_CAS
DDR[x]_RAS
NC
CAS
RAS
Vio 1.8(A)
CAS
RAS
T0
T0
T0
T0
T0
T0
DDR[x]_WE
DDR[x]_CKE
DDR[x]_CLK
WE
WE
CKE
CKE
0.1 µF
0.1 µF
1 K Ω 1%
CK
CK
CK
CK
DDR[x]_CLK
VREF VREF
VREF VREF
VREFSSTL_DDR[x]
VREF
0.1 µF(B)
0.1 µF(B)
0.1 µF(B)
1 K Ω 1%
DDR[x]_RST
DDR[x]_VTP
NC
50 Ω ( 2%)
T0
Termination is required. See terminator comments.
A. Vio1.8 is the power supply for the DDR2 memories and the AM387x DDR2 interface.
B. One of these capacitors can be eliminated if the divider and its capacitors are placed near a VREF pin.
Figure 8-48. 32-Bit DDR2 High-Level Schematic
264
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
DDR2
DQ0
DDR[x]_D[0]
DDR[x]_D[7]
DQ7
LDM
LDQS
DDR[x]_DQM[0]
DDR[x]_DQS[0]
DDR[x]_DQS[0]
DDR[x]_D[8]
LDQS
DQ8
DDR[x]_D[15]
DDR[x]_DQM[1]
DDR[x]_DQS[1]
DDR[x]_DQS[1]
DQ15
UDM
UDQS
UDQS
DDR[x]_ODT[0]
DDR[x]_ODT[1]
DDR[x]_D[16]
T0
NC
ODT
NC
Vio 1.8(A)
DDR[x]_D[23]
NC
NC
DDR[x]_DQM[2]
1 KΩ
1 KΩ
DDR[x]_DQS[2]
DDR[x]_DQS[2]
NC
DDR[x]_D[24]
Vio 1.8(A)
DDR[x]_D[31]
DDR[x]_DQM[3]
DDR[x]_DQS[3]
DDR[x]_DQS[3]
NC
NC
1 KΩ
1 KΩ
DDR[x]_BA[0]
T0
BA0
DDR[x]_BA[2]
DDR[x]_A[0]
T0
T0
BA2
A0
DDR[x]_A[14]
DDR[x]_CS[0]
DDR[x]_CS[1]
DDR[x]_CAS
DDR[x]_RAS
DDR[x]_WE
T0
T0
A14
CS
NC
CAS
RAS
T0
T0
T0
T0
T0
T0
Vio 1.8(A)
WE
DDR[x]_CKE
DDR[x]_CLK
CKE
CK
CK
1 K Ω 1%
VREF
0.1 µF
0.1 µF
DDR[x]_CLK
VREFSSTL_DDR[x]
VREF VREF
0.1 µF(B)
0.1 µF(B)
1 K Ω 1%
DDR[x]_RST
DDR[x]_VTP
NC
50 Ω ( 2%)
T0
Termination is required. See terminator comments.
A. Vio1.8 is the power supply for the DDR2 memories and the AM387x DDR2 interface.
B. One of these capacitors can be eliminated if the divider and its capacitors are placed near a VREF pin.
Figure 8-49. 16-Bit DDR2 High-Level Schematic
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
265
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
8.13.1.1.2.2 Compatible JEDEC DDR2 Devices
Table 8-50 shows the parameters of the JEDEC DDR2 devices that are compatible with this interface.
Generally, the DDR2 interface is compatible with x16 DDR2-800 speed grade DDR2 devices.
Table 8-50. Compatible JEDEC DDR2 Devices (Per Interface)
NO.
1
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
UNIT
JEDEC DDR2 device speed grade(1)
JEDEC DDR2 device bit width
JEDEC DDR2 device count(2)
JEDEC DDR2 device ball count(3)
DDR2-800
2
x16
1
x16
2
Bits
Devices
Balls
3
4
84
92
(1) Higher DDR2 speed grades are supported due to inherent JEDEC DDR2 backwards compatibility.
(2) One DDR2 device is used for a 16-bit DDR2 memory system. Two DDR2 devices are used for a 32-bit DDR2 memory system.
(3) The 92-ball devices are retained for legacy support. New designs will migrate to 84-ball DDR2 devices. Electrically, the 92- and 84-ball
DDR2 devices are the same.
8.13.1.1.2.3 PCB Stackup
The minimum stackup required for routing the AM387x device is a six-layer stackup as shown in
Table 8-51. Additional layers may be added to the PCB stackup to accommodate other circuitry or to
reduce the size of the PCB footprint.
Table 8-51. Minimum PCB Stackup
LAYER
TYPE
Signal
Plane
Plane
Signal
Plane
Signal
DESCRIPTION
Top routing mostly horizontal
Ground
1
2
3
4
5
6
Power
Internal routing
Ground
Bottom routing mostly vertical
266
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Complete stackup specifications are provided in Table 8-52.
Table 8-52. PCB Stackup Specifications
NO.
1
PARAMETER
MIN
6
TYP
MAX
UNIT
PCB routing/plane layers
2
Signal routing layers
3
3
Full ground layers under DDR2 routing region
Number of ground plane cuts allowed within DDR routing region
Number of ground reference planes required for each DDR2 routing layer
Number of layers between DDR2 routing layer and reference ground plane
PCB routing feature size
2
4
0
0
5
1
6
7
4
4
Mils
Mils
Mils
Mils
mm
Ω
8
PCB trace width, w
PCB BGA escape via pad size(1)
9
18
10
0.4
20
10 PCB BGA escape via hole size(1)
11 MPU BGA pad size
13 Single-ended impedance, Zo
14 Impedance control(2)
50
75
Z-5
Z
Z+5
Ω
(1) A 20/10 via may be used if enough power routing resources are available. An 18/10 via allows for more flexible power routing to the
MPU.
(2) Z is the nominal singled-ended impedance selected for the PCB specified by item 13.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
267
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
8.13.1.1.2.4 Placement
Figure 8-50 shows the required placement for the MPU as well as the DDR2 devices. The dimensions for
this figure are defined in Table 8-53. The placement does not restrict the side of the PCB on which the
devices are mounted. The ultimate purpose of the placement is to limit the maximum trace lengths and
allow for proper routing space. For a 16-bit DDR memory system, the high-word DDR2 device is omitted
from the placement.
Recommended DDR2 Device
Orientation
X
1
X
A1
A1
1
1
X
X
OFFSET OFFSET
Y
Figure 8-50. AM387x Device and DDR2 Device Placement
Table 8-53. Placement Specifications
NO.
1
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
1660
1280
650
UNIT
Mils
Mils
Mils
X + Y(1)(2)
X'(1)(2)
X' Offset(1)(2) (3)
DDR2 keepout region(4)
2
3
4
5
Clearance from non-DDR2 signal to DDR2 keepout region(5)
4
w
(1) For dimension definitions, see Figure 8-48.
(2) Measurements from center of MPU to center of DDR2 device.
(3) For 16-bit memory systems, it is recommended that X' offset be as small as possible.
(4) DDR2 keepout region to encompass entire DDR2 routing area.
(5) Non-DDR2 signals allowed within DDR2 keepout region provided they are separated from DDR2 routing layers by a ground plane.
268
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
8.13.1.1.2.5 DDR2 Keepout Region
The region of the PCB used for the DDR2 circuitry must be isolated from other signals. The DDR2
keepout region is defined for this purpose and is shown in Figure 8-51. The size of this region varies with
the placement and DDR routing. Additional clearances required for the keepout region are shown in
Table 8-53.
A1
A1
DDR2 Device
A1
A1
Figure 8-51. DDR2 Keepout Region
NOTE
The region shown in should encompass all the DDR2 circuitry and varies depending on
placement. Non-DDR2 signals should not be routed on the DDR signal layers within the
DDR2 keepout region. Non-DDR2 signals may be routed in the region, provided t hey are
routed on layers separated from DDR2 signal layers by a ground layer. No breaks should be
allowed in the reference ground layers in this region. In addition, the 1.8-V power plane
should cover the entire keepout region. Routes for the two DDR interfaces must be
separated by at least 4x; the more separation, the better.
8.13.1.1.2.6 Bulk Bypass Capacitors
Bulk bypass capacitors are required for moderate speed bypassing of the DDR2 and other circuitry.
Table 8-54 contains the minimum numbers and capacitance required for the bulk bypass capacitors. Note
that this table only covers the bypass needs of the DDR2 interfaces and DDR2 device. Additional bulk
bypass capacitance may be needed for other circuitry.
Table 8-54. Bulk Bypass Capacitors
No. Parameter
Min
6
Max
Unit
Devices
μF
1
2
3
4
5
6
DVDD18 bulk bypass capacitor count(1)
DVDD18 bulk bypass total capacitance
DDR#1 bulk bypass capacitor count(1)
DDR#1 bulk bypass total capacitance(1)
DDR#2 bulk bypass capacitor count(2)
DDR#2 bulk bypass total capacitance(1)(2)
60
1
Devices
μF
10
1
Devices
μF
10
(1) These devices should be placed near the device they are bypassing, but preference should be given to the placement of the high-speed
(HS) bypass capacitors. Use half of these capacitors for DDR[0] and half for DDR[1].
(2) Only used on 32-bit wide DDR2 memory systems.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
269
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
8.13.1.1.2.7 High-Speed Bypass Capacitors
High-speed (HS) bypass capacitors are critical for proper DDR2 interface operation. It is particularly
important to minimize the parasitic series inductance of the HS bypass capacitors, MPU/DDR power, and
MPU/DDR ground connections. Table 8-55 contains the specification for the HS bypass capacitors as well
as for the power connections on the PCB.
Table 8-55. High-Speed Bypass Capacitors
NO.
1
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
UNIT
HS bypass capacitor package size(1)
0402 10 Mils
2
Distance from HS bypass capacitor to device being bypassed
Number of connection vias for each HS bypass capacitor(2)
Trace length from bypass capacitor contact to connection via
Number of connection vias for each MPU power/ground ball
Trace length from MPU power/ground ball to connection via
Number of connection vias for each DDR2 device power/ground ball
Trace length from DDR2 device power/ground ball to connection via
DVDD18 HS bypass capacitor count(3)(4)
250
30
Mils
Vias
Mils
3
2
1
1
4
5
Vias
Mils
6
35
7
1
Vias
Mils
8
35
9
40
2.4
8
Devices
μF
10 DVDD18 HS bypass capacitor total capacitance(5)
11 DDR device HS bypass capacitor count(6)(7)
12 DDR device HS bypass capacitor total capacitance(7)
Devices
μF
0.4
(1) LxW, 10-mil units, i.e., a 0402 is a 40x20-mil surface-mount capacitor.
(2) An additional HS bypass capacitor can share the connection vias only if it is mounted on the opposite side of the board.
(3) These devices should be placed as close as possible to the device being bypassed.
(4) Use half of these capacitors for DDR[0] and half for DDR[1].
(5) Use half of these capacitors for DDR[0] and half for DDR[1].
(6) These devices should be placed as close as possible to the device being bypassed.
(7) Per DDR device.
8.13.1.1.2.8 Net Classes
Table 8-56 lists the clock net classes for the DDR2 interface. Table 8-57 lists the signal net classes, and
associated clock net classes, for the signals in the DDR2 interface. These net classes are used for the
termination and routing rules that follow.
Table 8-56. Clock Net Class Definitions
CLOCK NET CLASS MPU PIN NAMES
CK
DDR[x]_CLK/DDR[x]_CLK
DQS0
DDR[x]_DQS[0]/DDR[x]_DQS[0]
DDR[x]_DQS[1]/DDR[x]_DQS[1]
DDR[x]_DQS[2]/DDR[x]_DQS[2]
DDR[x]_DQS[3]/DDR[x]_DQS[3]
DQS1
DQS2(1)
DQS3(1)
(1) Only used on 32-bit wide DDR2 memory systems.
270
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 8-57. Signal Net Class Definitions
ASSOCIATED CLOCK
CLOCK NET CLASS
MPU PIN NAMES
NET CLASS
ADDR_CTRL
CK
DDR[x]_BA[2:0], DDR[x]_A[14:0], DDR[x]_CS[x], DDR[x]_CAS, DDR[x]_RAS,
DDR[x]_WE, DDR[x]_CKE
DQ0
DQ1
DQ2(1)
DQ3(1)
DQS0
DQS1
DQS2
DQS3
DDR[x]_D[7:0], DDR[x]_DQM[0]
DDR[x]_D[15:8], DDR[x]_DQM[1]
DDR[x]_D[23:16], DDR[x]_DQM[2]
DDR[x]_D[31:24], DDR[x]_DQM[3]
(1) Only used on 32-bit wide DDR2 memory systems.
8.13.1.1.2.9 DDR2 Signal Termination
Signal terminators are required in CK and ADDR_CTRL net classes. Serial terminators may be used on
data lines to reduce EMI risk; however, serial terminations are the only type permitted. ODT's are
integrated on the data byte net classes. They should be enabled to ensure signal integrity.Table 8-58
shows the specifications for the series terminators.
Table 8-58. DDR2 Signal Terminations
No. Parameter
Min
0
Typ
Max Unit
1
2
3
CK net class(1)(2)
ADDR_CTRL net class(1)(3)(4) (2)
Data byte net classes (DQS0-DQS3, DQ0-DQ3)(5)
10
Zo
0
Ω
Ω
Ω
0
22
0
(1) Only series termination is permitted, parallel or SST specifically disallowed on board.
(2) Only required for EMI reduction.
(3) Terminator values larger than typical only recommended to address EMI issues.
(4) Termination value should be uniform across net class.
(5) No external terminations allowed for data byte net classes. ODT is to be used.
8.13.1.1.2.10 VREFSSTL_DDR Routing
VREFSSTL_DDR is used as a reference by the input buffers of the DDR2 memories as well as the MPU.
VREF is intended to be half the DDR2 power supply voltage and should be created using a resistive
divider as shown in Figure 8-49. Other methods of creating VREF are not recommended. Figure 8-52
shows the layout guidelines for VREF.
VREF Nominal Max Trace
width is 20 mils
DDR2 Device
VREF Bypass Capacitor
A1
A1
+
+
DDR2 Controller
Neck down to minimum in BGA escape
regions is acceptable. Narrowing to
accomodate via congestion for short
distances is also acceptable. Best
performance is obtained if the width
of VREF is maximized.
Figure 8-52. VREF Routing and Topology
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
271
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
8.13.1.1.3 DDR2 CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing
Figure 8-53 shows the topology of the routing for the CK and ADDR_CTRL net classes. The route is a
balanced T as it is intended that the length of segments B and C be equal. In addition, the length of A
(A'+A'') should be maximized.
A1
A1
B
C
A´´
T
A´
A = A´ + A´´
Figure 8-53. CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing and Topology
(1)
Table 8-59. CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing Specification
NO.
1
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
MAX
2w
UNIT
Center-to-center CK-CK spacing
CK/CK skew(1)
2
25
Mils
Mils
3
CK B-to-C skew length mismatch
25
4
Center-to-center CK to other DDR2 trace spacing(2)
CK/ADDR_CTRL nominal trace length(3)
4w
5
CACLM-50
CACLM
CACLM+50
100
Mils
Mils
Mils
6
ADDR_CTRL-to-CK skew length mismatch
7
ADDR_CTRL-to-ADDR_CTRL skew length mismatch
Center-to-center ADDR_CTRL to other DDR2 trace spacing(2)
Center-to-center ADDR_CTRL to other ADDR_CTRL trace spacing(2)
ADDR_CTRL B-to-C skew length mismatch
100
8
4w
3w
9
10
100
Mils
(1) The length of segment A=A'+A′′ as shown in Figure 8-53.
(2) Center-to-center spacing is allowed to fall to minimum (w) for up to 500 mils of routed length to accommodate BGA escape and routing
congestion.
(3) CACLM is the longest Manhattan distance of the CK and ADDR_CTRL net classes.
Figure 8-54 shows the topology and routing for the DQS and DQ net classes; the routes are point to point.
Skew matching across bytes is not needed nor recommended.
T
T
T
T
A1
A1
E2
E3
E0
E1
Figure 8-54. DQS and DQ Routing and Topology
272
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
NO.
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 8-60. DQS and DQ Routing Specification
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
MAX
2w
UNIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Center-to-center DQS-DQSn spacing in E0|E1|E2|E3
DQS-DQSn skew in E0|E1|E2|E3
Center-to-center DQS to other DDR2 trace spacing(1)
25
Mils
4w
(2)(3)(4)
DQS/DQ nominal trace length
DQ-to-DQS skew length mismatch(2)(3)(4)
DQ-to-DQ skew length mismatch(2)(3)(4)
DQ-to-DQ/DQS via count mismatch(2)(3)(4)
Center-to-center DQ to other DDR2 trace spacing(1)(5)
Center-to-center DQ to other DQ trace spacing(1)(6)(7)
DQLM-50
DQLM
DQLM+50
Mils
Mils
Mils
Vias
100
100
1
4w
3w
10 DQ/DQS E skew length mismatch(2)(3)(4)
100
Mils
(1) Center-to-center spacing is allowed to fall to minimum (w) for up to 500 mils of routed length to accommodate BGA escape and routing
congestion.
(2) A 16-bit DDR memory system has two sets of data net classes; one for data byte 0, and one for data byte 1, each with an associated
DQS (2 DQSs) per DDR EMIF used.
(3) A 32-bit DDR memory system has four sets of data net classes; one each for data bytes 0 through 3, and each associated with a DQS
(4 DQSs) per DDR EMIF used.
(4) There is no need, and it is not recommended, to skew match across data bytes; i.e., from DQS0 and data byte 0 to DQS1 and data
byte 1.
(5) DQs from other DQS domains are considered other DDR2 trace.
(6) DQs from other data bytes are considered other DDR2 trace.
(7) DQLM is the longest Manhattan distance of each of the DQS and DQ net classes.
8.13.1.2 DDR3 Routing Guidelines
8.13.1.2.1 Board Designs
TI only supports board designs utilizing DDR3 memory that follow the guidelines in this document. The
switching characteristics and timing diagram for the DDR3 memory controller are shown in Table 8-61 and
Figure 8-55.
Table 8-61. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for DDR3 Memory
Controller
-1G
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
1
tc(DDR_CLK)
Cycle time, DDR_CLK
2.5
3.3(1)
ns
(1) This is the absolute maximum the clock period can be. Actual maximum clock period may be limited by DDR3 speed grade and
operating frequency (see the DDR3 memory device data sheet).
1
DDR_CLK
Figure 8-55. DDR3 Memory Controller Clock Timing
8.13.1.2.1.1 DDR3 versus DDR2
This specification only covers AM387x MPU PCB designs that utilize DDR3 memory. Designs using DDR2
memory should use the PCB design specifications for DDR2 memory in Section 8.13.1.1. While similar,
the two memory systems have different requirements. It is currently not possible to design one PCB that
covers both DDR2 and DDR3.
8.13.1.2.2 DDR3 Device Combinations
Since there are several possible combinations of device counts and single- or dual-side mounting,
Table 8-62 summarizes the supported device configurations.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
273
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 8-62. Supported DDR3 Device Combinations(1)
NUMBER OF DDR3 DEVICES
DDR3 DEVICE WIDTH (BITS)
MIRRORED?
DDR3 EMIF WIDTH (BITS)
1
2
2
2
4
4
16
8
N
Y(2)
N
16
16
32
32
32
32
16
16
8
Y(2)
N
Y(3)
8
(1) This table is per EMIF.
(2) Two DDR3 devices are mirrored when one device is placed on the top of the board and the second device is placed on the bottom of
the board.
(3) This is two mirrored pairs of DDR3 devices.
8.13.1.2.2.1 DDR3 EMIFs
The MPU contains two separate DDR3 EMIFs. This specification covers one of these EMIFs (DDR[0])
and, thus, needs to be implemented twice, once for each EMIF. The PCB layout generally turns out to be
a semi-mirror with DDR[1] being a flipped version of DDR[0]; the only exception being the DDR3 devices
themselves are not flipped unless mounted on opposite sides of the PCB. Requirements are identical
between the two EMIFs.
8.13.1.2.3 DDR3 Interface Schematic
8.13.1.2.3.1 32-Bit DDR3 Interface
The DDR3 interface schematic varies, depending upon the width of the DDR3 devices used and the width
of the bus used (16 or 32 bits). General connectivity is straightforward and very similar. 16-bit DDR
devices look like two 8-bit devices. Figure 8-56 and Figure 8-57 show the schematic connections for 32-bit
interfaces using x16 devices.
8.13.1.2.3.2 16-Bit DDR3 Interface
Note that the 16-bit wide interface schematic is practically identical to the 32-bit interface (see Figure 8-56
and Figure 8-57); only the high-word DDR memories are removed and the unused DQS inputs are tied off.
The MPU DDR[x]_DQS[2] and DDR[x]_DQS[3] pins should be pulled to the DDR supply via 1-kΩ
resistors. Similarly, the DDR[x]_DQS[2] and DDR[x]_DQS[3] pins should be pulled to ground via 1-kΩ
resistors.
When not using a DDR interface, the proper method of handling the unused pins is to tie off the DQS pins
by pulling the non-inverting DQS pin to the DDR_1V5 supply via a 1k-Ω resistor and pulling the inverting
DQSn pin to ground via a 1k-Ω resistor. This needs to be done for each byte not used. Also, include the
50-Ω pulldown for DDR[x]_VTP. All other DDR interface pins can be left unconnected. Note that the
supported modes for use of the DDR EMIF are 32 bits wide, 16 bits wide, or not used.
274
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
32-bit DDR3 EMIF
DDR[0] or DDR[1]
16-Bit DDR3
Devices
DDR[x]_ODT[1]
DDR[x]_CS[1]
NC
NC
DDR[x]_D[31]
DQ15
8
DDR[x]_D[24]
DQ8
DDR[x]_DQM[3]
DDR[x]_DQS[3]
DDR[x]_DQS[3]
UDM
UDQS
UDQS
DDR[x]_D[23]
DQ7
8
DDR[x]_D[16]
D08
DDR[x]_DQM[2]
DDR[x]_DQS[2]
DDR[x]_DQS[2]
LDM
LDQS
LDQS
DDR[x]_D[15]
DQ15
DQ8
8
DDR[x]_D[8]
DDR[x]_DQM[1]
DDR[x]_DQS[1]
DDR[x]_DQS[1]
UDM
UDQS
UDQS
DDR[x]_D[7]
DQ7
8
DDR[x]_D[0]
DQ0
DDR[x]_DQM[0]
DDR[x]_DQS[0]
DDR[x]_DQS[0]
LDM
LDQS
LDQS
0.1 µF
Zo
Zo
DDR[x]_CLK
DDR[x]_CLK
CK
CK
CK
CK
DDR_1V5
DDR[x]_ODT[0]
DDR[x]_CS[0]
DDR[x]_BA[0]
DDR[x]_BA[1]
DDR[x]_BA[2]
ODT
ODT
CS
CS
BA0
BA1
BA2
BA0
BA1
BA2
DDR_VTT
Zo
Zo
DDR[x]_A[0]
A0
A0
15
DDR[x]_A[14]
A14
A14
DDR[x]_CAS
DDR[x]_RAS
DDR[x]_WE
DDR[x]_CKE
DDR[x]_RST
CAS
CAS
RAS
WE
RAS
WE
CKE
CKE
RST
DDR_VREF
RST
ZQ
ZQ
ZQ
ZQ
VREFDQ
VREFCA
VREFDQ
VREFCA
VREFSSTL_DDR[x]
0.1 µF
0.1 µF
0.1 µF
DDR[x]_VTP
50 Ω ( 2%)
Zo
ZQ
Termination is required. See terminator comments.
Value determined according to the DDR memory device data sheet.
Figure 8-56. 32-Bit, One-Bank DDR3 Interface Schematic Using Two 16-Bit DDR3 Devices
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
275
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
32-bit DDR3 EMIF
DDR[0] or DDR[1]
8-Bit DDR3
Devices
8-Bit DDR3
Devices
DDR[x]_ODT[1]
DDR[x]_CS[1]
NC
NC
DDR[x]_D[31]
DQ7
DQ0
8
DDR[x]_D[24]
DDR[x]_DQM[3]
DM/TQS
TDQS
DQS
NC
DDR[x]_DQS[3]
DDR[x]_DQS[3]
DQS
DDR[x]_D[23]
DQ7
DQ0
8
DDR[x]_D[16]
DDR[x]_DQM[2]
DM/TQS
TDQS
DQS
NC
DDR[x]_DQS[2]
DDR[x]_DQS[2]
DQS
DDR[x]_D[15]
DQ7
DQ0
8
DDR[x]_D[8]
DDR[x]_DQM[1]
DM/TQS
TDQS
DQS
NC
DDR[x]_DQS[1]
DDR[x]_DQS[1]
DQS
DDR[x]_D[7]
DQ7
DQ0
8
DDR[x]_D[0]
DDR[x]_DQM[0]
DM/TQS
TDQS
DQS
NC
DDR[x]_DQS[0]
DDR[x]_DQS[0]
DQS
0.1 µF
Zo
Zo
DDR[x]_CLK
DDR[x]_CLK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
DDR_1V5
DDR[x]_ODT[0]
DDR[x]_CS[0]
DDR[x]_BA[0]
DDR[x]_BA[1]
DDR[x]_BA[2]
ODT
ODT
ODT
ODT
CS
CS
CS
CS
BA0
BA1
BA2
BA0
BA1
BA2
BA0
BA1
BA2
BA0
BA1
BA2
DDR_VTT
Zo
Zo
DDR[x]_A[0]
A0
A0
A0
A0
15
DDR[x]_A[14]
A14
A14
A14
A14
DDR[x]_CAS
DDR[x]_RAS
DDR[x]_WE
DDR[x]_CKE
DDR[x]_RST
CAS
CAS
RAS
WE
CAS
CAS
RAS
WE
RAS
RAS
WE
WE
CKE
CKE
RST
CKE
CKE
RST
RST
RST
DDR_VREF
ZQ
ZQ
ZQ
ZQ
ZQ
ZQ
ZQ
ZQ
VREFDQ
VREFCA
VREFDQ
VREFCA
VREFDQ
VREFCA
VREFDQ
VREFCA
VREFSSTL_DDR[x]
0.1 µF
0.1 µF
0.1 µF
0.1 µF
0.1 µF
DDR[x]_VTP
50 Ω ( 2%)
Zo
ZQ
Termination is required. See terminator comments.
Value determined according to the DDR memory device data sheet.
Figure 8-57. 32-Bit, One-Bank DDR3 Interface Schematic Using Four 8-Bit DDR3 Devices
276
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
8.13.1.2.4 Compatible JEDEC DDR3 Devices
Table 8-63 shows the parameters of the JEDEC DDR3 devices that are compatible with this interface.
Generally, the DDR3 interface is compatible with DDR3-1600 devices in the x8 or x16 widths.
Table 8-63. Compatible JEDEC DDR3 Devices (Per Interface)
NO.
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
UNIT
1
JEDEC DDR3 device speed grade(1)
DDR3-800
DDR3-
1600(2)
2
3
JEDEC DDR3 device bit width
JEDEC DDR3 device count(3)
x8
2
x16
4
Bits
Devices
(1) DDR3 speed grade depends on desired clock rate. Data rate is 2x the clock rate. For DDR3-800, the clock rate is 400 MHz.
(2) DDR3 devices with speed grades up to DDR3-1600 are supported; however, max clock rate will still be limited to 400 MHz as stated in
Table 8-61 Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for DDR3 Memory Controller.
(3) For valid DDR3 device configurations and device counts, see Section 8.13.1.2.3, Figure 8-56, and Figure 8-57.
8.13.1.2.5 PCB Stackup
The minimum stackup for routing the DDR3 interface is a four-layer stack up as shown in Table 8-64.
Additional layers may be added to the PCB stackup to accommodate other circuitry, enhance SI/EMI
performance, or to reduce the size of the PCB footprint. A six-layer stackup is shown in Table 8-65.
Complete stackup specifications are provided in Table 8-66.
Table 8-64. Minimum PCB Stackup
LAYER
TYPE
Signal
Plane
Plane
Signal
DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
4
Top routing mostly vertical
Split power plane
Full ground plane
Bottom routing mostly horizontal
Table 8-65. Six-Layer PCB Stackup Suggestion
LAYER
TYPE
Signal
Plane
Plane
Plane
Plane
Signal
DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
Top routing mostly vertical
Ground
Split power plane
Split power plane or Internal routing
Ground
Bottom routing mostly horizontal
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
277
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
UNIT
Table 8-66. PCB Stackup Specifications
NO.
PARAMETER
MIN
4
TYP
MAX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PCB routing/plane layers
6
Signal routing layers
2
Full ground reference layers under DDR3 routing region(1)
Full 1.5-V power reference layers under the DDR3 routing region(1)
Number of reference plane cuts allowed within DDR routing region(2)
Number of layers between DDR3 routing layer and reference plane(3)
PCB routing feature size
1
1
0
0
4
4
Mils
Mils
Mils
Mils
mm
Ω
PCB trace width, w
PCB BGA escape via pad size(4)
18
10
0.4
20
10 PCB BGA escape via hole size
11 MPU BGA pad size
13 Single-ended impedance, Zo
14 Impedance control(5)
50
75
Z-5
Z
Z+5
Ω
(1) Ground reference layers are preferred over power reference layers. Be sure to include bypass caps to accommodate reference layer
return current as the trace routes switch routing layers.
(2) No traces should cross reference plane cuts within the DDR routing region. High-speed signal traces crossing reference plane cuts
create large return current paths which can lead to excessive crosstalk and EMI radiation.
(3) Reference planes are to be directly adjacent to the signal plane to minimize the size of the return current loop.
(4) An 18-mil pad assumes Via Channel is the most economical BGA escape. A 20-mil pad may be used if additional layers are available
for power routing. An 18-mil pad is required for minimum layer count escape.
(5) Z is the nominal singled-ended impedance selected for the PCB specified by item 13.
8.13.1.2.6 Placement
Figure 8-58 shows the required placement for the MPU as well as the DDR3 devices. The dimensions for
this figure are defined in Table 8-67. The placement does not restrict the side of the PCB on which the
devices are mounted. The ultimate purpose of the placement is to limit the maximum trace lengths and
allow for proper routing space. For a 16-bit DDR memory system, the high-word DDR3 device(s) are
omitted from the placement.
X1
X2
X2
X2
DDR3
Controller
Y
Figure 8-58. Placement Specifications
278
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
NO.
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 8-67. Placement Specifications
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
1000
600
UNIT
Mils
Mils
Mils
1
2
3
4
5
X1(1)(2)(3)
X2(1)(2)
Y Offset(1)(2)(3)
1500
DDR3 keepout region
Clearance from non-DDR3 signal to DDR3 keepout region(4)(5)(6)
4
w
(1) For dimension definitions, see Figure 8-58.
(2) Measurements from center of MPU to center of DDR3 device.
(3) Minimizing X1 and Y improves timing margins.
(4) w is defined as the signal trace width.
(5) Non-DDR3 signals allowed within DDR3 keepout region provided they are separated from DDR3 routing layers by a ground plane.
(6) Note that DDR3 signals from one DDR3 controller are considered non-DDR3 to the other controller. In other words, keep the two DDR3
interfaces separated by this specification.
8.13.1.2.7 DDR3 Keepout Region
The region of the PCB used for DDR3 circuitry must be isolated from other signals. The DDR3 keepout
region is defined for this purpose and is shown in Figure 8-59. The size of this region varies with the
placement and DDR routing. Additional clearances required for the keepout region are shown in
Table 8-67. Non-DDR3 signals should not be routed on the DDR signal layers within the DDR3 keepout
region. Non-DDR3 signals may be routed in the region, provided they are routed on layers separated from
the DDR signal layers by a ground layer. No breaks should be allowed in the reference ground layers in
this region. In addition, the 1.5-V DDR3 power plane should cover the entire keepout region. Also note
that the two DDR3 controller's signals should be separated from each other by the specification in
Table 8-67, item 5.
DDR3 Controllers
DDR[1] Keep Out Region
DDR[0] Keep Out Region
Encompasses Entire DDR[1] Routing Area
Encompasses Entire DDR[0] Routing Area
Figure 8-59. DDR3 Keepout Region
8.13.1.2.8 Bulk Bypass Capacitors
Bulk bypass capacitors are required for moderate speed bypassing of the DDR3 and other circuitry.
Table 8-68 contains the minimum numbers and capacitance required for the bulk bypass capacitors. Note
that this table only covers the bypass needs of the DDR3 controllers and DDR3 device(s). Additional bulk
bypass capacitance may be needed for other circuitry. Also note that Table 8-68 is per DDR3 controller;
thus, systems using both controllers have to meet the needs of Table 8-68 twice, once for each controller.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
279
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 8-68. Bulk Bypass Capacitors
NO.
PARAMETER
DDR_1V5 bulk bypass capacitor count(1)
MIN
6
MAX
UNIT
Devices
μF
1
2
DDR_1V5 bulk bypass total capacitance
140
(1) These devices should be placed near the devices they are bypassing, but preference should be given to the placement of the
high-speed (HS) bypass capacitors and DDR3 signal routing.
8.13.1.2.9 High-Speed Bypass Capacitors
High-speed (HS) bypass capacitors are critcal for proper DDR3 interface operation. It is particularly
important to minimize the parasitic series inductance of the HS bypass capacitors, MPU/DDR power, and
MPU/DDR ground connections. Table 8-69 contains the specification for the HS bypass capacitors as well
as for the power connections on the PCB. Generally speaking, it is good to:
1. Fit as many HS bypass capacitors as possible.
2. Minimize the distance from the bypass cap to the pins/balls being bypassed.
3. Use the smallest physical sized capacitors possible with the highest capacitance readily available.
4. Connect the bypass capacitor pads to their vias using the widest traces possible and using the largest
hole size via possible.
5. Minimize via sharing. Note the limites on via sharing shown in Table 8-69.
Table 8-69. High-Speed Bypass Capacitors
NO.
1
PARAMETER
HS bypass capacitor package size(1)
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
201
402 10 Mils
2
Distance, HS bypass capacitor to MPU being bypassed(2)(3)(4)
400
Mils
Devices
μF
3
MPU DDR_1V5 HS bypass capacitor count
70
5
4
MPU DDR_1V5 HS bypass capacitor total capacitance
Number of connection vias for each device power/ground ball(5)
Trace length from device power/ground ball to connection via(2)
Distance, HS bypass capacitor to DDR device being bypassed(6)
DDR3 device HS bypass capacitor count(7)
5
Vias
Mils
6
35
70
7
150
Mils
8
12
0.85
2
Devices
μF
9
DDR3 device HS bypass capacitor total capacitance(7)
10 Number of connection vias for each HS capacitor(8)(9)
Vias
Mils
11 Trace length from bypass capacitor connect to connection via(2)(9)
12 Number of connection vias for each DDR3 device power/ground ball(10)
13 Trace length from DDR3 device power/ground ball to connection via(2)(8)
35
35
100
60
1
Vias
Mils
(1) LxW, 10-mil units, i.e., a 0402 is a 40x20-mil surface-mount capacitor.
(2) Closer/shorter is better.
(3) Measured from the nearest MPU power/ground ball to the center of the capacitor package.
(4) Three of these capacitors should be located underneath the MPU, between the cluster of DDR_1V5 balls and ground balls, between the
DDR interfaces on the package.
(5) See the Via Channel™ escape for the MPU package.
(6) Measured from the DDR3 device power/ground ball to the center of the capacitor package.
(7) Per DDR3 device.
(8) An additional HS bypass capacitor can share the connection vias only if it is mounted on the opposite side of the board. No sharing of
vias is permitted on the same side of the board.
(9) An HS bypass capacitor may share a via with a DDR device mounted on the same side of the PCB. A wide trace should be used for the
connection and the length from the capacitor pad to the DDR device pad should be less than 150 mils.
(10) Up to a total of two pairs of DDR power/ground balls may share a via.
8.13.1.2.9.1 Return Current Bypass Capacitors
Use additional bypass capacitors if the return current reference plane changes due to DDR3 signals
hopping from one signal layer to another. The bypass capacitor here provides a path for the return current
to hop planes along with the signal. As many of these return current bypass capacitors should be used as
possible. Since these are returns for signal current, the signal via size may be used for these capacitors.
280
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
8.13.1.2.10 Net Classes
Table 8-70 lists the clock net classes for the DDR3 interface. Table 8-71 lists the signal net classes, and
associated clock net classes, for signals in the DDR3 interface. These net classes are used for the
termination and routing rules that follow.
Table 8-70. Clock Net Class Definitions
CLOCK NET CLASS MPU PIN NAMES
CK
DDR[x]_CLK/DDR[x]_CLK
DQS0
DDR[x]_DQS[0]/DDR[x]_DQS[0]
DDR[x]_DQS[1]/DDR[x]_DQS[1]
DDR[x]_DQS[2]/DDR[x]_DQS[2]
DDR[x]_DQS[3]/DDR[x]_DQS[3]
DQS1
DQS2(1)
DQS3(1)
(1) Only used on 32-bit wide DDR3 memory systems.
Table 8-71. Signal Net Class Definitions
ASSOCIATED CLOCK
MPU PIN NAMES
NET CLASS
CLOCK NET CLASS
ADDR_CTRL
CK
DDR[x]_BA[2:0], DDR[x]_A[14:0], DDR[x]_CS[x], DDR[x]_CAS, DDR[x]_RAS,
DDR[x]_WE, DDR[x]_CKE
DQ0
DQ1
DQ2(1)
DQ3(1)
DQS0
DQS1
DQS2
DQS3
DDR[x]_D[7:0], DDR[x]_DQM[0]
DDR[x]_D[15:8], DDR[x]_DQM[1]
DDR[x]_D[23:16], DDR[x]_DQM[2]
DDR[x]_D[31:24], DDR[x]_DQM[3]
(1) Only used on 32-bit wide DDR3 memory systems.
8.13.1.2.11 DDR3 Signal Termination
Signal terminators are required for the CK and ADDR_CTRL net classes. The data lines are terminated by
ODT and, thus, the PCB traces should be unterminated. Detailed termination specifications are covered in
the routing rules in the following sections.
8.13.1.2.12 VREFSSTL_DDR Routing
VREFSSTL_DDR (VREF) is used as a reference by the input buffers of the DDR3 memories as well as
the MPU. VREF is intended to be half the DDR3 power supply voltage and is typically generated with the
DDR3 1.5-V and VTT power supply. It should be routed as a nominal 20-mil wide trace with 0.1 µF bypass
capacitors near each device connection. Narrowing of VREF is allowed to accommodate routing
congestion.
8.13.1.2.13 VTT
Like VREF, the nominal value of the VTT supply is half the DDR3 supply voltage. Unlike VREF, VTT is
expected to source and sink current, specifically the termination current for the ADDR_CTRL net class
Thevinen terminators. VTT is needed at the end of the address bus and it should be routed as a power
sub-plane. VTT should be bypassed near the terminator resistors.
8.13.1.2.14 CK and ADDR_CTRL Topologies and Routing Definition
The CK and ADDR_CTRL net classes are routed similarly and are length matched to minimize skew
between them. CK is a bit more complicated because it runs at a higher transition rate and is differential.
The following subsections show the topology and routing for various DDR3 configurations for CK and
ADDR_CTRL. The figures in the following subsections define the terms for the routing specification
detailed in Table 8-72.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
281
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
8.13.1.2.14.1 Four DDR3 Devices
Four DDR3 devices are supported on the DDR EMIF consisting of four x8 DDR3 devices arranged as one
bank (CS). These four devices may be mounted on a single side of the PCB, or may be mirrored in two
pairs to save board space at a cost of increased routing complexity and parts on the backside of the PCB.
8.13.1.2.14.1.1 CK and ADDR_CTRL Topologies, Four DDR3 Devices
Figure 8-60 shows the topology of the CK net classes and Figure 8-61 shows the topology for the
corresponding ADDR_CTRL net classes.
DDR Differential CK Input Buffers
–
–
–
–
+
+
+
+
Clock Parallel
Terminator
DDR_1V5
Rcp
A1
A1
A2
A2
A3
A3
A4
A4
A3
A3
AT
AT
Cac
MPU
Differential Clock
Output Buffer
+
–
0.1 µF
Rcp
Routed as Differential Pair
Figure 8-60. CK Topology for Four x8 DDR3 Devices
DDR Address/Control Input Buffers
Address/Control
Terminator
Rtt
MPU
Address/Control
Output Buffer
A1
A2
A3
A4
A3
AT
Vtt
Figure 8-61. ADDR_CTRL Topology for Four x8 DDR3 Devices
8.13.1.2.14.1.2 CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing, Four DDR3 Devices
Figure 8-62 shows the CK routing for four DDR3 devices placed on the same side of the PCB. Figure 8-63
shows the corresponding ADDR_CTRL routing.
282
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
DDR_1V5
Cac
Rcp
Rcp
A2
A2
A3
A3
A4
A4
A3
A3
AT
AT
0.1 µF
=
Figure 8-62. CK Routing for Four Single-Side DDR3 Devices
Rtt
A2
A3
A4
A3
AT
Vtt
=
Figure 8-63. ADDR_CTRL Routing for Four Single-Side DDR3 Devices
To save PCB space, the four DDR3 memories may be mounted as two mirrored pairs at a cost of
increased routing and assembly complexity. Figure 8-64 and Figure 8-65 show the routing for CK and
ADDR_CTRL, respectively, for four DDR3 devices mirrored in a two-pair configuration.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
283
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
DDR_1V5
Cac
Rcp
Rcp
A2
A2
A3
A3
A4
A4
A3
A3
AT
AT
0.1 µF
=
Figure 8-64. CK Routing for Four Mirrored DDR3 Devices
Rtt
A2
A3
A4
A3
AT
Vtt
=
Figure 8-65. ADDR_CTRL Routing for Four Mirrored DDR3 Devices
8.13.1.2.14.2 Two DDR3 Devices
Two DDR3 devices are supported on the DDR EMIF consisting of two x8 DDR3 devices arranged as one
bank (CS), 16 bits wide, or two x16 DDR3 devices arranged as one bank (CS), 32 bits wide. These two
devices may be mounted on a single side of the PCB, or may be mirrored in a pair to save board space at
a cost of increased routing complexity and parts on the backside of the PCB.
8.13.1.2.14.2.1 CK and ADDR_CTRL Topologies, Two DDR3 Devices
Figure 8-66 shows the topology of the CK net classes and Figure 8-67 shows the topology for the
corresponding ADDR_CTRL net classes.
284
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
DDR Differential CK Input Buffers
–
–
+
+
Clock Parallel
Terminator
DDR_1V5
Rcp
A1
A1
A2
A2
A3
A3
AT
AT
Cac
MPU
+
–
Differential Clock
Output Buffer
0.1 µF
Rcp
Routed as Differential Pair
Figure 8-66. CK Topology for Two DDR3 Devices
DDR Address/Control Input Buffers
Address/Control
Terminator
Rtt
MPU
Address/Control
Output Buffer
A1
A2
A3
AT
Vtt
Figure 8-67. ADDR_CTRL Topology for Two DDR3 Devices
8.13.1.2.14.2.2 CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing, Two DDR3 Devices
Figure 8-68 shows the CK routing for two DDR3 devices placed on the same side of the PCB. Figure 8-69
shows the corresponding ADDR_CTRL routing.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
285
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
DDR_1V5
Cac
Rcp
Rcp
A2
A2
A3
A3
AT
AT
0.1 µF
=
Figure 8-68. CK Routing for Two Single-Side DDR3 Devices
Rtt
A2
A3
AT
Vtt
=
Figure 8-69. ADDR_CTRL Routing for Two Single-Side DDR3 Devices
To save PCB space, the two DDR3 memories may be mounted as a mirrored pair at a cost of increased
routing and assembly complexity. Figure 8-70 and Figure 8-71 show the routing for CK and ADDR_CTRL,
respectively, for two DDR3 devices mirrored in a single-pair configuration.
286
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
DDR_1V5
Cac
Rcp
Rcp
A2
A2
A3
A3
AT
AT
0.1 µF
=
Figure 8-70. CK Routing for Two Mirrored DDR3 Devices
Rtt
A2
A3
AT
Vtt
=
Figure 8-71. ADDR_CTRL Routing for Two Mirrored DDR3 Devices
8.13.1.2.14.3 One DDR3 Device
A single DDR3 device is supported on the DDR EMIF consisting of one x16 DDR3 device arranged as
one bank (CS), 16 bits wide.
8.13.1.2.14.3.1 CK and ADDR_CTRL Topologies, One DDR3 Device
Figure 8-72 shows the topology of the CK net classes and Figure 8-73 shows the topology for the
corresponding ADDR_CTRL net classes.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
287
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
DDR Differential CK Input Buffer
–
+
Clock Parallel
Terminator
DDR_1V5
Rcp
A1
A1
A2
A2
AT
AT
Cac
MPU
Differential Clock
Output Buffer
+
–
0.1 µF
Rcp
Routed as Differential Pair
Figure 8-72. CK Topology for One DDR3 Device
DDR Address/Control Input Buffers
Address/Control
Terminator
Rtt
MPU
Address/Control
Output Buffer
A1
A2
AT
Vtt
Figure 8-73. ADDR_CTRL Topology for One DDR3 Device
8.13.1.2.14.3.2 CK and ADDR/CTRL Routing, One DDR3 Device
Figure 8-74 shows the CK routing for one DDR3 device placed on the same side of the PCB. Figure 8-75
shows the corresponding ADDR_CTRL routing.
288
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
DDR_1V5
Cac
Rcp
Rcp
A2
A2
AT
AT
0.1 µF
=
Figure 8-74. CK Routing for One DDR3 Device
Rtt
A2
AT
Vtt
=
Figure 8-75. ADDR_CTRL Routing for One DDR3 Device
8.13.1.2.15 Data Topologies and Routing Definition
No matter the number of DDR3 devices used, the data line topology is always point to point, so its
definition is simple.
8.13.1.2.15.1 DQS and DQ/DM Topologies, Any Number of Allowed DDR3 Devices
DQS lines are point-to-point differential, and DQ/DM lines are point-to-point singled ended. Figure 8-76
and Figure 8-77 show these topologies.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
289
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
MPU
DQS
DDR
DQSn+
DQSn-
DQS
I/O Buffer
I/O Buffer
Routed Differentially
n = 0, 1, 2, 3
Figure 8-76. DQS Topology
MPU
DQ/DM
DDR
Dn
DQ/DM
I/O Buffer
I/O Buffer
n = 0, 1, 2, 3
Figure 8-77. DQ/DM Topology
8.13.1.2.15.2 DQS and DQ/DM Routing, Any Number of Allowed DDR3 Devices
Figure 8-78 and Figure 8-79 show the DQS and DQ/DM routing.
DQS
DQSn+
DQSn-
Routed Differentially
n = 0, 1, 2, 3
Figure 8-78. DQS Routing With Any Number of Allowed DDR3 Devices
DQ/DM
Dn
n = 0, 1, 2, 3
Figure 8-79. DQ/DM Routing With Any Number of Allowed DDR3 Devices
290
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
8.13.1.2.16 Routing Specification
8.13.1.2.16.1 CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing Specification
Skew within the CK and ADDR_CTRL net classes directly reduces setup and hold margin and, thus, this
skew must be controlled. The only way to practically match lengths on a PCB is to lengthen the shorter
traces up to the length of the longest net in the net class and its associated clock. A metric to establish
this maximum length is Manhattan distance. The Manhattan distance between two points on a PCB is the
length between the points when connecting them only with horizontal or vertical segments. A reasonable
trace route length is to within a percentage of its Manhattan distance. CACLM is defined as Clock Address
Control Longest Manhattan distance.
Given the clock and address pin locations on the MPU and the DDR3 memories, the maximum possible
Manhattan distance can be determined given the placement. Figure 8-80 and Figure 8-81 show this
distance for four loads and two loads, respectively. It is from this distance that the specifications on the
lengths of the transmission lines for the address bus are determined. CACLM is determined similarly for
other address bus configurations; i.e., it is based on the longest net of the CK/ADDR_CTRL net class. For
CK and ADDR_CTRL routing, these specifications are contained in Table 8-72.
A8(A)
CACLMY
CACLMX
A8(A)
A8(A)
A8(A)
A8(A)
Rtt
A2
A3
A4
A3
AT
Vtt
=
A. It is very likely that the longest CK/ADDR_CTRL Manhattan distance will be for Address Input 8 (A8) on the DDR3
memories. CACLM is based on the longest Manhattan distance due to the device placement. Verify the net class that
satisfies this criteria and use as the baseline for CK/ADDR_CTRL skew matching and length control.
The length of shorter CK/ADDR_CTRL stubs as well as the length of the terminator stub are not included in this
length calculation. Non-included lengths are grayed out in the figure.
Assuming A8 is the longest, CALM = CACLMY + CACLMX + 300 mils.
The extra 300 mils allows for routing down lower than the DDR3 memories and returning up to reach A8.
Figure 8-80. CACLM for Four Address Loads on One Side of PCB
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
291
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
A8(A)
CACLMY
CACLMX
A8(A)
A8(A)
Rtt
A2
A3
AT
Vtt
=
A. It is very likely that the longest CK/ADDR_CTRL Manhattan distance will be for Address Input 8 (A8) on the DDR3
memories. CACLM is based on the longest Manhattan distance due to the device placement. Verify the net class that
satisfies this criteria and use as the baseline for CK/ADDR_CTRL skew matching and length control.
The length of shorter CK/ADDR_CTRL stubs as well as the length of the terminator stub are not included in this
length calculation. Non-included lengths are grayed out in the figure.
Assuming A8 is the longest, CALM = CACLMY + CACLMX + 300 mils.
The extra 300 mils allows for routing down lower than the DDR3 memories and returning up to reach A8.
Figure 8-81. CACLM for Two Address Loads on One Side of PCB
Table 8-72. CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing Specification(1)(2)
NO.
1
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
MAX
2500
25
UNIT
mils
mils
mils
mils
mils
mils
mils
mils
mils
mils
mils
mils
mils
mils
mils
A1+A2 length
A1+A2 skew
A3 length
A3 skew(3)
A3 skew(4)
A4 length
A4 skew
2
3
660
25
4
5
125
660
25
6
7
8
AS length
AS skew
100
25
9
10 AS+/AS- length
11 AS+/AS- skew
12 AT length(5)
13 AT skew(6)
14 AT skew(7)
15 CK/ADDR_CTRL nominal trace length(8)
70
5
500
100
5
CACLM-50
CACLM
CACLM+50
(1) The use of vias should be minimized.
(2) Additional bypass capacitors are required when using the DDR_1V5 plane as the reference plane to allow the return current to jump
between the DDR_1V5 plane and the ground plane when the net class switches layers at a via.
(3) Non-mirrored configuration (all DDR3 memories on same side of PCB).
(4) Mirrored configuration (one DDR3 device on top of the board and one DDR3 device on the bottom).
(5) While this length can be increased for convenience, its length should be minimized.
(6) ADDR_CTRL net class only (not CK net class). Minimizing this skew is recommended, but not required.
(7) CK net class only.
(8) CACLM is the longest Manhattan distance of the CK and ADDR_CTRL net classes + 300 mils. For definition, see Section 8.13.1.2.16.1,
Figure 8-80, and Figure 8-81.
292
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
NO.
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 8-72. CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing Specification(1)(2) (continued)
PARAMETER
MIN
4w
TYP
MAX
UNIT
16 Center-to-center CK to other DDR3 trace spacing(9)
17 Center-to-center ADDR_CTRL to other DDR3 trace spacing(9)(10)
18 Center-to-center ADDR_CTRL to other ADDR_CTRL trace spacing(9)
19 CK center-to-center spacing(11)
4w
3w
20 CK spacing to other net(9)
21 Rcp(12)
22 Rtt(12)(13)
4w
Zo-1
Zo-5
Zo
Zo
Zo+
Ω
Ω
Zo+5
(9) Center-to-center spacing is allowed to fall to minimum (w) for up to 1250 mils of routed length.
(10) The ADDR_CTRL net class of the other DDR EMIF is considered other DDR3 trace spacing.
(11) CK spacing set to ensure proper differential impedance.
(12) Source termination (series resistor at driver) is specifically not allowed.
(13) Termination values should be uniform across the net class.
8.13.1.2.16.2 DQS and DQ Routing Specification
Skew within the DQS and DQ/DM net classes directly reduces setup and hold margin and thus this skew
must be controlled. The only way to practically match lengths on a PCB is to lengthen the shorter traces
up to the length of the longest net in the net class and its associated clock. As with CK and ADDR_CTRL,
a reasonable trace route length is to within a percentage of its Manhattan distance. DQLMn is defined as
DQ Longest Manhattan distance n, where n is the byte number. For a 32-bit interface, there are four
DQLMs, DQLM0-DQLM3. Likewise, for a 16-bit interface, there are two DQLMs, DQLM0-DQLM1.
NOTE
It is not required, nor is it recommended, to match the lengths across all bytes. Length
matching is only required within each byte.
Given the DQS and DQ/DM pin locations on the MPU and the DDR3 memories, the maximum possible
Manhattan distance can be determined given the placement. Figure 8-82 shows this distance for four
loads. It is from this distance that the specifications on the lengths of the transmission lines for the data
bus are determined. For DQS and DQ/DM routing, these specifications are contained in Table 8-73.
DQLMX0
DQ[0:7]/DM0/DQS0
DB0
DQ[8:15]/DM1/DQS1
DB1
DQLMX1
DQ[16:23]/DM2/DQS2
DB2
DQLMY0
DQLMX2
DQLMY1
DQLMY3 DQLMY2
DQ[23:31]/DM3/DQS3
DB3
DQLMX3
3
2
1
0
DB0 - DB3 represent data bytes 0 - 3.
There are four DQLMs, one for each byte (32-bit interface). Each DQLM is the longest Manhattan distance of the
byte; therefore:
DQLM0 = DQLMX0 + DQLMY0
DQLM1 = DQLMX1 + DQLMY1
DQLM2 = DQLMX2 + DQLMY2
DQLM3 = DQLMX3 + DQLMY3
Figure 8-82. DQLM for Any Number of Allowed DDR3 Devices
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
293
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 8-73. Data Routing Specification(1)
NO.
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
MAX
DQLM0
DQLM1
DQLM2
DQLM3
25
UNIT
mils
mils
mils
mils
mils
mils
mils
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DB0 nominal length(2)(3)
DB1 nominal length(2)(4)
DB2 nominal length(2)(5)
DB3 nominal length(2)(6)
DBn skew(7)
DQSn+ to DQSn- skew
DQSn to DBn skew(7)(8)
5
25
Center-to-center DBn to other DDR3 trace spacing(9)(10)
Center-to-center DBn to other DBn trace spacing(9)(11)
4w
3w
10 DQSn center-to-center spacing(12)
11 DQSn center-to-center spacing to other net(9)
4w
(1) External termination disallowed. Data termination should use built-in ODT functionality.
(2) DQLMn is the longest Manhattan distance of a byte. For definition, see Section 8.13.1.2.16.2 and Figure 8-82.
(3) DQLM0 is the longest Manhattan length for the net classes of Byte 0.
(4) DQLM1 is the longest Manhattan length for the net classes of Byte 1.
(5) DQLM2 is the longest Manhattan length for the net classes of Byte 2.
(6) DQLM3 is the longest Manhattan length for the net classes of Byte 3.
(7) Length matching is only done within a byte. Length matching across bytes is neither required nor recommended.
(8) Each DQS pair is length matched to its associated byte.
(9) Center-to-center spacing is allowed to fall to minimum for up to 1250 mils of routed length.
(10) Other DDR3 trace spacing means other DDR3 net classes not within the byte.
(11) This applies to spacing within the net classes of a byte.
(12) DQS pair spacing is set to ensure proper differential impedance.
294
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
8.14 Multichannel Audio Serial Port (McASP)
The multichannel audio serial port (McASP) functions as a general-purpose audio serial port optimized for
the needs of multichannel audio applications. The McASP is useful for time-division multiplexed (TDM)
stream, Inter-Integrated Sound (I2S) protocols, and inter-component digital audio interface transmission
(DIT).
8.14.1 McASP Device-Specific Information
The device includes six multichannel audio serial port (McASP) interface peripherals (McASP0, McASP1,
McASP2, McASP3, McASP4, and McASP5). The McASP module consists of a transmit and receive
section. On McASP0/1, these sections can operate completely independently with different data formats,
separate master clocks, bit clocks, and frame syncs or, alternatively, the transmit and receive sections
may be synchronized. On McASP2, McASP3, McASP4, and McASP5, the transmit and receive sections
must always be synchronized. The McASP module also includes shift registers that may be configured to
operate as either transmit data or receive data.
The transmit section of the McASP can transmit data in either a time-division-multiplexed (TDM)
synchronous serial format or in a digital audio interface (DIT) format where the bit stream is encoded for
S/PDIF, AES-3, IEC-60958, CP-430 transmission. The receive section of the McASP peripheral supports
the TDM synchronous serial format.
The McASP module can support one transmit data format (either a TDM format or DIT format) and one
receive format at a time. All transmit shift registers use the same format and all receive shift registers use
the same format; however, the transmit and receive formats need not be the same. Both the transmit and
receive sections of the McASP also support burst mode, which is useful for non-audio data (for example,
passing control information between two devices).
The McASP peripheral has additional capability for flexible clock generation and error detection/handling,
as well as error management.
The device McASP0 and McASP1 modules have up to 10 serial data pins, while McASP2, McASP3,
McASP4, and McASP5 are limited to up to four serial data pins each. The McASP FIFO size is 256 bytes
and two DMA and two interrupt requests are supported. Buffers are used transparently to better manage
DMA, which can be leveraged to manage data flow more efficiently.
For more detailed information on and the functionality of the McASP peripheral, see the Multichannel
Audio Serial Port (McASP) chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical
Reference Manual (Literature Number: SPRUGZ7).
8.14.2 McASP0, McASP1, McASP2, McASP3, McASP4, and McASP5 Peripheral Registers
Descriptions
Table 8-74. McASP0/1/2/3/4/5 Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
Peripheral ID
MCASP0
MCASP1
MCASP2
MCASP3
MCASP4
MCASP5
0x4803 8000 0x4803 C000 0x4805 0000 0x4A1A 2000 0x4A1A 8000 0x4A1A E000
0x4803 8004 0x4803 C004 0x4805 0004 0x4A1A 2004 0x4A1A 8004 0x4A1A E004
PID
PWRIDLE
Power Idle SYSCONFIG
SYSCONFIG
0x4803 8010 0x4803 C010 0x4805 0010 0x4A1A 2010 0x4A1A 8010 0x4A1A E010
0x4803 8014 0x4803 C014 0x4805 0014 0x4A1A 2014 0x4A1A 8014 0x4A1A E014
0x4803 8018 0x4803 C018 0x4805 0018 0x4A1A 2018 0x4A1A 8018 0x4A1A E018
PFUNC
PDIR
Pin Function
Pin Direction
Pin Data Out
PDOUT
PDIN
0x4803 801C 0x4803 C01C 0x4805 001C 0x4A1A 201C 0x4A1A 801C
0x4A1A
E01C
Pin Data Input (Read)
Read returns pin data input
PDSET
Pin Data Set (Write)
Writes effect pin data set
(Alternate Write Address
PDOUT)
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
295
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 8-74. McASP0/1/2/3/4/5 Registers (continued)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
MCASP2 MCASP3
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
Pin Data Clear
MCASP0
MCASP1
MCASP4
MCASP5
0x4803 8020 0x4803 C020 0x4805 0020 0x4A1A 2020 0x4A1A 8020 0x4A1A E020
PDCLR
(Alternate Write Address
PDOUT)
0x4803 8044 0x4803 C044 0x4805 0044 0x4A1A 2044 0x4A1A 8044 0x4A1A E044
0x4803 8048 0x4803 C048 0x4805 0048 0x4A1A 2048 0x4A1A 8048 0x4A1A E048
GBLCTL
AMUTE
LBCTL
Global Control
Mute Control
0x4803 804C 0x4803 C04C 0x4805 004C 0x4A1A 204C 0x4A1A 804C
0x4A1A
E04C
Loop-Back Test Control
0x4803 8050 0x4803 C050 0x4805 0050 0x4A1A 2050 0x4A1A 8050 0x4A1A E050
0x4803 8060 0x4803 C060 0x4805 0060 0x4A1A 2060 0x4A1A 8060 0x4A1A E060
TXDITCTL Transmit DIT Mode Control
GBLCTLR
Alias of GBLCTL containing
only receiver reset bits;
allows transmit to be reset
independently from receive
0x4803 8064 0x4803 C064 0x4805 0064 0x4A1A 2064 0x4A1A 8064 0x4A1A E064
0x4803 8068 0x4803 C068 0x4805 0068 0x4A1A 2068 0x4A1A 8068 0x4A1A E068
RXMASK
RXFMT
Receiver Bit Mask
Receive Bitstream Format
Receive Frame Sync Control
0x4803 806C 0x4803 C06C 0x4805 006C 0x4A1A 206C 0x4A1A 806C
0x4A1A
E06C
RXFMCTL
0x4803 8070 0x4803 C070 0x4805 0070 0x4A1A 2070 0x4A1A 8070 0x4A1A E070 ACLKRCTL Receive Clock Control
0x4803 8074 0x4803 C074 0x4805 0074 0x4A1A 2074 0x4A1A 8074 0x4A1A E074 AHCLKRCTL High Frequency Receive
Clock Control
0x4803 8078 0x4803 C078 0x4805 0078 0x4A1A 2078 0x4A1A 8078 0x4A1A E078
RXTDM
Receive TDM Slot 0-31
0x4803 807C 0x4803 C07C 0x4805 007C 0x4A1A 207C 0x4A1A 807C
0x4A1A
E07C
EVTCTLR
Receiver Interrupt Control
0x4803 8080 0x4803 C080 0x4805 0080 0x4A1A 2080 0x4A1A 8080 0x4A1A E080
RXSTAT
Status Receiver
0x4803 8084 0x4803 C084 0x4805 0084 0x4A1A 2084 0x4A1A 8084 0x4A1A E084 RXTDMSLOT Current Receive TDM Slot
0x4803 8088 0x4803 C088 0x4805 0088 0x4A1A 2088 0x4A1A 8088 0x4A1A E088 RXCLKCHK Receiver Clock Check
Control
0x4803 808C 0x4803 C08C 0x4805 008C 0x4A1A 208C 0x4A1A 808C
0x4A1A
E08C
REVTCTL
Receiver DMA Event Control
0x4803 80A0 0x4803 C0A0 0x4805 00A0 0x4A1A 20A0 0x4A1A 80A0 0x4A1A E0A0
GBLCTLX
Alias of GBLCTL containing
only transmit reset bits;
allows transmit to be reset
independently from receive
0x4803 80A4 0x4803 C0A4 0x4805 00A4 0x4A1A 20A4 0x4A1A 80A4 0x4A1A E0A4
0x4803 80A8 0x4803 C0A8 0x4805 00A8 0x4A1A 20A8 0x4A1A 80A8 0x4A1A E0A8
TXMASK
Transmit Format Unit Bit
Mask
TXFMT
Transmit Bitstream Format
0x4803 80AC 0x4803 C0AC 0x4805 00AC
0x4A1A
20AC
0x4A1A
80AC
0x4A1A
E0AC
TXFMCTL
Transmit Frame Sync Control
0x4803 80B0 0x4803 C0B0 0x4805 00B0 0x4A1A 20B0 0x4A1A 80B0 0x4A1A E0B0 ACLKXCTL Transmit Clock Control
0x4803 80B4 0x4803 C0B4 0x4805 00B4 0x4A1A 20B4 0x4A1A 80B4 0x4A1A E0B4 AHCLKXCTL High Frequency Transmit
Clock Control
0x4803 80B8 0x4803 C0B8 0x4805 00B8 0x4A1A 20B8 0x4A1A 80B8 0x4A1A E0B8
TXTDM
Transmit TDM Slot 0-31
0x4803 80BC 0x4803 C0BC 0x4805 00BC
0x4A1A
20BC
0x4A1A
80BC
0x4A1A
E0BC
EVTCTLX
Transmitter Interrupt Control
0x4803 80C0 0x4803 C0C0 0x4805 00C0 0x4A1A 20C0 0x4A1A 80C0
0x4803 80C4 0x4803 C0C4 0x4805 00C4 0x4A1A 20C4 0x4A1A 80C4
0x4803 80C8 0x4803 C0C8 0x4805 00C8 0x4A1A 20C8 0x4A1A 80C8
0x4A1A
E0C0
TXSTAT
Status Transmitter
0x4A1A
E0C4
TXTDMSLOT Current Transmit TDM Slot
0x4A1A
E0C8
TXCLKCHK Transmit Clock Check
Control
0x4803 80CC
0x4803
C0CC
0x4805 00CC
0x4A1A
20CC
0x4A1A
80CC
0x4A1A
E0CC
XEVTCTL
Transmitter DMA Control
0x4803 80D0 0x4803 C0D0 0x4805 00D0 0x4A1A 20D0 0x4A1A 80D0
0x4A1A
E0D0
CLKADJEN One-shot Clock Adjust
Enable
296
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
MCASP0
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 8-74. McASP0/1/2/3/4/5 Registers (continued)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
MCASP1
MCASP2
MCASP3
MCASP4
MCASP5
0x4803 8100 0x4803 C100 0x4805 0100 0x4A1A 2100 0x4A1A 8100
0x4803 8104 0x4803 C104 0x4805 0104 0x4A1A 2104 0x4A1A 8104
0x4803 8108 0x4803 C108 0x4805 0108 0x4A1A 2108 0x4A1A 8108
0x4803 810C 0x4803 C10C 0x4805 010C 0x4A1A 210C 0x4A1A 810C
0x4803 8110 0x4803 C110 0x4805 0110 0x4A1A 2110 0x4A1A 8110
0x4803 8114 0x4803 C114 0x4805 0114 0x4A1A 2114 0x4A1A 8114
0x4803 8118 0x4803 C118 0x4805 0118 0x4A1A 2118 0x4A1A 8118
0x4803 811C 0x4803 C11C 0x4805 011C 0x4A1A 211C 0x4A1A 811C
0x4803 8120 0x4803 C120 0x4805 0120 0x4A1A 2120 0x4A1A 8120
0x4803 8124 0x4803 C124 0x4805 0124 0x4A1A 2124 0x4A1A 8124
0x4803 8128 0x4803 C128 0x4805 0128 0x4A1A 2128 0x4A1A 8128
0x4803 812C 0x4803 C12C 0x4805 012C 0x4A1A 212C 0x4A1A 812C
0x4803 8130 0x4803 C130 0x4805 0130 0x4A1A 2130 0x4A1A 8130
0x4803 8134 0x4803 C134 0x4805 0134 0x4A1A 2134 0x4A1A 8134
0x4803 8138 0x4803 C138 0x4805 0138 0x4A1A 2138 0x4A1A 8138
0x4803 813C 0x4803 C13C 0x4805 013C 0x4A1A 213C 0x4A1A 813C
0x4803 8140 0x4803 C140 0x4805 0140 0x4A1A 2140 0x4A1A 8140
0x4803 8144 0x4803 C144 0x4805 0144 0x4A1A 2144 0x4A1A 8144
0x4803 8148 0x4803 C148 0x4805 0148 0x4A1A 2148 0x4A1A 8148
0x4803 814C 0x4803 C14C 0x4805 014C 0x4A1A 214C 0x4A1A 814C
0x4803 8150 0x4803 C150 0x4805 0150 0x4A1A 2150 0x4A1A 8150
0x4803 8154 0x4803 C154 0x4805 0154 0x4A1A 2154 0x4A1A 8154
0x4803 8158 0x4803 C158 0x4805 0158 0x4A1A 2158 0x4A1A 8158
0x4803 815C 0x4803 C15C 0x4805 015C 0x4A1A 215C 0x4A1A 815C
Left (Even TDM Slot)
Channel Status Register File
0x4A1A E100 DITCSRA0
Left (Even TDM Slot)
Channel Status Register File
0x4A1A E104 DITCSRA1
0x4A1A E108 DITCSRA2
Left (Even TDM Slot)
Channel Status Register File
0x4A1A
DITCSRA3
E10C
Left (Even TDM Slot)
Channel Status Register File
Left (Even TDM Slot)
Channel Status Register File
0x4A1A E110 DITCSRA4
0x4A1A E114 DITCSRA5
0x4A1A E118 DITCSRB0
Left (Even TDM Slot)
Channel Status Register File
Right (Odd TDM Slot)
Channel Status Register File
0x4A1A
DITCSRB1
E11C
Right (Odd TDM Slot)
Channel Status Register File
Right (Odd TDM Slot)
Channel Status Register File
0x4A1A E120 DITCSRB2
0x4A1A E124 DITCSRB3
0x4A1A E128 DITCSRB4
Right (Odd TDM Slot)
Channel Status Register File
Right (Odd TDM Slot)
Channel Status Register File
0x4A1A
DITCSRB5
E12C
Right (Odd TDM Slot)
Channel Status Register File
Left (Even TDM Slot) User
Data Register File
0x4A1A E130 DITUDRA0
0x4A1A E134 DITUDRA1
0x4A1A E138 DITUDRA2
Left (Even TDM Slot) User
Data Register File
Left (Even TDM Slot) User
Data Register File
0x4A1A
DITUDRA3
E13C
Left (Even TDM Slot) User
Data Register File
Left (Even TDM Slot) User
Data Register File
0x4A1A E140 DITUDRA4
0x4A1A E144 DITUDRA5
0x4A1A E148 DITUDRB0
Left (Even TDM Slot) User
Data Register File
Right (Odd TDM Slot) User
Data Register File
0x4A1A
DITUDRB1
E14C
Right (Odd TDM Slot) User
Data Register File
Right (Odd TDM Slot) User
Data Register File
0x4A1A E150 DITUDRB2
0x4A1A E154 DITUDRB3
0x4A1A E158 DITUDRB4
Right (Odd TDM Slot) User
Data Register File
Right (Odd TDM Slot) User
Data Register File
0x4A1A
DITUDRB5
E15C
Right (Odd TDM Slot) User
Data Register File
0x4803 8180 0x4803 C180 0x4805 0180 0x4A1A 2180 0x4A1A 8180 0x4A1A E180 XRSRCTL0 - Serializer 0 Control -
-
-
-
-
-
-
XRSRCTL15 Serializer 15 Control
0x4803 81BC 0x4803 C1BC 0x4805 01BC
0x4A1A
21BC
0x4A1A
81BC
0x4A1A
E1BC
0x4803 8200 0x4803 C200 0x4805 0200 0x4A1A 2200 0x4A1A 8200 0x4A1A E200
TXBUF0 -
TXBUF15
Transmit Buffer for Serializer
0 - Transmit Buffer for
Serializer 15
-
-
-
-
-
-
0x4803 8
23C
0x4803 C23C 0x4805 023C 0x4A1A 223C 0x4A1A 823C
0x4A1A
E23C
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
297
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 8-74. McASP0/1/2/3/4/5 Registers (continued)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
MCASP2 MCASP3
0x4803 8280 0x4803 C280 0x4805 0280 0x4A1A 2280 0x4A1A 8280 0x4A1A E280
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
MCASP0
MCASP1
MCASP4
MCASP5
RXBUF0 -
RXBUF15
Receive Buffer for Serializer
0 - Receive Buffer for
Serializer 15
-
-
-
-
-
-
0x4803 82BC 0x4803 C2BC 0x4805 02BC
0x4A1A
22BC
0x4A1A
82BC
0x4A1A
E2BC
0x4803 9000 0x4803 D000 0x4805 1000 0x4A1A 3000 0x4A1A 9000 0x4A1A F000 BUFFER_CF Write FIFO Control
GRD_WFIFO
CTL
0x4803 9004 0x4803 D004 0x4805 1004 0x4A1A 3004 0x4A1A 9004 0x4A1A F004 BUFFER_CF Write FIFO Status
GRD_WFIFO
STS
0x4803 9008 0x4803 D008 0x4805 1008 0x4A1A 3008 0x4A1A 9008 0x4A1A F008 BUFFER_CF Read FIFO Control
GRD_RFIFO
CTL
0x4803 900C 0x4803 D00C 0x4805 100C 0x0A1A 300C 0x0A1A 900C 0x0A1A F00C BUFFER_CF Read FIFO Status
GRD_RFIFO
STS
0x4803 9010 0x4803 D010 0x4805 1010 0x4A1A 3010 0x4A1A 9010 0x4A1A F010
–
Reserved
-
-
-
-
-
-
0x4803 9FFF 0x4803 DFFF 0x4805 1FFF 0x4A1A 3FFF 0x4A1A 9FFF 0x4A1A FFFF
298
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
8.14.3 McASP (McASP[5:0]) Electrical Data/Timing
Table 8-75. Timing Requirements for McASP(1)
(see Figure 8-83)
OPP100
NO
.
McASP[5:2,0] Only
McASP1 Only
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
1
2
tc(AHCLKRX)
tw(AHCLKRX)
Cycle time, MCA[x]_AHCLKR/X
20
20
ns
ns
0.5P -
3(2)
0.5P -
3(2)
Pulse duration, MCA[x]_AHCLKR/X high or low
Any Other
Conditions
20
20
ns
ns
ns
ns
3
4
tc(ACLKRX)
Cycle time, MCA[x]_ACLKR/X
ACLKx, AFSX
and AXR are all
inputs
–
12.5
Any Other
Conditions
0.5R -
3(3)
0.5R -
3(3)
Pulse duration, MCA[x]_ACLKR/X high or
low
tw(ACLKRX)
ACLKx, AFSX
and AXR are all
inputs
0.5R -
1.5(3)
–
ACLKR/X int
11.5
4
11.5
2.5
4
Setup time, MCA[x]_AFSR/X input valid
before MCA[X]_ACLKR/X
5
6
7
8
tsu(AFSRX-ACLKRX)
th(ACLKRX-AFSRX)
tsu(AXR-ACLKRX)
th(ACLKRX-AXR)
ACLKR/X ext in
ACLKR/X ext out
ACLKR/X int
ns
ns
ns
ns
4
-1
-1
Hold time, MCA[x]_AFSR/X input valid
after MCA[X]_ACLKR/X
ACLKR/X ext in
ACLKR/X ext out
ACLKR/X int
0.4
0.4
11.5
4
2.5
2.5
11.5
2
Setup time, MCA[x]_AXR input valid
before MCA[X]_ACLKR/X
ACLKR/X ext in
ACLKR/X ext out
ACLKR/X int
4
4
-1
-1
Hold time, MCA[x]_AXR input valid after
MCA[X]_ACLKR/X
ACLKR/X ext in
ACLKR/X ext out
0.4
0.4
2
2
(1) ACLKR internal: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM=1, PDIR.ACLKR = 1
ACLKR external input: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM=0, PDIR.ACLKR=0
ACLKR external output: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM=0, PDIR.ACLKR=1
ACLKX internal: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=1, PDIR.ACLKX = 1
ACLKX external input: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=0, PDIR.ACLKX=0
ACLKX external output: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=0, PDIR.ACLKX=1
(2) P = MCA[x]_AHCLKR/X period in nano seconds (ns).
(3) R = MCA[x]_ACLKR/X period in ns.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
299
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
2
1
2
MCA[x]_ACLKR/X (Falling Edge Polarity)
MCA[x]_AHCLKR/X (Rising Edge Polarity)
4
4
3
MCA[x]_ACLKR/X (CLKRP = CLKXP = 0)(A)
MCA[x]_ACLKR/X (CLKRP = CLKXP = 1)(B)
6
5
MCA[x]_AFSR/X (Bit Width, 0 Bit Delay)
MCA[x]_AFSR/X (Bit Width, 1 Bit Delay)
MCA[x]_AFSR/X (Bit Width, 2 Bit Delay)
MCA[x]_AFSR/X (Slot Width, 0 Bit Delay)
MCA[x]_AFSR/X (Slot Width, 1 Bit Delay)
MCA[x]_AFSR/X (Slot Width, 2 Bit Delay)
8
7
MCA[x]_AXR[x] (Data In/Receive)
A0 A1
A30 A31 B0 B1
B30 B31 C0 C1 C2 C3
C31
A. For CLKRP = CLKXP = 0, the McASP transmitter is configured for rising edge (to shift data out) and the McASP
receiver is configured for falling edge (to shift data in).
B. For CLKRP = CLKXP = 1, the McASP transmitter is configured for falling edge (to shift data out) and the McASP
receiver is configured for rising edge (to shift data in).
Figure 8-83. McASP Input Timing
300
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 8-76. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for McASP(1)
(see Figure 8-84)
OPP100
MIN
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MAX
9
tc(AHCLKRX)
Cycle time, MCA[X]_AHCLKR/X
20(2)
ns
ns
ns
ns
0.5P -
2.5(3)
10 tw(AHCLKRX)
11 tc(ACLKRX)
12 tw(ACLKRX)
Pulse duration, MCA[X]_AHCLKR/X high or low
Cycle time, MCA[X]_ACLKR/X
20
0.5P -
2.5(3)
Pulse duration, MCA[X]_ACLKR/X high or low
ACLKR/X int
0
2
6
Delay time, MCA[X]_ACLKR/X transmit edge to
MCA[X]_AFSR/X output valid
ACLKR/X ext in
13.5
13 td(ACLKRX-AFSRX)
ns
ns
Delay time, MCA[X]_ACLKR/X transmit edge to
MCA[X]_AFSR/X output valid with Pad Loopback
ACLKR/X ext out
2
13.5
ACLKX int
0
2
6
Delay time, MCA[X]_ACLKX transmit edge to
MCA[X]_AXR output valid
ACLKX ext in
13.5
14 td(ACLKX-AXR)
Delay time, MCA[X]_ACLKX transmit edge to
MCA[X]_AXR output valid with Pad Loopback
ACLKX ext out
2
13.5
ACLKX int
0
2
6
Disable time, MCA[X]_ACLKX transmit edge to
MCA[X]_AXR output high impedance
ACLKX ext in
13.5
15 tdis(ACLKX-AXR)
ns
Disable time, MCA[X]_ACLKX transmit edge to
MCA[X]_AXR output high impedance with Pad
Loopback
ACLKX ext out
2
13.5
(1) ACLKR internal: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM=1, PDIR.ACLKR = 1
ACLKR external input: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM=0, PDIR.ACLKR=0
ACLKR external output: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM=0, PDIR.ACLKR=1
ACLKX internal: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=1, PDIR.ACLKX = 1
ACLKX external input: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=0, PDIR.ACLKX=0
ACLKX external output: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM=0, PDIR.ACLKX=1
(2) 50 MHz
(3) P = AHCLKR/X period.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
301
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
10
10
9
MCA[x]_ACLKR/X (Falling Edge Polarity)
MCA[x]_AHCLKR/X (Rising Edge Polarity)
12
11
12
MCA[x]_ACLKR/X (CLKRP = CLKXP = 1)(A)
MCA[x]_ACLKR/X (CLKRP = CLKXP = 0)(B)
13
13
13
13
MCA[x]_AFSR/X (Bit Width, 0 Bit Delay)
MCA[x]_AFSR/X (Bit Width, 1 Bit Delay)
MCA[x]_AFSR/X (Bit Width, 2 Bit Delay)
MCA[x]_AFSR/X (Slot Width, 0 Bit Delay)
MCA[x]_AFSR/X (Slot Width, 1 Bit Delay)
MCA[x]_AFSR/X (Slot Width, 2 Bit Delay)
13
13
13
MCA[x]_AXR[x] (Data Out/Transmit)
14
15
A0 A1
A30 A31 B0 B1
B30 B31 C0 C1 C2 C3
C31
A. For CLKRP = CLKXP = 1, the McASP transmitter is configured for falling edge (to shift data out) and the McASP
receiver is configured for rising edge (to shift data in).
B. For CLKRP = CLKXP = 0, the McASP transmitter is configured for rising edge (to shift data out) and the McASP
receiver is configured for falling edge (to shift data in).
Figure 8-84. McASP Output Timing
302
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
8.15 Multichannel Buffered Serial Port (McBSP)
The McBSP provides these functions:
•
•
•
•
Full-duplex communication
Double-buffered data registers, which allow a continuous data stream
Independent framing and clocking for receive and transmit
Direct interface to industry-standard codecs, analog interface chips (AICs), and other serially
connected analog-to-digital (A/D) and digital-to-analog (D/A) devices
•
•
•
•
Supports TDM, I2S, and similar formats
External shift clock or an internal, programmable frequency shift clock for data transfer
5KB Tx and Rx buffer
Supports three interrupt and two DMA requests.
The McBSP module may support two types of data transfer at the system level:
•
The full-cycle mode, for which one clock period is used to transfer the data, generated on one edge
and captured on the same edge (one clock period later).
•
The half-cycle mode, for which one half clock period is used to transfer the data, generated on one
edge and captured on the opposite edge (one half clock period later). Note that a new data is
generated only every clock period, which secures the required hold time. The interface clock
(CLKX/CLKR) activation edge (data/frame sync capture and generation) has to be configured
accordingly with the external peripheral (activation edge capability) and the type of data transfer
required at the system level.
For more detailed information on the McBSP peripheral, see the Multichannel Buffered Serial Port
(McBSP) chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual
(Literature Number: SPRUGZ7).
The following sections describe the timing characteristics for applications in normal mode (that is, the
McBSP connected to one peripheral) and TDM applications in multipoint mode.
8.15.1 McBSP Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 8-77. McBSP Registers(1)
HEX ADDRESS
0x4700 0000
0x4700 0008
0x4700 0010
0x4700 0014
0x4700 0018
0x4700 001C
0x4700 0020
0x4700 0024
0x4700 0028
0x4700 002C
0x4700 0030
0x4700 0034
0x4700 0038
0x4700 003C
0x4700 0040
0x4700 0044
0x4700 0048
ACRONYM
DRR_REG
REGISTER NAME
McBSP data receive
DXR_REG
McBSP data transmit
SPCR2_REG
SPCR1_REG
RCR2_REG
RCR1_REG
XCR2_REG
XCR1_REG
SRGR2_REG
SRGR1_REG
MCR2_REG
MCR1_REG
RCERA_REG
RCERB_REG
XCERA_REG
XCERB_REG
PCR_REG
McBSP serial port control 2
McBSP serial port control 1
McBSP receive control 2
McBSP receive control 1
McBSP transmit control 2
McBSP transmit control 1
McBSP sample rate generator 2
McBSP sample rate generator 1
McBSP multichannel 2
McBSP multichannel 1
McBSP receive channel enable partition A
McBSP receive channel enable partition B
McBSP transmit channel enable partition A
McBSP transmit channel enable partition B
McBSP pin control
(1) Note that the McBSP registers are 32-bit aligned.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
303
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 8-77. McBSP Registers(1) (continued)
HEX ADDRESS
0x4700 004C
0x4700 0050
0x4700 0054
0x4700 0058
0x4700 005C
0x4700 0060
0x4700 0064
0x4700 0068
0x4700 006C
0x4700 0070
0x4700 0074
0x4700 0078
0x4700 007C
0x4700 0080
0x4700 0084
0x4700 0088
0x4700 008C
0x4700 0090
0x4700 0094
0x4700 00A0
0x4700 00A4
0x4700 00A8
0x4700 00AC
0x4700 00B0
0x4700 00B4
0x4700 00B8
0x4700 00C0
ACRONYM
RCERC_REG
RCERD_REG
XCERC_REG
XCERD_REG
RCERE_REG
RCERF_REG
XCERE_REG
XCERF_REG
RCERG_REG
RCERH_REG
XCERG_REG
XCERH_REG
REV_REG
REGISTER NAME
McBSP receive channel enable partition C
McBSP receive channel enable partition D
McBSP transmit channel enable partition C
McBSP transmit channel enable partition D
McBSP receive channel enable partition E
McBSP receive channel enable partition F
McBSP transmit channel enable partition E
McBSP transmit channel enable partition F
McBSP receive channel enable partition G
McBSP receive channel enable partition H
McBSP transmit channel enable partition G
McBSP transmit channel enable partition H
McBSP revision number
RINTCLR_REG
XINTCLR_REG
ROVFLCLR_REG
SYSCONFIG_REG
THRSH2_REG
THRSH1_REG
IRQSTATATUS
IRQENABLE
McBSP receive interrupt clear
McBSP transmit interrupt clear
McBSP receive overflow interrupt clear
McBSP system configuration
McBSP transmit buffer threshold (DMA or IRQ trigger)
McBSP receive buffer threshold (DMA or IRQ trigger)
McBSP interrupt status (OCP compliant IRQ line)
McBSP interrupt enable (OCP compliant IRQ line)
McBSP wakeup enable
WAKEUPEN
XCCR_REG
McBSP transmit configuration control
McBSP receive configuration control
McBSP transmit buffer status
RCCR_REG
XBUFFSTAT_REG
RBUFFSTAT_REG
STATUS_REG
McBSP receive buffer status
McBSP status
304
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
8.15.2 McBSP Electrical Data/Timing
Table 8-78. Timing Requirements for McBSP - Master Mode(1)
(see Figure 8-85)
OPP100
UNIT
NO.
MIN
3.5
MAX
6
7
tsu(DRV-CLKAE)
th(CLKAE-DRV)
Setup time, MCB_DR valid before MCB_CLK active edge(2)
Hold time, MCB_DR valid after MCB_CLK active edge(2)
ns
ns
0.1
(1) The timings apply to all configurations regardless of MCB_CLK polarity and which clock edges are used to drive output data and capture
input data.
(2) MCB_CLK corresponds to either MCB_CLKX or MCB_CLKR.
Table 8-79. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for McBSP - Master
Mode(1)
(see Figure 8-85)
OPP100
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
20.83
0.5*P - 1(3)
0.5*P - 1(3)
MAX
1
2
3
tc(CLK)
Cycle time, output MCB_CLK period(2)
Pulse duration, output MCB_CLK low(2)
Pulse duration, output MCB_CLK high(2)
ns
ns
ns
tw(CLKL)
tw(CLKH)
Delay time, output MCB_CLK active edge to output MCB_FS
valid(2)(4)
4
5
td(CLKAE-FSV)
0.7
0.7
9.4
9.4
ns
ns
Delay time, output MCB_CLKX active edge to output MCB_DX
valid
td(CLKXAE-DXV)
(1) The timings apply to all configurations regardless of MCB_CLK polarity and which clock edges are used to drive output data and capture
input data.
(2) MCB_CLK corresponds to either MCB_CLKX or MCB_CLKR.
(3) P = MCB_CLKX/MCB_CLKR output CLK period, in ns; use whichever value is greater. This parameter applies to the maximum McBSP
frequency. Operate serial clocks (CLKX/R) in the reasonable range of 40/60 duty cycle.
(4) MCB_FS corresponds to either MCB_FSX or MCB_FSR.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
305
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
2
1
3
MCB_CLK
4
4
MCB_FS
5
5
5
MCB_DX
MCB_DR
MCB_DX7
MCB_DX6
MCB_DX0
MCB_DR0
7
6
MCB_DR7
MCB_DR6
A. The timings apply to all configurations regardless of MCB_CLK polarity and which clock edges are used to drive
output data and capture input data.
B. MCBSP_CLK corresponds to either MCBSP_CLKX or MCBSP_CLKR; MCBSP_FS corresponds to either
MCBSP_FSX
or
MCBSP_FSR.
McBSP in 6-pin mode: DX and DR as data pins; CLKX, CLKR, FSX and FSR as control pins.
McBSP in 4-pin mode: DX and DR as data pins; CLKX and FSX pins as control pins. The CLKX and FSX pins are
internally looped back via software configuration, respectively to the CLKR and FSR internal signals for data receive.
C. The polarity of McBSP frame synchronization is software configurable.
D. The active clock edge selection of MCBSP_CLK (rising or falling) on which MCBSP_DX data is latched and
MCBSP_DR data is sampled is software configurable.
E. Timing diagrams are for data delay set to 1.
F. For further details about the registers used to configure McBSP, see the Multichannel Buffered Serial Port (McBSP)
chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number:
SPRUGZ7).
Figure 8-85. McBSP Master Mode Timing
Table 8-80. Timing Requirements for McBSP - Slave Mode(1)
(see Figure 8-86)
OPP100
MIN
NO.
UNIT
MAX
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
tc(CLK)
Cycle time, MCB_CLK period(2)
Pulse duration, MCB_CLK low(2)
Pulse duration, MCB_CLK high(2)
Setup time, MCB_FS valid before MCB_CLK active edge(2)(4)
Hold time, MCB_FS valid after MCB_CLK active edge(2)(4)
Setup time, MCB_DR valid before MCB_CLK active edge(2)
Hold time, MCB_DR valid after MCB_CLK active edge(2)
20.83
0.5*P - 1(3)
0.5*P - 1(3)
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
tw(CLKL)
tw(CLKH)
tsu(FSV-CLKAE)
th(CLKAE-FSV)
tsu(DRV-CLKAE)
th(CLKAE-DRV)
3.8
0
3.8
0
(1) The timings apply to all configurations regardless of MCB_CLK polarity and which clock edges are used to drive output data and capture
input data.
(2) MCB_CLK corresponds to either MCB_CLKX or MCB_CLKR.
(3) P = MCB_CLKX/MCB_CLKR output CLK period, in ns; use whichever value is greater. This parameter applies to the maximum McBSP
frequency. Operate serial clocks (CLKX/R) in the reasonable range of 40/60 duty cycle.
(4) MCB_FS corresponds to either MCB_FSX or MCB_FSR.
Table 8-81. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for McBSP - Slave
Mode(1)
(see Figure 8-86)
OPP100
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
6
td(CLKXAE-DXV)
Delay time, input MCB_CLKx active edge to output MCB_DX valid
0.5
12.5
ns
(1) The timings apply to all configurations regardless of MCB_CLK polarity and which clock edges are used to drive output data and capture
input data.
306
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
2
1
3
MCB_CLK
MCB_FS
MCB_DX
4
5
6
6
8
6
MCB_DX7
MCB_DX6
MCB_DX0
MCB_DR0
7
MCB_DR
MCB_DR7
MCB_DR6
A. The timings apply to all configurations regardless of MCB_CLK polarity and which clock edges are used to drive
output data and capture input data.
B. MCBSP_CLK corresponds to either MCBSP_CLKX or MCBSP_CLKR; MCBSP_FS corresponds to either
MCBSP_FSX
or
MCBSP_FSR.
McBSP in 6-pin mode: DX and DR as data pins; CLKX, CLKR, FSX and FSR as control pins.
McBSP in 4-pin mode: DX and DR as data pins; CLKX and FSX pins as control pins. The CLKX and FSX pins are
internally looped back via software configuration, respectively to the CLKR and FSR internal signals for data receive.
C. The polarity of McBSP frame synchronization is software configurable.
D. The active clock edge selection of MCBSP_CLK (rising or falling) on which MCBSP_DX data is latched and
MCBSP_DR data is sampled is software configurable.
E. Timing diagrams are for data delay set to 1.
F. For further details about the registers used to configure McBSP, see the Multichannel Buffered Serial Port (McBSP)
chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number:
SPRUGZ7).
Figure 8-86. McBSP Slave Mode Timing
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
307
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
8.16 MultiMedia Card/Secure Digital/Secure Digital Input Output (MMC/SD/SDIO)
The device includes 3 MMC/SD/SDIO Controllers which are compliant with MMC V4.3, Secure Digital Part
1 Physical Layer Specification V2.00 and Secure Digital Input Output (SDIO) V2.00 specifications.
The device MMC/SD/SDIO Controller has the following features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
MultiMedia card (MMC)
Secure Digital (SD) memory card
MMC/SD protocol support
SDIO protocol support
Programmable clock frequency
1024 byte read/write FIFO to lower system overhead
Slave EDMA transfer capability
SD High capacity support
8.16.1 MMC/SD/SDIO Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 8-82. MMC/SD/SDIO Registers(1)
MMC/SD/SDIO0
HEX ADDRESS
MMC/SD/SDIO1
HEX ADDRESS
MMC/SD/SDIO2
HEX ADDRESS
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
0x4806 0000
0x4806 0004
0x481D 8000
0x481D 8004
0x4781 0000
0x4781 0004
MMCHS_HL_REV
IP Revision Identifier
MMCHS_HL_HWINF Hardware Configuration
O
0x4806 0010
0x4806 0110
0x4806 0114
0x481D 8010
0x481D 8110
0x481D 8114
0x4781 0010
0x4781 0110
0x4781 0114
MMCHS_HL_SYSCO Clock Management Configuration
NFIG
MMCHS_SYSCONFI System Configuration
G
MMCHS_SYSSTATU System Status
S
0x4806 0124
0x4806 0128
0x4806 012C
0x4806 0130
0x4806 0200
0x4806 0204
0x4806 0208
0x4806 020C
0x4806 0210
0x4806 0214
0x4806 0218
0x4806 021C
0x4806 0220
0x4806 0224
0x4806 0228
0x4806 022C
0x4806 0230
0x4806 0234
0x4806 0238
0x4806 023C
0x4806 0240
0x4806 0248
0x481D 8124
0x481D 8128
0x481D 812C
0x481D 8130
0x481D 8200
0x481D 8204
0x481D 8208
0x481D 820C
0x481D 8210
0x481D 8214
0x481D 8218
0x481D 821C
0x481D 8220
0x481D 8224
0x481D 8228
0x481D 822C
0x481D 8230
0x481D 8234
0x481D 8238
0x481D 823C
0x481D 8240
0x481D 8248
0x4781 0124
0x4781 0128
0x4781 012C
0x4781 0130
0x4781 0200
0x4781 0204
0x4781 0208
0x4781 020C
0x4781 0210
0x4781 0214
0x4781 0218
0x4781 021C
0x4781 0220
0x4781 0224
0x4781 0228
0x4781 022C
0x4781 0230
0x4781 0234
0x4781 0238
0x4781 023C
0x4781 0240
0x4781 0248
MMCHS_CSRE
Card status response error
MMCHS_SYSTEST System Test
MMCHS_CON
Configuration
Power counter
MMCHS_PWCNT
MMCHS_SDMASA SDMA System address:
MMCHS_BLK
MMCHS_ARG
MMCHS_CMD
MMCHS_RSP10
MMCHS_RSP32
MMCHS_RSP54
MMCHS_RSP76
MMCHS_DATA
MMCHS_PSTATE
MMCHS_HCTL
MMCHS_SYSCTL
MMCHS_STAT
MMCHS_IE
Transfer Length Configuration
Command argument
Command and transfer mode
Command Response 0 and 1
Command Response 2 and 3
Command Response 4 and 5
Command Response 6 and 7
Data
Present state
Host Control
SD system control
Interrupt status
Interrupt SD enable
Interrupt Signal Enable
Auto CMD12 Error Status
Capabilities
MMCHS_ISE
MMCHS_AC12
MMCHS_CAPA
MMCHS_CUR_CAPA Maximum current capabilities
(1) SD/SDIO registers are limited to 32-bit data accesses; 16-bit and 8-bit accesses are not allowed and can corrupt register content.
308 Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 8-82. MMC/SD/SDIO Registers(1) (continued)
MMC/SD/SDIO0
MMC/SD/SDIO1
HEX ADDRESS
MMC/SD/SDIO2
HEX ADDRESS
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
HEX ADDRESS
0x4806 0250
0x4806 0254
0x4806 0258
0x4806 025C
0x4806 02FC
0x481D 8250
0x481D 8254
0x481D 8258
0x481D 825C
0x481D 82FC
0x4781 0250
0x4781 0254
0x4781 0258
0x4781 025C
0x4781 02FC
MMCHS_FE
Force Event
MMCHS_ADMAES ADMA Error Status
MMCHS_ADMASAL ADMA System address Low bits
MMCHS_ADMASAH ADMA System address High bits
MMCHS_REV
Versions
8.16.2 MMC/SD/SDIO Electrical Data/Timing
Table 8-83. Timing Requirements for MMC/SD/SDIO
(see Figure 8-88, Figure 8-90)
ALL MODES
NO.
UNIT
MIN
4.1
1.9
4.1
1.9
MAX
1
2
3
4
tsu(CMDV-CLKH)
th(CLKH-CMDV)
tsu(DATV-CLKH)
th(CLKH-DATV)
Setup time, SD_CMD valid before SD_CLK rising clock edge
Hold time, SD_CMD valid after SD_CLK rising clock edge
Setup time, SD_DATx valid before SD_CLK rising clock edge
Hold time, SD_DATx valid after SD_CLK rising clock edge
ns
ns
ns
ns
Table 8-84. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for MMC/SD/SDIO
(see Figure 8-87 through Figure 8-90)
MODES
3.3 V STD
1.8 V SDR12
3.3 V HS
1.8 V SDR25
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
fop(CLK)
tc(CLK)
Operating frequency, SD_CLK
Operating period: SD_CLK
24
48 MHz
7
41.7
20.8
ns
fop(CLKID)
tc(CLKID)
tw(CLKL)
Identification mode frequency, SD_CLK
Identification mode period: SD_CLK
Pulse duration, SD_CLK low
400
400 kHz
8
9
2500.0
0.5*P(1)
0.5*P(1)
2500.0
0.5*P(1)
0.5*P(1)
ns
ns
ns
10 tw(CLKH)
11 tr(CLK)
12 tf(CLK)
Pulse duration, SD_CLK high
Rise time, All Signals (10% to 90%)
Fall time, All Signals (10% to 90%)
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
ns
ns
Delay time, SD_CLK rising clock edge to SD_CMD
transition
13 td(CLKL-CMD)
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
ns
ns
Delay time, SD_CLK rising clock edge to SD_DATx
transition
14 td(CLKL-DAT)
(1) P = SD_CLK period.
10
7
9
SDx_CLK
13
13
13
Valid
13
START
XMIT
Valid
Valid
END
SDx_CMD
Figure 8-87. MMC/SD/SDIO Host Command Timing
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
309
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
9
10
7
SDx_CLK
1
2
START
XMIT
SDx_CMD
Valid
Valid
Valid
END
Figure 8-88. MMC/SD/SDIO Card Response Timing
10
9
7
SDx_CLK
14
14
14
14
Dx
START
D0
D1
END
SDx_DAT[x]
Figure 8-89. MMC/SD/SDIO Host Write Timing
9
10
7
SDx_CLK
4
4
3
3
Start
SDx_DAT[x]
D0
D1
Dx
End
Figure 8-90. MMC/SD/SDIO Host Read and Card CRC Status Timing
310
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
8.17 Peripheral Component Interconnect Express (PCIe)
The device supports connections to PCIe-compliant devices via the integrated PCIe master/slave bus
interface. The PCIe module is comprised of a dual-mode PCIe core and a SerDes PHY. The device
implements a single one-lane PCIe 2.0 (5.0 GT/s) Endpoint/Root Complex port.
The device PCIe supports the following features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Supports Gen1/Gen2 in x1 or x2 mode
One port with one 5 GT/s lane
Single virtual channel (VC), single traffic class (TC)
Single function in end-point mode
Automatic width and speed negotiation and lane reversal
Max payload: 128 byte outbound, 256 byte inbound
Automatic credit management
ECRC generation and checking
Configurable BAR filtering
Supports PCIe messages
Legacy interrupt reception (RC) and generation (EP)
MSI generation and reception
PCI device power management, except D3 cold with vaux
Active state power management state L0 and L1.
For more detailed information on the PCIe port peripheral module, see the PCI Express (PCIe) Module
chapter of the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature
Number: SPRUGZ7).
The PCIe peripheral on the device conforms to the PCI Express Base 2.0 Specification.
8.17.1 PCIe Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 8-85. PCIe Registers
HEX ADDRESS
0x5100 0000
0x5100 0004
0x5100 0008
0x5100 000C
0x5100 0010
0x5100 0014
0x5100 0020
0x5100 0024
0x5100 0028
0x5100 0030
0x5100 0034
0x5100 0038
0x5100 003C
0x5100 0050
0x5100 0054
0x5100 0064
0x5100 0068
0x5100 006C
0x5100 0070
ACRONYM
PID
REGISTER NAME
Peripheral Version and ID
Command Status
CMD_STATUS
CFG_SETUP
IOBASE
Config Transaction Setup
IO TLP Base
TLPCFG
TLP Attribute Configuration
Reset Command and Status
Power Management Command
Power Management Configuration
Activity Status
RSTCMD
PMCMD
PMCFG
ACT_STATUS
OB_SIZE
Outbound Size
DIAG_CTRL
ENDIAN
Diagnostic Control
Endian Mode
PRIORITY
IRQ_EOI
CBA Transaction Priority
End of Interrupt
MSI_IRQ
MSI Interrupt IRQ
EP_IRQ_SET
EP_IRQ_CLR
EP_IRQ_STATUS
GPRO
Endpoint Interrupt Request Set
Endpoint Interrupt Request Clear
Endpoint Interrupt Status
General Purpose 0
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
311
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 8-85. PCIe Registers (continued)
HEX ADDRESS
0x5100 0074
0x5100 0078
0x5100 007C
0x5100 0100
0x5100 0104
0x5100 0108
0x5100 010C
0x5100 0180
0x5100 0184
0x5100 0188
0x5100 018C
0x5100 01C0
0x5100 01C4
0x5100 01C8
0x5100 01CC
0x5100 01D0
0x5100 01D4
0x5100 01D8
0x5100 01DC
0x5100 0200
0x5100 0204
0x5100 0300
0x5100 0304
0x5100 0308
0x5100 030C
0x5100 0310
0x5100 0314
0x5100 0318
0x5100 031C
0x5100 0320
0x5100 0324
0x5100 0328
0x5100 032C
0x5100 0330
0x5100 0334
0x5100 0338
0x5100 033C
0x5100 0380
0x5100 0384
0x5100 0388
0x5100 038C
0x5100 0390
0x5100 0394
0x5100 0398
0x5100 039C
0x5100 03A0
0x5100 03A4
ACRONYM
GPR1
REGISTER NAME
General Purpose 1
GPR2
General Purpose 2
GPR3
General Purpose 3
MSI0_IRQ_STATUS_RAW
MSI0_IRQ_STATUS
MSI0_IRQ_ENABLE_SET
MSI0_IRQ_ENABLE_CLR
IRQ_STATUS_RAW
IRQ_STATUS
MSI 0 Interrupt Raw Status
MSI 0 Interrupt Enabled Status
MSI 0 Interrupt Enable Set
MSI 0 Interrupt Enable Clear
Raw Interrupt Status
Interrupt Enabled Status
IRQ_ENABLE_SET
IRQ_ENABLE_CLR
ERR_IRQ_STATUS_RAW
ERR_IRQ_STATUS
ERR_IRQ_ENABLE_SET
ERR_IRQ_ENABLE_CLR
PMRST_IRQ_STATUS_RAW
PMRST_IRQ_STATUS
PMRST_ENABLE_SET
PMRST_ENABLE_CLR
OB_OFFSET_INDEXn
OB_OFFSETn_HI
IB_BAR0
Interrupt Enable Set
Interrupt Enable Clear
Raw ERR Interrupt Status
ERR Interrupt Enabled Status
ERR Interrupt Enable Set
ERR Interrupt Enable Clear
Power Management and Reset Interrupt Status
Power Management and Reset Interrupt Enabled Status
Power Management and Reset Interrupt Enable Set
Power Management and Reset Interrupt Enable Clear
Outbound Translation Region N Offset Low and Index
Outbound Translation Region N Offset High
Inbound Translation Bar Match 0
Inbound Translation 0 Start Address Low
Inbound Translation 0 Start Address High
Inbound Translation 0 Address Offset
Inbound Translation Bar Match 1
Inbound Translation 1 Start Address Low
Inbound Translation 1 Start Address High
Inbound Translation 1 Address Offset
Inbound Translation Bar Match 2
Inbound Translation 2 Start Address Low
Inbound Translation 2 Start Address High
Inbound Translation 2 Address Offset
Inbound Translation Bar Match 3
Inbound Translation 3 Start Address Low
Inbound Translation 3 Start Address High
Inbound Translation 3 Address Offset
PCS Configuration 0
IB_START0_LO
IB_START0_HI
IB_OFFSET0
IB_BAR1
IB_START1_LO
IB_START1_HI
IB_OFFSET1
IB_BAR2
IB_START2_LO
IB_START2_HI
IB_OFFSET2
IB_BAR3
IB_START3_LO
IB_START3_HI
IB_OFFSET3
PCS_CFG0
PCS_CFG1
PCS Configuration 1
PCS_STATUS
PCS Status
SERDES_STATUS
SERDES_RXCFG0
SERDES_RXCFG1
SERDES_RXCFG2
SERDES_RXCFG3
SERDES_RXCFG4
SERDES_TXCFG0
SerDes Status
SerDes Receive Configuration 0 Register
SerDes Receive Configuration 1 Register
SerDes Receive Configuration 2 Register
SerDes Receive Configuration 3 Register
SerDes Receive Configuration 4 Register
SerDes Transmit Configuration 0 Register
312
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 8-85. PCIe Registers (continued)
HEX ADDRESS
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
0x5100 03A8
0x5100 03AC
0x5100 03B0
0x5100 03B4
SERDES_TXCFG1
SERDES_TXCFG2
SERDES_TXCFG3
SERDES_TXCFG4
SerDes Transmit Configuration 1 Register
SerDes Transmit Configuration 2 Register
SerDes Transmit Configuration 3 Register
SerDes Transmit Configuration 4 Register
8.17.2 PCIe Electrical Data/Timing
Texas Instruments (TI) has performed the simulation and system characterization to ensure that the PCIe
peripheral meets all AC timing specifications as required by the PCI Express Base 2.0 Specification.
Therefore, the AC timing specifications are not reproduced here. For more information on the AC timing
specifications, see Sections 4.3.3.5 and 4.3.4.4 of the PCI Express Base 2.0 Specification.
8.17.3 PCIe Design and Layout Guidelines
8.17.3.1 Clock Source
A standard 100-MHz PCIe differential clock source must be used for PCIe operation (for more details, see
Section 7.4.2, SERDES CLKN/P Input Clock).
8.17.3.2 PCIe Connections and Interface Compliance
The PCIe interface on the device is compliant with the PCI Express Base 2.0 Specification. Refer to the
PCIe specifications for all connections that are described in it. For coupling capacitor selection, see
Section 8.17.3.2.1, Coupling Capacitors.
The use of PCIe-compatible bridges and switches is allowed for interfacing with more than one other
processor or PCIe device.
8.17.3.2.1 Coupling Capacitors
AC coupling capacitors are required on the transmit data pair. Table 8-86 shows the requirements for
these capacitors.
Table 8-86. AC Coupling Capacitors Requirements
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
MAX
200
UNIT
nF
EIA(2)
PCIe AC coupling capacitor value
PCIe AC coupling capacitor package size(1)
75
0402
0603
(1) The physical size of the capacitor should be as small as practical. Use the same size on both lines in each pair, placed side by side.
(2) EIA LxW units; i.e., a 0402 is a 40x20 mil (thousandths of an inch) surface-mount capacitor.
8.17.3.2.2 Polarity Inversion
The PCIe specification requires polarity inversion support. This means, for layout purposes, polarity is
unimportant since each signal can change its polarity on-die inside the chip. This means polarity within a
lane is unimportant for layout.
8.17.3.3 Non-Standard PCIe Connections
The following sections contain suggestions for any PCIe connection that is not described in the official
PCIe specification, such as an on-board device-to-device connection, or device-to-other PCIe-compliant
processor connection.
8.17.3.3.1 PCB Stackup Specifications
Table 8-87 shows the stackup and feature sizes required for these types of PCIe connections.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
313
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 8-87. PCIe PCB Stackup Specifications
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
6
MAX
UNIT
Layers
Layers
Cuts
Layers
Mils
PCB Routing/Plane Layers
4
2
-
-
-
Signal Routing Layers
3
Number of ground plane cuts allowed within PCIe routing region
Number of layers between PCIe routing area and reference plane(1)
PCB Routing clearance
-
0
0
-
-
-
-
4
PCB Trace width(2)
-
4
-
Mils
PCB BGA escape via pad size
-
20
10
0.4
-
Mils
PCB BGA escape via hole size
MPU BGA pad size(3)(4)
-
Mils
mm
(1) A reference plane may be a ground plane or the power plane referencing the PCIe signals.
(2) In breakout area.
(3) Non-solder mask defined pad.
(4) Per IPC-7351A BGA pad size guideline.
8.17.3.3.2 Routing Specifications
The PCIe data signal traces must be routed to achieve 100 Ω (±20%) differential impedance and 60 Ω
(±15%) single-ended impedance. The single-ended impedance is required because differential signals are
extremely difficult to closely couple on PCBs and, therefore, single-ended impedance becomes important.
These requirements are the same as those recommended in the PCIe Motherboard Checklist 1.0
document, available from PCI-SIG.
These impedances are impacted by trace width, trace spacing, distance between signals and referencing
planes, and dielectric material. Verify with a PCB design tool that the trace geometry for both data signal
pairs result in as close to 100 Ω differential impedance and 60 Ω single-ended impedance as possible. For
best accuracy, work with your PCB fabricator to ensure this impedance is met.
In general, closely coupled differential signal traces are not an advantage on PCBs. When differential
signals are closely coupled, tight spacing and width control is necessary. Very small width and spacing
variations affect impedance dramatically, so tight impedance control can be more problematic to maintain
in production.
Loosely coupled PCB differential signals make impedance control much easier. Wider traces and spacing
make obstacle avoidance easier, and trace width variations do not affect impedance as much; therefore, it
is easier to maintain an accurate impedance over the length of the signal. The wider traces also show
reduced skin effect and, therefore, often result in better signal integrity.
Table 8-88 shows the routing specifications for the PCIe data signals.
Table 8-88. PCIe Routing Specifications
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
PCIe signal trace length
10(1) Inches
Differential pair trace matching
10(2)
0
Mils
Stubs
Ω
Number of stubs allowed on PCIe traces(3)
TX/RX pair differential impedance
TX/RX single ended impedance
Pad size of vias on PCIe trace
80
51
100
60
120
69
25(4)
Ω
Mils
Mils
Vias(5)
Hole size of vias on PCIe trace
14
Number of vias on each PCIe trace
3
(1) Beyond this, signal integrity may suffer.
(2) For example, RXP0 within 10 Mils of RXN0.
(3) In-line pads may be used for probing.
(4) 35-Mil antipad max recommended.
(5) Vias must be used in pairs with their distance minimized.
314
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 8-88. PCIe Routing Specifications (continued)
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
PCIe differential pair to any other trace spacing
(6) DS = differential spacing of the PCIe traces.
2*DS(6)
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
315
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
8.18 Serial ATA Controller (SATA)
The Serial ATA (SATA) peripheral provides a direct interface to one hard disk drive (SATA 300) or up to
15 hard disk drives using a Port Multiplier and supports the following features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Serial ATA 1.5 Gbps and 3 Gbps speeds
Integrated PHY
Integrated Rx and Tx data buffers
Supports all SATA power management features
Hardware-assisted native command queuing (NCQ) for up to 32 entries
Supports port multiplier with command-based switching
Activity LED support.
8.18.1 SATA Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 8-89. SATA Registers
HEX ADDRESS
0x4A14 0000
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
CAP
GHC
HBA Capabilities
Global HBA Control
Interrupt Status
0x4A14 0004
0x4A14 0008
IS
0x4A14 000C
0x4A14 0010
PI
Ports Implemented
AHCI Version
VS
0x4A14 0014
CCC_CTL
CCC_PORTS
-
Command Completion Coalescing Control
Command Completion Coalescing Ports
Reserved
0x4A14 0018
0x4A14 001C - 0x4A14 009C
0x4A14 00A0
0x4A14 00A4
0x4A14 00A8
0x4A14 00AC
0x4A14 00B0
0x4A14 00B4 - 0x4A14 00DF
0x4A14 00E0
0x4A14 00E4
0x4A14 00E8
0x4A14 00EC
0x4A14 00F0
0x4A14 00F4
0x4A14 00F8
0x4A14 00FC
0x4A14 0100
BISTAFR
BISTCR
BISTFCTR
BISTSR
BISTDECR
-
BIST Active FIS
BIST Control
BIST FIS Count
BIST Status
BIST DWORD Error Count
Reserved
TIMER1MS
-
BIST DWORD Error Count
Reserved
GPARAM1R
GPARAM2R
PPARAMR
TESTR
VERSIONR
IDR (PID)
P0CLB
-
Global Parameter 1
Global Parameter 2
Port Parameter
Test
Version
ID
Port 0 Command List Base Address
Reserved
0x4A14 0104
0x4A14 0108
P0FB
Port 0 FIS Base Address
Reserved
0x4A14 010C
0x4A14 0110
-
P0IS
Port 0 Interrupt Status
Port 0 Interrupt Enable
Port 0 Command
Reserved
0x4A14 0114
P0IE
0x4A14 0118
P0CMD
-
0x4A14 011C
0x4A14 0120
P0TFD
P0SIG
P0SSTS
Port 0 Task File Data
Port 0 Signature
0x4A14 0124
0x4A14 0128
Port 0 Serial ATA Status (SStatus)
316
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 8-89. SATA Registers (continued)
HEX ADDRESS
0x4A14 012C
0x4A14 0130
0x4A14 0134
0x4A14 0138
0x4A14 013C
ACRONYM
P0SCTL
P0SERR
P0SACT
P0CI
REGISTER NAME
Port 0 Serial ATA Control (SControl)
Port 0 Serial ATA Error (SError)
Port 0 Serial ATA Active (SActive)
Port 0 Command Issue
P0SNTF
-
Port 0 Serial ATA Notification
Reserved
0x4A14 0140 - 0x4A14 016C
0x4A14 0170
P0DMACR
-
Port 0 DMA Control
0x4A14 0174 - 0x4A14 017C
0x4A14 0180 - 0x4A14 01FC
0x4A14 1100
Reserved
-
Reserved
IDLE
Idle and Standby Modes
0x4A14 1104
CFGRX0
CFGRX1
CFGRX2
CFGRX3
CFGRX4
STSRX
PHY Configuration Receive 0 Register
PHY Configuration Receive 1 Register
PHY Configuration Receive 2 Register
PHY Configuration Receive 3 Register
PHY Configuration Receive 4 Register
0x4A14 1108
0x4A14 110C
0x4A14 1110
0x4A14 1114
0x4A14 1118
Receive Bus PHY-to-Controller Status Register (Used for
Debug Purposes)
0x4A14 111C
0x4A14 1120
0x4A14 1124
0x4A14 1128
0x4A14 112C
0x4A14 1130
CFGTX0
CFGTX1
CFGTX2
CFGTX3
CFGTX4
STSTX
PHY Configuration Transmit 0 Register
PHY Configuration Transmit 1 Register
PHY Configuration Transmit 2 Register
PHY Configuration Transmit 3 Register
PHY Configuration Transmit 4 Register
Transmit Bus Controller-to-PHY Status Register (Used for
Debug Purposes)
8.18.2 SATA Interface Design Guidelines
This section provides PCB design and layout guidelines for the SATA interface. The design rules constrain
PCB trace length, PCB trace skew, signal integrity, cross-talk, and signal timing. Simulation and system
design work has been done to ensure the SATA interface requirements are met.
A standard 100-MHz differential clock source must be used for SATA operation (for details, see
Section 7.4.2, SERDES_CLKN/P Input Clock).
8.18.2.1 SATA Interface Schematic
Figure 8-91 shows the data portion of the SATA interface schematic. The specific pin numbers can be
obtained from Table 3-26, Serial ATA Terminal Functions.
SATA Interface (Processor)
SATA Connector
10 nF
SATA_TXN0
TX-
SATA_TXP0
TX+
10 nF
10 nF
SATA_RXN0
SATA_RXP0
RX-
RX+
10 nF
Figure 8-91. SATA Interface High-Level Schematic
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
317
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
8.18.2.2 Compatible SATA Components and Modes
Table 8-90 shows the compatible SATA components and supported modes. Note that the only supported
configuration is an internal cable from the processor host to the SATA device.
Table 8-90. SATA Supported Modes
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
UNIT
SUPPORTED
Transfer Rates
xSATA
1.5
3.0
Gbps
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
No
No
Backplane
Internal Cable (iSATA)
Yes
8.18.2.3 PCB Stackup Specifications
Table 8-91 shows the PCB stackup and feature sizes required for SATA.
Table 8-91. SATA PCB Stackup Specifications
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
Layers
Layers
Cuts
PCB routing/plane layers
Signal routing layers
4
2
-
6
3
-
-
Number of ground plane cuts allowed within SATA routing region
Number of layers between SATA routing region and reference ground plane
PCB trace width, w
-
0
0
-
-
-
Layers
Mils
-
4
PCB BGA escape via pad size
-
20
10
0.4
-
Mils
PCB BGA escape via hole size
MPU BGA pad size(1)
-
Mils
mm
(1) NSMD pad, per IPC-7351A BGA pad size guideline.
8.18.2.4 Routing Specifications
The SATA data signal traces must be routed to achieve 100 Ω (±20%) differential impedance and 60 Ω
(±15%) single-ended impedance. The single-ended impedance is required because differential signals are
extremely difficult to closely couple on PCBs and, therefore, single-ended impedance becomes important.
60 Ω is chosen for the single-ended impedance to minimize problems caused by too low an impedance.
These impedances are impacted by trace width, trace spacing, distance to reference planes, and dielectric
material. Verify with a PCB design tool that the trace geometry for both data signal pairs results in as
close to 100 Ω differential impedance and 60 Ω single-ended impedance traces as possible. For best
accuracy, work with your PCB fabricator to ensure this impedance is met.
Table 8-92 shows the routing specifications for the SATA data signals.
Table 8-92. SATA Routing Specifications
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
MPU-to-SATA header trace length
10(1) Inches
Number of stubs allowed on SATA traces(2)
0
120
69
Stubs
Ω
TX/RX pair differential impedance
80
51
100
60
TX/RX single ended impedance
Ω
Number of vias on each SATA trace
SATA differential pair to any other trace spacing
3
Vias(3)
2*DS(4)
(1) Beyond this, signal integrity may suffer.
(2) In-line pads may be used for probing.
(3) Vias must be used in pairs with their distance minimized.
(4) DS = differential spacing of the SATA traces.
318
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
8.18.2.5 Coupling Capacitors
AC coupling capacitors are required on the receive data pair. Table 8-93 shows the requirements for these
capacitors.
Table 8-93. SATA AC Coupling Capacitors Requirements
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
10
MAX
12
UNIT
nF
EIA(2)
SATA AC coupling capacitor value
SATA AC coupling capacitor package size(1)
1
0402
0603
(1) The physical size of the capacitor should be as small as practical. Use the same size on both lines in each pair, placed side by side.
(2) EIA LxW units; i.e., a 0402 is a 40 x 20 mil surface-mount capacitor.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
319
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
8.19 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
The SPI is a high-speed synchronous serial input/output port that allows a serial bit stream of programmed
length (4 to 32 bits) to be shifted into and out of the device at a programmed bit-transfer rate. The SPI is
normally used for communication between the device and external peripherals. Typical applications
include an interface-to-external I/O or peripheral expansion via devices such as shift registers, display
drivers, SPI EEPROMs, and Analog-to-Digital Converters (ADCs).
The SPI supports the following features:
•
•
Master/Slave operation
Four chip selects for interfacing/control to up to four SPI Slave devices and connection to a single
external Master
•
•
•
•
32-bit shift register
Buffered receive/transmit data register per channel (1 word deep), FIFO size is 64 bytes
Programmable SPI configuration per channel (clock definition, enable polarity and word width)
Supports one interrupt request and two DMA requests per channel.
For more detailed information on the SPI, see the Multichannel Serial Port Interface (McSPI) chapter of
the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number:
SPRUGZ7).
8.19.1 SPI Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 8-94. SPI Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
SPI0
SPI1
SPI2
SPI3
0x4803 0000
0x4803 0004
0x481A 0000
0x481A 0004
0x481A 2000
0x481A 2004
0x481A 4000
0x481A 4004
MCSPI_HL_REV SPI REVISION
MCSPI_HL_HWIN SPI HARDWARE
FO
INFORMATION
0x4803 0008 -
0x4803 000C
0x481A 0008 -
0x481A 000C
0x481A 2008 -
0x481A 200C
0x481A 4008 -
0x481A 400C
-
RESERVED
0x4803 0010
0x481A 0010
0x481A 2010
0x481A 4010
MCSPI_HL_SYSC SPI SYSTEM
ONFIG
CONFIGURATION
0x4803 0014 -
0x4803 00FF
0x481A 0014 -
0x481A 00FF
0x481A 2014 -
0x481A 20FF
0x481A 4014 -
0x481A 40FF
-
RESERVED
0x4803 0100
0x481A 0100
0x481A 2100
0x481A 4100
MCSPI_REVISION REVISION
RESERVED
0x4803 0104 -
0x4803 010C
0x481A 0104 -
0x481A 010C
0x481A 2104 -
0x481A 210C
0x481A 4104 -
0x481A 410C
-
0x4803 0110
0x4803 0114
0x4803 0118
0x4803 011C
0x4803 0120
0x481A 0110
0x481A 0114
0x481A 0118
0x481A 011C
0x481A 0120
0x481A 2110
0x481A 2114
0x481A 2118
0x481A 211C
0x481A 2120
0x481A 4110
0x481A 4114
0x481A 4118
0x481A 411C
0x481A 4120
MCSPI_SYSCONF SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
IG
MCSPI_SYSSTAT SYSTEM STATUS
US
MCSPI_IRQSTATU INTERRUPT STATUS
S
MCSPI_IRQENABL INTERRUPT ENABLE
E
MCSPI_WAKEUPE WAKEUP ENABLE
NABLE
0x4803 0124
0x4803 0128
0x481A 0124
0x481A 0128
0x481A 2124
0x481A 2128
0x481A 4124
0x481A 4128
MCSPI_SYST
SYSTEM TEST
MCSPI_MODULCT MODULE CONTROL
RL
0x4803 012C
0x4803 0130
0x4803 0134
0x4803 0138
0x481A 012C
0x481A 0130
0x481A 0134
0x481A 0138
0x481A 212C
0x481A 2130
0x481A 2134
0x481A 2138
0x481A 412C
0x481A 4130
0x481A 4134
0x481A 4138
MCSPI_CH0CONF CHANNEL 0 CONFIGURATION
MCSPI_CH0STAT CHANNEL 0 STATUS
MCSPI_CH0CTRL CHANNEL 0 CONTROL
MCSPI_TX0
CHANNEL 0 TRANSMITTER
320
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 8-94. SPI Registers (continued)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
SPI0
SPI1
SPI2
SPI3
0x4803 013C
0x4803 0140
0x4803 0144
0x4803 0148
0x4803 014C
0x4803 0150
0x4803 0154
0x4803 0158
0x4803 015C
0x4803 0160
0x4803 0164
0x4803 0168
0x4803 016C
0x4803 0170
0x4803 0174
0x4803 0178
0x4803 017C
0x481A 013C
0x481A 0140
0x481A 0144
0x481A 0148
0x481A 014C
0x481A 0150
0x481A 0154
0x481A 0158
0x481A 015C
0x481A 0160
0x481A 0164
0x481A 0168
0x481A 016C
0x481A 0170
0x481A 0174
0x481A 0178
0x481A 017C
0x481A 213C
0x481A 2140
0x481A 2144
0x481A 2148
0x481A 214C
0x481A 2150
0x481A 2154
0x481A 2158
0x481A 215C
0x481A 2160
0x481A 2164
0x481A 2168
0x481A 216C
0x481A 2170
0x481A 2174
0x481A 2178
0x481A 217C
0x481A 413C
0x481A 4140
0x481A 4144
0x481A 4148
0x481A 414C
0x481A 4150
0x481A 4154
0x481A 4158
0x481A 415C
0x481A 4160
0x481A 4164
0x481A 4168
0x481A 416C
0x481A 4170
0x481A 4174
0x481A 4178
0x481A 417C
MCSPI_RX0
CHANNEL 0 RECEIVER
MCSPI_CH1CONF CHANNEL 1 CONFIGURATION
MCSPI_CH1STAT CHANNEL 1 STATUS
MCSPI_CH1CTRL CHANNEL 1 CONTROL
MCSPI_TX1
MCSPI_RX1
CHANNEL 1 TRANSMITTER
CHANNEL 1 RECEIVER
MCSPI_CH2CONF CHANNEL 2 CONFIGURATION
MCSPI_CH2STAT CHANNEL 2 STATUS
MCSPI_CH2CTRL CHANNEL 2 CONTROL
MCSPI_TX2
MCSPI_RX2
CHANNEL 2 TRANSMITTER
CHANNEL 2 RECEIVER
MCSPI_CH3CONF CHANNEL 3 CONFIGURATION
MCSPI_CH3STAT CHANNEL 3 STATUS
MCSPI_CH3CTRL CHANNEL 3 CONTROL
MCSPI_TX3
MCSPI_RX3
CHANNEL 3 TRANSMITTER
CHANNEL 3 RECEIVER
MCSPI_XFERLEV TRANSFER LEVELS
EL
0x4803 0180
0x481A 0180
0x481A 2180
0x481A 4180
MCSPI_DAFTX
DMA ADDRESS ALIGNED
FIFO TRANSMITTER
0x4803 0184 -
0x4803 019C
0x481A 0184 -
0x481A 019C
0x481A 2184 -
0x481A 219C
0x481A 4184 -
0x481A 419C
-
RESERVED
0x4803 01A0
0x481A 01A0
0x481A 21A0
0x481A 41A0
MCSPI_DAFRX
-
DMA ADDRESS ALIGNED
FIFO RECEIVER
0x4803 01A4 -
0x4803 01FF
0x481A 01A4 -
0x481A 01FF
0x481A 21A4 -
0x481A 21FF
0x481A 41A4 -
0x481A 41FF
RESERVED
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
321
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
8.19.2 SPI Electrical/Data Timing
Table 8-95. Timing Requirements for SPI - Master Mode
(see Figure 8-92 and Figure 8-93)
OPP100
MIN
NO.
UNIT
MAX
MASTER: 1 LOAD AT A MAXIMUM OF 5 pF
Cycle time, SPI_CLK(1)(2)
Pulse duration, SPI_CLK low(1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
tc(SPICLK)
20.8(3)
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
tw(SPICLKL)
0.5*P - 1(4)
0.5*P - 1(4)
2.29
tw(SPICLKH)
Pulse duration, SPI_CLK high(1)
tsu(MISO-SPICLK)
th(SPICLK-MISO)
td(SPICLK-MOSI)
td(SCS-MOSI)
Setup time, SPI_D[x] valid before SPI_CLK active edge(1)
Hold time, SPI_D[x] valid after SPI_CLK active edge(1)
Delay time, SPI_CLK active edge to SPI_D[x] transition(1)
Delay time, SPI_SCS[x] active edge to SPI_D[x] transition
2.67
-3.57
3.57
3.57
MASTER_PHA0(5)
B-4.2(6)
A-4.2(7)
A-4.2(7)
B-4.2(6)
Delay time, SPI_SCS[x] active to SPI_CLK
first edge(1)
8
9
td(SCS-SPICLK)
MASTER_PHA1(5)
MASTER_PHA0(5)
MASTER_PHA1(5)
Delay time, SPI_CLK last edge to SPI_SCS[x]
inactive(1)
td(SPICLK-SCS)
MASTER: UP TO 4 LOADS AT A MAXIMUM TOTAL OF 25 pF
Cycle time, SPI_CLK(1)(2)
Pulse duration, SPI_CLK low(1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
tc(SPICLK)
41.7(8)
0.5*P - 2(4)
0.5*P - 2(4)
3.02
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
tw(SPICLKL)
tw(SPICLKH)
Pulse duration, SPI_CLK high(1)
tsu(MISO-SPICLK)
th(SPICLK-MISO)
td(SPICLK-MOSI)
td(SCS-MOSI)
Setup time, SPI_D[x] valid before SPI_CLK active edge(1)
Hold time, SPI_D[x] valid after SPI_CLK active edge(1)
Delay time, SPI_CLK active edge to SPI_D[x] transition(1)
Delay time, SPI_SCS[x] active edge to SPI_D[x] transition
2.76
-4.62
4.62
4.62
MASTER_PHA0(5)
B-2.54(6)
A-2.54(7)
A-2.54(7)
B-2.54(6)
Delay time, SPI_SCS[x] active to SPI_CLK
first edge(1)
8
9
td(SCS-SPICLK)
MASTER_PHA1(5)
MASTER_PHA0(5)
MASTER_PHA1(5)
Delay time, SPI_CLK last edge to SPI_SCS[x]
inactive(1)
td(SPICLK-SCS)
(1) This timing applies to all configurations regardless of SPI_CLK polarity and which clock edges are used to drive output data and capture
input data.
(2) Related to the SPI_CLK maximum frequency.
(3) Maximum frequency = 48 MHz
(4) P = SPICLK period.
(5) SPI_CLK phase is programmable with the PHA bit of the SPI_CH(i)CONF register.
(6) B = (TCS + 0.5) * TSPICLKREF * Fratio, where TCS is a bit field of the SPI_CH(i)CONF register and Fratio = Even ≥2.
(7) When P = 20.8 ns, A = (TCS + 1) * TSPICLKREF, where TCS is a bit field of the SPI_CH(i)CONF register. When P > 20.8 ns, A = (TCS
+ 0.5) * Fratio * TSPICLKREF, where TCS is a bit field of the SPI_CH(i)CONF register.
(8) Maximum frequency = 24 MHz
322
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
PHA=0
EPOL=1
SPI_SCS[x] (Out)
1
1
3
2
8
2
3
9
POL=0
POL=1
SPI_SCLK (Out)
SPI_SCLK (Out)
SPI_D[x] (Out)
6
7
6
Bit n-1
Bit n-2
Bit n-3
Bit n-4
Bit 0
PHA=1
EPOL=1
SPI_SCS[x] (Out)
SPI_SCLK (Out)
1
3
2
8
2
3
9
POL=0
POL=1
1
SPI_SCLK (Out)
SPI_D[x] (Out)
6
6
6
6
Bit n-1
Bit n-2
Bit n-3
Bit 1
Bit 0
Figure 8-92. SPI Master Mode Transmit Timing
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
323
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
PHA=0
EPOL=1
SPI_SCS[x] (Out)
1
1
3
2
8
2
3
9
POL=0
SPI_SCLK (Out)
POL=1
SPI_SCLK (Out)
4
4
5
5
SPI_D[x] (In)
Bit n-1
Bit n-2
Bit n-3
Bit n-4
Bit 0
PHA=1
EPOL=1
SPI_SCS[x] (Out)
1
2
1
3
3
2
8
9
POL=0
SPI_SCLK (Out)
POL=1
SPI_SCLK (Out)
4
4
5
5
SPI_D[x] (In)
Bit n-1
Bit n-2
Bit n-3
Bit 1
Bit 0
Figure 8-93. SPI Master Mode Receive Timing
Table 8-96. Timing Requirements for SPI - Slave Mode
(see Figure 8-94 and Figure 8-95)
OPP100
MIN
NO.
UNIT
MAX
1
2
3
4
5
6
tc(SPICLK)
Cycle time, SPI_CLK(1)(2)
Pulse duration, SPI_CLK low(1)
Pulse duration, SPI_CLK high(1)
Setup time, SPI_D[x] valid before SPI_CLK active edge(1)
Hold time, SPI_D[x] valid after SPI_CLK active edge(1)
Delay time, SPI_CLK active edge to SPI_D[x] transition(1)
62.5(3)
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
tw(SPICLKL)
0.5*P - 3(4)
0.5*P - 3(4)
12.92
tw(SPICLKH)
tsu(MOSI-SPICLK)
th(SPICLK-MOSI)
td(SPICLK-MISO)
12.92
-4.00
17.1
17.1
Delay time, SPI_SCS[x] active edge to SPI_D[x]
transition(5)
Setup time, SPI_SCS[x] valid before SPI_CLK first edge(1)
7
8
td(SCS-MISO)
ns
ns
tsu(SCS-SPICLK)
12.92
(1) This timing applies to all configurations regardless of SPI_CLK polarity and which clock edges are used to drive output data and capture
input data.
(2) Related to the input maximum frequency supported by the SPI module.
(3) Maximum frequency = 16 MHz
(4) P = SPICLK period.
(5) PHA = 0; SPI_CLK phase is programmable with the PHA bit of the SPI_CH(i)CONF register.
324
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 8-96. Timing Requirements for SPI - Slave Mode (continued)
(see Figure 8-94 and Figure 8-95)
OPP100
UNIT
NO.
MIN
MAX
9
th(SPICLK-SCS)
Hold time, SPI_SCS[x] valid after SPI_CLK last edge(1)
12.92
ns
PHA=0
EPOL=1
SPI_SCS[x] (In)
SPI_SCLK (In)
1
3
8
2
2
9
POL=0
POL=1
1
3
SPI_SCLK (In)
SPI_D[x] (Out)
6
7
6
Bit n-1
Bit n-2
Bit n-3
Bit n-4
Bit 0
PHA=1
EPOL=1
SPI_SCS[x] (In)
SPI_SCLK (In)
1
1
3
2
8
2
3
9
POL=0
POL=1
SPI_SCLK (In)
SPI_D[x] (Out)
6
6
6
6
Bit n-1
Bit n-2
Bit n-3
Bit 1
Bit 0
Figure 8-94. SPI Slave Mode Transmit Timing
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
325
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
PHA=0
EPOL=1
SPI_SCS[x] (In)
1
1
3
3
8
2
2
9
POL=0
SPI_SCLK (In)
POL=1
SPI_SCLK (In)
4
4
5
5
SPI_D[x] (In)
Bit n-1
Bit n-2
Bit n-3
Bit n-4
Bit 0
PHA=1
EPOL=1
SPI_SCS[x] (In)
1
3
2
8
2
3
9
POL=0
SPI_SCLK (In)
1
POL=1
SPI_SCLK (In)
4
4
5
5
SPI_D[x] (In)
Bit n-1
Bit n-2
Bit n-3
Bit 1
Bit 0
Figure 8-95. SPI Slave Mode Receive Timing
326
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
8.20 Timers
The device has eight 32-bit general-purpose (GP) timers (TIMER8 - TIMER1) that have the following
features:
•
•
TIMER8, TIMER1 are for software use and do not have an external connection
Dedicated input trigger for capture mode and dedicated output trigger/pulse width modulation (PWM)
signal
•
•
•
Interrupts generated on overflow, compare, and capture
Free-running 32-bit upward counter
Supported modes:
–
–
–
Compare and capture modes
Auto-reload mode
Start-stop mode
•
TIMER[8:1] functional clock is sourced from either the DEVOSC, AUXOSC, AUD_CLK2/1/0, TCLKIN,
or SYSCLK18 27 MHz as selected by the timer clock multiplexers.
•
•
On-the-fly read/write register (while counting)
Generates interrupts to the ARM and Media Controller.
The device has one system watchdog timer that have the following features:
•
•
•
•
Free-running 32-bit upward counter
On-the-fly read/write register (while counting)
Reset upon occurrence of a timer overflow condition
The system watchdog timer has two possible clock sources:
–
–
RCOSC32K oscillator
RTCDIVIDER
•
The watchdog timer is used to provide a recovery mechanism for the device in the event of a fault
condition, such as a non-exiting code loop.
For more detailed information, see the TMS320DM814x DMSoC 32-Bit Timers User's Guide (TBD).
8.20.1 Timer Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table TBD and Table TBD show the registers for the Timers 1-8 and the Watchdog Timer (WDT0).
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
327
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
8.20.2 Timer Electrical/Data Timing
Table 8-97. Timing Requirements for Timer
(see Figure 8-96)
OPP100
MIN
NO.
UNIT
MAX
1
2
tw(EVTIH)
tw(EVTIL)
Pulse duration, high
Pulse duration, low
4P(1)
4P(1)
ns
ns
(1) P = module clock.
Table 8-98. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Timer
(see Figure 8-96)
OPP100
MIN
4P-3(1)
4P-3(1)
NO.
PARAMETER
Pulse duration, high
UNIT
MAX
3
4
tw(EVTOH)
tw(EVTOL)
ns
ns
Pulse duration, low
(1) P = module clock.
1
2
TCLKIN
3
4
TIMx_IO
Figure 8-96. Timer Timing
328
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
8.21 Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART)
The UART performs serial-to-parallel conversions on data received from a peripheral device and
parallel-to-serial conversion on data received from the CPU. The device provides up to six UART
peripheral interfaces, depending on the selected pin multiplexing.
Each UART has the following features:
•
•
•
Selectable UART/IrDA (SIR/MIR)/CIR modes
Dual 64-entry FIFOs for received and transmitted data payload
Programmable and selectable transmit and receive FIFO trigger levels for DMA and interrupt
generation
•
•
•
Baud-rate generation based upon programmable divisors N (N=1…16384)
Two DMA requests and one interrupt request to the system
Can connect to any RS-232 compliant device.
UART functions include:
•
•
•
Baud-rate up to 3.6 Mbit/s on UART0, UART1, and UART2
Baud-rate up to 12 Mbit/s on UART3, UART4, and UART5
Programmable serial interfaces characteristics
–
–
–
–
5, 6, 7, or 8-bit characters
Even, odd, or no parity-bit generation and detection
1, 1.5, or 2 stop-bit generation
Flow control: hardware (RTS/CTS) or software (XON/XOFF)
•
Additional modem control functions (UART0_DTR, UART0_DSR, UART0_DCD, and UART0_RIN) for
UART0 only; UART1, UART2, UART3, UART4, and UART5 do not support full-flow control signaling.
IR-IrDA functions include:
•
•
•
Support of IrDA 1.4 slow infrared (SIR, baud-rate up to 115.2 Kbits/s), medium infrared (MIR,
baud-rate up to 1.152 Mbits/s) and fast infrared (FIR baud-rate up to 4.0 Mbits/s) communications
Supports framing error, cyclic redundancy check (CRC) error, illegal symbol (FIR), and abort pattern
(SIR, MIR) detection
8-entry status FIFO (with selectable trigger levels) available to monitor frame length and frame errors.
IR-CIR functions include:
•
•
•
Consumer infrared (CIR) remote control mode with programmable data encoding
Free data format (supports any remote control private standards)
Selectable bit rate and configurable carrier frequency.
For more detailed information on the UART peripheral, see the TMS320DM814x DMSoc Universal
Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) User's Guide (TBD).
8.21.1 UART Peripheral Register Descriptions
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
329
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
8.21.2 UART Electrical/Data Timing
Table 8-99. Timing Requirements for UART
(see Figure 8-97)
OPP100
MIN
NO.
UNIT
MAX
4
5
tw(RX)
Pulse width, receive data bit, 15/30/100pF high or low
Pulse width, receive start bit, 15/30/100pF high or low
Delay time, transmit start bit to transmit data
0.96U(1)
0.96U(1)
P(2)
1.05U(1)
1.05U(1)
ns
ns
ns
ns
tw(CTS)
td(RTS-TX)
td(CTS-TX)
Delay time, receive start bit to transmit data
P(2)
(1) U = UART baud time = 1/programmed baud rate
(2) P = Clock period of the reference clock (FCLK, usually 48 MHz).
Table 8-100. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for UART
(see Figure 8-97)
OPP100
MIN
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MAX
15 pF
(UART0/1/2)
5
15 pF
(UART3/4/5)
12
f(baud)
Maximum programmable baud rate
MHz
30 pF
0.23
0.115
100 pF
2
3
tw(TX)
Pulse width, transmit data bit, 15/30/100 pF high or low
Pulse width, transmit start bit, 15/30/100 pF high or low
U - 2(1)
U - 2(1)
U + 2(1)
U + 2(1)
ns
ns
tw(RTS)
(1) U = UART baud time = 1/programmed baud rate
3
2
Start
Bit
UARTx_TXD
Data Bits
5
4
Start
Bit
UARTx_RXD
Data Bits
Figure 8-97. UART Timing
330
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
8.22 Universal Serial Bus (USB2.0)
The device includes two USB2.0 modules which support the Universal Serial Bus Specification Revision
2.0. The following are some of the major USB features that are supported:
•
•
•
USB 2.0 peripheral at high speed (HS: 480 Mbps) and full speed (FS: 12 Mbps)
USB 2.0 host at HS, FS, and low speed (LS: 1.5 Mbps)
Each endpoint (other than endpoint 0, control only) can support all transfer modes (control, bulk,
interrupt, and isochronous)
•
•
•
Supports high-bandwidth ISO mode
Supports 16 Transmit (TX) and 16 Receive (RX) endpoints including endpoint 0
FIFO RAM
–
–
32K endpoint
Programmable size
•
•
Includes two integrated PHYs
RNDIS-like mode for terminating RNDIS-type protocols without using short-packet termination for
support of MSC applications.
•
USB OTG extensions, i.e. session request protocol (SRP) and host negotiation protocol (HNP)
The USB2.0 peripherals do not support the following features:
•
•
•
On-chip charge pump (VBUS Power must be generated external to the device.)
RNDIS mode acceleration for USB sizes that are not multiples of 64 bytes
Endpoint max USB packet sizes that do not conform to the USB 2.0 spec (for FS/LS: 8, 16, 32, 64, –
and 1023 are defined; for HS: 64, 128, 512, and 1024 are defined
For more detailed information on the USB2.0 peripheral, see the Universal Serial Bus (USB) chapter of
the AM387x Sitara ARM Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual (Literature Number:
SPRUGZ7).
8.22.1 USB2.0 Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 8-101. USB2.0 Submodules
SUBMODULE
SUBMODULE NAME
ADDRESS OFFSET
0x0000
0x1000
0x1800
0x2000
0x3000
0x4000
USBSS registers
USB0 controller registers
USB1 controller registers
CPPI DMA controller registers
CPPI DMA scheduler registers
CPPI DMA Queue Manager registers
Table 8-102. USB Subsystem (USBSS) Registers(1)
HEX ADDRESS
0x4740 0000
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
USBSS REVISION
Reserved
REVREG
0x4740 0004 - 0x4740 000C
0x4740 0010
-
SYSCONFIG
-
USBSS SYSCONFIG
Reserved
0x4740 0014 - 0x4740 001C
0x4740 0020
EOI
USBSS IRQ_EOI
USBSS IRQ_STATUS_RAW
USBSS IRQ_STATUS
0x4740 0024
IRQSTATRAW
IRQSTAT
0x4740 0028
(1) USBSS registers contain the registers that are used to control at the global level and apply to all sub-modules.
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
331
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 8-102. USB Subsystem (USBSS) Registers(1) (continued)
HEX ADDRESS
0x4740 002C
0x4740 0030
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
IRQENABLER
USBSS IRQ_ENABLE_SET
IRQCLEARR
USBSS IRQ_ENABLE_CLR
0x4740 0034 - 0x4740 00FC
0x4740 0100
-
Reserved
IRQDMATHOLDTX00
IRQDMATHOLDTX01
IRQDMATHOLDTX02
IRQDMATHOLDTX03
IRQDMATHOLDRX00
IRQDMATHOLDRX01
IRQDMATHOLDRX02
IRQDMATHOLDRX03
IRQDMATHOLDTX10
IRQDMATHOLDTX11
IRQDMATHOLDTX12
IRQDMATHOLDTX13
IRQDMATHOLDRX10
IRQDMATHOLDRX11
IRQDMATHOLDRX12
IRQDMATHOLDRX13
IRQDMAENABLE0
USBSS IRQ_DMA_THRESHOLD_TX0_0
USBSS IRQ_DMA_THRESHOLD_TX0_1
USBSS IRQ_DMA_THRESHOLD_TX0_2
USBSS IRQ_DMA_THRESHOLD_TX0_3
USBSS IRQ_DMA_THRESHOLD_RX0_0
USBSS IRQ_DMA_THRESHOLD_RX0_1
USBSS IRQ_DMA_THRESHOLD_RX0_2
USBSS IRQ_DMA_THRESHOLD_RX0_3
USBSS IRQ_DMA_THRESHOLD_TX1_0
USBSS IRQ_DMA_THRESHOLD_TX1_1
USBSS IRQ_DMA_THRESHOLD_TX1_2
USBSS IRQ_DMA_THRESHOLD_TX1_3
USBSS IRQ_DMA_THRESHOLD_RX1_0
USBSS IRQ_DMA_THRESHOLD_RX1_1
USBSS IRQ_DMA_THRESHOLD_RX1_2
USBSS IRQ_DMA_THRESHOLD_RX1_3
USBSS IRQ_DMA_ENABLE_0
0x4740 0104
0x4740 0108
0x4740 010C
0x4740 0110
0x4740 0114
0x4740 0118
0x4740 011C
0x4740 0120
0x4740 0124
0x4740 0128
0x4740 012C
0x4740 0130
0x4740 0134
0x4740 0138
0x4740 013C
0x4740 0140
0x4740 0144
IRQDMAENABLE1
USBSS IRQ_DMA_ENABLE_1
0x4740 0148 - 0x4740 01FC
0x4740 0200
-
Reserved
IRQFRAMETHOLDTX00
IRQFRAMETHOLDTX01
IRQFRAMETHOLDTX02
IRQFRAMETHOLDTX03
IRQFRAMETHOLDRX00
IRQFRAMETHOLDRX01
IRQFRAMETHOLDRX02
IRQFRAMETHOLDRX03
IRQFRAMETHOLDTX10
IRQFRAMETHOLDTX11
IRQFRAMETHOLDTX12
IRQFRAMETHOLDTX13
IRQFRAMETHOLDRX10
IRQFRAMETHOLDRX11
IRQFRAMETHOLDRX12
IRQFRAMETHOLDRX13
IRQFRAMEENABLE0
IRQFRAMEENABLE1
-
USBSS IRQ_FRAME_THRESHOLD_TX0_0
USBSS IRQ_FRAME_THRESHOLD_TX0_1
USBSS IRQ_FRAME_THRESHOLD_TX0_2
USBSS IRQ_FRAME_THRESHOLD_TX0_3
USBSS IRQ_FRAME_THRESHOLD_RX0_0
USBSS IRQ_FRAME_THRESHOLD_RX0_1
USBSS IRQ_FRAME_THRESHOLD_RX0_2
USBSS IRQ_FRAME_THRESHOLD_RX0_3
USBSS IRQ_FRAME_THRESHOLD_TX1_0
USBSS IRQ_FRAME_THRESHOLD_TX1_1
USBSS IRQ_FRAME_THRESHOLD_TX1_2
USBSS IRQ_FRAME_THRESHOLD_TX1_3
USBSS IRQ_FRAME_THRESHOLD_RX1_0
USBSS IRQ_FRAME_THRESHOLD_RX1_1
USBSS IRQ_FRAME_THRESHOLD_RX1_2
USBSS IRQ_FRAME_THRESHOLD_RX1_3
USBSS IRQ_FRAME_ENABLE_0
0x4740 0204
0x4740 0208
0x4740 020C
0x4740 0210
0x4740 0214
0x4740 0218
0x4740 021C
0x4740 0220
0x4740 0224
0x4740 0228
0x4740 022C
0x4740 0230
0x4740 0234
0x4740 0238
0x4740 023C
0x4740 0240
0x4740 0244
USBSS IRQ_FRAME_ENABLE_1
0x4740 0248 - 0x4740 0FFC
Reserved
332
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 8-103. USB0 Controller Registers
HEX ADDRESS
ACRONYM
USB0REV
REGISTER NAME
USB0 REVISION
Reserved
0x4740 1000
0x4740 1004 - 0x4740 1010
0x4740 1014
-
USB0CTRL
USB0 Control
USB0 Status
Reserved
0x4740 1018
USB0STAT
0x4740 101C
-
0x4740 1020
USB0IRQMSTAT
USB0IRQEOI
USB0 IRQ_MERGED_STATUS
USB0 IRQ_EOI
0x4740 1024
0x4740 1028
USB0IRQSTATRAW0
USB0IRQSTATRAW1
USB0IRQSTAT0
USB0IRQSTAT1
USB0IRQENABLESET0
USB0IRQENABLESET1
USB0IRQENABLECLR0
USB0IRQENABLECLR1
-
USB0 IRQ_STATUS_RAW_0
USB0 IRQ_STATUS_RAW_1
USB0 IRQ_STATUS_0
0x4740 102C
0x4740 1030
0x4740 1034
USB0 IRQ_STATUS_1
0x4740 1038
USB0 IRQ_ENABLE_SET_0
USB0 IRQ_ENABLE_SET_1
USB0 IRQ_ENABLE_CLR_0
USB0 IRQ_ENABLE_CLR_1
Reserved
0x4740 103C
0x4740 1040
0x4740 1044
0x4740 1048 - 0x4740 106C
0x4740 1070
USB0TXMODE
USB0RXMODE
-
USB0 Tx Mode
0x4740 1074
USB0 Rx Mode
0x4740 1078 - 0x4740 107C
0x4740 1080
Reserved
USB0GENRNDISEP1
USB0GENRNDISEP2
USB0GENRNDISEP3
USB0GENRNDISEP4
USB0GENRNDISEP5
USB0GENRNDISEP6
USB0GENRNDISEP7
USB0GENRNDISEP8
USB0GENRNDISEP9
USB0GENRNDISEP10
USB0GENRNDISEP11
USB0GENRNDISEP12
USB0GENRNDISEP13
USB0GENRNDISEP14
USB0GENRNDISEP15
-
USB0 Generic RNDIS Size EP1
USB0 Generic RNDIS Size EP2
USB0 Generic RNDIS Size EP3
USB0 Generic RNDIS Size EP4
USB0 Generic RNDIS Size EP5
USB0 Generic RNDIS Size EP6
USB0 Generic RNDIS Size EP7
USB0 Generic RNDIS Size EP8
USB0 Generic RNDIS Size EP9
USB0 Generic RNDIS Size EP10
USB0 Generic RNDIS Size EP11
USB0 Generic RNDIS Size EP12
USB0 Generic RNDIS Size EP13
USB0 Generic RNDIS Size EP14
USB0 Generic RNDIS Size EP15
Reserved
0x4740 1084
0x4740 1088
0x4740 108C
0x4740 1090
0x4740 1094
0x4740 1098
0x4740 109C
0x4740 10A0
0x4740 10A4
0x4740 10A8
0x4740 10AC
0x4740 10B0
0x4740 10B4
0x4740 10B8
0x4740 10BC - 0x4740 10CC
0x4740 10D0
USB0AUTOREQ
USB0SRPFIXTIME
USB0TDOWN
-
USB0 Auto Req
0x4740 10D4
USB0 SRP Fix Time
0x4740 10D8
USB0 Teardown
0x4740 10DC
Reserved
0x4740 10E0
USB0UTMI
USB0 PHY UTMI
0x4740 10E4
USB0UTMILB
USB0MODE
USB0 MGC UTMI Loopback
USB0 Mode
0x4740 10E8
0x4740 10E8 - 0x4740 13FF
0x4740 1400 - 0x4740 1468
0x4740 146C
-
Reserved
-
USB0 Mentor Core Registers/FIFOs
USB0 Mentor Core Hardware Version Register
USB0 Mentor Core Registers/FIFOs
Reserved
USB0_HWVERS
-
0x4740 1470 - 0x4740 159C
0x4740 15A0 - 0x4740 17FC
-
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
333
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 8-104. USB1 Controller Registers
HEX ADDRESS
0x4740 1800
ACRONYM
USB1REV
REGISTER NAME
USB1 Revision
0x4740 1804 - 0x4740 1810
0x4740 1814
-
Reserved
USB1CTRL
USB1 Control
0x4740 1818
USB1STAT
USB1 Status
0x4740 181C
-
Reserved
0x4740 1820
USB1IRQMSTAT
USB1IRQEOI
USB1 IRQ_MERGED_STATUS
USB1 IRQ_EOI
0x4740 1824
0x4740 1828
USB1IRQSTATRAW0
USB1IRQSTATRAW1
USB1IRQSTAT0
USB1IRQSTAT1
USB1IRQENABLESET0
USB1IRQENABLESET1
USB1IRQENABLECLR0
USB1IRQENABLECLR1
-
USB1 IRQ_STATUS_RAW_0
USB1 IRQ_STATUS_RAW_1
USB1 IRQ_STATUS_0
USB1 IRQ_STATUS_1
USB1 IRQ_ENABLE_SET_0
USB1 IRQ_ENABLE_SET_1
USB1 IRQ_ENABLE_CLR_0
USB1 IRQ_ENABLE_CLR_1
Reserved
0x4740 182C
0x4740 1830
0x4740 1834
0x4740 1838
0x4740 183C
0x4740 1840
0x4740 1844
0x4740 1848 - 0x4740 186C
0x4740 1870
USB1TXMODE
USB1RXMODE
-
USB1 Tx Mode
0x4740 1874
USB1 Rx Mode
0x4740 1878 - 0x4740 187C
0x4740 1880
Reserved
USB1GENRNDISEP1
USB1GENRNDISEP2
USB1GENRNDISEP3
USB1GENRNDISEP4
USB1GENRNDISEP5
USB1GENRNDISEP6
USB1GENRNDISEP7
USB1GENRNDISEP8
USB1GENRNDISEP9
USB1GENRNDISEP10
USB1GENRNDISEP11
USB1GENRNDISEP12
USB1GENRNDISEP13
USB1GENRNDISEP14
USB1GENRNDISEP15
-
USB1 Generic RNDIS Size EP1
USB1 Generic RNDIS Size EP2
USB1 Generic RNDIS Size EP3
USB1 Generic RNDIS Size EP4
USB1 Generic RNDIS Size EP5
USB1 Generic RNDIS Size EP6
USB1 Generic RNDIS Size EP7
USB1 Generic RNDIS Size EP8
USB1 Generic RNDIS Size EP9
USB1 Generic RNDIS Size EP10
USB1 Generic RNDIS Size EP11
USB1 Generic RNDIS Size EP12
USB1 Generic RNDIS Size EP13
USB1 Generic RNDIS Size EP14
USB1 Generic RNDIS Size EP15
Reserved
0x4740 1884
0x4740 1888
0x4740 188C
0x4740 1890
0x4740 1894
0x4740 1898
0x4740 189C
0x4740 18A0
0x4740 18A4
0x4740 18A8
0x4740 18AC
0x4740 18B0
0x4740 18B4
0x4740 18B8
0x4740 18BC - 0x4740 18CC
0x4740 18D0
USB1AUTOREQ
USB1SRPFIXTIME
USB1TDOWN
-
USB1 Auto Req
0x4740 18D4
USB1 SRP Fix Time
0x4740 18D8
USB1 Teardown
0x4740 18DC
Reserved
0x4740 18E0
USB1UTMI
USB1 PHY UTMI
0x4740 18E4
USB1UTMILB
USB1MODE
USB1 MGC UTMI Loopback
USB1 Mode
0x4740 18E8
0x4740 18E8 - 0x4740 1BFF
0x4740 1C00 - 0x4740 1C68
0x4740 1C6C
-
Reserved
-
USB1 Mentor Core Registers
USB1 Mentor Core Hardware Version Register
USB1 Mentor Core Registers
Reserved
USB1HWVERS
-
0x4740 1C70 - 0x4740 1D9C
0x4740 1DA0 - 0x4740 1FFC
-
334
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 8-105. CPPI DMA Controller Registers
HEX ADDRESS
0x4740 2000
0x4740 2004
0x4740 2008
0x4740 200C
0x4740 2010
0x4740 2014
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
DMAREVID
Revision Register
TDFDQ
Teardown Free Descriptor Queue Control
Emulation Control Register
DMAEMU
-
Reserved
DMAMEM1BA
CPPI Mem1 Base Address Register
CPPI Mem1 Mask Address Register
Reserved
DMAMEM1MASK
0x4740 200C - 0x4740 27FF
0x4740 2800
-
TXGCR0
Tx Channel 0 Global Configuration Register
Reserved
0x4740 2804
-
RXGCR0
RXHPCRA0
RXHPCRB0
-
0x4740 2808
Rx Channel 0 Global Configuration Register
Rx Channel 0 Host Packet Configuration Register A
Rx Channel 0 Host Packet Configuration Register B
Reserved
0x4740 280C
0x4740 2810
0x4740 2814 - 0x4740 281C
0x4740 2820
TXGCR1
-
Tx Channel 1 Global Configuration Register
Reserved
0x4740 2824
0x4740 2828
RXGCR1
RXHPCRA1
RXHPCRB1
-
Rx Channel 1 Global Configuration Register
Rx Channel 1 Host Packet Configuration Register A
Rx Channel 1 Host Packet Configuration Register B
Reserved
0x4740 282C
0x4740 2830
0x4740 2834 - 0x4740 283C
0x4740 2840
TXGCR2
-
Tx Channel 2 Global Configuration Register
Reserved
0x4740 2844
0x4740 2848
RXGCR2
RXHPCRA2
RXHPCRB2
-
Rx Channel 2 Global Configuration Register
Rx Channel 2 Host Packet Configuration Register A
Rx Channel 2 Host Packet Configuration Register B
Reserved
0x4740 284C
0x4740 2850
0x4740 2854 - 0x4740 285F
0x4740 2860
TXGCR3
-
Tx Channel 3 Global Configuration Register
Reserved
0x4740 2864
0x4740 2868
RXGCR3
RXHPCRA3
RXHPCRB3
-
Rx Channel 3 Global Configuration Register
Rx Channel 3 Host Packet Configuration Register A
Rx Channel 3 Host Packet Configuration Register B
...
0x4740 286C
0x4740 2870
0x4740 2880 - 0x4740 2B9F
0x4740 2BA0
TXGCR29
-
Tx Channel 29 Global Configuration Register
Reserved
0x4740 2BA4
0x4740 2BA8
RXGCR29
RXHPCRA29
RXHPCRB29
-
Rx Channel 29 Global Configuration Register
Rx Channel 29 Host Packet Configuration Register A
Rx Channel 29 Host Packet Configuration Register B
Reserved
0x4740 2BAC
0x4740 2BB0
0x4740 2BB4 - 0x4740 2FFF
Table 8-106. CPPI DMA Scheduler Registers
HEX ADDRESS
0x4740 3000
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
DMA_SCHED_CTRL
CPPI DMA Scheduler Control Register
Reserved
0x4740 3804 - 0x4740 38FF
0x4740 3800
-
WORD0
WORD1
…
CPPI DMA Scheduler Table Word 0
CPPI DMA Scheduler Table Word 1
…
0x4740 3804
…
0x4740 38F8
WORD62
WORD63
CPPI DMA Scheduler Table Word 62
CPPI DMA Scheduler Table Word 63
0x4740 38FC
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
335
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Table 8-106. CPPI DMA Scheduler Registers (continued)
HEX ADDRESS
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
0x4740 38FF - 0x4740 3FFF
-
Reserved
Table 8-107. CPPI DMA Queue Manager Registers
HEX ADDRESS
0x4740 4000
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
Queue Manager Revision
Reserved
QMGRREVID
0x4740 4004
-
0x4740 4008
DIVERSION
Queue Manager Queue Diversion
Reserved
0x4740 400C - 0x4740 401F
0x4740 4020
-
FDBSC0
Queue Manager Free Descriptor/Buffer Starvation Count 0
0x4740 4024
FDBSC1
Queue Manager Free Descriptor/Buffer Starvation Count 1
0x4740 4028
FDBSC2
Queue Manager Free Descriptor/Buffer Starvation Count 2
0x4740 402C
FDBSC3
Queue Manager Free Descriptor/Buffer Starvation Count 3
0x4740 4030
FDBSC4
Queue Manager Free Descriptor/Buffer Starvation Count 4
0x4740 4034
FDBSC5
Queue Manager Free Descriptor/Buffer Starvation Count 5
0x4740 4038
FDBSC6
Queue Manager Free Descriptor/Buffer Starvation Count 6
0x4740 403C
FDBSC7
Queue Manager Free Descriptor/Buffer Starvation Count 7
0x4740 4030 - 0x4740 407C
0x4740 4080
-
Reserved
LRAM0BASE
Queue Manager Linking RAM Region 0 Base Address
0x4740 4084
LRAM0SIZE
Queue Manager Linking RAM Region 0 Size
0x4740 4088
LRAM1BASE
Queue Manager Linking RAM Region 1 Base Address
0x4740 408C
-
Reserved
0x4740 4090
PEND0
Queue Manager Queue Pending 0
0x4740 4094
PEND1
Queue Manager Queue Pending 1
0x4740 4098
PEND2
Queue Manager Queue Pending 2
0x4740 409C
PEND3
Queue Manager Queue Pending 3
0x4740 40A0
PEND4
Queue Manager Queue Pending 4
0x4740 40A4 - 0x4740 4FFF
0x4740 5000 + 16xR
0x4740 5000 + 16xR + 4
0x4740 5000 + 16xR + 8
0x4740 5000 + 16xR + C
0x4740 5010 – 0x4740 50EF
0x4740 5000 + 16xR
0x4740 5000 + 16xR + 4
0x4740 5000 + 16xR + 8
0x4740 5000 + 16xR + C
0x4740 5080 - 0x4740 5FFF
0x4740 6000 + 16xN
0x4740 6000 + 16xN + 4
0x4740 6000 + 16xN + 8
0x4740 6000 + 16xN + C
0x4740 6010 – 0x4740 69AF
0x4740 6000 + 16xN
0x4740 6000 + 16xN + 4
0x4740 6000 + 16xN + 8
0x4740 6000 + 16xN + C
0x4740 69B0 - 0x4740 6FFF
-
Reserved
QMEMRBASE0
Memory Region 0 Base Address (R ranges from 0 to 15)
QMEMRCTRL0
Memory Region 0 Control 0 (R ranges from 0 to 15)
-
Reserved
-
Reserved
-
...
QMEMRBASE15
Memory Region 15 Base Address (R ranges from 0 to 15)
QMEMRCTRL15
Memory Region 15 Control (R ranges from 0 to 15)
-
Reserved
-
Reserved
-
Reserved
-
Reserved
-
Reserved
-
Reserved
CTRLD0
Queue N Register D (N ranges from 0 to 155)
-
...
-
Reserved
-
Reserved
-
Reserved
CTRLD155
-
Queue N Register D (N ranges from 0 to 155)
Reserved
336
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
Table 8-107. CPPI DMA Queue Manager Registers (continued)
HEX ADDRESS
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
0x4740 7000 + 16xN
0x4740 7000 + 16xN + 4
0x4740 7000 + 16xN + 8
QSTATA0
Queue N Status A (N ranges from 0 to 155)
Queue N Status B (N ranges from 0 to 155)
Queue N Status C (N ranges from 0 to 155)
Reserved
QSTATB0
QSTATC0
0x4740 7000 + 16xN + C
0x4740 7010 – 0x4740 79AF
0x4740 7000 + 16xN
-
-
...
QSTATA155
Queue N Status A (N ranges from 0 to 155)
Queue N Status B (N ranges from 0 to 155)
Queue N Status C (N ranges from 0 to 155)
Reserved
0x4740 7000 + 16xN + 4
0x4740 7000 + 16xN + 8
0x4740 7000 + 16xN + C
0x4740 79B0 - 0x4740 7FFF
QSTATB155
QSTATC155
-
-
Reserved
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
337
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
8.22.2 USB2.0 Electrical Data/Timing
Table 8-108. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for USB2.0
(see Figure 8-98)
OPP100
LOW SPEED
1.5 Mbps
FULL SPEED
12 Mbps
HIGH SPEED
480 Mbps
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
75
MAX
MIN
4
MAX
MIN
0.5
0.5
–
MAX
1
2
3
4
5
tr(D)
Rise time, USBx_DP and USBx_DM signals(1)
Fall time, USBx_DP and USBx_DM signals(1)
Rise/Fall time, matching(2)
300
300
125
2
20
20
111
2
ns
ns
%
tf(D)
75
4
trfM
80
90
1.3
–
VCRS
Output signal cross-over voltage(1)
Source (Host) Driver jitter, next transition
Function Driver jitter, next transition
Source (Host) Driver jitter, paired transition(4)
Function Driver jitter, paired transition
Pulse duration, EOP transmitter
Pulse duration, EOP receiver(5)
Data Rate
1.3
–
–
(3)
V
tjr(source)NT
tjr(FUNC)NT
tjr(source)PT
tjr(FUNC)PT
tw(EOPT)
tw(EOPR)
t(DRATE)
2
2
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
(3)
(3)
(3)
25
2
6
1
1
10
1
7
8
9
1250
670
1500
160
82
175
–
–
–
1.5
12
49.5
–
480 Mb/s
10 ZDRV
11 ZINP
Driver Output Resistance
–
–40
28
40.5
49.5
Ω
Receiver Input Impedance
TBD
100
–
–
kΩ
(1) Low Speed: CL = 200 pF, Full Speed: CL = 50 pF, High Speed: CL = 50 pF
(2) tRFM = (tr/tf) x 100. [Excluding the first transaction from the Idle state.]
(3) For more detailed information, see the Universal Serial Bus Specification Revision 2.0, Chapter 7, Electrical.
(4) tjr = tpx(1) - tpx(0)
(5) Must accept as valid EOP.
t
t
per − jr
USBx_DM
V
90% V
OH
CRS
10% V
OL
USBx_DP
t
f
t
r
Figure 8-98. USB2.0 Integrated Transceiver Interface Timing
For more detailed information on USB2.0 board design, routing, and layout guidelines, see the USB 2.0
Board Design and Layout Guidelines Application Report (Literature Number: SPRAAR7).
338
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
9 Device and Documentation Support
9.1 Device Support
9.1.1 Development Support
TI offers an extensive line of development tools, including tools to evaluate the performance of the
processors, generate code, develop algorithm implementations, and fully integrate and debug software
and hardware modules. The tool's support documentation is electronically available within the Code
Composer Studio™ Integrated Development Environment (IDE).
The following products support development of AM387x MPU applications:
Software Development Tools: Code Composer Studio™ Integrated Development Environment (IDE):
including Editor C/C++/Assembly Code Generation, and Debug plus additional development tools
Scalable, Real-Time Foundation Software, which provides the basic run-time target software needed to
support any Sitara ARM MPU application.
Hardware Development Tools: Extended Development System (XDS™) Emulator
For a complete listing of development-support tools for the AM387x Sitara™ ARM MPU platform, visit the
Texas Instruments website at www.ti.com. For information on pricing and availability, contact the nearest
TI field sales office or authorized distributor.
9.1.2 Device and Development-Support Tool Nomenclature
To designate the stages in the product development cycle, TI assigns prefixes to the part numbers of all
MPUs and support tools. Each device has one of three prefixes: X, P, or null (no prefix) [e.g.,
XAM3874BCYE]. Texas Instruments recommends two of three possible prefix designators for its support
tools: TMDX and TMDS. These prefixes represent evolutionary stages of product development from
engineering prototypes (TMDX) through fully qualified production devices/tools (TMDS).
Device development evolutionary flow:
X
Experimental device that is not necessarily representative of the final device's electrical
specifications and may not use production assembly flow.
P
Prototype device that is not necessarily the final silicon die and may not necessarily meet
final electrical specifications.
null
Production version of the silicon die that is fully qualified.
Support tool development evolutionary flow:
TMDX
Development-support product that has not yet completed Texas Instruments internal
qualification testing.
TMDS
Fully-qualified development-support product.
X and P devices and TMDX development-support tools are shipped against the following disclaimer:
"Developmental product is intended for internal evaluation purposes."
Production devices and TMDS development-support tools have been characterized fully, and the quality
and reliability of the device have been demonstrated fully. TI's standard warranty applies.
Predictions show that prototype devices (X or P) have a greater failure rate than the standard production
devices. Texas Instruments recommends that these devices not be used in any production system
because their expected end-use failure rate still is undefined. Only qualified production devices are to be
used.
TI device nomenclature also includes a suffix with the device family name. This suffix indicates the
package type (for example, CYE), the temperature range (for example, "Blank" is the default commercial
temperature range), and the device speed range, in megahertz (for example, "Blank" is the default).
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device and Documentation Support
339
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
www.ti.com
Figure 9-1 provides a legend for reading the complete device name for any AM387x MPU platform
member.
For device part numbers and further ordering information of AM387x devices in the CYE package type,
see the TI website (www.ti.com) or contact your TI sales representative.
For additional description of the device nomenclature markings on the die, see the AM387x Sitara™ ARM
Processors Silicon Errata (Silicon Revision 2.1) (Literature Number: SPRZ345).
(
)
(
)
X
AM3874
CYE
B
PREFIX
X = Experimental Device
P = Prototype Device
DEVICE SPEED RANGE
80 = 800-MHz ARM
100 = 1000-MHz ARM
Null = Production Device
TEMPERATURE RANGE
DEVICE
Blank = 0°C to 90°C, Commercial Temperature
A = -40°C to 105°C, Extended Temperature
AM387x Sitara™ ARM Microprocessors (MPUs):
AM3874
AM3872
AM3871
PACKAGE TYPE(A)
CYE = 684-Pin Plastic BGA, with Pb-Free Die Bump
and Solder Ball
SILICON REVISION
B = Revision 2.1
A. BGA = Ball Grid Array
B. For actual device part numbers (P/Ns) and ordering information, see the TI website (http://www.ti.com).
C. The TEMPERATURE RANGE values are specified over operating junction temperature.
Figure 9-1. Device Nomenclature(B)(C)
9.2 Documentation Support
The following document describes the AM387x Sitara™ ARM MPUs.
SPRUGZ7 AM387x Sitara ARM Microporcessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual.
9.3 Community Resources
The following links connect to TI community resources. Linked contents are provided "AS IS" by the
respective contributors. They do not constitute TI specifications and do not necessarily reflect TI's views;
see TI's Terms of Use.
TI E2E Community TI's Engineer-to-Engineer (E2E) Community. Created to foster collaboration
among engineers. At e2e.ti.com, you can ask questions, share knowledge, explore ideas and
help solve problems with fellow engineers.
TI Embedded Processors Wiki Texas Instruments Embedded Processors Wiki. Established to help
developers get started with Embedded Processors from Texas Instruments and to foster
innovation and growth of general knowledge about the hardware and software surrounding
these devices.
340
Device and Documentation Support
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
AM3874, AM3872, AM3871
www.ti.com
SPRS695–SEPTEMBER 2011
10 Mechanical
The device package has been specially engineered with a new technology called Via Channel™. This
allows larger than normal PCB via sizes and reduced PCB signal layers to be used in a PCB design with
this 0.8-mm pitch package, and will substantially reduce PCB costs. It allows PCB routing in only two
signal layers (four layers total) due to the increased layer efficiency of the Via Channel™ BGA technology.
10.1 Thermal Data for CYE-04 (Top Hat)
Table 10-1. Thermal Resistance Characteristics (PBGA Package) [CYE-04] (Thinner Top Hat)
NO.
1
°C/W(1)
0.39
3.87
11.67
8.59
7.80
7.33
0.19
0.20
0.20
0.21
3.44
3.37
3.26
3.17
AIR FLOW (m/s)(2)
RΘJC
RΘJB
RΘJA
Junction-to-case
Junction-to-board
Junction-to-free air
N/A
N/A
2
3
0.00
1.00
2.00
3.00
0.00
1.00
2.00
3.00
0.00
1.00
2.00
3.00
5
6
RΘJMA
Junction-to-moving air
7
8
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
PsiJT
Junction-to-package top
PsiJB
Junction-to-board
(1) These measurements were conducted in a JEDEC defined 2S2P system (with the exception of the Theta JC [RΘJC] measurement,
which was conducted in a JEDEC defined 1S0P system) and will change based on environment as well as application. For more
information, see these EIA/JEDEC standards:
•
•
•
•
JESD51-2, Integrated Circuits Thermal Test Method Environment Conditions - Natural Convection (Still Air)
JESD51-3, Low Effective Thermal Conductivity Test Board for Leaded Surface Mount Packages
JESD51-7, High Effective Thermal Conductivity Test Board for Leaded Surface Mount Packages
JESD51-9, Test Boards for Area Array Surface Mount Packages
Power dissipation of 2 W and an ambient temperature of 70ºC is assumed.
(2) m/s = meters per second
10.2 Packaging Information
The following packaging information and addendum reflects the most current data available for the
designated device(s). This data is subject to change without notice and without revision of this document.
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Mechanical
341
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): AM3874 AM3872 AM3871
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com
14-Sep-2011
PACKAGING INFORMATION
Status (1)
Eco Plan (2)
MSL Peak Temp (3)
Samples
Orderable Device
Package Type Package
Drawing
Pins
Package Qty
Lead/
Ball Finish
(Requires Login)
AM3871BCYE100
AM3871BCYE80
AM3871BCYEA80
AM3872BCYE100
AM3872BCYE80
AM3872BCYEA80
AM3874BCYE100
AM3874BCYE80
AM3874BCYEA80
XAM3874BCYE
PREVIEW
PREVIEW
PREVIEW
PREVIEW
PREVIEW
PREVIEW
PREVIEW
PREVIEW
PREVIEW
ACTIVE
FCBGA
FCBGA
FCBGA
FCBGA
FCBGA
FCBGA
FCBGA
FCBGA
FCBGA
FCBGA
CYE
CYE
CYE
CYE
CYE
CYE
CYE
CYE
CYE
CYE
684
684
684
684
684
684
684
684
684
684
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
60
(1) The marketing status values are defined as follows:
ACTIVE: Product device recommended for new designs.
LIFEBUY: TI has announced that the device will be discontinued, and a lifetime-buy period is in effect.
NRND: Not recommended for new designs. Device is in production to support existing customers, but TI does not recommend using this part in a new design.
PREVIEW: Device has been announced but is not in production. Samples may or may not be available.
OBSOLETE: TI has discontinued the production of the device.
(2) Eco Plan - The planned eco-friendly classification: Pb-Free (RoHS), Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt), or Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) - please check http://www.ti.com/productcontent for the latest availability
information and additional product content details.
TBD: The Pb-Free/Green conversion plan has not been defined.
Pb-Free (RoHS): TI's terms "Lead-Free" or "Pb-Free" mean semiconductor products that are compatible with the current RoHS requirements for all 6 substances, including the requirement that
lead not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous materials. Where designed to be soldered at high temperatures, TI Pb-Free products are suitable for use in specified lead-free processes.
Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt): This component has a RoHS exemption for either 1) lead-based flip-chip solder bumps used between the die and package, or 2) lead-based die adhesive used between
the die and leadframe. The component is otherwise considered Pb-Free (RoHS compatible) as defined above.
Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br): TI defines "Green" to mean Pb-Free (RoHS compatible), and free of Bromine (Br) and Antimony (Sb) based flame retardants (Br or Sb do not exceed 0.1% by weight
in homogeneous material)
(3) MSL, Peak Temp. -- The Moisture Sensitivity Level rating according to the JEDEC industry standard classifications, and peak solder temperature.
Important Information and Disclaimer:The information provided on this page represents TI's knowledge and belief as of the date that it is provided. TI bases its knowledge and belief on information
provided by third parties, and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of such information. Efforts are underway to better integrate information from third parties. TI has taken and
continues to take reasonable steps to provide representative and accurate information but may not have conducted destructive testing or chemical analysis on incoming materials and chemicals.
TI and TI suppliers consider certain information to be proprietary, and thus CAS numbers and other limited information may not be available for release.
Addendum-Page 1
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com
14-Sep-2011
In no event shall TI's liability arising out of such information exceed the total purchase price of the TI part(s) at issue in this document sold by TI to Customer on an annual basis.
Addendum-Page 2
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, modifications, enhancements, improvements,
and other changes to its products and services at any time and to discontinue any product or service without notice. Customers should
obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All products are
sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment.
TI warrants performance of its hardware products to the specifications applicable at the time of sale in accordance with TI’s standard
warranty. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary to support this warranty. Except where
mandated by government requirements, testing of all parameters of each product is not necessarily performed.
TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or customer product design. Customers are responsible for their products and
applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with customer products and applications, customers should provide
adequate design and operating safeguards.
TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any TI patent right, copyright, mask work right,
or other TI intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI products or services are used. Information
published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license from TI to use such products or services or a
warranty or endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual
property of the third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI.
Reproduction of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration and is accompanied
by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. Reproduction of this information with alteration is an unfair and deceptive
business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional
restrictions.
Resale of TI products or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that product or service voids all
express and any implied warranties for the associated TI product or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not
responsible or liable for any such statements.
TI products are not authorized for use in safety-critical applications (such as life support) where a failure of the TI product would reasonably
be expected to cause severe personal injury or death, unless officers of the parties have executed an agreement specifically governing
such use. Buyers represent that they have all necessary expertise in the safety and regulatory ramifications of their applications, and
acknowledge and agree that they are solely responsible for all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements concerning their products
and any use of TI products in such safety-critical applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support that may be
provided by TI. Further, Buyers must fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use of TI products in
such safety-critical applications.
TI products are neither designed nor intended for use in military/aerospace applications or environments unless the TI products are
specifically designated by TI as military-grade or "enhanced plastic." Only products designated by TI as military-grade meet military
specifications. Buyers acknowledge and agree that any such use of TI products which TI has not designated as military-grade is solely at
the Buyer's risk, and that they are solely responsible for compliance with all legal and regulatory requirements in connection with such use.
TI products are neither designed nor intended for use in automotive applications or environments unless the specific TI products are
designated by TI as compliant with ISO/TS 16949 requirements. Buyers acknowledge and agree that, if they use any non-designated
products in automotive applications, TI will not be responsible for any failure to meet such requirements.
Following are URLs where you can obtain information on other Texas Instruments products and application solutions:
Products
Audio
Applications
www.ti.com/audio
amplifier.ti.com
dataconverter.ti.com
www.dlp.com
Communications and Telecom www.ti.com/communications
Amplifiers
Data Converters
DLP® Products
DSP
Computers and Peripherals
Consumer Electronics
Energy and Lighting
Industrial
www.ti.com/computers
www.ti.com/consumer-apps
www.ti.com/energy
dsp.ti.com
www.ti.com/industrial
www.ti.com/medical
www.ti.com/security
Clocks and Timers
Interface
www.ti.com/clocks
interface.ti.com
logic.ti.com
Medical
Security
Logic
Space, Avionics and Defense www.ti.com/space-avionics-defense
Transportation and Automotive www.ti.com/automotive
Power Mgmt
Microcontrollers
RFID
power.ti.com
microcontroller.ti.com
www.ti-rfid.com
Video and Imaging
www.ti.com/video
OMAP Mobile Processors www.ti.com/omap
Wireless Connctivity www.ti.com/wirelessconnectivity
TI E2E Community Home Page
e2e.ti.com
Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
相关型号：
SI9130DB
5- and 3.3-V Step-Down Synchronous ConvertersWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9135LG-T1
SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply ControllerWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9135LG-T1-E3
SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply ControllerWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9135_11
SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply ControllerWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9136_11
Multi-Output Power-Supply ControllerWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9130CG-T1-E3
Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCsWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9130LG-T1-E3
Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCsWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9130_11
Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCsWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9137
Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile ApplicationsWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9137DB
Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile ApplicationsWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9137LG
Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile ApplicationsWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9122E
500-kHz Half-Bridge DC/DC Controller with Integrated Secondary Synchronous Rectification DriversWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
©2020 ICPDF网 联系我们和版权申明